Difference between revisions of "Winrss help"
Jump to navigation
Jump to search
| Line 5,964: | Line 5,964: | ||
=== RECEIVE CHANNEL BANDWIDTH HELP === | === RECEIVE CHANNEL BANDWIDTH HELP === | ||
| − | + | <pre> | |
Press the Up/Down Arrows to select between the four toggle choices for | Press the Up/Down Arrows to select between the four toggle choices for | ||
this field. Allowed choices are WIDE 25 - 30 kHz, NPSPAC 25 kHz | this field. Allowed choices are WIDE 25 - 30 kHz, NPSPAC 25 kHz | ||
| Line 6,008: | Line 6,008: | ||
</pre> | </pre> | ||
| + | |||
=== TX RATED DEVIATION HELP === | === TX RATED DEVIATION HELP === | ||
<pre> | <pre> | ||
Latest revision as of 03:31, 7 February 2024
This is the help file from the Quantar Winrss
Contents
- 1 KEYBOARD
- 2 SYSTEM
- 3 System help
- 4 COMPUTER SERIAL PORT CONFIGURATION HELP
- 5 FILE MAINTENANCE HELP
- 6 PRINT CODEPLUG HELP
- 7 PRINT CODEPLUG TO PRINTER HELP
- 8 PRINT CODEPLUG SUMMARY HELP
- 9 READ/SAVE CODEPLUG HELP
- 10 CHANGE VIEW CODEPLUG HELP
- 11 DIAGNOSTICS HELP
- 12 SETUP COMPUTER CONFIGURATION MENU HELP
- 13 MAIN MENU HELP
- 14 SERVICE MENU HELP
- 15 ZONE CONTROLLER PARITY HELP
- 15.1 SERVICE:ALIGNMENT HELP
- 15.2 SERVICE:ALIGNMENT:PRESELECTOR HELP
- 15.3 SERVICE:ALIGNMENT:RX WIRELINE HELP
- 15.4 SERVICE:ALIGNMENT:RX WIRELINE HELP
- 15.5 RX WIRELINE LEVEL (1 kHz) HELP
- 15.6 LO BOOST ADJUST LEVEL HELP
- 15.7 HI BOOST ADJUST LEVEL HELP
- 15.8 HI BOOST FREQUENCY HELP
- 15.9 STATUS TONE LEVEL HELP
- 15.10 RX WIRELINE ALERT TONE LEVEL HELP
- 15.11 TX WIRELINE HELP
- 15.12 RSSI HELP
- 15.13 REFERENCE OSCILLATOR HELP
- 15.14 SERVICE:ALIGNMENT:REFERENCE OSCILLATOR HELP
- 15.15 POWER OUT HELP
- 15.16 SERVICE:ALIGNMENT:ASTRO ALIGNMENT AND TEST HELP
- 15.17 TDATA DEVIATION HELP
- 15.18 ASTRO SIMULCAST ALIGNMENT
- 15.19 Bit Error Rate Reporting (BER) Help
- 15.20 ASTRO TEST Pattern HELP
- 15.21 RSSI Monitor Help
- 15.22 TX DEVIATION GAIN ADJUST HELP
- 15.23 REFERENCE MODULATION COMPENSATION HELP
- 15.24 SQUELCH ADJUST HELP
- 15.25 SERVICE:ALIGNMENT:BATTERY EQUALIZATION HELP
- 15.26 SERVICE:ALIGNMENT:BATTERY EQUALIZATION HELP
- 16 CUTBACK HELP
- 17 SERIAL NUMBER HELP
- 18 STATION NAME HELP
- 19 RX FREQ BAND 1 HELP
- 20 RX FREQ BAND 2 HELP
- 21 TX FREQ BAND HELP
- 22 HARDWARE PLATFORM HELP
- 23 PA POWER RATING HELP
- 24 WIRELINE HELP
- 25 POWER SUPPLY HELP
- 26 BATTERY HELP
- 27 SYSTEM TYPE HELP
- 28 INTELLIREPEATER FREQ BAND HELP
- 29 SCANNING RECEIVER HELP
- 30 STATION TYPE HELP
- 31 ANTENNA RELAY HELP
- 32 SERVICE:HARDWARE CONFIGURATION HELP
- 33 RESTORE ARCHIVE DIRECTORY FROM BACKUP HELP
- 34 GET CODEPLUG FROM FILE SCROLL REGION HELP
- 35 VIEW INFORMATION HELP
- 36 SAVE CODEPLUG DATA TO ARCHIVE DISK FILE HELP
- 37 SAVE CODEPLUG TO FILE SCROLL REGION HELP
- 38 EDIT INFORMATION HELP
- 39 USER NAME HELP
- 40 DATE HELP
- 41 COMMENTS HELP
- 42 STATION CONTROL DIAGNOSTIC TESTS HELP
- 43 STATION CONTROL BASIC DRAM TEST HELP
- 44 STATION CONTROL EXTENSIVE DRAM TEST HELP
- 45 STATION CONTROL BASIC ROM TEST HELP
- 46 STATION CONTROL BASIC EEPROM TEST HELP
- 47 STATION CONTROL EXTENSIVE EEPROM TEST HELP
- 48 STATION CONTROL DUART LOOPBACK TEST HELP
- 49 STATION CONTROL SPI TEST HELP
- 50 STATION CONTROL DSP GLUE ASIC TEST HELP
- 51 STATION CONTROL AUDIO LOOPBACK TEST HELP
- 52 STATION CONTROL HDLC LOOPBACK TEST HELP
- 53 = STATION CONTROL REFERENCE OSCILLATOR TEST HELP
- 54 STATION CONTROL DSP RAM TEST HELP
- 55 STATION CONTROL DSP SANITY TEST HELP
- 56 STATION CONTROL WIRELINE TDM LOOPBACK TEST HELP
- 57 STATION CONTROL WIRELINE LOOPBACK TEST HELP
- 58 STATION CONTROL FLASH TEST HELP
- 59 WIRELINE TEST HELP
- 60 WIRELINE SRAM TEST HELP
- 61 WIRELINE EXTENSIVE SRAM TEST HELP
- 62 WIRELINE BASIC ROM TEST HELP
- 63 WIRELINE HDLC LOOPBACK TEST HELP
- 64 WIRELINE MODEM LOOPBACK TEST HELP
- 65 WIRELINE 9.6V POWER SUPPLY TEST HELP
- 66 WIRELINE -9.6V POWER SUPPLY TEST HELP
- 67 WIRELINE COMPATIBILITY TEST
- 68 WIRELINE COMMUNICATIONS TEST HELP
- 69 WIRELINE A/D TEST HELP
- 70 RECEIVER TEST HELP
- 71 RECEIVER COMMUNICATIONS TEST HELP
- 72 RECEIVER COMPATIBILITY TEST HELP
- 73 RECEIVER 5V POWER SUPPLY TEST HELP
- 74 RECEIVER 10V POWER SUPPLY TEST HELP
- 75 RECEIVER 14V POWER SUPPLY TEST HELP
- 76 RECEIVER PREAMP BIAS TEST HELP
- 77 RECEIVER 2.1 MHZ REFERENCE LEVEL TEST HELP
- 78 RECEIVER INJECTION TEST HELP
- 79 RECEIVER SYNTHESIZER TEST HELP
- 80 RECEIVER ABACUS CLOCK/DATA TEST HELP
- 81 POWER AMPLIFIER TESTS HELP
- 82 POWER AMPLIFIER COMMUNICATIONS TEST HELP
- 83 POWER AMPLIFIER COMPATIBILITY TEST HELP
- 84 POWER AMPLIFIER POWER SUPPLY TEST HELP
- 85 POWER AMPLIFIER HEATSINK TEMPERATURE TEST HELP
- 86 POWER AMPLIFIER FAN ALARM TEST HELP
- 87 EXCITER DIAGNOSTIC TESTS HELP
- 88 EXCITER COMMUNICATIONS TEST HELP
- 89 EXCITER BASIC RAM TEST HELP
- 90 EXCITER EXTENSIVE RAM TEST HELP
- 91 EXCITER BASIC EPROM TEST HELP
- 92 EXCITER BASIC EEPROM TEST HELP
- 93 EXCITER EXTENSIVE EEPROM TEST HELP
- 94 EXCITER 2.1 MHZ REFERENCE LEVEL TEST HELP
- 95 EXCITER SYNTHESIZER LOCK TEST HELP
- 96 POWER SUPPLY TESTS HELP
- 97 POWER SUPPLY COMMUNICATIONS TEST HELP
- 98 POWER SUPPLY MODULE FAIL TEST HELP
- 99 POWER SUPPLY INPUT VOLTAGE TEST HELP
- 100 POWER SUPPLY 28V TEST HELP
- 101 POWER SUPPLY 14V TEST HELP
- 102 POWER SUPPLY 5V TEST HELP
- 103 POWER SUPPLY BATTERY TEMPERATURE TEST HELP
- 104 POWER SUPPLY HEAT SINK TEMPERATURE TEST HELP
- 105 POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE RIPPLE TEST HELP
- 106 POWER SUPPLY BATTERY VOLTAGE TEST HELP
- 107 POWER SUPPLY FAN ALARM TEST HELP
- 108 STATUS PANEL/SOFTWARE VERSION/SET STATION DATE AND TIME MENU HELP
- 109 STATUS PANEL DISPLAY HELP
- 110 INTELLIREPEATER STATUS PANEL DISPLAY HELP
- 111 DATE HELP
- 112 TIME HELP
- 113 CHANNEL INFORMATION HELP
- 114 CHANNEL INFORMATION HELP
- 115 CHANNEL NUMBER HELP
- 116 RX FREQUENCY HELP
- 117 RX2 FREQUENCY HELP
- 118 TX FREQUENCY HELP
- 119 TX IDLE FREQUENCY HELP
- 120 RECEIVE CHANNEL BANDWIDTH HELP
- 121 TX RATED DEVIATION HELP
- 122 CALL SIGN HELP
- 123 CALL SIGN OVER WIRELINE HELP
- 124 CARRIER SQUELCH TRANSITION HELP
- 125 MODULATION TYPE HELP
- 126 RX ACTIVATION HELP
- 127 REPEATER ACTIVATION HELP
- 128 REPEATER HOLD_IN HELP
- 129 ANALOG RPTR ACCESS HELP
- 130 TX POWER OUT HELP
- 131 TX POWER OUT-BATTERY BACKUP HELP
- 132 LINE PTT TIME OUT TIMER HELP
- 133 LOCAL PTT TIME OUT TIMER HELP
- 134 REPEATER PTT TIME OUT TIMER HELP
- 135 PHONE PATCH PUSH TO TALK TIMEOUT TIMER HELP
- 136 PHONE PATCH OPERATION HELP
- 137 REPEATER DROP OUT DELAY TIMER HELP
- 138 RPTR HOLDOFF HELP
- 139 COMPANDER HELP
- 140 NOISE CANCELLER HELP
- 141 PTT PRIORITY HELP
- 142 ILLEGAL CARRIER SIGNAL LEVEL HELP
- 143 RCV (Receive) SIGNAL INVERSION HELP
- 144 MONITOR BEFORE TRANSMIT HELP
- 145 ANALOG REPEATER BOOST HELP
- 146 BRSTAT HELP
- 147 ALARM TONE OVER AIR HELP
- 148 ALARM TONE OVER WL HELP
- 149 MAX CODE DETECT WINDOW HELP (SECURE ONLY)
- 150 TAKEOVER EOM LENGTH HELP (SECURE ONLY)
- 151 TX CODE DETECT FADE TIMER HELP (SECURE ONLY)
- 152 DC GLITCH LENGTH HELP (SECURE ONLY)
- 153 MINIMUM EOM LENGTH HELP (SECURE ONLY)
- 154 CLEAR PTT DELAY HELP (SECURE ONLY)
- 155 CLEAR RECEIVER DELAY HELP (SECURE ONLY)
- 156 RF CONFIGURATION HELP
- 157 MONITOR TYPE HELP
- 158 TEXT COLOR HELP
- 159 STATUS LINE COLOR HELP
- 160 MESSAGE LINE COLOR HELP
- 161 HIGHLIGHT COLOR HELP
- 162 SCREEN OUTLINE COLOR HELP
- 163 BACKGROUND COLOR HELP
- 164 SCREEN COLOR CONFIGURATION HELP
- 165 ENTER DIRECTORY NAME HELP
- 166 ENTER FILENAME HELP
- 167 SELECT CODEPLUG FILE FROM LIST HELP
- 168 OVERWRITE CODEPLUG FILE FROM LIST HELP
- 169 METERING MENU HELP
- 170 METER WIRELINE HELP
- 171 METERING EXCITER HELP
- 172 METERING POWER AMPLIFIER HELP
- 173 METER RECEIVER HELP
- 174 METER RECEIVER 2 HELP
- 175 METER POWER SUPPLY HELP
- 176 ACCESS CODE TABLE NUMBER HELP
- 177 SQUELCH TYPE HELP
- 178 PL/DPL CODE HELP
- 179 RX NAC Operation
- 180 RX/TX ASTRO VOICE HELP
- 181 TRANSMIT USING LAST RECEIVED NAC HELP
- 182 EXPIRATION TIME HELP
- 183 CHANNELS USING THIS TABLE HELP
- 184 CONNECT TONE # 1 HELP
- 185 CONNECT TONE # 2 HELP
- 186 Rx/Tx ASTRO ACCESS CODE HELP
- 187 TRUNKING ACCESS CODE TABLE FORM HELP
- 188 WIRELINE CONFIGURATION HELP
- 189 WIRELINE OPERATION HELP
- 190 SIMULCAST OPERATION HELP
- 191 PHONE PATCH INTERFACE HELP
- 192 MAIN/STANDBY HELP
- 193 RT/RT CONFIGURATION HELP
- 194 COMPARATOR HELP
- 195 FALL BACK IN-CABINET REPEAT HELP
- 196 FALLBACK TIMER HELP
- 197 WIRELINE STATUS TONE HELP
- 198 STATUS TONE FREQUENCY HELP
- 199 EQUALIZATION HELP
- 200 RX SECURENET TO WIRELINE HELP (SECURE ONLY)
- 201 WIRELINE CONFIGURATION TRC/ASTRO HELP
- 201.1 =====================
- 201.2 =========================================================
- 201.3 ================
- 201.4 ================
- 201.5 ========
- 201.6 =============================
- 201.7 =============================================================
- 201.8 ==========================================================
- 201.9 ==========================================================
KEYBOARD
KEY KEYBOARD FUNCTION
------------------------------------------------------------------
TAB: Advance Cursor to Next Data Field
ENTER: Validate the Field Value
Shift TAB: Backup Cursor to Last Data Field
UP / DOWN Arrow Keys: Increment / Decrement Value or Selection
LEFT / RIGHT Arrow: Move Cursor Within Data Field
INSERT: Insert Space at Current Cursor Position
BACKSPACE: Erase Data Within Field & Move Cursor Left
DELETE: Erase Current Character
PAGE UP / PAGE DN: Scroll Displayed Data UP or DOWN
HOME: Move Cursor To Left of the Field
SYSTEM
SYSTEM HELP
-------------
Part Number............. RVN5002
Manual Number........... 68P81085E35
APPLICABLE PRODUCTS
-------------------
This version of RSS supports the Motorola Quantar/Quantro/Quantar Satellite
Receiver stations as well as ASTRO-TAC 3000 Comparator.
Base Station products supported by this RSS software version are as follows:
+===========+==========+==========+=========+========+==================+
| Product | | | Family | | Frequency |
| Family | Band | Model | Options | Power | Range |
+===========+==========+==========+=========+========+==================+
| Quantar | VHF | T5365A | | 25W | R1 (132-154 MHz) |
| | | |* See | 125W | R2 (150-174 MHz) |
| | | | List | | |
| | | | Below | | |
| | UHF | T5365A | | |
| | | | | 110W;R0 (380-433 MHz) |
| | | | | 25W;R1 (403-433 MHz) |
| | | | | 110W;R2 (438-470 MHz) |
| | | | | 100W;R4 (494-520 MHz) |
| | | | | |
| | | | | |
| | | | | | |
| | 800 MHz | T5365A | | 20W | 851-870 MHz (TX) |
| | | | | 100W | 806-825 MHz (RX) |
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
| | 900 Mhz | T5365A | X599 | 100W | 935-941 MHz (TX) |
| | | | X999 | | 896-902 MHz (RX) |
| | | | X997 | | |
+-----------+----------+----------+---------+--------+------------------+
| Quantar | VHF | T5367A | * | n/a | As listed above |
| Satellite | UHF | | | | for VHF, UHF, |
| Receiver | 800 MHz | | | | and 800 MHz |
+-----------+----------+----------+---------+--------+------------------+
| Quantro | VHF | T5365A | X599 | 350W | R1 (132-154 MHz) |
| | | | | | R2 (150-174 MHz) |
| | | | | | |
| | UHF | T5365A | X599 | 6W | R1 (403-433 MHz) |
| | | | X999 | 40W | R2 (438-470 MHz) |
| | | | X998 |100/110W| R3 (470-494 MHz) |
| | | | | 225W | R4 (494-520 MHz) |
| | | | | | |
| | 800 MHz | T5365A | X599 | 35W | 851-870 MHz (TX) |
| | | | X999 | 75W | 806-825 MHz (RX) |
| | | | X998 | 150W | |
| | | | X997 | | |
| | | | X996 | | |
+-----------+----------+----------+---------+--------+------------------+
| DSS-III | UHF | T5541A | n/a | 25W | R1 (403-433 MHz) |
| | | | | 25W | R2 (438-470 MHz) |
| | | | | 110W | R1 (403-433 MHz) |
| | | | | 110W | R2 (438-470 MHz) |
| | | | | 100W | R4 (494-520 MHz) |
| | | | | | |
| | 800 MHz | T5541A | n/a | 20W | 851-870 MHz (TX) |
| | | | | 100W | 806-825 MHz (RX) |
| | | | | | |
| | 900 MHz | T5541A | n/a | 100W | 935-941 MHz (TX) |
| | | | | | 896-902 MHz (RX) |
+-----------+----------+----------+---------+--------+------------------+
* Family Options:
X597 Conventional Analog
X598 Conventional Analog/SECURENET - Cancelled - MOL Only
X599 Conventional ASTRO/Analog (includes
customer-selectable SECURENET operation.)- Cancelled - MOL Only
X806 Conventional ASTRO IMBE/Analog
X897 6809 ASTRO CAI/Analog Trunking - SmartZone
X900 6809 ASTRO CAI/Analog Trunking - Single Site
X996 6809 SECURENET Transparent Trunking - Cancelled - MOL Only
X997 6809 Trunking
X898 IntelliRepeater ASTRO CAI/Analog
X998 IntelliRepeater w/SECURENET - Cancelled - MOL Only
X999 IntelliRepeater
X591 ASTRO 25 Site Repeater - System 6.x
RSS PROGRAM VERSION COMPATIBILITY
---------------------------------
RSS RELEASE NUMBERS:
The release number of each RSS version corresponds to the release number
for the station firmware. The release numbering format is RX.XX.XX,
with each major release resulting in an incremented release number
(e.g., R1.00.00, R2.00.00, etc.). Minor releases, i.e., those that
include minor feature additions, are indicated by incrementing the middle
set of digits (e.g., R5.01.00). Internal changes, those that are not
apparent to the user, are indicated by incrementing the right set of
digits (e.g. R03.00.01). The release number of the RSS is printed on
the RSS diskettes and is displayed on each RSS screen.
RSS PROGRAM, CODEPLUG, AND STATION VERSION COMPATIBILITY:
Each new version of RSS software is "backwards compatible" with previous
RSS generated codeplugs. The current RSS may be used with all previous
version conventional, 6809 trunking, and IntelliRepeater station firmware
shown in the following table with the following differences:
-> Error No. 513, 516, and 533 - "Connected Device Does Not Support This
Feature" - when you receive any of these popup messages it means one of
two things:
1. The RSS is connected to the wrong device(i.e. you are running the Base
Station RSS and are physically connected to an ASTRO-TAC Comparator).
In this case, check to see that you are physically connected to the
proper device type and try again.
2. The RSS is sending commands that are not understood by the connected
device. With the addition of new firmware features, the RSS adds
functionality to support them. Older firmware that does not include
these new features will not understand the new commands. In this case
the only way to get this functionality is to upgrade your firmware.
-> Some data fields have been moved to different screens to improve
logical groupings.
-> Due to added fields and screens, you may notice these new fields
with arbitrary values. Similarly, you may receive error messages
if you try to access these new fields. This may happen when a
codeplug of an older version is read into a newer version of the
RSS. Simply ignore the arbitrary values and press OK to remove
the error messages. Operation of the RSS or station will not be
affected.
-> Previous versions of the RSS software are not forward compatible
with station firmware. Earlier RSS versions cannot read later
versions of the station codeplug, and will display a warning to
this effect if attempted.
The following tables describe the relationships between RSS program
versions, software versions, station firmware versions, and
Motorola part numbers.
The software version numbers are available through the SERVICE:STATUS
REPORT screen unless a star (*) follows the number in the table.
RSS PROGRAM VERSION AND STATION FIRMWARE RELATIONSHIP
Conventional and 6809 Trunking Stations
+=============+==================+===============+==================+
| | | Station | |
| RSS Version | Software | Firmware | Motorola Part |
| Release | Version Number | Versions | Number |
+=============+==================+===============+==================+
| | | R1.00 | |
| | R1.00 |(6809 Trunking | |
| | | Not Avail For | |
| | | R1.00) | |
| R1.00 | SC B011.01.009 | SCM U653 | 5191020C41 |
|(R01.19.17) | | SCM U654 | 5191020C42 |
| | WL B011.01.006 | WL U134 | 5191013H14 |
| | | WL U135 | 5191013H13 |
| | EX B011.01.003* | EXC U3701 | 5191012L68 |
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R2.00 | R2.00 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC B013.02.015 | SCM U653 | 5191020C47 |
| | | SCM U654 | 5191020C48 |
| | WL B013.02.007 | WL U134 | 5191013H18 |
| | | WL U135 | 5191013H17 |
| | EX B013.02.004* | EXC U3701 | 5191012L71 |
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R3.00 | R3.00 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC B013.03.007 | SCM U653 | 5191020C49 |
| | | SCM U654 | 5191020C50 |
| | WL B013.03.003 | WL U134 | 5191013H20 |
| | | WL U135 | 5191013H19 |
| | EX B013.03.003* | EXC U3701 | 5191012L72 |
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R3.01 | R3.01 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC B013.03.013 | SCM U653 | 5191020C51 |
| | | SCM U654 | 5191020C52 |
| | WL B013.03.007 | WL U134 | 5191013H22 |
| | | WL U135 | 5191013H21 |
| | EX B013.03.006* | EXC U3701 | 5191012L73 |
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R4.00 | R4.01 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC B013.04.007 | SCM U653 | 5191022C13 |
| | | SCM U654 | 5191022C14 |
| | WL B013.04.004 | WL U134 | 5191013H26 |
| | | WL U135 | 5191013H25 |
| | EX B013.04.004 | EXC U3701 | 5191012L75 |
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R4.00 | R4.02 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC B013.04.011 | SCM U653 | 5191022C19 |
| | | SCM U654 | 5191022C20 |
| | WL B013.04.004 | WL U134 | 5191013H26 |
| | | WL U135 | 5191013H25 |
| | EX B013.04.004 | EXC U3701 | 5191012L75 |
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R5.00 | R5.00 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC B013.05.007 | SCM U651 | 5191020H09 |
| | EPIC | SCM U652 | 5191020H10 |
| | | SCM U653 | 5191020H11 |
| | | SCM U654 | 5191020H12 |
| | WL B013.05.001 | WL U134 | 5191013H28 |
| | | WL U135 | 5191013H27 |
| | EX B013.05.002 | EXC U3701 | 5191012P13 |
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R5.01 | R5.01 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC B013.05.012 | SCM U651 | 5191020H13 |
| | EPIC | SCM U652 | 5191020H14 |
| | | SCM U653 | 5191020H15 |
| | | SCM U654 | 5191020H16 |
| | WL B013.05.004 | WL U134 | 5191013H30 |
| | | WL U135 | 5191013H29 |
| | EX B013.05.002 | EXC U3701 | 5191012P13 |
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R6.00 | R6.00 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC B015.06.009 | SCM U651 | 5191020L01 |
| | EPIC | SCM U652 | 5191020L02 |
| | | SCM U653 | 5191020L03 |
| | | SCM U654 | 5191020L04 |
| | WL B015.06.004 | WL U134 | 5191013H66 |
| | | WL U135 | 5191013H65 |
| | EX B013.05.002 | EXC U3701 | 5191012P13 |
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R6.02 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC R016.06.018 | SCM U651 | 5191020L05 |
| | EPIC | SCM U652 | 5191020L06 |
| | | SCM U653 | 5191020L07 |
| | | SCM U654 | 5191020L08 |
| | WL B016.06.013 | WL U134 | 5191013H70 |
| | | WL U135 | 5191013H69 |
| | EX B016.06.001 | EXC U3701 | 5191012P14 |
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R7.00 | R7.00 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC B016.07.015 | SCM U651 | 5191020L13 |
| | EPIC | SCM U652 | 5191020L14 |
| | | SCM U653 | 5191020L15 |
| | | SCM U654 | 5191020L16 |
| | WL B016.07.008 | WL U134 | 5191013H74 |
| | | WL U135 | 5191013H73 |
| | EX B016.06.001 | EXC U3701 | 5191012P14 |
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R7.01 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC B016.07.026 | SCM U651 | 5191020L17 |
| | EPIC | SCM U652 | 5191020L18 |
| | | SCM U653 | 5191020L19 |
| | | SCM U654 | 5191020L20 |
| | WL B016.07.013 | WL U134 | 5191013H76 |
| | | WL U135 | 5191013H75 |
| | EX B016.06.001 | EXC U3701 | 5191012P14 |
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R7.02.02 | R7.02 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC B016.07.030 | SCM U651 | 5191020L21 |
| | EPIC | SCM U652 | 5191020L22 |
| | | SCM U653 | 5191020L23 |
| | | SCM U654 | 5191020L24 |
| | WL B016.07.014 | WL U134 | 5191013H78 |
| | | WL U135 | 5191013H77 |
| | EX B016.06.001 | EXC U3701 | 5191012P14 |
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R7.03 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC B016.07.034 | SCM U651 | 5191020L25 |
| | EPIC | SCM U652 | 5191020L26 |
| | | SCM U653 | 5191020L27 |
| | | SCM U654 | 5191020L28 |
| | WL B016.07.018 | WL U134 | 5191013H99 |
| | | WL U135 | 5191013H98 |
| | EX B016.06.001 | EXC U3701 | 5191012P14 |
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R8.00 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC B016.07.034 | SCM U651 | 5191020L25 |
| | EPIC | SCM U652 | 5191020L26 |
| | | SCM U653 | 5191020L27 |
| | | SCM U654 | 5191020L28 |
| | WL B016.07.018 | WL U134 | 5191013H99 |
| | | WL U135 | 5191013H98 |
| | EX B016.07.001 | EXC U3701 | 5191012P15 |
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R8.01 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC B016.08.004 | SCM U651 | 5191020L37 |
| | EPIC | SCM U652 | 5191020L38 |
| | | SCM U653 | 5191020L39 |
| | | SCM U654 | 5191020L40 |
| | WL B016.08.002 | WL U134 | 5191013L28 |
| | | WL U135 | 5191013L27 |
| | EX B016.07.001 | EXC U3701 | 5191012P15 |
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R8.02 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC B016.08.006 | SCM U651 | 5191020L88 |
| | EPIC | SCM U652 | 5191020L89 |
| | | SCM U653 | 5191020L90 |
| | | SCM U654 | 5191020L91 |
| | WL B016.08.002 | WL U134 | 5191013L28 |
| | | WL U135 | 5191013L27 |
| | EX B016.07.001 | EXC U3701 | 5191012P15 |
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R8.03 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC B016.08.008 | SCM U651 |PC5091104000008008|
| | EPIC | SCM U652 |PC5091204000008008|
| | | SCM U653 |PC5091304000008008|
| | | SCM U654 |PC5091404000008008|
| | WL B016.08.003 | WL U134 |PC5095204000008003|
| | | WL U135 |PC5095104000008003|
| | EX B016.07.001 | EXC U3701 | 5191012P15 |
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R9.00 | R9.00 | System:3.0 | |
| | | | |
| | SC 020.09.017 | SCM P651 |PC5091103000009017|
| | WL 020.09.015 | WL U134,U135 |PC5095103000009015|
| | EX 020.09.001 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009001|
| +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R9.01 | System:3.0 | |
| | | | |
| | SC 020.09.028 | SCM P651 |PC5091103000009028|
| | WL 020.09.022 | WL U134,U135 |PC5095103000009022|
| | EX 020.09.001 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009001|
|-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R09.02.01 | R9.02 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC 020.09.031 | SCM P651 |PC5091103000009031|
| | WL 020.09.022 | WL U134,U135 |PC5095103000009022|
| | | | |
| | EX 020.09.001 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009001|
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R9.02 | Field upgrades| |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | SC 020.09.031 | SCM P651 |PC5091103000009031|
| | WL 020.09.805 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000009805|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000009805|
| | EX 020.09.001 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009001|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R09.03.00 | R9.03 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC 020.09.042 | SCM P651 |PC5091103000009042|
| | WL 020.09.028 | WL U134,U135 |PC5095001000009028|
| | | | |
| | EX 020.09.001 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009001|
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R9.03 | Field upgrades| |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | SC 020.09.042 | SCM P651 |PC5091103000009042|
| | WL 020.09.809 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000009809|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000009809|
| | EX 020.09.001 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009001|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R09.05.00 | R9.05 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC 020.09.055 | SCM P651 |PC5091103000009055|
| | WL 020.09.033 | WL U134,U135 |PC5095001000009033|
| | | | |
| | EX 020.09.004 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009004|
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R9.05 | Field upgrades| |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | SC 020.09.055 | SCM P651 |PC5091103000009055|
| | WL 020.09.812 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000009812|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000009812|
| | EX 020.09.004 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009004|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R09.06.01 | R9.06 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC 020.09.062 | SCM P651 |PC5091103000009062|
| | WL 020.09.034 | WL U134,U135 |PC5095001000009034|
| | | | |
| | EX 020.09.004 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009004|
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R9.06 | Field upgrades| |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | SC 020.09.062 | SCM P651 |PC5091103000009062|
| | WL 020.09.813 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000009813|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000009813|
| | EX 020.09.004 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009004|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R09.07.00 | R9.07 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC 020.09.068 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000009068|
| | WL 020.09.036 | WL U134,U135 |PC5095001000009036|
| | | | |
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R9.07 | Field upgrades| |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | SC 020.09.068 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000009068|
| | WL 020.09.813 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000009813|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000009813|
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R10.00.00 | R10.00 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC 020.10.002 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000010002|
| | WL 020.10.001 | WL U134,U135 |PC5095001000010001|
| | | | |
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R10.00 | Field upgrades| |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | SC 020.10.072 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000010072|
| | WL 020.09.813 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000009813|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000009813|
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R10.01.00 | R10.01 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC 020.10.013 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000010013|
| | WL 020.10.001 | WL U134,U135 |PC5095001000010001|
| | | | |
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R10.01 | Field upgrades| |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | SC 020.10.013 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000010013|
| | WL 020.09.813 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000009813|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000009813|
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R10.02.00 | R10.02 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC 020.10.021 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000010021|
| | WL 020.10.007 | WL U134,U135 |PC5095001000010007|
| | | | |
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R10.02 | Field upgrades| |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | SC 020.10.021 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000010021|
| | WL 020.10.806 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000010806|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000010806|
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R10.03.00 | R10.03 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC 020.10.030 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000010030|
| | WL 020.10.008 | WL U134,U135 |PC5095001000010008|
| | | | |
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R10.03 | Field upgrades| |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | SC 020.10.030 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000010030|
| | WL 020.10.807 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000010807|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000010807|
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R10.04.00 | R10.04 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.10.041 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000010041|
| | WL 020.10.008 | WL U134,U135 |PC5095001000010008|
| | | | |
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R10.04 | Field upgrades| |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.10.041 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000010041|
| | WL 020.10.807 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000010807|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000010807|
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R10.05.00 | R10.05 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.10.046 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000010046|
| | WL 020.10.008 | WL U134,U135 |PC5095001000010008|
| | | | |
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R10.05 | Field upgrades| |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.10.046 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000010046|
| | WL 020.10.807 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000010807|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000010807|
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R10.06.00 | R10.06 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.10.058 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000010058|
| | WL 020.10.018 | WL U134,U135 |PC5095001000010018|
| | | | |
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R10.06 | Field upgrades| |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.10.058 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000010058|
| | WL 020.10.816 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000010816|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000010816|
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R10.07.00 | R10.07 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.10.066 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000010066|
| | WL 020.10.021 | WL U134,U135 |PC5095001000010021|
| | | | |
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R10.07 | Field upgrades| |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.10.066 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000010066|
| | WL 020.10.816 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000010816|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000010816|
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R10.08.00 | R10.08 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.10.086 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000010086|
| | WL 020.10.025 | WL U134,U135 |PC5095001000010025|
| | | | |
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R10.08 | Field upgrades| |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.10.086 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000010086|
| | WL 020.10.816 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000010816|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000010816|
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R10.11.00 | R10.11 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.10.095 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000010095|
| | WL 020.10.025 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000010025|
| | | | |
| | EX 020.09.007 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009007|
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R10.11 | Field upgrades| |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.10.095 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000010095|
| | WL 020.10.816 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000010816|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000010816|
| | EX 020.09.007 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009007|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R10.12.00 | R10.12 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.10.101 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000010101|
| | WL 020.10.025 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000010025|
| | | | |
| | EX 020.09.007 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009007|
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R10.12 | Field upgrades| |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.10.101 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000010101|
| | WL 020.10.816 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000010816|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000010816|
| | EX 020.09.007 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009007|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R12.01.00 | R12.01 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.12.008 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000012008|
| | WL 020.12.003 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000012003|
| | | | |
| | EX 020.09.008 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009008|
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R12.01 | Field upgrades| |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.12.008 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000012008|
| | WL 020.10.816 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000010816|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000010816|
| | EX 020.09.008 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009008|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R12.01.00 | R12.01.01 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.12.021 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000012021|
| | WL 020.12.004 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000012004|
| | | | |
| | EX 020.09.008 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009008|
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R12.01 | Field upgrades| |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.12.021 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000012021|
| | WL 020.10.816 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000010816|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000010816|
| | EX 020.09.008 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009008|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R12.02.00 | R12.02 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.12.021 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000012021|
| | WL 020.12.004 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000012004|
| | | | |
| | EX 020.09.010 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009010|
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R12.02 | Field upgrades| |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.12.021 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000012021|
| | WL 020.10.816 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000010816|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000010816|
| | EX 020.09.010 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009010|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R12.03.00 | R12.03 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.12.024 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000012024|
| | WL 020.12.008 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000012008|
| | | | |
| | EX 020.09.017 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009017|
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R12.03 | Field upgrades| |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.12.024 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000012024|
| | WL 020.10.816 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000010816|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000010816|
| | EX 020.09.017 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009017|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R12.06.00 | R12.06 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.12.042 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000012042|
| | WL 020.12.011 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000012011|
| | | | |
| | EX 020.09.017 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009017|
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R12.06 | Field upgrades| |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.12.042 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000012042|
| | WL 020.10.816 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000010816|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000010816|
| | EX 020.09.017 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009017|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R12.06.00 | R12.06.01 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.12.047 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000012047|
| | WL 020.12.011 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000012011|
| | | | |
| | EX 020.09.017 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009010|
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R12.06 | Field upgrades| |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.12.047 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000012047|
| | WL 020.10.816 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000010816|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000010816|
| | EX 020.09.017 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009017|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R12.07.00 | R12.07 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.12.071 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000012071|
| | WL 020.12.028 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000012028|
| | | | |
| | EX 020.09.017 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009017|
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R12.06 | Field upgrades| |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.12.071 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000012071|
| | WL 020.10.816 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000010816|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000010816|
| | EX 020.09.017 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009017|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R13.00.00 | R13.00 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.13.009 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000013009|
| | WL 020.12.014 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000012014|
| | | | |
| | EX 020.09.017 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009010|
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R12.06 | Field upgrades| |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.13.009 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000013009|
| | WL 020.10.816 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000010816|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000010816|
| | EX 020.09.017 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009010|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R13.00.00 | R13.00.01 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.13.011 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000013011|
| | WL 020.13.002 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000013002|
| | | | |
| | EX 020.09.017 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009010|
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R12.06 | Field upgrades| |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.13.011 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000013011|
| | WL 020.10.816 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000010816|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000010816|
| | EX 020.09.017 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009010|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R13.01.00 | R13.01 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.13.017 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000013017|
| | WL 020.13.002 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000013002|
| | | | |
| | EX 020.09.017 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009010|
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R12.06 | Field upgrades| |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.13.017 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000013017|
| | WL 020.10.816 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000010816|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000010816|
| | EX 020.09.017 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009017|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R14.00.00 | R14.00 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.14.003 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000014003|
| | WL_020.14.002 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000014002|
| | EX_020.19.018 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009018|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R14.01.00 | R14.01 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.14.020 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000014020|
| | WL_020.14.002 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000014002|
| | EX_020.19.018 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009018|
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R14.01.01 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.14.021 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000014021|
| | WL_020.14.002 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000014002|
| | EX_020.19.018 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009018|
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R14.01.02 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.14.027 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000014027|
| | WL_020.14.002 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000014002|
| | EX_020.19.018 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009018|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R14.02.00 | R14.02 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.14.028 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000014028|
| | WL_020.14.002 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000014002|
| | EX_020.19.018 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009018|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R14.03.00 | R14.03 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.14.029 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000014029|
| | WL_020.14.003 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000014003|
| | EX_020.19.018 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009018|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R14.04.00 | R14.04 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.14.033 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000014033|
| | WL_020.14.003 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000014003|
| | EX_020.19.018 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009018|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R14.05.00 | R14.05 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.14.034 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000014034|
| | WL_020.14.003 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000014003|
| | EX_020.19.018 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009018|
| +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R14.05.01 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.14.035 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000014035|
| | WL_020.14.003 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000014003|
| | EX_020.19.018 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009018|
| +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R14.05.02 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.14.036 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000014036|
| | WL_020.14.003 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000014003|
| | EX_020.19.018 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009018|
| +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R14.05.03 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.14.038 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000014038|
| | WL_020.14.003 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000014003|
| | EX_020.19.018 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009018|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R14.06.00 | R14.06.00 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.14.040 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000014040|
| | WL_020.14.003 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000014003|
| | EX_020.19.018 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009018|
| +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R14.06.01 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.14.041 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000014041|
| | WL_020.14.003 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000014003|
| | EX_020.19.018 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009018|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R14.07.00 | R14.07 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.14.042 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000014042|
| | WL_020.14.003 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000014003|
| | EX_020.19.018 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009018|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R14.08.00 | R14.08 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC_020.14.043 | SCM P651 |PC509F103000014043|
| | WL_020.14.003 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000014003|
| | EX_020.19.018 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009018|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
Intellirepeater/Smartzone Stations
+=============+==================+===============+==================+
| | | System/Station| |
|RSS Version | Software Version | Firmware | Motorola Part |
| Release | Number | Versions | Number |
+=============+==================+===============+==================+
| | | | |
| | | System:SZ2.0 | |
| R1.00 | IR 8.14* | SCM U653 | 5191022C03 |
|(R01.19.17) | | SCM U654 | 5191022C04 |
| | COMB WL 930504* | WL U134 | 5191013H12 |
| | | WL U135 | 5191013H11 |
| | EX 7.11* | EX U3701 | 5191012H98 |
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | | System:SZ2.3 | |
| R2.00 | IR 10.26* | SCM U653 | 5191022C05 |
| | | SCM U654 | 5191022C06 |
| | WL B013.02.007 | WL U134 | 5191013H18 |
| | | WL U135 | 5191013H17 |
| | EX B013.02.004* | EX U3701 | 5191012L71 |
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | | | |
| R3.00 | | | |
| | | | |
| | | | |
+-------------+ | | |
| | | System:SZ2.7 | |
| R3.01 | IR 11.69* | SCM U653 | 5191022C11 |
| | | SCM U654 | 5191022C12 |
| | WL B013.03.007 | WL U134 | 5191013H22 |
| | | WL U135 | 5191013H21 |
| | EX B013.03.006* | EX U3701 | 5191012L73 |
+-------------+ | | |
| | | | |
| R4.00 | | | |
| | | | |
+-------------+ | | |
| | | | |
| R5.00 | | | |
| | | | |
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | | System:SZ2.7E | |
| R5.01 | IR 13.20 | SCM U651 | 5191022H25 |
| | EPIC IR | SCM U652 | 5191022H26 |
| | | SCM U653 | 5191022H27 |
| | | SCM U654 | 5191022H28 |
| | WL B013.05.004 | WL U134 | 5191013H30 |
| | | WL U135 | 5191013H29 |
| | EX B013.05.002 | EX U3701 | 5191012P13 |
| | | | |
| | IR 11.103 | SCM U653 | 5191022C23 |
| | NON EPIC IR | SCM U654 | 5191022C24 |
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R6.00 | R6.00 | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | | |
| | SC R015.06.514 | SCM U651 | 5191022C29 |
| | EPIC IR | SCM U652 | 5191022C30 |
| | | SCM U653 | 5191022C31 |
| | | SCM U654 | 5191022C32 |
| | WL B015.06.004 | WL U134 | 5191013H66 |
| | | WL U135 | 5191013H65 |
| | EX B013.05.002 | EXC U3701 | 5191012P13 |
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R6.01 | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | | |
| | SC R016.06.521 | SCM U651 | 5191022C33 |
| | EPIC IR | SCM U652 | 5191022C34 |
| | | SCM U653 | 5191022C35 |
| | | SCM U654 | 5191022C36 |
| | WL B013.06.011 | WL U134 | 5191013H68 |
| | | WL U135 | 5191013H67 |
| | EX B016.06.001 | EXC U3701 | 5191012P14 |
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R6.02 | System:2.0.3/2| |
| | | | |
| | SC R016.06.521 | SCM U651 | 5191022C33 |
| | EPIC IR | SCM U652 | 5191022C34 |
| | | SCM U653 | 5191022C35 |
| | | SCM U654 | 5191022C36 |
| | WL B016.06.013 | WL U134 | 5191013H70 |
| | | WL U135 | 5191013H69 |
| | EX B016.06.001 | EXC U3701 | 5191012P14 |
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R7.00 | R7.00 | System:2.0.3/2| |
| | | | |
| | SC R016.06.521 | SCM U651 | 5191022C33 |
| | EPIC IR | SCM U652 | 5191022C34 |
| | | SCM U653 | 5191022C35 |
| | | SCM U654 | 5191022C36 |
| | WL B016.07.008 | WL U134 | 5191013H74 |
| | | WL U135 | 5191013H73 |
| | EX B016.06.001 | EXC U3701 | 5191012P14 |
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R7.01 | System:2.0.3/2| |
| | | | |
| | SC R016.06.521 | SCM U651 | 5191022C33 |
| | EPIC IR | SCM U652 | 5191022C34 |
| | | SCM U653 | 5191022C35 |
| | | SCM U654 | 5191022C36 |
| | WL B016.07.013 | WL U134 | 5191013H76 |
| | | WL U135 | 5191013H75 |
| | EX B016.06.001 | EXC U3701 | 5191012P14 |
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R7.02.02 | R7.02 | System:2.0.3/2| |
| | | | |
| | SC R016.06.521 | SCM U651 | 5191022C33 |
| | EPIC IR | SCM U652 | 5191022C34 |
| | | SCM U653 | 5191022C35 |
| | | SCM U654 | 5191022C36 |
| | WL B016.07.014 | WL U134 | 5191013H78 |
| | | WL U135 | 5191013H77 |
| | EX B016.06.001 | EXC U3701 | 5191012P14 |
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R7.03 | System:2.0.3/2| |
| | | | |
| | SC R016.06.521 | SCM U651 | 5191022C33 |
| | EPIC IR | SCM U652 | 5191022C34 |
| | | SCM U653 | 5191022C35 |
| | | SCM U654 | 5191022C36 |
| | WL B016.07.018 | WL U134 | 5191013H99 |
| | | WL U135 | 5191013H98 |
| | EX B016.06.001 | EXC U3701 | 5191012P14 |
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R8.00 | System:2.0.3/2| |
| | | | |
| | SC R016.08.503 | SCM U651 | 5191022C37 |
| | EPIC IR | SCM U652 | 5191022C38 |
| | | SCM U653 | 5191022C39 |
| | | SCM U654 | 5191022C41 |
| | WL B016.07.018 | WL U134 | 5191013H99 |
| | | WL U135 | 5191013H98 |
| | EX B016.07.001 | EXC U3701 | 5191012P15 |
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R8.01 | System:2.0.3/2| |
| | | | |
| | SC R016.08.508 | SCM U651 | 5191022C46 |
| | EPIC IR | SCM U652 | 5191022C47 |
| | | SCM U653 | 5191022C48 |
| | | SCM U654 | 5191022C49 |
| | WL B016.08.002 | WL U134 | 5191013L28 |
| | | WL U135 | 5191013L27 |
| | EX B016.07.001 | EXC U3701 | 5191012P15 |
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R8.02 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC R016.08.508 | SCM U651 | 5191022C46 |
| | EPIC IR | SCM U652 | 5191022C47 |
| | | SCM U653 | 5191022C48 |
| | | SCM U654 | 5191022C49 |
| | WL B016.08.002 | WL U134 | 5191013L28 |
| | | WL U135 | 5191013L27 |
| | EX B016.07.001 | EXC U3701 | 5191012P15 |
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R8.03 | | |
| | | | |
| | SC R016.08.508 | SCM U651 | 5191022C46 |
| | EPIC IR | SCM U652 | 5191022C47 |
| | | SCM U653 | 5191022C48 |
| | | SCM U654 | 5191022C49 |
| | WL B016.08.003 | WL U134 |PC5095204000008003|
| | | WL U135 |PC5095104000008003|
| | EX B016.07.001 | EXC U3701 | 5191012P15 |
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R09.00.00 | R9.00 | System:3.0 | |
| | | | |
| | IR 020.09.519 | SCM P651 |PC5091103000009519|
| | WL 020.09.015 | WL U134,U135 |PC5095103000009015|
| | EX 020.09.001 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009001|
| +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R9.01 | System:3.0 | |
| | | | |
| | IR 020.09.528 | SCM P651 |PC5091103000009528|
| | WL 020.09.022 | WL U134,U135 |PC5095103000009022|
| | EX 020.09.001 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009001|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R9.02.01 | R9.02 | System:3.0 | |
| | | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | | |
| | IR 020.09.533 | SCM P651 |PC5091103000009533|
| | WL 020.09.022 | WL U134,U135 |PC5095103000009022|
| | | | |
| | EX 020.09.001 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009001|
| +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R9.02 | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | IR 020.09.533 | SCM P651 |PC5091103000009533|
| | WL 020.09.805 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000009805|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000009805|
| | EX 020.09.001 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009001|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R09.03.00 | R9.03 | System:3.0 | |
| | | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | | |
| | IR 020.09.542 | SCM P651 |PC5091103000009542|
| | WL 020.09.028 | WL U134,U135 |PC5095001000009028|
| | EX 020.09.001 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009001|
| +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R9.03 | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | IR 020.09.542 | SCM P651 |PC5091103000009542|
| | WL 020.09.809 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000009809|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000009809|
| | EX 020.09.001 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009001|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R09.05.00 | R9.05 | System:3.0 | |
| | | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | | |
| | IR 020.09.552 | SCM P651 |PC5091103000009552|
| | WL 020.09.033 | WL U134,U135 |PC5095001000009033|
| | EX 020.09.004 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009004|
| +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R9.05 | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | IR 020.09.552 | SCM P651 |PC5091103000009552|
| | WL 020.09.812 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000009812|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000009812|
| | EX 020.09.004 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009004|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R09.06.01 | R9.06 | System:3.0 | |
| | | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | | |
| | IR 020.09.558 | SCM P651 |PC5091103000009558|
| | WL 020.09.034 | WL U134,U135 |PC5095001000009034|
| | EX 020.09.004 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009004|
| +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R9.06 | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | IR 020.09.558 | SCM P651 |PC5091103000009558|
| | WL 020.09.813 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000009813|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000009813|
| | EX 020.09.004 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009004|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R09.07.00 | R9.07 | System:3.0 | |
| | | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | | |
| | IR 020.09.564 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000009564|
| | WL 020.09.036 | WL U134,U135 |PC5095001000009036|
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
| +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R9.07 | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | IR 020.09.564 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000009564|
| | WL 020.09.813 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000009813|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000009813|
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R10.00.00 | R10.00 | System:3.0 | |
| | | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | | |
| | IR 020.10.502 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000010502|
| | WL 020.10.001 | WL U134,U135 |PC5095001000010001|
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
| +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R10.00 | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | IR 020.10.568 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000010568|
| | WL 020.09.813 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000009813|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000009813|
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R10.01.00 | R10.01 | System:3.0 | |
| | | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | | |
| | IR 020.10.513 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000010513|
| | WL 020.10.001 | WL U134,U135 |PC5095001000010001|
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
| +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R10.01 | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | IR 020.10.513 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000010513|
| | WL 020.09.813 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000009813|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000009813|
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R10.02.00 | R10.02 | System:3.0 | |
| | | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | | |
| | IR 020.10.520 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000010520|
| | WL 020.10.007 | WL U134,U135 |PC5095001000010007|
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
| +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R10.02 | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | IR 020.10.520 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000010520|
| | WL 020.10.806 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000010806|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000010806|
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R10.03.00 | R10.03 | System:3.0 | |
| | | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | | |
| | IR 020.10.527 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000010527|
| | WL 020.10.008 | WL U134,U135 |PC5095001000010008|
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
| +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R10.02 | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | IR 020.10.527 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000010527|
| | WL 020.10.807 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000010807|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000010807|
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R10.04.00 | R10.04 | System:3.0 | |
| | | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | | |
| | IR_020.10.535 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000010535|
| | WL 020.10.008 | WL U134,U135 |PC5095001000010008|
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
| +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R10.04 | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | IR_020.10.535 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000010535|
| | WL 020.10.807 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000010807|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000010807|
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R10.05.00 | R10.05 | System:3.0 | |
| | | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | | |
| | IR_020.10.541 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000010541|
| | WL 020.10.008 | WL U134,U135 |PC5095001000010008|
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
| +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R10.05 | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | IR_020.10.541 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000010541|
| | WL 020.10.807 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000010807|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000010807|
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R10.06.00 | R10.06 | System:3.0 | |
| | | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | | |
| | IR_020.10.552 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000010552|
| | WL 020.10.018 | WL U134,U135 |PC5095001000010018|
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
| +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R10.06 | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | IR_020.10.552 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000010552|
| | WL 020.10.816 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000010816|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000010816|
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R10.07.00 | R10.07 | System:3.0 | |
| | | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | | |
| | IR_020.10.560 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000010560|
| | WL 020.10.021 | WL U134,U135 |PC5095001000010021|
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
| +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R10.07 | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | IR_020.10.560 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000010560|
| | WL 020.10.816 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000010816|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000010816|
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R10.08.00 | R10.08 | System:3.0 | |
| | | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | | |
| | IR_020.10.584 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000010584|
| | WL 020.10.025 | WL U134,U135 |PC5095001000010025|
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
| +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R10.08 | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | IR_020.10.584 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000010584|
| | WL 020.10.816 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000010816|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000010816|
| | EX 020.09.005 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009005|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R10.11.00 | R10.11 | System:3.0 | |
| | | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | | |
| | IR_020.10.593 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000010593|
| | WL 020.10.025 | WL U134,U135 |PC5095001000010025|
| | EX 020.09.007 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009007|
| +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R10.11 | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | IR_020.10.593 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000010593|
| | WL 020.10.816 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000010816|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000010816|
| | EX 020.09.007 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009007|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R10.12.00 | R10.12 | System:3.0 | |
| | | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | | |
| | IR_020.10.599 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000010599|
| | WL 020.10.025 | WL U134,U135 |PC5095001000010025|
| | EX 020.09.007 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009007|
| +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R10.12 | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | IR_020.10.599 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000010599|
| | WL 020.10.816 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000010816|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000010816|
| | EX 020.09.007 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009007|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R12.01.00 | R12.01 | System:3.0 | |
| | | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | | |
| | IR_020.12.508 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000012508|
| | WL 020.12.003 | WL U134,U135 |PC5095001000012003|
| | EX 020.09.008 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009008|
| +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R12.01 | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | only | |
| | | | |
| | IR_020.12.508 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000012508|
| | WL 020.10.816 | WL PROM U134 |PC5095204000010816|
| | | WL PROM U135 |PC5095104000010816|
| | EX 020.09.008 | EXC U3701 |PC5093104000009008|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R12.02.00 | R12.02 | System:3.0 | |
| | | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | | |
| | IR_020.12.521 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000012521|
| | WL 020.12.004 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000012004|
| | EX 020.09.010 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009010|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R12.03.00 | R12.03 | System:3.0 | |
| | | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | | |
| | IR_020.12.524 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000012524|
| | WL 020.12.008 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000012008|
| | EX 020.09.017 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009017|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R12.05.00 | R12.05 | System:3.0 | |
| | | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | | |
| | IR_020.12.529 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000012529|
| | WL 020.12.008 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000012008|
| | EX 020.09.017 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009017|
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R12.05.01 | System:3.0 | |
| | | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | | |
| | IR_020.12.530 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000012530|
| | WL 020.12.008 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000012008|
| | EX 020.09.017 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009017|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R12.06.00 | R12.06 | System:3.0 | |
| | | System:2.0.3 | |
| | | | |
| | IR_020.12.535 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000012535|
| | WL 020.12.011 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000012011|
| | EX 020.09.017 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009017|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R13.00.00 | R13.00.01 | System:3.0/3.5/4.1 |
| | | | |
| | | | |
| | IR_020.12.546 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000012546|
| | WL 020.13.002 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000013002|
| | EX 020.09.017 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009017|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R13.01.00 | R13.01 | System:3.0/3.5/4.1 |
| | | | |
| | | | |
| | IR_020.12.551 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000012551|
| | WL 020.13.002 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000013002|
| | EX 020.09.017 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009017|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R14.00.00 | R14.00 | System:3.0/3.5/4.1 |
| | | | |
| | | | |
| | IR_020.14.504 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000014504|
| | WL 020.14.002 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000014002|
| | EX 020.09.018 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009018|
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R14.00.01 | System:3.0/3.5/4.1 |
| | | | |
| | | | |
| | IR_020.14.506 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000014506|
| | WL 020.14.002 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000014002|
| | EX 020.09.018 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009018|
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R14.00.02 | System:3.0/3.5/4.1 |
| | | | |
| | | | |
| | IR_020.14.511 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000014511|
| | WL 020.14.002 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000014002|
| | EX 020.09.018 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009018|
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R14.00.03 | System:3.0/3.5/4.1 |
| | | | |
| | | | |
| | IR_020.14.514 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000014514|
| | WL 020.14.002 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000014002|
| | EX 020.09.018 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009018|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R14.02.00 | R14.02 | System:3.0/3.5/4.1 |
| | | | |
| | | | |
| | IR_020.14.515 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000014515|
| | WL 020.14.002 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000014002|
| | EX 020.09.018 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009018|
+ +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R14.02.01 | System:3.0/3.5/4.1 |
| | | | |
| | | | |
| | IR_020.14.516 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000014516|
| | WL 020.14.002 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000014002|
| | EX 020.09.018 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009018|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R14.04.00 | R14.04 | System:3.0/3.5/4.1 |
| | | | |
| | | | |
| | IR_020.14.518 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000014518|
| | WL 020.14.003 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000014003|
| | EX 020.09.018 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009018|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R14.05.00 | R14.05 | System:3.0/3.5/4.1 |
| | | | |
| | | | |
| | IR_020.14.519 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000014519|
| | WL 020.14.003 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000014003|
| | EX 020.09.018 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009018|
| +------------------+---------------+------------------+
| | R14.05.01 | System:3.0/3.5/4.1 |
| | | | |
| | | | |
| | IR_020.14.520 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000014520|
| | WL 020.14.003 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000014003|
| | EX 020.09.018 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009018|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
| R14.06.00 | R14.06 | System:3.0/3.5/4.1 |
| | | | |
| | | | |
| | IR_020.14.521 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000014521|
| | WL 020.14.003 | WL U134,U135 |PC509F02N000014003|
| | EX 020.09.018 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009018|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
Limited Quantar
+=============+==================+===============+==================+
| | | System/Station| |
|RSS Version | Software Version | Firmware | Motorola Part |
| Release | Number | Versions | Number |
+=============+==================+===============+==================+
| R10.12.00 | R10.12 | | |
| | | | |
| | | | |
| | LQ_020.10.737 | SCM P651 |PC509F104000010737|
| | WL 020.10.014 | WL U134,U135 |PC5095001000010014|
| | EX 020.09.017 | EXC U3701 |PC509E02M000009017|
+-------------+------------------+---------------+------------------+
NOTE FOR LIMITED QUANTAR. Limited Quantar must be programmed as
Conventional, Analog only stations. The following features can be enabled
for Limited Quantar: Repeater Operation, Base Station Operation, DC Remote
Control, Multi PL Capability, Phone Patch Interface, Wireline Interface
8-Wire, Basic Wildcard Operation, Enhanced Wildcard Operation, and Tone
Remote Control. The RSS will allow other features to be set but they will
be ignored. For additional configuration help, consult the "Limited"
Quantar supplement manual (68P81131E14) which was shipped with your station.
Note that for station releases prior to Release 9, conventional and 6809
trunking station firmware both share a 5 IC set, whereas the IntelliRepeater
station firmware is provided by a unique 5 IC set.
For station releases beginning with Release 9, software upgrades are
provided on a floppy disk. In order for a station to be loaded with
Release 9 or later, it must be capable of being software downloaded. If
the station being upgraded is not software download capable, an upgrade
kit is available. Check the Flashport ordering guide for details.
The following table describes the relationship between RSS Comparator release
dates, firmware versions, Motorola part numbers and RSS program versions.
Codeplug
Release Date Card Versions Part Numbers Version RSS
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 12/30/2008 | B1_R03.10.000 | PC525F001000031000 | 3.9 | R14.06.00 |
| | B2_R03.11.000 | PC525F002000031100 | | |
| | OC_R03.18.003 | PC525F003000031800 | | |
| | WB_R03.06.002 | PC525E401000030600 | | |
| | WL_R03.18.000 | PC525F004000031800 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 01/01/2008 | B1_R03.10.000 | PC525F001000031000 | 3.9 | R14.04.00 |
| | B2_R03.11.000 | PC525F002000031100 | | |
| | OC_R03.17.001 | PC525F003000031700 | | |
| | WB_R03.06.002 | PC525E401000030600 | | |
| | WL_R03.17.001 | PC525F004000031700 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 06/04/2005 | B1_R03.10.000 | PC525F001000031000 | 3.9 | R03.09.00 |
| | B2_R03.11.000 | PC525F002000031100 | | |
| | OC_R03.16.000 | PC525F003000031600 | | |
| | WB_R03.06.002 | PC525E401000030600 | | |
| | WL_R03.10.000 | PC525F004000031000 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 01/01/2005 | B1_R03.10.000 | PC525F001000031000 | 3.9 | R03.09.00 |
| | B2_R03.11.000 | PC525F002000031100 | | |
| | OC_R03.15.000 | PC525F003000031500 | | |
| | WB_R03.06.002 | PC525E401000030600 | | |
| | WL_R03.10.000 | PC525F004000031000 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 09/29/2003 | B1_R03.10.000 | PC525F001000031000 | 3.9 | R03.09.00 |
| | B2_R03.11.000 | PC525F002000031100 | | |
| | OC_R03.14.000 | PC525F003000031400 | | |
| | WB_R03.06.002 | PC525E401000030600 | | |
| | WL_R03.10.000 | PC525F004000031000 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| | B1_R03.10.000 | PC525F001000031000 | 3.9 | R03.09.00 |
| | B2_R03.11.000 | PC525F002000031100 | | |
| 04/11/2003 | OC_R03.13.000 | PC525F003000031300 | | |
| | WB_R03.06.002 | PC525E401000030600 | | |
| | WL_R03.09.000 | PC525F004000030900 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 06/19/2002 | B1_R03.10.000 | PC525F001000031000 | 3.9 | R03.09.00 |
| | B2_R03.11.000 | PC525F002000031100 | | |
| | OC_R03.12.000 | PC525F003000031200 | | |
| | WB_R03.06.002 | PC525E401000030600 | | |
| | WL_R03.09.000 | PC525F004000030900 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 12/08/2000 | B1_R03.06.005 | KC525F001000030600 | 3.9 | R03.08.00 |
| | B2_R03.06.004 | PC525F002000030600 | | |
| | OC_R03.06.005 | PC525F003000030601 | | |
| | WB_R03.06.002 | PC525E401000030600 | | |
| | WL_R03.06.002 | PC525F004000030600 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 10/09/1999 | B1_R03.06.005 | KC525F001000030600 | 3.9 | R03.07.00 |
| | B2_R03.06.004 | PC525F002000030600 | | |
| | OC_R03.06.005 | PC525F003000030601 | | |
| | WB_R03.06.002 | PC525E401000030600 | | |
| | WL_R03.06.002 | PC525F004000030600 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 07/15/1999 | B1_R03.06.005 | KC525F001000030600 | 3.6 | R03.06.00 |
| | B2_R03.06.004 | PC525F002000030600 | | |
| | OC_R03.06.005 | PC525F003000030601 | | |
| | WB_R03.06.002 | PC525E401000030600 | | |
| | WL_R03.06.002 | PC525F004000030600 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 07/15/1999 | OC_R03.05.007 | PC5251101000030502 | 3.6 | R03.05.00 |
| | WL_R03.05.004 | PC5255101000030501 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 04/15/1999 | B1_R03.06.005 | KC525F001000030600 | 3.6 | R03.06.00 |
| | B2_R03.06.004 | PC525F002000030600 | | |
| | OC_R03.06.003 | PC525F003000030600 | | |
| | WB_R03.06.002 | PC525E401000030600 | | |
| | WL_R03.06.002 | PC525F004000030600 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 10/16/1998 | OC_R03.05.005 | PC5251101000030501 | 3.6 | R03.05.00 |
| | WL_R03.05.004 | PC5255101000030501 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 07/17/1998 | OC_R03.04.003 | PC5251101000030400 | 3.6 | R03.03.00 |
| | WL_R03.04.002 | PC5255101000030400 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 04/15/1998 | OC_R03.03.003 | PC5251101000030301 | 3.6 | R03.03.00 |
| | WL_R03.03.001 | PC5255101000030300 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 01/15/1998 | OC_R03.02.006 | PC5251101000030200 | 3.6 | R03.02.00 |
| | WL_R03.02.002 | PC5255101000030200 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 07/18/1997 | OC_R03.01.003 | PC5251101000030100 | 3.1 | R03.01.00 |
| | WL_R03.01.002 | PC5255101000030100 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 06/20/1997* | OC_R03.00.036 | PC5251101000030003 | 3.1 | R03.00.00 |
| | WL_R03.00.032 | PC5255101000030002 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 04/22/1997 | OC_R03.00.034 | PC5251101000030002 | 3.1 | R03.00.00 |
| | WL_R03.00.032 | PC5255101000030002 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 03/14/1997 | OC_R03.00.032 | PC5251101000030032 | 3.1 | R03.00.00 |
| | WL_R03.00.028 | 51R91013L39-40 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 12/06/1996 | OC_R03.00.030 | 51R91020H83-86 | 3.1 | R03.00.00 |
| | WL_R03.00.028 | 51R91013L39-40 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
*-Limited Release.
PROGRAM NOTES
-------------
-> Error No. 513, 516, and 533 - "Connected Device Does Not Support This
Feature" - when you receive any of these popup messages it means one of
two things:
1. The RSS is connected to the wrong device(i.e. you are running the
ASTRO-TAC RSS and are physically connected to a Quantar Base Station).
In this case, check to see that you are physically connected to the
proper device type and try again.
2. The RSS is sending commands that are not understood by the connected
device. With the addition of new firmware features, the RSS adds
functionality to support them. Older firmware that does not include
these new features will not understand the new commands. In this case
the only way to get this functionality is to upgrade your firmware.
System help
SYSTEM HELP
-------------
RSS Part Number............. RVN4154
RSS Manual Number........... 68P81098E15
RSS PROGRAM, CODEPLUG, AND VERSION COMPATIBILITY:
-------------------------------------------------
This version of the comparator RSS supports the Motorola
ASTRO-TAC 3000 Comparator. Previous comparator models
are not supported by this software package.
The following table describes the relationship between RSS
comparator release dates, firmware versions, Motorola part
numbers and RSS program versions.
Codeplug
Release Date Card Versions Part Numbers Version RSS
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 12/30/2008 | B1_R03.10.000 | PC525F001000031000 | 3.9 | R14.06.00 |
| | B2_R03.11.000 | PC525F002000031100 | | |
| | OC_R03.18.003 | PC525F003000031800 | | |
| | WB_R03.06.002 | PC525E401000030600 | | |
| | WL_R03.18.000 | PC525F004000031800 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 01/01/2008 | B1_R03.10.000 | PC525F001000031000 | 3.9 | R14.04.00 |
| | B2_R03.11.000 | PC525F002000031100 | | |
| | OC_R03.17.001 | PC525F003000031700 | | |
| | WB_R03.06.002 | PC525E401000030600 | | |
| | WL_R03.17.001 | PC525F004000031700 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 06/04/2005 | B1_R03.10.000 | PC525F001000031000 | 3.9 | R03.09.00 |
| | B2_R03.11.000 | PC525F002000031100 | | |
| | OC_R03.16.000 | PC525F003000031600 | | |
| | WB_R03.06.002 | PC525E401000030600 | | |
| | WL_R03.10.000 | PC525F004000031000 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 01/01/2005 | B1_R03.10.000 | PC525F001000031000 | 3.9 | R03.09.00 |
| | B2_R03.11.000 | PC525F002000031100 | | |
| | OC_R03.15.000 | PC525F003000031500 | | |
| | WB_R03.06.002 | PC525E401000030600 | | |
| | WL_R03.10.000 | PC525F004000031000 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 09/29/2003 | B1_R03.10.000 | PC525F001000031000 | 3.9 | R03.09.00 |
| | B2_R03.11.000 | PC525F002000031100 | | |
| | OC_R03.14.000 | PC525F003000031400 | | |
| | WB_R03.06.002 | PC525E401000030600 | | |
| | WL_R03.10.000 | PC525F004000031000 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| | B1_R03.10.000 | PC525F001000031000 | 3.9 | R03.09.00 |
| | B2_R03.11.000 | PC525F002000031100 | | |
| 04/11/2003 | OC_R03.13.000 | PC525F003000031300 | | |
| | WB_R03.06.002 | PC525E401000030600 | | |
| | WL_R03.09.000 | PC525F004000030900 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 06/19/2002 | B1_R03.10.000 | PC525F001000031000 | 3.9 | R03.09.00 |
| | B2_R03.11.000 | PC525F002000031100 | | |
| | OC_R03.12.000 | PC525F003000031200 | | |
| | WB_R03.06.002 | PC525E401000030600 | | |
| | WL_R03.09.000 | PC525F004000030900 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 12/08/2000 | B1_R03.06.005 | KC525F001000030600 | 3.9 | R03.08.00 |
| | B2_R03.06.004 | PC525F002000030600 | | |
| | OC_R03.06.005 | PC525F003000030601 | | |
| | WB_R03.06.002 | PC525E401000030600 | | |
| | WL_R03.06.002 | PC525F004000030600 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 10/09/1999 | B1_R03.06.005 | KC525F001000030600 | 3.9 | R03.07.00 |
| | B2_R03.06.004 | PC525F002000030600 | | |
| | OC_R03.06.005 | PC525F003000030601 | | |
| | WB_R03.06.002 | PC525E401000030600 | | |
| | WL_R03.06.002 | PC525F004000030600 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 07/15/1999 | B1_R03.06.005 | KC525F001000030600 | 3.6 | R03.06.00 |
| | B2_R03.06.004 | PC525F002000030600 | | |
| | OC_R03.06.005 | PC525F003000030601 | | |
| | WB_R03.06.002 | PC525E401000030600 | | |
| | WL_R03.06.002 | PC525F004000030600 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 07/15/1999 | OC_R03.05.007 | PC5251101000030502 | 3.6 | R03.05.00 |
| | WL_R03.05.004 | PC5255101000030501 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 04/15/1999 | B1_R03.06.005 | KC525F001000030600 | 3.6 | R03.06.00 |
| | B2_R03.06.004 | PC525F002000030600 | | |
| | OC_R03.06.003 | PC525F003000030600 | | |
| | WB_R03.06.002 | PC525E401000030600 | | |
| | WL_R03.06.002 | PC525F004000030600 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 10/16/1998 | OC_R03.05.005 | PC5251101000030501 | 3.6 | R03.05.00 |
| | WL_R03.05.004 | PC5255101000030501 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 07/17/1998 | OC_R03.04.003 | PC5251101000030400 | 3.6 | R03.03.00 |
| | WL_R03.04.002 | PC5255101000030400 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 04/15/1998 | OC_R03.03.003 | PC5251101000030301 | 3.6 | R03.03.00 |
| | WL_R03.03.001 | PC5255101000030300 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 01/15/1998 | OC_R03.02.006 | PC5251101000030200 | 3.6 | R03.02.00 |
| | WL_R03.02.002 | PC5255101000030200 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 07/18/1997 | OC_R03.01.003 | PC5251101000030100 | 3.1 | R03.01.00 |
| | WL_R03.01.002 | PC5255101000030100 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 06/20/1997* | OC_R03.00.036 | PC5251101000030003 | 3.1 | R03.00.00 |
| | WL_R03.00.032 | PC5255101000030002 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 04/22/1997 | OC_R03.00.034 | PC5251101000030002 | 3.1 | R03.00.00 |
| | WL_R03.00.032 | PC5255101000030002 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 03/14/1997 | OC_R03.00.032 | PC5251101000030032 | 3.1 | R03.00.00 |
| | WL_R03.00.028 | 51R91013L39-40 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
| 12/06/1996 | OC_R03.00.030 | 51R91020H83-86 | 3.1 | R03.00.00 |
| | WL_R03.00.028 | 51R91013L39-40 | | |
+-------------+----------------+--------------------+---------+--------------+
*-Limited Release.
PROGRAM NOTES
-------------
-> Error No. 513, 516, and 533 - "Connected Device Does Not Support This
Feature" - when you receive any of these popup messages it means one of
two things:
1. The RSS is connected to the wrong device(i.e. you are running the
ASTRO-TAC RSS and are physically connected to a Quantar Base Station).
In this case, check to see that you are physically connected to the
proper device type and try again.
2. The RSS is sending commands that are not understood by the connected
device. With the addition of new firmware features, the RSS adds
functionality to support them. Older firmware that does not include
these new features will not understand the new commands. In this case
the only way to get this functionality is to upgrade your firmware.
COMPUTER SERIAL PORT CONFIGURATION HELP
SERIAL PORT:
The SERIAL PORT field indicates which Serial Port on the PC that the
Connected Device should be connected to. The four choices COM1,
COM2, COM3 and COM4 are selected by use of the Up/Dn arrow keys. Once
the choice is made, press the COMM TEST button to check the
communications with the device. Once satisfied, press SAVE to
save this setting to the PC.
The default is COM1.
NOTE: The user must be certain that no other peripheral devices (i.e.,
mouse, modem, etc.) are currently using the desired Serial Port.
If another device is using the desired port, the RSS will not
operate correctly. The solution to the problem usually requires
the user to re configure the hardware interrupt jumpers located on
the modem or mouse interface board. Refer to your Instruction manual
for your mouse or modem for further details.
BAUD RATE:
The BAUD RATE field is the rate of transmission between the Connected Device
and the computer. Baud Rate is expressed in bits-per-second (bps). The
choices 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 AND 19200 are selected by use of the
Up/Dn arrow keys.
NOTE: The Quantar/Quantro station and ASTRO-TAC 3000 Comparator do not
currently support any baud rate other than 9600 baud.
The default and recommended setting is 9600 bps.
MOSCAD RESPONSE TIME MULTIPLIER:
The MOSCAD RESPONSE TIME MULTIPLIER is used to increase the time RSS waits
for a reply from the connected device. The normal response wait time is
multiplied by this number to allow for longer response delays. Longer
response delays will be encountered when the device to RSS link is
implemented using a MOSCAD remote connection.
The default value for the MOSCAD RESPONSE TIME MULTIPLIER is 1.
NOTE: The user should not change the value of the MOSCAD RESPONSE TIME
MULTIPLIER from the default value unless the RSS is connected remotely
to a device through a link provided by the MOSCAD system.
Button Descriptions:
Help - Displays this Help screen.
COMM TEST. - Quick check of connection between PC and device.
SAVE Port - Configuration to disk file.
RESET - Serial Port defaults.
COMM TEST:
Comm test executes a test of the serial communications between the PC and
the device by sending commands to the device and checking for proper
response. An OK response will be displayed in the Status Window if the
system checks OK.
After the computer and the device are connected per the manual, turn the
station on and execute COMM TEST by pressing the button. If the communication
test fails, select COM2 and repeat COMM TEST. If the test fails again, repeat
with COM3. If it fails yet again, repeat the test with COM4.
If all four tries have failed, recheck your system connections.
SAVE CONFIG:
Save the configuration of the RSS to a file. This button will save the
current port settings for the RSS to use the next time the program is
entered.
RESET DEFAULTS:
Reset serial port configuration to default values.
The settings previously saved to disk will be unchanged.
FILE MAINTENANCE HELP
File Maintenance functions allow the user to create new archive directories,
delete codeplug files from the current archive directory, and restore a
backup copy of the current archive directory contents to the current
archive.
Button Descriptions:
Help - Recalls this Help Screen.
F4 - Create new Directory.
F6 - Delete File from current directory.
F7 - Restore Entire backup archive directory.
PRINT CODEPLUG HELP
This screen will print out the current codeplug parameters which are modifiable by a user. Follow the directions as noted on the screen. If problems in printing occur, check your printer setup.
PRINT CODEPLUG TO PRINTER HELP
This screen will print out the current codeplug parameters which are modifiable by a user. The codeplug will be printed to a printer. Follow the directions as noted on the screen. If problems in printing occur, check your printer setup.
PRINT CODEPLUG SUMMARY HELP
Button Descriptions:
Help - Displays this screen.
F2 - Prints the Codeplug Summary to a Printer
F3 - Prints the Codeplug Summary to a File on Disk
A summary of all codeplug data will be printed to either the printer
or a disk file.
READ/SAVE CODEPLUG HELP
Button Descriptions:
Help - Displays this screen.
F2 - READ Data from Connected Device's Codeplug into the
RSS program's memory.
F3 - GET Codeplug Data from Archive Disk File.
F5 - MERGE WildCard Data from Archive Disk File into Codeplug
in memory. This will overwrite any wildcard tables already
existing in memory. (Not applicable for ASTRO-TAC 3000
Comparator Codeplugs.)
F6 - Program firmware into station. Send executable images to
different hardware components in the station. (Not applicable
for ASTRO-TAC 3000 Comparators.)
F7 - SAVE codeplug Data to Archive Disk File. This will
overwrite the PC file if it already exists.
F8 - PROGRAM Data into Connected Device's Codeplug.
On F2 - READ from device and F8 PROGRAM to device the RSS will check the
device's EEPROM and determine whether or not it needs to be conditioned.
If it needs conditioning, the RSS will prompt you.
Below is the help text for conditioning:
========================================
The process of additional conditioning is an enhanced version of conditioning
and must be performed.
Memory EEPROM IC (51-84293T01/T02/T03/T04) used in Quantar/Quantro/Data Base
Stations has been found susceptible to memory corruption in unused portions
of its memory. (The EEPROM IC is used to store codeplug data, alignment info,
and other operation parameters for the station.)
When EEPROM memory is corrupted and the station experiences a reset, the
overall memory IC checksum no longer is its expected value. This will
result in the station "Control Fail" red LED lighting, and the station
will not be operational. Only RSS communications will be possible.
The RSS attempts to correct this problem by conditioning the EEPROM.
Conditioning writes a specific pattern to the unused portion of the
EEPROM IC to prevent the memory corruption from occurring.
Whenever the user attempts to read or write codeplug data to or from the
station, the RSS checks the EEPROM to see if the EEPROM has been
conditioned. If it has NOT been conditioned, the RSS will present the user
with a screen explaining that the EEPROM needs conditioning.
The user should attempt to condition the EEPROM at this point.
In most cases, conditioning of the EEPROM will take less than 10 minutes.
The station will be access disabled during that time.
NOTE: It is important that there is a current archive of the station's
codeplug before continuing with the conditioning procedure!
Not having an archive of the codeplug would result in the user
having to manually re-enter all the customer codeplug data in the
event of a problem occurring while performing the conditioning.
The EEPROM conditioning only needs to be done once. After the EEPROM has
been conditioned, the RSS will no longer present the conditioning screen
to the user.
NOTE: When upgrading a station to newer version firmware and codeplug,
the RSS may inform the user that the codeplug needs to be
conditioned again, even though it had been previously
conditioned. This is normal and is required to condition any
new codeplug data sections added during the upgrade.
The station EEPROM may only be conditioned when the RSS is connected to the
RS-232 port on the front of the station. If the RSS is connected to the
rear port of the station, conditioning will not be attempted.
IMPORTANT: It is recommended that conditioning NOT be done via modem
connection. Phone lines can be unreliable and could cause a failure in
the conditioning process. If the conditioning process is interrupted,
it will fail and could result in a non-functional station! (See "IF
CONDITIONING FAILS", below.)
SPECIAL NOTE FOR INTELLIREPEATER STATIONS:
=========================================
Conditioning MUST be done at the site and for each individual station!
Conditioning is only done to the EEPROM of the station connected to the
RSS PC. Conditioning is not cross-loaded to other Ethernet connected
stations in the system. Care must be taken to condition the EEPROMs of
each of the stations in the system.
IntelliRepeater stations must be put into "RSS_only" mode while the EEPROM
is being conditioned. "RSS_only" mode means that the station will only
communicate with the RSS. No normal station operations are allowed.
To place the IntelliRepeater into "RSS_only" mode:
1. Reset the Station by pressing the Volume UP, Volume Down and
Intercom buttons (the top two and the bottom buttons) on the
front panel simultaneously.
2. At the point in the reset sequence when the bottom two Station
Control LEDs are the only ones lit, press and hold the Volume
Down and CSQ-PL-OFF buttons (the middle two buttons) on the front
panel of the station simultaneously.
3. Continue to hold these down until 15 seconds after the "Control
Fail" and the "PA Fail" red LEDs are both lit.
4. If these LEDs do not remain lit, repeat steps 1-3.
5. When these LEDs remain lit, you are ready to condition the
EEPROM.
6. After successfully conditioning the EEPROM, you must reset the
station again to exit "RSS_only" mode and return to normal
operation.
IF CONDITIONING FAILS (the RSS will inform the user if a failure occurs):
=========================================================================
Reset the station.
If the station comes up "green", the failure occurred during the reading
of the EEPROM and the only step needed is to retry the conditioning when
the RSS requests it.
If the station does not come up "green" after a reset, the user will have
to do all the steps needed for installing a new station: write the archived
codeplug out to the station, attempt conditioning again and, if successful,
re-align the station.
If unable to restore the station to normal operation by repeating these
steps, contact the Motorola Support Center at 1-800-221-7144,
(International) 1-847-576-7300, FAX 1-847-576-2172.
(End of EEPROM Conditioning Help)
==================================
On either the GET Codeplug Data from File or the SAVE Codeplug Data To
File screens, the first field displays the currently selected directory.
Drive names may be included.
The second field consists of the file name. It may be entered in one of two
fashions. The first is to directly enter in the filename. The second is to
navigate through the files using the following keys:
PgUp/PgDn: Display more files if all of the directory's files can not fit
on one page.
Up/Dn Arrow: These keys will move cursor up or down to the next file.
Tab: Moves cursor to filename in the same row in the next column.
If cursor is in last column the cursor will move to the last
filename.
ShiftTab: Moves cursor to filename in the same row in the previous
column. If cursor is in first column on first page then cursor
will move up to the directory pathname field so that a new
directory pathname may be entered.
Enter: Will read or save using the filename that is displayed on the
'Enter Filename' line.
CHANGE VIEW CODEPLUG HELP
This section allows the user to view and change station operating
parameters. For DSS-III and Quantar Data Base Stations, only
F1, F4 (Channel Information), and F10 are available.
Button Descriptions:
Help - Recalls this Help Screen.
F2 - Changing and viewing of the Wireline, Secure option, and
Remote Control configurations. (Required at Station Install)
F3 - Changing and viewing of the PL, DPL and ASTRO code table.
(Required at Station Install)
F4 - Changing and viewing channel information.
(Required at Station Install)
F5 - Changing and viewing the TRC Command Table or the DC Remote
Command Table depending on the Remote Control Type.
(Required at Station Install)
F6 - Changing and viewing the RF Configuration Parameters.
(Required at Station Install)
F7 - Changing and viewing the 6809 Trunking Parameters.
(Required at Station Install)
F9 - Brings up the menu for changing/viewing the WildCard Tables.
DIAGNOSTICS HELP
The Diagnostics screens allow the Service Technician to select which
diagnostics tests are to be run on the station, and when these tests
should be executed. The technician may select any or all of the tests
to be run at station power up (Cold Start), Station reset (Warm Start)
or on demand (Run Diagnostics Now).
Note: DSS-III Data Stations early versions will not execute the Cold
and Warm Start diagnostic tests if selected, and will indicate this
fact by means of the RSS displaying a warning message on entry to the
Diagnostic Menu.
Button Descriptions:
Help - Recalls this Help Screen.
F2 - Station Control Module Diagnostic tests.
F3 - Wireline Module Diagnostic tests.
(Not available for DSS-III or Quantar Data Base Stations)
F4 - Exciter Module Diagnostic tests.
F5 - RF Power Amplifier (PA) Diagnostic tests.
F6 - Receiver Module Diagnostic tests. A pop-up window will appear
to allow the selection of Receiver 1 or Receiver 2 diagnostic
screens.
F7 - Power Supply Diagnostic tests.
F8 - UHSO Diagnostic tests.
SETUP COMPUTER CONFIGURATION MENU HELP
These functions are used to configure your RSS to your particular
application and computer environment.
Button Descriptions:
Help - Recalls this Help Screen.
F3 - SERIAL PORT CONFIGURATION is used to select the Asynchronous
Communications Port (COM 1,COM 2,COM 3,COM 4) to be used for
Programming purposes.
F4 - MODEM CONFIGURATION is used to configure the interface between
the PC and the MODEM to use RSS remotely via a telephone link.
F6 - Changes the password on a password protected Connected Device.
Also allows the user to set and disable password protection.
F7 - SCREEN COLOR CONFIGURATION is used to enable the Color display.
F9 - The REMOTE DIAL-UP facility is used to establish a connection
to a remote device over a telephone link via modem.
MAIN MENU HELP
The MAIN Menu is the top level of the program from which you select
the type of function that you wish to perform. All selections are
made via the "buttons", labeled F1 through F10 on your keyboard.
After making a selection, you will be directed to similar menus
and/or data entry screens for codeplug data.
Button Descriptions:
F1 - Additional information is available for every menu via the F1(HELP)
key. Specific help is also available for each field on all data
entry screens. Keyboard help is available within any HELP screen via
the F2 key. Version and RVN numbers for this version are available
via the F9 key. Additionally, the current codeplug size may be cal-
culated by pressing the F5 key.
F2 - SERVICE: This section allows the user to check the Hardware config-
uration and Align a new Device. It also allows for viewing
Status messages, running Diagnostic Tests, viewing the Status
Panel, and saving and restoring the current Alignment.
F3 - READ/SAVE Codeplug Data routine gives the user the capability
to retrieve data for modification. After modifying the data
the user can program the information into the connected device
or save it to disk for future reference.
F4 - CHANGE/VIEW Codeplug Data function allows the user to modify all
editable information in the codeplug.
F5 - PRINT Codeplug Data function allows the user to print a copy of
the codeplug information or save it to a file.
F6 - FILE MAINTENANCE gives the user the capability of performing certain
operations with directories and files (i.e. creating directories).
All of the capabilities offered by the RSS under this menu can be
carried out by executing one or more DOS commands.
F9 - SETUP COMPUTER CONFIGURATION is used to configure your RSS Software
to your particular application. Communication ports, screen colors,
modem settings, password settings, and remote phone numbers may be
customized to your specific needs.
F10 - Select EXIT to quit the program and return to DOS. Be sure all
desired codeplug changes have been programmed back into the connected
device and that an archive copy has been made. Otherwise all changes
will be lost since returning to DOS erases this data from the computer's
memory.
SERVICE MENU HELP
This section allows the user to check the Hardware Configuration and
Align a new Connected Device. It also allows for viewing Status Messages,
running Diagnostic Tests, viewing the Status Panel, and saving and
restoring the current Alignment.
Button Descriptions:
Help - Recalls this Help Screen.
F2 - Allows viewing and modification to the Hardware Configuration.
F3 - The Alignment function prompts the user with a list of allowed
adjustments. Install/Maintenance alignments must be executed
for any new installation. Maintenance alignments may be done
any time after installation. User access will only be allowed
to alignments existing on the device currently communicating
with the PC. For Base Stations, the station should also be
access disabled before attempting any alignments to prevent
any inadvertent keyups.
F4 - The Status Report function reports to the user any diagnostic
test failure that occurred during startup, reset, diagnostics,
or normal operation.
F5 - The Diagnostics function allows the user to select which
diagnostic tests are to be run upon device start up, reset,
or when requested by the service technician. It also allows the
technician to determine which test failures will cause the
device to automatically reset. (Not applicable for ASTRO-TAC
3000 Comparators).
F6 - The Status Panel/Software Version/Set Date and Time function
brings up a menu that allows the user to monitor and/or modify
current operating parameters.
F8 - Upgrade Codeplug Version. Allows the user to upgrade the current
codeplug version to the latest version known to the RSS.
(Only to be done as part of a firmware upgrade procedure).
F9 - The Digital Metering function brings up a menu that contains a
variety of selections which allow the user to monitor device
operation at internal, predefined measurement points of the
device hardware. The computer running the RSS must be connected
to the device under test to enter any of the Metering screens.
(Not applicable for ASTRO-TAC 3000 Comparators).
SERVICE:ALIGNMENT HELP
The ALIGNMENT section enables the user to handle both new installations
and maintenance of existing Stations. Note that the Install/Maintenance
alignments must be executed for any new installations. Maintenance
alignments can be done any time after installation. To execute any
alignments, the RSS MUST be connected to the Station to be aligned.
Move the highlight bar to the desired alignment by pressing the Enter or
Up/Down arrow keys or the Tab/Shift-Tab keys. Then press F2 to select the
highlighted alignment.
NOTE: A Station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any
alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may occur
due to normal station activity.
Note: When change has been made to the SIMULCAST field on the station
configuration screen, a Reference Modulation Compensation alignment
should be performed.
Station Power output is reduced from the programmed value for the station
to half power for all stations with rated power less than 150 W. For
higher power stations, power output is reduced to 100 W. This is true
for all alignments, with the exception of the Power Out Alignment, which
is performed at full power.
Please note that the Preselector Install/Maintenance step is band
dependent, and is covered in the Service Manual. No RSS operations
are required to align the Preselector.
General Alignment Notes
-----------------------
During alignment, the station changes the level of a particular
parameter being aligned to reflect the new value entered by the service
technician. This mechanism is used so that the technician can visually
observe the changes that are being made through some type of external
measurement. Thus the technician can determine whether the parameter
being aligned has reached target or not. When the target value is reached,
the technician normally saves the new value for future station operation.
If the technician was changing the level of the parameter just to explore
possibilities without intention of actually saving the altered value, the
technician will use the same RSS screen and procedure as would be done
for an actual alignment. The intention here is for the technician to
leave the station in the same state as before the exploratory test was
begun. If the alignment screen is exited without saving the new parameter
value, the station is left with the parameter in the changed mode. In
order to restore the parameter and station to its normal mode, the station
must be reset.
Button Descriptions:
Help - Recalls this Help Screen.
F2 - Perform Alignment. Enters the alignment procedure screen
that the cursor is currently on.
F3 - UHSO Enable (Override UHSO warm-up timer. Key is only
displayed if frequency reference is set to INTERNAL -
HIGH STABILITY).
F4 - Access Disables the station (prevents keyups and normal station
operations). The RSS must be connected to the station for this
key to function.
F5 - Reset Station. Allows the user to manually reset the station
to which the RSS is currently connected.
F6 - Access Enables the station (restores the station to normal
operation). The RSS must be connected to the station for this
key to function.
The UHSO ENABLE button is used to override the 7.5 minute
UHSO warm-up period. This may be used to assist in aligning the station.
This override should only be used if the user is certain that the UHSO
is already warm, and will not cause the station to transmit off frequency.
This will be the case if the station was momentarily power cycled after
the UHSO was already active and locked.
ZONE CONTROLLER PARITY HELP
The Zone controller link parity field is used to determine the how to proceed with the auto-protocol sequence with the Zone Controller Link. The Zone Controller link is connected to the back port of the IntelliRepeater 3.0/3.5/4.1 station. There are two choices for the Zone Controller link parity choice list: ODD and NONE. The default is ODD parity. Setting the parity choice to NONE allows the back port to be used for communication to the Zone Controller on various baud rates, as well as for RSS use, specifically to use it for remote software downloads. Setting the parity choice to ODD will allow the back port to be used only for communication to the Zone Controller on various baud rates. The ability to use the back port for RSS use is removed.
SERVICE:ALIGNMENT HELP
The ALIGNMENT section enables the user to handle both new installations
and maintenance of existing Comparators. Note that the Install/Maintenance
alignments must be executed for any new installations. Maintenance
alignments can be done anytime after installation. To execute any
alignments, the RSS MUST be connected to the Comparator to be aligned.
Move the highlight bar to the desired alignment by pressing the Enter or
Up/Down arrow keys or the Tab/Shift-Tab keys. Then press F2 to select the
highlighted alignment.
During alignment, the comparator changes the level of a particular
parameter being aligned to reflect the new value entered by the service
technician. This mechanism is used so that the technician can visually
observe the changes that are being made through some type of external
measurement. Thus the technician can determine whether the parameter
being aligned has reached target or not.
Button Descriptions:
Help - Recalls this Help Screen.
F2 - Perform Alignment. Enters the alignment procedure screen
that the cursor is currently on.
F5 - Reset Comparator. Allows the user to manually reset the
comparator to which the RSS is currently connected.
SERVICE:ALIGNMENT:PRESELECTOR HELP
The Preselector Install/Maintenance step is band dependent. No RSS
operations are required to align the Preselector.
Following are the Tuning Procedures for the UHF and VHF preselectors.
Please refer to the Quantar Service Manual for more details.
UHF PRESELECTOR TUNING PROCEDURE:
Required Test Equipment:
1) RF Signal Generator - Motorola R2600 Communications Analyzer,
R2001 Communications Analyzer, or HP8656A Signal Generator
(or equivalent).
2) Dip/Peak Monitor - HP435B Power Meter (or equivalent) with HP8484A
sensitive power head, Boonton Model 92E with BNC input, or
R2001/R2600 using the spectrum analyzer function.
3) Torque driver capable of delivering 6 in-lbs of torque and 10 mm
deep well socket.
4) Tuning Probe 01-90763D22, part of TRN5525A Tuning Kit.
5) Flat-blade screwdriver.
Procedure:
1) Loosen torque nuts.
2) Turn L3, L4 tuning screws clockwise until they bottom out.
3) Set the signal generator on the tune-up frequency (see below) and connect
to the preselector input. Set level for no more than +5 dBm.
4) Preselector output may be terminated in a 50 Ohm load, or in a powered
up module.
5) Insert tuning probe into U2 and tune L2 out for a PEAK.
6) Tighten torque nut on L2 and fine tune for a PEAK.
7) Tune L3 out for a DIP. Tighten torque nut on L3 and fine tune for a DIP.
8) Move tuning probe to U3.
9) Tune L4 for a DIP. Tighten torque nut on L4 and fine tune for a DIP.
To determine the UHF Tune Up frequency:
1) Locate the midpoint of the customer frequency range:
freq(mid) = ( freq(highest) + freq(lowest) ) / 2
2) For Range 1, If freq(mid) < 405 Then freq(tune) = 405
If freq(mid) > 431 Then freq(tune) = 431
Else freq(tune) = freq(mid).
3) For Range 2, If freq(mid) < 440 Then freq(tune) = 440
If freq(mid) > 468 Then freq(tune) = 468
Else freq(tune) = freq(mid).
VHF PRESELECTOR TUNING PROCEDURE:
Required Test Equipment:
1) RF Signal Generator - Motorola R2600 Communications Analyzer,
R2001 Communications Analyzer, or HP8656A Signal Generator
(or equivalent).
2) Dip/Peak Monitor - HP435B Power Meter (or equivalent) with HP8484A
sensitive power head, Boonton Model 92E with BNC input, or
R2001/R2600 using the spectrum analyzer function.
3) Torque driver capable of delivering 6 in-lbs of torque and 10 mm
deep well socket.
4) Tuning Probe 01-90763D22, part of TRN5525A Tuning Kit.
5) Flat-blade screwdriver.
Tuning Procedure:
Use one of the following two methods to calculate the alignment frequen-
cy to be generated by the signal generator.
For stations with a SINGLE RECEIVE FREQUENCY, calculate the frequency of
the alignment signal as follows:
1) From the site documentation or the RSS, determine the station receive
frequency.
2) If the frequency is less than or equal to 148 MHz (Range 1), or
less than or equal to 156 MHz (Range 2), subtract 250 KHz. Otherwise, note
the actual frequency.
Example: If the station receive frequency is 134.575 MHz, subtract
250 KHz since frequency is less than 143 MHz.
134.575 MHz - 250 KHz = 134.325 MHz
3) If Receiver Module is Range 1, determine the alignment frequency as
follows:
If frequency (from step 2) is less than 134 MHz, then alignment fre-
quency = 133.75 MHz.
If frequency (from step 2) is greater than 152 MHz, then alignment
frequency = 152 MHz.
Otherwise, use actual frequency from step 2.
4) If Receiver Module is Range 2, determine the alignment frequency as
follows:
If frequency (from step 2) is less than 152 MHz, then alignment fre-
quency = 151.75 MHz.
If frequency (from step 2) is greater than 172 MHz, then alignment
frequency = 172 MHz.
Otherwise, use actual frequency from step 2.
For stations with MULTIPLE RECEIVE FREQUENCIES, calculate the frequency
of the alignment signal as follows:
1) From the site documentation or the RSS, note the receive frequency for
each channel supported by the station.
2) Calculate a midpoint frequency as follows:
F(mid) = ( F(highest) + F(lowest) ) / 2
3) Using F(mid) in place of the station receive frequency, perform
Step 2 through Step 4 above.
Preparing Equipment:
1) Make sure Receiver Module (with Preselector Assembly) is installed
in a functional station cage equipped with a Power Supply Module.
2) Remove the two Torx-head screws from the Receiver Module front panel
and remove the panel.
3) Detune the preselector as follows:
If the alignment frequency (calculated above) is greater than 148 MHz
(Range 1) or 156 MHz (Range 2), turn the five tuning screws in (CW) until
1/8 inch protrudes past each of the tension nuts. If the alignment fre-
quency is less than or equal to 148 MHz (Range 1) OR 156 MHZ (RANGE 2),
BACK OUT (CCW) the five tuning screws until 3/4 inch protrudes past each
of the tension nuts.
4) Using the torque driver and deep well socket, tighten the five tension
nuts on the adjustment screws to 6 in-lbs.
5) Connect the test equipment as shown in the Service Manual.
Tuning Procedure:
1) Turn the station power supply ON (to provide the active 50 Ohm
termination).
2) Adjust the signal generator to the frequency calculated from the
procedure above. Set the level to +5 dBm.
3) Insert tuning probe into cavity H1 and adjust tuning screw 1 for
a PEAK.
4) Leave tuning probe in cavity H1 and adjust tuning screw 2 for a DIP.
5) Insert tuning probe into cavity H2 and adjust tuning screw 3 for a DIP.
6) Insert tuning probe into cavity H3 and adjust tuning screw 4 for a DIP.
7) Insert tuning probe into cavity H4. Change the level from the signal
generator to -5 dBm.
8) Adjust tuning screw 5 for a DIP. Then turn tuning screw 5 1/4 turn
CCW. (Note that dip will not be as sharp as for screw 5 as it was for
screws 2 through 4).
SERVICE:ALIGNMENT:RX WIRELINE HELP
NOTE: The station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may occur due to normal station activity. The Rx Wireline alignment screen is used to adjust the Rx Wireline level for both voting and non-voting systems. (Examples of voting systems are Spectra-TAC, DIGI-TAC, and ASTRO-TAC). Use this screen to adjust the Rx Wireline Level at 1 kHz, the Spectra-TAC Hi and Lo Boost levels, and the Status Tone Level. For each of the four levels, enter the desired level followed by enter to send the level to the station. After pressing the enter key press the appropriate "Tone on" button (either 1 KHZ, LO Boost, HI Boost or Status Tone Level) to re-align the wireline output for that frequency. The Save button may be pressed after each individual adjustment, or may be pressed once after all adjustments are made, prior to leaving the screen. While performing Rx Wireline Equalization, make sure that the station is not receiving any signal on its receive input port. If a signal is received, it will be mixed in with the test tones that are generated to the wireline, and it will cause the technician to incorrectly set up the equalization filters in the station. The Save button may be pressed after each individual adjustment, or may be pressed once after all adjustments are made, prior to leaving the screen. The technician may consider disconnecting the receive antenna cable to make sure that nothing is being received at the station. NOTE: The PC running the RSS MUST currently be connected to the station to be aligned to enter the Rx Wireline adjust screen. If Spectra-TAC Status Tone is enabled, the Status Tone will become active after either the "Tone Off" button is pressed, or the screen is exited. NOTE: For IntelliRepeater systems, the Status Tone level needs to be aligned. Status Tone is used as a diagnostic tool to verify that the wireline links are established. Refer to the RSS Manual, the RX Wireline Alignment Procedure for details. For Hybrid Links, Status Tone is used as the Analog Link Monitor Tone (ALMT).
SERVICE:ALIGNMENT:RX WIRELINE HELP
NOTE: The station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may occur due to normal station activity. The Rx Wireline alignment screen is used to adjust the Rx Wireline level for both voting and non-voting systems. (Examples of voting systems are Spectra-TAC, DIGI-TAC, and ASTRO-TAC). Use this screen to adjust the Rx Wireline Level at 1 kHz, the Spectra-TAC Hi and Lo Boost levels, and the Status Tone Level. The technician may consider disconnecting the receive antenna cable to make sure that nothing is being received at the station. The Save button may be pressed after each individual adjustment, or may be pressed once after all adjustments are made, prior to leaving the screen. NOTE: The PC running the RSS MUST currently be connected to the station to be aligned to enter the Rx Wireline adjust screen.
RX WIRELINE LEVEL (1 kHz) HELP
Enter the desired Rx Wireline level in the field shown on the screen.
This level represents the level at which a signal received at 60% full
system deviation is transmitted on the Rx wireline.
The valid range is -20.0 to +0.0 dBm.
Press the 1 kHz Tone On button
to generate a 1 kHz tone on the Rx wireline simulating the
reception of a signal at 60% full system deviation. Pressing the ENTER key
sends this setting to the station and the wireline level is changed to match
the level specified in this field.
The level of the 1 kHz tone corresponds to 60% system deviation (i.e.
3 kHz in a 5 kHz system). Enter the desired dBm level into the field.
Note that at full system deviation the line level would be 4.4 dB higher
than this level (Therefore, if the maximum allowable line level is 0 dBm,
enter a number at least 4.4 dB lower, such as -5 dBm).
press OK to permanently save this value in the station.
Station software release 13 and later accept a decimal value for the
wireline level. The wireline level can be set in tenths of dBm.
Station software release 12 and earlier accept only integer values for the
wireline level. The wireline level can only be set in integer of dBm even
though the RSS accepts decimal values; the station will truncate the value.
NOTE: The station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any
alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may occur
due to normal station activity.
NOTE: For Analog Idle Link Check option enabled, in order to verify
alignment settings the following steps should be executed.
For a Conventional/6809 configuration, there are two ways of alignment
and verification of alignment settings of a Wireline Line 2 (WL RX):
1) During an alignment and verification analog link is established (it can be
done by applying loop back on Line 1 and Line 2). Be aware that measuring
device may introduce additional load for WL RX output, thus resulting in
higher signal levels after disconnecting the measuring device.
2) During the alignment analog link is failed (no loop back on Line 1 and
Line 2). However, in order to verify alignment settings analog link has to
be established. Measurements will show signal levels approximately 3.6 dBm
lower than levels set during alignment. This is caused by Wireline Line 1
(WL TX) input load.
For an IntelliRepeater (IR) configuration, in order to verify alignment settings
connect a signal source e.g. R2600 Analyzer, to the receive input of IR station.
Use a subscriber to initiate a call on the IR station of interest. The subscriber
audio should be observed on Line 2 of the station. Start generating RF signal
using the RX frequency and a connect tone of a tested IR station. Dekey the
subscriber. Now IR station is receiving signal from RF signal generator. Verify
that a 1kHz tone level on Wireline Line 2 is the same as set during the station
alignment.
SPECTRA-TAC Comparator wireline Equalization
When installing a Spectra-TAC system, the phone line which connects the
receiver to the comparator should be equalized for best voting performance.
Since the receiver and comparator are normally at two different sites, two
technicians are required to perform equalization. To equalize the phone
line, the LO BOOST and HI BOOST parameters need to be set to provide a flat
frequency response across the audio spectrum.
To calculate the levels for LO and HI BOOST, first measure the phone line
levels at the comparator at each of the three frequencies by generating each
of the three different tones at the receiver, 1 kHz, LO BOOST tone and the
HI BOOST tone. The level for each frequency is noted. Using the 1 kHz tone
as the reference, calculate the offset required to bring the LO BOOST and
HI BOOST levels to the same level as the 1 kHz tone. Enter the offset in the
RSS fields.
The HI BOOST tone frequency may be changed from the default level. The user
also has the freedom to set other than a flat line equalization and
adjust the LO BOOST and HI BOOST tones levels as desired.
Press the 1 kHz Tone On button to turn on the 1 kHz tone and measure
the level at the comparator. Pressing again (Tone Off) may
be used to turn off the 1 kHz tone when the measurement is completed.
Press the LO Boost Tone On button to turn on the 400 Hz tone and measure
the level at the comparator. Pressing again (Tone Off) may
be used to turn off the 400 Hz tone when the measurement is completed.
Press the HI Boost Tone On button to turn on the 2500 Hz tone and measure
the level at the comparator. Pressing again (Tone Off) may
be used to turn off the 2500 Hz tone when the measurement is completed.
If Spectra-TAC Status Tone is enabled, the Status Tone will become
active after either the "Tone Off" button is pressed, or the screen
is exited.
NOTE: For IntelliRepeater systems, the Status Tone level needs to be
aligned. Status Tone is used as a diagnostic tool to verify that the
wireline links are established. Refer to the RSS Manual, the RX
Wireline Alignment Procedure for details. For Hybrid Links, Status Tone
is used as the Analog Link Monitor Tone (ALMT).
LO BOOST ADJUST LEVEL HELP
During alignment the level of the boost tones are expressed in dB relative to the level of the 1kHz receive wireline test tone (independent of the status tone level setting). The dB steps are most accurate for a high boost frequency of 2500 Hz. NOTE: The station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may occur due to normal station activity. Low frequency boost adjustment is optional and has no effect on voting performance (it affects only low frequency "fidelity"). It is recommended that the HI Boost Adjust be done BEFORE the Lo Boost Adjustment. A LO Boost tone (400 Hz tone) is generated on the Rx Wireline. Measure the tone level at the comparator to determine if an adjustment is desired. If adjustment is desired, enter the new low boost value in dB (relative to the 1 kHz level) and press ENTER and click on "Tone On" button to re- align the station for this frequency level. For example, if the 1 kHz tone is measured as -16 dBm and the 400 Hz tone is measured as -18.3 dBm, then enter 2.3 dB in the LO BOOST field. Continue adjustment until the 400 Hz tone level measured at the comparator is equal to the level recorded at the comparator for the 1 kHz tone. press OK to save this value in the station. If Spectra-TAC Status Tone is enabled, the Status Tone will become active after either the "Tone Off" button is pressed, or the screen is exited. NOTE: For IntelliRepeater systems, the Status Tone level needs to be aligned. Status Tone is used as a diagnostic tool to verify that the wireline links are established. Refer to the RSS Manual, the RX Wireline Alignment Procedure for details. For Hybrid Links, Status Tone is used as the Analog Link Monitor Tone (ALMT).
HI BOOST ADJUST LEVEL HELP
The level of the boost tones is expressed in dB relative to the level of the 1 kHz receive wireline test tone (independent of the status tone level setting). The dB steps are most accurate for a high boost frequency of 2500 Hz. At other boost frequencies the level of the alignment tone will vary according to the shape of the boost band-pass filter, so the number will not accurately represent dB. For this reason, at frequencies other than 2500 Hz the "HI Boost Adjust Level" should be viewed as a relative indication only, with zero representing no boost and higher values representing more boost. Once a desired level is obtained, press ENTER and click on "Tone On" button to re-align the station for this frequency level, and then press OK t o save this value in the station. NOTE: When a Quantar or ASTRO-TAC receiver is used in a voting system with MICOR or SPECTRA-TAC receivers, the HI boost value needs to be incremented by 1.5 dB in order to further equalize the Quantar or ASTRO-TAC receiver so that voting across all receivers will be equal. Proceed with the calculations prescribed in the manual for equalizing the phone line, then to whatever HI boost value is calculated, add 1.5 dB. This additional step will make the Quantar or ASTRO-TAC receiver look a MICOR or SPECTRA-TAC receiver. If Spectra-TAC Status Tone is enabled, the Status Tone will become active after either "Tone Off" button is pressed, or the screen is exited. NOTE: For IntelliRepeater systems, the Status Tone level needs to be aligned. Status Tone is used as a diagnostic tool to verify that the wireline links are established. Refer to the RSS Manual, the RX Wireline Alignment Procedure for details. For Hybrid Links, Status Tone is used as the Analog Link Monitor Tone (ALMT).
HI BOOST FREQUENCY HELP
The high boost frequency adjustment may be used as a diagnostic tool to measure phone line response at various frequencies. If the phone line contains a notch or peak at the high boost alignment frequency, the alignment frequency should be changed to one which is more representative of the average level of the phone line response between 2300 and 2800 Hz. Errors will be introduced if not all receivers are aligned at the same high boost frequency (since the boost curves are not flat). If an alignment frequency is required that is more than about 100 Hz from that of any other receiver in the system, then all other receivers should have their high boost adjusted at the new frequency. NOTE: The station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may occur due to normal station activity. The initial recommended frequency is 2500 Hz. Once a desired level is selected, press ENTER followed by and click on "Tone On" button to re-align the station for this frequency level, and then press OK to save this value in the station. If Spectra-TAC Status Tone is enabled, the Status Tone will become active after either "Tone Off" button is pressed, or the screen is exited. NOTE: For IntelliRepeater systems, the Status Tone level needs to be aligned. Status Tone is used as a diagnostic tool to verify that the wireline links are established. Refer to the RSS Manual, the RX Wireline Alignment Procedure for details. For Hybrid Links, Status Tone is used as the Analog Link Monitor Tone (ALMT).
STATUS TONE LEVEL HELP
The status tone level adjustment must be made after Hi Boost is adjusted. It is also done when the system is installed or the HI Boost level is changed or the Status Tone frequency is changed. The level of Status Tone shown in the box is approximately the level of Status Tone at the wireline output relative to full system deviation (i.e. 5 kHz deviation in a 5 kHz system) before boosting (or at 0 dB boost). If HI Boost equalization was able to flatten the end-to-end phone line frequency response, the level shown also represents approximately the level of Status Tone measured at the comparator relative to a 1 kHz tone at full system deviation, and should be close to "13 dB" (in a -13 dB Status Tone system) after performing the following adjustment. Enter the desired status tone level in the appropriate box and press ENTER and click on "Tone On" button to re-align the station for the status tone level. This level is temporary and will not be retained through a station reset. To make this level permanent, press the "SAVE" button. Even though Spectra-TAC Status Tone is enabled, Status Tone will become disabled during the alignment process as other tones are turned on and off. If indeed Status Tone is Enabled, it will become active after either "Tone Off" button is pressed, or the alignment screen is exited. APPLICATION NOTES: 1. For -13 dB Status Tone systems (these are the most common voting system configurations), adjust the Status Tone Level up or down until its level, measured at the comparator, is 8.6 dB lower than the level recorded at the comparator for the 1 kHz tone. This corresponds to -13 dB below a 1 kHz tone at full system deviation. 2. 0 dB Status Tone system operation is not supported in the Quantar, Quantro or Quantar Receiver products. For these systems, be sure that the Signal Quality Module in the Spectra-TAC comparator which is connected to the Quantar, Quantro or Quantar Receiver be issue B or C and that it be jumpered for 13 dB operation. The other Signal Quality Modules can be configured for 0 dB operation. 3. If other voting receivers in the system do not use guard tone notches (such as the Micor Spectra-TAC Satellite Receivers), then the Quantar voting receiver(s) should have their receive wireline guard tone notch disabled (this is the default). If other voting receivers in the system have guard tone notches enabled, then Quantar voting receivers should also have their notches enabled. The GUARD TONE NOTCH field is on the WIRELINE CONFIGURATION screen. 4. For IntelliRepeater systems, the Status Tone needs to be used to properly align the Rx Wireline (if present). Refer to the RSS Manual, the RX Wireline Procedure for details. For analog IntelliRepeater systems, the Status Tone is used to set the tone level of analog monitor tone. 5. For all mixed mode ASTRO systems with hybrid links and Analog Idle Link Check Enabled (on the WIRELINE CONFIGURATION screen), the Status Tone is used to set the level of the analog link maintenance tone. The level setting is expressed in dBm's. It is an absolute level and is not referenced in this case to peak audio level.
RX WIRELINE ALERT TONE LEVEL HELP
The Alert Tone Level field controls the level of the alert tones that are generated whenever anyone of the following alarms occurs: AC failure, PA failure, Tx or RX Synthesizer failure and Battery overvoltage. The level of the alert tones is referenced to peak audio level and can be set from 0 dB to -45 dB, in one tenth dB increments, below peak audio level. Peak audio level is shown on this screen below the Rx Wireline Level. The alarm tones are mixed with voice and also with Status Tone if Status Tone is enabled.
TX WIRELINE HELP
The TX Wireline Alignment screen displayed is dependent on the value of
the Wireline Operation field on the Wireline Configuration Screen.
Procedure:
NOTE: The station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any
alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may occur
due to normal station activity.
Supply a 1 KHz tone at the desired reference level to the station. The
station will accept the incoming signal and will reproduce it at 60% rated
system deviation.
For example, on channels with 5 kHz max deviation, a 1 kHz tone
at 0 dBm on the wireline will result in 3 kHz Tx deviation.
In a 2 or 4 wire station:
Once signal is applied, press "Tx Wireline 1 Calibration" to calibrate the
station to this level.
The Tx Wireline and Wireline Squelch Alignments will be performed.
Wireline Squelch Alignment will still be performed if ALC is Enabled in
the Station's Codeplug.
In a 6 or 8 wire station:
Once signal is applied; for line 1 press "Tx Wireline 1 Calibration" to
calibrate the station to this
level, for line 3 press "Tx Wireline 3 Calibration". The Tx Wireline and
Wireline Squelch
Alignments will be performed. If ALC is enabled on a line and Wireline
Squelch is disabled, there will be a warning stating ALC is enabled on that
line and no attempt should be made to calibrate that line. This is because
the calibration is done automatically and should not be done manually.
For TRC systems, when ALC is ENABLED, the station will use High Level Guard
tone as a reference and will automatically adjust the line level based on
the measured HLGT level. HLGT will be referenced so that a signal going
into the station 6 dB below HLGT will be transmitted at 60% of rated channel
deviation as entered into the RSS.
For non HLGT systems such as ASTRO systems, CIT, etc., a fixed level
reference such as HLGT does not exist. Therefore, the installer will supply
a nominal reference level to the station, such as "-6 dBm". The station,
via the Alignment:TX Wireline screen, will be told to accept the signal
on the wireline and reproduce it at 60% rated system deviation. The station
will adjust the wireline circuitry gain to optimize the level at which the
signal is being used internally.
To help verify the station TX Wireline calibration, stations with
firmware version R3.01 or later support TX Wireline Keyup (KEYUP) and
TX Wireline Dekey (DEKEY). These buttons can be used to keyup and
dekey the station and allow the user to measure the TX Wireline audio
levels under the keyed condition. Older version stations do not support
this feature.
NOTE: Depending on how 'busy' the station is, a communications error may
sometimes be noted on attempting to SAVE the Tx Wireline setting. This
error is not serious and does not indicate a station problem. If this
error is observed, try to Save the value again.
NOTE: The station will accept HLGT levels in the 0 to -35 dBm range. Two
modes of operation are defined: Automatic Line Control (ALC) ENABLED or
DISABLED.
1. If the ALC parameter is set to ENABLED, the operational window for the
HLGT input to the station can vary from 0 to -35 dBm and the station
will stay keyed for as long as the LLGT is detected.
2. If the ALC parameter is set to DISABLED then the operational window for
HLGT and LLGT is limited to a +6/-2 dB range around the alignment level.
For example, if a station is aligned to -16 dBm, the expected level for
HLGT is -10 dBm and the expected level for LLGT is -40 dBm. If the LLGT
level falls 2 dB below the expected level, the station will lose
detection of LLGT and dekey.
RSSI HELP
RSSI alignment is required in all ASTRO systems. Currently it is not used
in non-ASTRO systems. The alignment process requires that a calibrated
signal generator be attached to the station's receiver. The generator is
used to provide the reference RF input level for the calibration.
Stations may be configured with one or two receivers. If a station has two
receivers, then both receivers must be aligned separately. Only
conventional stations are capable of having two receivers. All trunking
stations (both IntelliRepeater and 6809 Trunking), have only one receiver.
NOTE:
1 - The RSSI setting applies to all channels programmed on each
receiver. Since RSSI operation is bandwidth dependent, all the
channels on each receiver must have the same bandwidth.
2 - The station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any
alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may
occur due to normal station activity.
3 - Once alignments are complete, remember to reset the station before
returning it to normal operation.
CALIBRATION PROCESS FOR THE FIRST RECEIVER
1 - If two receivers are present, press the "Select RX1 Channel" button to set the current channel in
the station to a channel with an active Receiver 1, Otherwise proceed
to step 2.
2 - Connect the RF signal generator to the first receiver's input. For
maximum accuracy, keep the RF cables as short as possible.
3 - The RSS provides a default setting of -90 dBm as a point at which to
perform the RSSI alignment. The user is given the option of changing
the alignment point. Set the signal generator to -90 dBm or whatever
other level the user has selected; just make sure that the signal
generator level and the level on the RSS screen match. Also set the
generator to the frequency specified on the RSS screen.
4 - Press the "Start RSSI Calibration" button, this action starts the
calibration process.
A wait message will appear while the station is calibrating. When
completed, 'Calibration Complete' will appear in the status window.
5 - Calibration is complete. The value saved will apply to any channel
which uses Receiver 1.
CALIBRATION PROCESS FOR THE SECOND RECEIVER
(2 Receiver Conventional Stations Only)
1 - Press the "Select RX2 Channel" button to set the current channel in the station to a channel with
an active Receiver 2.
2 - Connect the RF signal generator to the second receiver's input. For
maximum accuracy, keep the RF cables as short as possible.
3 - The RSS provides a default setting of -90 dBm as a point at which to
perform the RSSI alignment. The user is given the option of changing
the alignment point. Set the signal generator to -90 dBm or whatever
other level the user has selected; just make sure that the signal
generator level and the level on the RSS screen match. Also set the
generator to the frequency specified on the RSS screen.
4 - Press the "Start RSSI Calibration" button, this starts the calibration process.
A wait message will appear while the station is calibrating. When
completed, 'Calibration Complete' will appear in the status window.
5 - Calibration is complete. The value saved will apply to any channel
which uses Receiver 2.
REFERENCE OSCILLATOR HELP
NOTE: The station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any
alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may occur
due to normal station activity.
NOTE: You must exit the Reference Oscillator screen with the
station communication still intact or else the gating may no longer
be correct until the station is reset.
NOTE: For ASTRO-TAC Receivers and Quantar Satellite Receivers, a power
amplifier module does not exist, so you will not be able to key and
dekey the station. You can only use method 2 (listed below) to align
these station types.
Station output power is reduced from the programmed value for the station
to half power for all stations with rated power less than 150W. For
higher power stations, power output is reduced to 100 W. This is true
for all alignments, with the exception of the Power Out Alignment, which
is performed at full power.
Alignment procedure for INTERNAL - STANDARD:
The user can align the Internal Standard according to either of the
following procedures.
Method 1:
1) Connect a Communications system analyzer to the transmit output port
of the station. (Make sure proper termination is applied). Set the Comm
analyzer to Monitor mode and enter the station's transmit frequency.
Key up the station by pressing the "KEYUP" button, and measure the transmit
frequency error. The error is typically displayed as a + or - number.
NOTE: The INTERNAL STANDARD reference oscillator is designed to
automatically self-compensate for temperature drifts. When the
compensation occurs, the measured transmit frequency will appear to 'hop'
up or down by as much as 1/2 ppm. For example, a 150 MHz station could
'hop' approximately 75 Hz. It is recommended that after first keying the
station the service technician should wait at least 30 seconds for the
system to stabilize BEFORE adjusting the oscillator from the RSS Alignment
screen. The frequency 'hopping' will not be observable on the alignment
screen bar graph setting.
To fine adjust the frequency, press the Up or Down Arrows to move the
oscillator in individual steps. To coarse adjust the frequency, press the
Page Up or Down keys to move the oscillator in 10 step jumps.
Use the Up/Down Arrows and or the PgUp/Down keys to adjust the INTERNAL
STANDARD reference oscillator until the transmit frequency error is as
small as possible; usually less than 50 Hz. Dekey the station by pressing
the "DEKEY" button, then press OK to store the desired reference oscillator
frequency.
NOTE: This method of alignment will provide a station transmit frequency
which is as accurate as the stability of the Comm analyzer. For example,
if the Comm analyzer is accurate to 1 ppm, then the station will be
accurate to 1 ppm, even though the frequency error was adjusted to zero.
Method 2 (AutoNet feature):
If a stable 5MHz or 10MHz signal is available to the technician then the
station's Auto-Net 5 or Auto-Net 10 feature can be invoked. The technician
should connect the high stability signal to the Reference Input Connector
(this BNC input is located on either the front of the station or on the
back plane of the station), or insert the INTERNAL UHSO into the
appropriate slot.
The technician should then select the appropriate Auto-Net button
("AUTO-NET 5 MHZ" or "AUTO-NET 10 MHZ"). The station will automatically
align the INTERNAL STANDARD to
the input source. The time required to successfully Auto-net depends upon
the frequency error of the INTERNAL STANDARD as compared to the high
stability reference. During the Auto-Netting sequence the CONTROL ON LED
will flash and the receiver and exciter will indicate an OUT OF LOCK
condition. When Auto-netting has been completed the RSS will display an
appropriate message. The technician can then exit from this screen.
NOTE: This netting will take a minimum of 5 minutes to achieve the highest
accuracy possible. Depending how far off the INTERNAL STANDARD is from
the high stability source, the time required for netting could be
significantly greater than this minimum period.
Alignment procedure for EXTERNAL - 5 MHZ or EXTERNAL - 10 MHZ
When the station is configured for an external reference, it is not
necessary to adjust the INTERNAL STANDARD reference. However, if
the station receiver and/or transmitter do not lock with an external
reference present, the technician should follow the alignment procedure
as follows:
The technician should connect the high stability signal to the Reference
Input Connector (this BNC input is located on either the front of the
station or on the back plane of the station). The technician should then
select the appropriate Auto-Net button ("AUTO-NET 5 MHZ" or "AUTO-NET 10 MHZ"
depending upon the
frequency of the reference signal). The station will automatically align
the INTERNAL STANDARD to the input source.
NOTE: The time required to successfully Auto-net depends upon the
frequency error of the INTERNAL STANDARD as compared to the high stability
reference. This netting will take a minimum of 5 minutes to achieve the
highest accuracy possible. Depending how far off the INTERNAL STANDARD
is from the high stability source, the time required for netting could
be significantly greater than this minimum period.
During the Auto-Netting sequence the CONTROL ON LED will flash and the
receiver and exciter will indicate an OUT OF LOCK condition. When
Auto-netting has been completed the RSS will display an appropriate
message.
The technician should then adjust the external high stability reference
according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Buttons "KEYUP" and "DEKEY"
allow the technician to key/dekey the station to measure the transmit
frequency error. Once the external reference has been adjusted, the user
can exit from this screen.
SERVICE:ALIGNMENT:REFERENCE OSCILLATOR HELP
Alignment procedure for INTERNAL - STANDARD:
If a stable 5MHz or 10MHz signal is available to the technician then the
comparator's Auto-Net 5 or Auto-Net 10 feature can be invoked. The technician
should connect the high stability signal to the Reference Input Connector
(this BNC input is located on either the front of the comparator or on the
back plane of the comparator).
The technician should then select the appropriate Auto-Net button
("AUTO-NET 5 MHZ" or "AUTO-NET 10 MHZ"). The comparator will automatically
align the INTERNAL STANDARD
to the input source. The time required to successfully Auto-net depends
upon the frequency error of the INTERNAL STANDARD as compared to the high
stability reference. During the Auto-Netting sequence the CONTROL ON LED
will flash. When Auto-netting has been completed the RSS will display an
appropriate message. The technician can then exit from this screen.
NOTE: This netting will take a minimum of 5 minutes to achieve the highest
accuracy possible. Depending how far off the INTERNAL STANDARD is from
the high stability source, the time required for netting could be
significantly greater than this minimum period.
POWER OUT HELP
NOTE: The station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may occur due to normal station activity. Also, make certain that the station is not currently keyed via the local PTT (station front panel keyup). If the Power Out alignment is attempted with the local PTT active, the station local PTT will have to be removed and the station reset before attempting the Power Out alignment. If the station is being converted from Conventional operation to either IntelliRepeater or 6809 Trunking operation, and an internal wattmeter is present, the station must be Power Output aligned to ensure proper oper- ation. Power Output Alignment Wattmeter Connection: For Quantar stations, the wattmeter must be connected to the PA output which is found on the front of the station. For Quantro stations, the wattmeter must be connected at the output of the Low Pass Filter. Connecting to any other point may result in improper level setting of the PA which in turn will reduce the PA's long term reliability. Connection to the designated point requires disconnecting the existing cable and connecting the wattmeter cable. It is preferred that the cable used to connect to the Wattmeter be of high quality. High loss cables will result in improper level setting for the PA. The DESIRED POWER OUT field initially shows the PA Max Power Level, as selected at the Hardware Configuration screen. The legal range for the DESIRED POWER field varies per Band. For reference, the legal ranges are shown below: QUANTAR/DSS-III STATIONS: (DSS-III not available in VHF) Station Station Displayed Alignment Desired Pwr Desired Pwr Band/Range Pwr Lvl. Field Choice Level Lower Limit Upper Limit ------------------------------------------------------------------------- VHF R1,R2 25 W 25 W 25 W 5 W 30 W VHF R1,R2 125 W 125 W 125 W 20 W 135 W UHF R0 110 W 110 W 110 W 10 W 120 W UHF R1,R2 25 W 25 W 25 W 5 W 30 W UHF R1,R2,R3 110 W 110 W 110 W 20 W 120 W UHF R4 100 W 100 W 100 W 20 W 110 W 800 MHz 20 W 20 W 20 W 5 W 22 W 800 MHz 100 W 100 W 100 W 20 W 110 W 900 MHz 100 W 100 W 100 W 20 W 110 W QUANTRO STATIONS: Station Station Displayed Alignment Desired Pwr Desired Pwr Band/Range Pwr Lvl. Field Choice Level Lower Limit Upper Limit ------------------------------------------------------------------------- VHF R1,R2 350 W 350 W/No Circ 350 W 170 W 375 W UHF R1,2,3,4 6 W 6 W/ 1 Circ 6 W 1 W 7 W UHF R1,2,3,4 4 W 6 W/ 3 Circ 4 W 1 W 5 W UHF R1,2,3,4 40 W 40 W/ 1 Circ 40 W 15 W 45 W UHF R1,2,3,4 31 W 40 W/ 3 Circ 31 W 10 W 35 W UHF R1,2,3,4 100 W 100 W/ 1 Circ 100 W 50 W 110 W UHF R1,2,3,4 80 W 100 W/ 3 Circ 80 W 40 W 85 W UHF R1,2,3,4 110 W 110 W/ 1 Circ 110 W 50 W 120 W UHF R1,2,3,4 80 W 110 W/ 3 Circ 80 W 35 W 90 W UHF R1,2,3,4 225 W 225 W/ 1 Circ 225 W 105 W 245 W UHF R1,2,3,4 170 W 225 W/ 3 Circ 170 W 80 W 185 W 800 QUANTRO 35 W 35 W/ 1 Circ 35 W 15 W 40 W 800 QUANTRO 30 W 35 W/ 3 Circ 30 W 12 W 35 W 800 QUANTRO 75 W 75 W/ 1 Circ 75 W 35 W 85 W 800 QUANTRO 65 W 75 W/ 3 Circ 65 W 30 W 75 W 800 QUANTRO 150 W 150 W/ 1 Circ 150 W 70 W 165 W 800 QUANTRO 130 W 150 W/ 3 Circ 130 W 60 W 140 W 900 QUANTRO 150 W 150 W/ 1 Circ 150 W 70 W 165 W 900 QUANTRO 150 W 150 W/ 3 Circ 130 W 60 W 140 W Quantro Stations are factory built with Single or Triple Circulators. The station's codeplug comes configured for the circulator that was ordered with the station. The presence of the circulator is reflected in the PA Power Rating field description. If circulators are field installed, the user needs to make sure that the description reflects the exact configuration of the station. Improper setting of this field can result in improper operation of the PA which can degrade the reliability of the PA and the user may not be able to perform the power output alignment. The maximum for Actual Power is 999 W (An external Wattmeter will read whatever the actual maximum for this measurement is). NOTE: Stations that have the Limited Power Output option have the upper range limited by that option (or the normal legal limit, whichever is lower). Detailed Procedure: NOTE: The station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may occur due to normal station activity. 1) Connect an external RF Wattmeter to the station Tx port. 2) Press "KEYUP" button to key up the station on the current channel Tx frequency. 3) Observe the Wattmeter display, and enter the observed value into the 'Power Read on Wattmeter' field on the Alignment:Power Out screen. 4) Press "ADJUST" button to adjust the power out of the station. The station has completed the adjustment when the 'Station is keyed' message is again displayed. 5) Check the output power on the wattmeter. If the output power is at the Desired Power Output level, then proceed with step 6. If the station is not at the Desired Power Output level, then go back to step 3. 6) Press OK to Save the Value in the station's non volatile memory. The RSS will display a 'Please Wait...' message while the station is saving the power output value. For High Power Quantro stations, the final adjustment will key the station up and down five times at five different frequencies over the whole band of the station. 7) The RSS will automatically dekey the station when the Alignment screen is exited. 8) Using either the RSS Status Panel or the station's Front Panel, reset the station to activate the updated alignment settings. THE STATION MUST BE RESET IN ORDER FOR THE SAVED PARAMETERS TO BE UTILIZED. NOTE 1: If a PA failure occurred during the adjustment, as indicated by the PA FAIL LED on the front of the station, press the PA INIT button to restore operating parameters. This action will initialize the operating parameters of the PA to a predetermined level. The PA FAIL light will go off assuming that all hardware is good. If the PA INIT function was not able to place the PA in its initial operating state, a possible problem with the hardware exists and the PA fail light will not go off. There are two cases which require special attention: Case 1. There may be the possibility that the PA INIT function will not work. This will be evident to the user when the alignment sequence is attempted and either the correct power output will not be attained or the SAVE function will not complete successfully. If this should happen, exit the alignment screen and reset the station. The station can be reset by pressing the buttons on the front of the station. After the station is reset, reenter the alignment screen and then press the PA INIT button to restore operating parameters. If the alignment still cannot be performed after this sequence, then a hardware malfunction exists. Pursue correction of the hardware before attempting power output alignment. Case 2. There may be the possibility that a misadjusted Reference Modulation alignment interferes with Power Output alignment. The result is that during the SAVE sequence, a PA Fail condition results and an error message will be displayed by the RSS. To correct this situation, first go to the Power Output Alignment screen and press the PA INIT button to restore nominal operating parameters. Exit the screen and then go to the Reference Modulation screen. Perform Reference Modulation alignment and SAVE it. If the PA will not key up properly during this adjustment and a PA FAIL condition results, there's a hardware problem which needs correction. After the Reference Modulation is completed, return to the Power Output Alignment screen and perform Power Output alignment.
SERVICE:ALIGNMENT:ASTRO ALIGNMENT AND TEST HELP
This screen allows you to perform ASTRO Launch Time Offset calibration and allows you to put the station in V.52 transmit mode.
TDATA DEVIATION HELP
NOTE: The station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may occur due to normal station activity. Make certain that the Tx Deviation alignment is done before the TDATA alignment is attempted. Connect the 6809 Central's TDATA output to the Base Stations TDATA input. Place the 6809 Central in a mode such that Low Speed Signaling is being routed on the TDATA line and not control channel signaling. When the station is access disabled, the 6809 Trunking Central will route low speed data to the station via the control cable connected. With an operational 6809 Trunking Central connected, press OK to Calibrate the station's TDATA input gain. This calibration will compensate for any variations in amplitude of the TDATA input. Upon completion, press OK to save value.
ASTRO SIMULCAST ALIGNMENT
============================= NOTE: The station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may occur due to normal station activity. Station Power output is reduced from the programmed value for the station to half power for all stations with rated power less than 150 W. For higher power stations, power output is reduced to 100 W. This is true for all alignments, with the exception of the Power Out Alignment, which is performed at full power. LAUNCH TIME OFFSET CALIBRATION ============================== This time offset permits a finer adjustment of the GPS Simulcast Timed Launch than can be provided by the 20 microseconds granularity of the comparator generated launch timestamp. The Stations at one transmitter site can be given a different offset value than the Stations at other transmitter sites in order to finely skew the synchronization of the launch from each site. The new effect will be to modify the simulcast coverage performance in overlap areas. Launch Time Offset can also be used to compensate for different GPS 1 PPS and transmitter antenna cable lengths and combining delays. The range is: 0 - 975.2 microseconds. ASTRO Simulcast is only applicable to a station operating on a simulcast channel utilizing an ASTRO-TAC simulcast controller/comparator. This alignment is not applicable for a delay-line based simulcast channel such as those employing a Digital Simulcast Modem (DSM) and Universal Simulcast Controller. On ASTRO Simulcast channels, time stamps are attached to the digital information which is to be simulcasted, and these time stamps are used to launch the station transmission in synchronization with the stations on the common channel at the other simulcasting sites. This alignment screen can be used to specify a very fine offset time (60 ns resolution) for the simulcast launch event that can be used to slightly alter the simulcast coverage performance in overlap areas. This fine offset time is added by the station to the coarse launch time (20 microseconds resolution) received from the ASTRO-TAC in order to specify the actual launch event time. Upon entering this screen, the RSS displays the current launch offset time and a field for entering a new DESIRED LAUNCH OFFSET value. After modifying the desired launch offset value, the screen should be exited and the station reset in order to activate the new launch offset. This alignment is not mandatory, since the station will default to a zero-valued offset time. A special simulcast test pattern modulation can also be initiated from this screen and can be used to verify that the station can successfully simulcast launch. To run this test, the station transmitter output should be attached to a communication service monitor, with the recovered modulation wave form viewed on the service monitor display. The service monitor scope should be triggered by the 1 pulse per second (PPS) output from the GPS receiver. If the station is able to properly simulcast, the zero crossing, observed in the recovered modulation, which occurs prior to the consecutive +3 symbol, should be delayed from the scope's trigger point precisely by the current launch offset time value. NOTES: The SIMULCAST TEST TONE PATTERN is not defined by Project 25. It is provided on this screen to perform ASTRO Launch Time Offset Calibration. This pattern is initiated by pressing the "Start Simulcast Pattern" button and is terminated by pressing the "Stop Simulcast Pattern" button or exiting the ASTRO Simulcast Test Pattern screen.
Bit Error Rate Reporting (BER) Help
NOTE: The Station Status value is only valid when entering the screen. The value will not
be updated automatically to reflect any changes to the status performed via the
Station buttons.
The BER Detector reports the Bit Error Rate (BER) for either the
V.52 test pattern or the Project 25 Standard Test Tone Pattern for
the station's receiver. Project 25 uses the V.52 pattern as the Standard
Transmitter Test Pattern and the Standard Interference Test Pattern. A
Receive Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) is displayed along with the BER
information. The RSSI display shows the received signal's absolute
value in dBm and the received signal's level above the receiver's noise
floor in dB. The accuracy depends on the accurate RSSI alignment. The
RSS continuously updates the RSSI and BER values once a second until
terminated by the user. The displayed value represents the average of 5
data samples taken at 200 millisecond intervals. This procedure is
compliant with Telecommunications Industry Association, TIA, Document
IS-102.CAAA which covers the Project 25 BER requirements.
If you receive a popup error stating that a required task has not
responded, it most likely means that you have not set up the test
properly. Exit the report screen and follow the setup procedure in
IS-102.CAAA before re-entering the report screen.
The procedure for running these reports is:
- Apply the desired test signal to the receiver of the station
- Hit the corresponding button to start the BER test
ASTRO TEST Pattern HELP
=========================
NOTE: The station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any
alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may
occur due to normal station activity.
Station Power output is reduced from the programmed value for the
station to half power for all stations with rated power less than 150 W.
For higher power stations, power output is reduced to 100 W. This is
true for all alignments, with the exception of the Power Out Alignment,
which is performed at full power.
NOTE:
1 - Beginning with Release 9.4, the Quantar station provides Project 25
compliant tone generation capability and Bit Error Rate Calculation.
2 - For earlier releases of the station software some of the
capabilities provided with Release 9.4 may have been available but
may have operated in a slightly different manner.
For example:
a. The station might not have to be in the access disable mode to
transmit the test tones defined in Project 25.
b. For a simulcast station, the option of turning on any of the
above test tones via the RSS might not have been available. If
the user attempts to turn any of those tones on on a station
with a release earlier than Release 9.4, this version of RSS
may display that the selected test tone is on but the station
will not be transmitting.
ASTRO TEST PATTERN SELECTION
=======================================
The following test patterns are defined by Project 25 and are initiated
by selecting the appropriate pattern from the list provided by the RSS
and then by pressing the "Start Pattern Transmission" button. Thebutton
legend chnages to "Stop Pattern Transmission" and it is then pressed
tostop the pattern transmission. The patterns are not terminated when
leaving the RSS screen allowing the user to leave the station in a mode
where it is continuously transmission a test pattern. Continuous
transmission of a test pattern is a feature used for coverage analysis.
The test patterns are:
a) V.52 is an industry-standard test pattern that is used to perform bit
error rate (BER) measurements and coverage testing in digital
systems.
b) Standard Transmitter Symbol Rate (STD_DEV)
c) Standard Transmitter Low Deviation (LOW_DEV) and
d) Standard Transmitter C4FM Modulation (C4FM)
These test patterns are compliant with TIA document IS-102.CAAA
Transceiver Measurement methods.
Since these test patterns are provided for test purposes, they can only
be initiated when the station is in access disabled mode.
The STD_DEV, LOW_DEV and C4FM test patterns can only be turned on via
this RSS. They can be transmitted by a Simulcast station, although the
signal will not be synchronized with the 1PPS signal.
V.52 is a special case since it can be initiated from two different
sources. It can be initiated either from the comparator or the RSS. When
initiated from the comparator, it requires the presence of a 1 PPS
signal, the pattern is simulcasted and the station is normally access
enabled. When it is initiated from the RSS, the pattern will not be
simulcasted, it does not require the presene of the 1PPS signal and the
station must be access disabled.
ASTRO DEVIATION STANDARDS
=========================
When using an R2670 to measure deviation to check the limits specified
in the table below, set the R2670 service monitor in "bar graph" mode
with "Deviation Smoothing" enabled via the "expand" command.
The specs in the table below allow a spread of +/- 10%. However the
accuracy of the service monitor, R2670, needs to be taken into account.
Since the accuracy of the service monitor is only +/- 5%, the allowable
spread in
the measured deviation should only be +/- 5% not +/- 10% as shown in the
table below. Also, if the measure deviation falls outside the allowable
range, repeat the TX deviation alignment for the station.
ASTRO Deviation
+---------------------------------------------------------------------+
| SIGNAL | Minimum | Nominal | Maximum |
| | Deviation | Deviation | Deviation |
=======================================================================
| Low Signal Deviation | 0.84 kHz | 0.93 kHz | 1.02 kHz |
+---------------------------------------------------------------------+
| Low Signal Wide Pulse | | 1.00 kHz | |
| Deviation | | | |
+---------------------------------------------------------------------+
| Standard Deviation | 2.55 kHz | 2.83 kHz | 3.11 kHz |
+---------------------------------------------------------------------+
| Standard Wide Pulse | | 3.00 kHz | |
| Deviation | | | |
+---------------------------------------------------------------------+
| V.52 Deviation | 2.91 kHz | 3.23 kHz | 3.55 kHz |
+---------------------------------------------------------------------+
| V.52 Wide Pulse Deviation | | 3.00 kHz | |
+---------------------------------------------------------------------+
| C4FM Deviation | 2.91 kHz | 3.23 kHz | 3.55 kHz |
+---------------------------------------------------------------------+
| C4FM Wide Pulse | | 3.00 kHz | |
| Deviation | | | |
+---------------------------------------------------------------------+
| GPS Test Pattern - | | 3.00 kHz | |
| Simulcast | | | |
+---------------------------------------------------------------------+
| ASTRO Voice | 3.24 kHz | 3.60 kHz | 3.96 kHz |
+---------------------------------------------------------------------+
| ASTRO Wide Pulse | | 3.00 kHz | |
+---------------------------------------------------------------------+
Interpreting Test Equipment Results
Based upon system deviation tolerance and service monitor accuracy the
chart below depicts what error can be allowed with the deviation
measuring equipment. The chart lists the allowable tolerance necessary
to achieve the 3.00 kHz +/- 5% specification, using various
communication analyzers.
System Tolerance +/- 5 %
Lower Limit Specification Upper Limit
2850 Hz 3000 Hz 3150 Hz
Lower Reading Specification Upper Reading
Measurement Measurement
1 % Instrument Accuracy 2880 Hz 3000 Hz 3120 Hz
2 % Instrument Accuracy 2910 Hz 3000 Hz 3090 Hz
3 % Instrument Accuracy 2940 Hz 3000 Hz 3060 Hz
4 % Instrument Accuracy 2970 Hz 3000 Hz 3030 Hz
5 % Instrument Accuracy 3000 Hz 3000 Hz 3000 Hz
Due to the accuracy of the R2670 (+/-5%), the final value must be as
close as possible to the specification of 3000 Hz (We recommend an error
of no more than +/-20 Hz).
RSSI Monitor Help
NOTE: The Station Status value is only valid when entering the screen. The value will not
be updated automatically to reflect any changes to the status performed via the
Station buttons.
This feature displays the average Receive Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI)
information for an ANALOG system configuration. The RSSI display shows
the received signal's absolute value in dBm. The accuracy depends on an
accurate RSSI alignment. The RSS continuously updates the RSSI values,
averaged over the previous one second, until terminated by the user.
The procedure for running this report is:
- Apply the desired test signal to the receiver of the station
- Enter the RSSI Monitor Screen if you are not already there
TX DEVIATION GAIN ADJUST HELP
NOTE: The station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may occur due to normal station activity. Make certain the Power Output Alignment has been successfully performed and the station has been reset BEFORE attempting the Tx Deviation Alignment to prevent any possible damage to your test equipment due to incorrect Power Output alignments. The minimum for the first frequency field and third frequency field is 1.82 kHz. The minimum values for the second frequency field and fourth frequency field depend on the values entered in the first and third fields respectively. The maximum frequency for all four fields is 10.00 kHz. Note that the third and fourth frequency fields will not be displayed if the PA frequency is 900 MHz. Procedure: 1) Connect a Communication Analyzer to the Tx port of the station. Set the Communication Analyzer to read deviation. WARNING: The Communication Analyzer is limited to 125 watts of input power and an external load may be required to limit the power into the comm analyzer). Make sure that the communication analyzer (R2000 series) is set to Wideband mode for these measurements! The comm analyzer is set to narrow band mode for all other measurements. 2) Press "Key on Freq1" button to keyup the station on test frequency #1. Set analyzer's Freq to Freq on display. Observe the Communication Analyzer, and note the deviation displayed. Enter this value (or the higher of two values if a + and - value are displayed) into the '1st Frequency Deviation' field. 3) Press "Key on Freq2" button to keyup the station on test frequency #2. Set analyzer's Freq to Freq on display. Observe the Communication Analyzer, and note the deviation displayed. Enter this value (or the higher of two values if a + and - value are displayed) into the '2nd Frequency Deviation' field. Note that for proper operation, the frequency entered here MUST be greater than or equal to 90% of the value entered for Frequency #1 or 1.820 kHz (whichever is greater). 4) If the PA frequency is not 900 MHz, press "Key on Freq3" to keyup the station on test frequency #3. Set analyzer's Freq to Freq on display. Observe the Communication Analyzer, and note the deviation displayed. Enter this value (or the higher of two values if a + and - value are displayed) into the '3rd Frequency Deviation' field. 5) If the PA frequency is not 900 MHz, press "Key on Freq4" to keyup the station on test frequency #4. Set analyzer's Freq to Freq on display. Observe the Communication Analyzer, and note the deviation displayed. Enter this value (or the higher of two values if a + and - value are displayed) into the '4th Frequency Deviation' field. Note that for proper operation, the frequency entered here MUST be greater than or equal to 90% of the value entered for Frequency #3 or 1.820 kHz (whichever is greater). 6) Once all values have been entered, press OK to save these values to the station. 7) Press "Dekey" button to dekey the station. Station Power output is reduced from the programmed value for the station to half power for all stations with rated power less than 150 W. For higher power stations, power output is reduced to 100 W. This is true for all alignments, with the exception of the Power Out Alignment, which is performed at full power.
REFERENCE MODULATION COMPENSATION HELP
NOTE: The station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may occur due to normal station activity. NOTE: This alignment should be performed whenever change has been made to the SIMULCAST field on the Hardware Configuration screen. When SIMULCAST is enabled there may be a difference in the level of the RF signal from REF MOD 1 to REF MOD 2. Reference Modulation Compensation on a simulcast station is frequency dependent. Whenever the frequency is changed on a station configured for simulcast operation, either analog or digital, the Reference Modulation Compensation alignment must be performed on the actual frequency of operation. Make certain the Power Output Alignment has been successfully performed and the station has been reset BEFORE attempting the Reference Modulation Compensation Alignment to prevent any possible damage to your test equipment due to incorrect Power Output alignments. This procedure should be done for each REF MOD alignment in the station. When executing, the station will internally modulate the transmit RF signal with a 10 Hz +/- 10% square wave. NOTE: If the PA frequency is set to 900 MHz or the station is Simulcast but not mixed mode Analog and ASTRO Simulcast, REF MOD2 will not be required. NOTE: The "SAVE" button will only save the currently keyed REF MOD setting. The procedure MUST be followed exactly! NOTE: Adjust the scope to be able to adequately view the waveform during the alignment. Procedure: 1) Connect a Communication analyzer to the station as shown in the manual and set it to view the modulation. 2) Press "ALIGN REF MOD1" button to key up the station on the FIRST REF MOD alignment. 3) Observe the recovered audio signal on the oscilloscope. Adjust the shape of the recovered audio signal by pressing the Up Down Arrow keys until the observed square wave's horizontal portions are as near a straight line as possible. A sloped straight line is acceptable. The oscilloscope must be in DC coupled mode. 4) press OK to save this adjustment to the station. 5) Press "ALIGN REF MOD1" button to key up the station on the SECOND REF MOD alignment (if applicable). NOTE: The next 2 steps only apply if REF MOD2 alignment is required. 6) Observe the recovered audio signal on the oscilloscope. Adjust the shape of the recovered audio signal by pressing the Up Down Arrow keys until the observed square wave's horizontal portions are as near a straight line as possible. A sloped straight line is acceptable. 7) press OK to save this adjustment to the station. 8) Once saved, press "DEKEY" button to dekey the station. Station Power output is reduced from the programmed value for the station to half power for all stations with rated power less than 150 W. For higher power stations, power output is reduced to 100 W. This is true for all alignments, with the exception of the Power Out Alignment, which is performed at full power.
SQUELCH ADJUST HELP
SQUELCH alignment is required in all stations which process analog voice
or are required to detect illegal carrier.
It is not required for ASTRO digital only stations unless illegal
carrier detection is required. To be able to detect illegal carrier, the
station MUST be configured for ANALOG/ASTRO operation. The alignment
process requires that a calibrated signal generator be attached to the station's
receiver.
Stations may be configured with one or two receivers. If a station has two
receivers, then both receivers must be aligned separately. Only
conventional stations are capable of having two receivers. All trunking
stations (both IntelliRepeater and 6809 Trunking), have only one receiver.
Trunking stations, either IntelliRepeater or 6809 Smartnet/SmartZone stations
must be configured for mixed mode, ANALOG/ASTRO CAI, operation in order for
the stations to be able to detect interfering carriers. The threshold for
detecting the interfering carrier is set by performing the Carrier Squelch
alignment. A station that is configured for ASTRO CAI ONLY operation will
not perform the carrier detect function properly and will not be able to
detect interfering carriers.
NOTE:
1 - The station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any
alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may
occur due to normal station activity.
2 - The Squelch setting applies to all channels programmed on each
receiver.
3 - Since Squelch operation is bandwidth dependent, all the
channels on each receiver must have the same bandwidth.
CALIBRATION PROCESS FOR THE FIRST RECEIVER
1 - If two receivers are present, press the "Select Receiver 1" button
otherwise proceed to step 2.
2 - Connect the RF signal generator to the first receiver's input. For
maximum accuracy, keep the RF cables as short as possible.
3 - An unmodulated RF carrier is required to properly perform the squelch
alignment. The level of the RF carrier normally corresponds to the RF
level which produces 12 dB SINAD or 20 db Quieting. It is left to the
user discretion to select the RF level at which squelch is set. Also
set the generator to the frequency specified on the RSS screen.
4 - Press the fully open button to set the squelch fully open.
5 - Press the "tighten squelch by 1 unit" or "tighten squelch by 10 units" button repeatedly until the squelch closes.
Wait at least ONE second between each button press to determine squelch closing.
6 - Press the "open squelch by 1 unit" or "open squelch by 10 units" button repeatedly until the squelch opens.
Wait at least FIVE seconds between each button press to determine squelch opening.
7 - press "Save" to save the squelch setting to the station.
8 - Calibration for Receiver 1 is complete.
CALIBRATION PROCESS FOR THE SECOND RECEIVER
(2 Receiver Conventional Stations Only)
1 - Press the "Select Receiver 2" button to set the current channel in the station to a channel with
an active Receiver 2.
2 - Connect the RF signal generator to the second receiver's input. For
maximum accuracy, keep the RF cables as short as possible.
3 - An unmodulated RF carrier is required to properly perform the squelch
alignment. The level of the RF carrier normally corresponds to the RF
level which produces 12 dB SINAD or 20 db Quieting. It is left to the
user discretion to select the RF level at which squelch is set. Also
set the generator to the frequency specified on the RSS screen.
4 - Press fully open button to set the squelch fully open.
5 - Press the "tighten squelch by 1 unit" or "tighten squelch by 10 units" button repeatedly until the squelch closes.
Wait at least ONE second between each button press to determine squelch closing.
6 - Press the "open squelch by 1 unit" or "open squelch by 10 units" repeatedly until the squelch opens.
Wait at least FIVE seconds between each button press to determine
squelch opening.
7 - press OK to save the squelch setting to the station.
8 - Calibration for Receiver 2 is complete.
OPERATIONAL NOTES:
For all stations with firmware version Rel 3.1 and later:
The "Select CSQ SQL" button is used to force the station's receiver qualifiers
to the speaker and Wireline to be CSQ. The speaker output or Wireline
may then be used to monitor squelch opening and closing. The "Select Normal SQL" button
is used to restore the receiver qualifiers to their original,
codeplug programmed state.
For all stations with firmware version Rel 3.0 and earlier:
The front panel CSQ/PL/OFF switch can be used to force the station's
receiver qualifiers to the speaker to be CSQ. The speaker output may
then be used to monitor squelch opening and closing. The Rx Active LED
or the Rx Wireline output can only be used if the current receiver
channel qualifiers are set to CSQ in the codeplug.
SERVICE:ALIGNMENT:BATTERY EQUALIZATION HELP
NOTE: The station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may occur due to normal station activity. QUANTAR/DSS-III/QUANTAR DATA BASE STATIONS ONLY =============================================== In order to maintain proper charge and capacity, some batteries require periodic equalization. The buttons "Turn Equalization ON" and "Turn Equalization OFF" allow the user to turn equalization ON and OFF. When equalization is turned ON, the station will equalize for a period of time and then it will turn equalization OFF. The user is given the capability to turn OFF equalization overriding the timer established in the station. The timer is dependent on the type of battery selected. Lead Acid Non-Linear : Not Equalized Lead Acid Linear : 72 Hours NICAD : 48 Hours QUANTRO Stations Only ===================== For QUANTRO stations, equalize batteries by flipping FLOAT/EQUALIZE switch on station power supply to equalize and manually time the battery equalization process.
SERVICE:ALIGNMENT:BATTERY EQUALIZATION HELP
In order to maintain proper charge and capacity, some batteries require periodic equalization. The buttons "Turn Equalization ON" and "Turn Equalization OFF" allow the user to turn equalization ON and OFF. When equalization is turned ON, the comparator will equalize for a period of time and then it will turn equalization OFF. The user is given the capability to turn OFF equalization overriding the timer established in the comparator. The timer is dependent on the type of battery selected. Lead Acid Non-Linear : Not Equalized Lead Acid Linear : 72 Hours NICAD : 48 Hours
CUTBACK HELP
Cutback voltage for a given battery type.
SERIAL NUMBER HELP
The SERIAL NUMBER is the current assigned serial number of the station. This number should match the back plane serial number. Initially this field will indicate the number downloaded from the station or codeplug. The Serial Number may be changed by the user; However, make sure that the serial number always matches the current station serial number. Otherwise, upon pressing the Validate Configuration button, the RSS will report a serial number mismatch. NOTE: To be able to Validate the current hardware configuration, the RSS must be currently connected to a station when the button is pressed. NOTE: When SYSTEM TYPE is IntelliRepeater codeplug will always be saved with CHANNEL 1 serial number.
STATION NAME HELP
The STATION NAME field allows the user to identify a station with a name up to 21 alphanumeric characters in length and contain no embedded spaces.
RX FREQ BAND 1 HELP
The Rx Frequency Band 1 can be toggled through all currently available frequency bands. Valid toggle choices are: UHF Range 0, UHF Range 1, UHF Range 2, UHF Range 3, UHF Range 4, VHF Range 1, VHF Range 2, 800 MHz, 900 MHz, and NONE. UHF Range 0 is only available for Conventional and IntelliRepeater 3.0/3.5/4.1 Quantar stations. If changed, the selected RX FREQ BAND 1 may be verified with the station by pressing the Validate Configuration button. Any mismatch with the station configuration will be reported by the RSS. If the choice of receiver is NONE (for Conventional Stations both Rx Frequency Band must be set to NONE), the station will function as a transmit only station provided that a valid Tx Freq Band is selected. This choice is typically used for paging station applications.
RX FREQ BAND 2 HELP
The Rx Frequency Band 2 can be toggled through all currently available frequency bands. Valid toggle choices are: UHF Range 0, UHF Range 1, UHF Range 2, UHF Range 3, UHF Range 4, VHF Range 1, VHF Range 2, 800 MHz, 900 MHz, and NONE. UHF Range 0 is only available for Conventional Quantar stations. If changed, the selected RX FREQ BAND 2 may be verified with the station by pressing the Validate Configuration button. Any mismatch with the station configuration will be reported by the RSS. If the choice of receiver is NONE (for Conventional Stations both Rx Frequency Band must be set to NONE), the station will function as a transmit only station provided that a valid Tx Freq Band is selected. This choice is typically used for paging station applications.
TX FREQ BAND HELP
The Tx Frequency Band can be toggled through all currently available
frequency bands. Valid toggle choices are: UHF Range 0, UHF Range 1,
UHF Range 2, UHF Range 3, UHF Range 4, VHF Range 1, VHF Range 2,
800 MHz, and 900 MHz.
UHF Range 0 is only available for Conventional and IntelliRepeater 3.0/3.5/4.1 Quantar stations.
When the Hardware Platform is set to ASTRO-TAC Receiver or Quantar Satellite
Receiver, the Tx Frequency Band field is set to NONE and grayed. The user
cannot change this setting.
When NONE is displayed, the PA Power Rating field is set to 0
and becomes non-editable.
If the choice of Tx Band is NONE, the station will function as a receive
only station provided that a valid band is selected for the Receiver. This
application is more commonly known as a satellite receiver configuration.
If changed, the displayed Tx Freq Band may be verified with the actual
station hardware by pressing the Validate Configuration Button.
Any mismatch with the hardware configuration will be reported by the RSS.
HARDWARE PLATFORM HELP
The HARDWARE PLATFORM can be toggled between QUANTRO, QUANTAR, QUANTAR SATELLITE RECEIVER, ASTRO-TAC RECEIVER. If changed, the selected HARDWARE PLATFORM may be verified with the station by pressing the Validate Configuration Button. Any mismatch with the hardware configuration will be reported by the RSS. When the selected Hardware Platform is QUANTRO, note that the Power Supply field will also be set to QUANTRO, and the Battery field will be set to NONE. The Power Supply field is not editable in Quantro stations. When the selected Hardware Platform is ASTRO-TAC RECEIVER, the Power Supply field will be set to AC LOW, and the Battery field will be set to NONE. Prior to Release 05.01.00 RSS, the HARDWARE PLATFORM field did not exist. Instead, the user selected the Hardware Platform indirectly by setting the PA TYPE field and the TX FREQUENCY BAND fields. The HARDWARE PLATFORM field more clearly identifies the hardware choices that exist.
PA POWER RATING HELP
PA POWER RATING is dependent upon the selected TX FREQ BAND and the PA TYPE according to the following table: QUANTAR/DSS-III STATIONS: (DSS-III not available in VHF) Station Station Displayed Alignment Desired Pwr Desired Pwr Band/Range Pwr Lvl. Field Choice Level Lower Limit Upper Limit ------------------------------------------------------------------------- VHF R1,R2 25 W 25 W 25 W 5 W 30 W VHF R1,R2 125 W 125 W 125 W 20 W 135 W UHF R0 110 W 110 W 110 W 10 W 120 W UHF R1,R2 25 W 25 W 25 W 5 W 30 W UHF R1,R2,R3 110 W 110 W 110 W 20 W 120 W UHF R4 100 W 100 W 100 W 20 W 110 W 800 MHz 20 W 20 W 20 W 5 W 22 W 800 MHz 100 W 100 W 100 W 20 W 110 W 900 MHz 100 W 100 W 100 W 20 W 110 W (Booster Amp only available for Quantar and DBS) VHF R2 350 W 25 W Boosted 25 W 94 W 400 W 800 MHz 150 W 20 W Boosted 20 W 44 W 187 W QUANTRO STATIONS: Station Station Displayed Alignment Desired Pwr Desired Pwr Band/Range Pwr Lvl. Field Choice Level Lower Limit Upper Limit ------------------------------------------------------------------------- VHF R1,R2 350 W 350 W/No Circ 350 W 170 W 375 W UHF R1,2 6 W 6 W/ 1 Circ 6 W 1 W 7 W UHF R1,2 4 W 6 W/ 3 Circ 4 W 1 W 5 W UHF R1,2 40 W 40 W/ 1 Circ 40 W 15 W 45 W UHF R1,2 31 W 40 W/ 3 Circ 31 W 10 W 35 W UHF R4 100 W 100 W/ 1 Circ 100 W 50 W 110 W UHF R4 80 W 100 W/ 3 Circ 80 W 40 W 85 W UHF R1,2,3 110 W 110 W/ 1 Circ 110 W 50 W 120 W UHF R1,2,3 80 W 110 W/ 3 Circ 80 W 35 W 90 W UHF R1,2 225 W 225 W/ 1 Circ 225 W 105 W 245 W UHF R1,2 170 W 225 W/ 3 Circ 170 W 80 W 185 W 800 QUANTRO 35 W 35 W/ 1 Circ 35 W 15 W 40 W 800 QUANTRO 30 W 35 W/ 3 Circ 30 W 12 W 35 W 800 QUANTRO 75 W 75 W/ 1 Circ 75 W 35 W 85 W 800 QUANTRO 65 W 75 W/ 3 Circ 65 W 30 W 75 W 800 QUANTRO 150 W 150 W/ 1 Circ 150 W 70 W 165 W 800 QUANTRO 130 W 150 W/ 3 Circ 130 W 60 W 140 W 900 QUANTRO 150 W 150 W/ 1 Circ 150 W 70 W 165 W 900 QUANTRO 150 W 150 W/ 3 Circ 130 W 60 W 140 W Quantro Stations may be ordered with Single or Triple Circulators. The station's codeplug comes configured for the circulator that was ordered with the station. The presence of the circulator is reflected in the PA Power Rating field description. If circulators are field installed, the user needs to make sure that the description reflects the exact configuration of the station. Improper setting of this field can result in improper operation of the PA which can degrade the reliability of the PA and the user may not be able to perform the power output alignment. If changed, the selected PA POWER RATING may be verified with the station by pressing the Validate Configuration Button. Any mismatch with the hardware configuration will be reported by the RSS. NOTE: If the Limited Power Output option is enabled, the actual upper limit will be determined by this feature and will be displayed next to the PA Power Rating field. When aligning the output power, this limit will be imposed and you will not be able to align the station with power greater than this limit, regardless of what is selected in the choice list.
WIRELINE HELP
The Wireline may be toggled between 8-Wire, 4-Wire and NONE. Choosing None will automatically disable the Wireline Operation choices available at the WIRELINE CONFIGURATION screen. The choice of NONE for this field is used in cases where the station is configured as a stand-alone repeater. In this configuration, a console interface is not used. A wireline board is required for DC Remote, TRC, and WildCard. If changed, the displayed WIRELINE operation may be verified with the station by pressing the Validate Configuration Button. Any mismatch with the hardware configuration will be reported by the RSS. NOTE: To be able to Validate the current hardware configuration, the RSS must be currently connected to a station when the button is pressed.
POWER SUPPLY HELP
Quantar/Quantar Satellite Receiver/DSS-III stations only:
The Power Supply may be toggled between AC LOW, AC HIGH, DC LOW, and
DC HIGH.
Power Supply Selections:
AC HIGH - 575 W w/o battery charger AC LOW - 210 W w/o battery charger
- 625 W with battery charger - 265 W with battery charger
DC HIGH - 575 W (21 - 34.5 V or 41 - 72 V Input)
DC LOW - 210 W (10.5 - 34.5 V or 41 - 72 V Input)
Once the Power Supply type is changed, the Battery field should also
be inspected.
If changed, the selected POWER SUPPLY TYPE may be verified with the
station by pressing the Validate Configuration Button. Any mismatch with the
hardware configuration will be reported by the RSS.
BATTERY HELP
For Quantar stations or satellite receivers, the BATTERY field may be toggled between NONE, LEAD ACID LINEAR, LEAD ACID NONLINEAR, and NICAD. The station or receiver will utilize the battery type selected to allow the power supplies' battery charging circuitry to select the best charging rate for the type of battery the system is using. Setting the battery type to NONE will DISABLE the charging circuitry, but it does not affect the battery revert or low battery disconnect, which are built in the power supply hardware. Select NONE for the battery type if the batteries to be used are charged from an external battery charger. The BATTERY field also determines the amount of time the station will "equalize" the batteries. In order to maintain proper charge and capacity, some batteries require periodic equalization. During this process, the charging voltage from the power supply is increased slightly to ensure that the individual cells of the battery are charged to a uniform level. When equalization is turned on, the station will start and maintain a timer and will turn equalization off when the timer expires. The battery types and their equalization times are as follows: None : Not Equalized Lead Acid Non-Linear : Not Equalized Lead Acid Linear : 72 Hours NICAD : 48 Hours Equalization will automatically start when AC power is restored to a station. During this period, if the AC power is lost the station will revert to battery power. When the AC power is restored the equalization will continue with the remaining timer value. This automatic equalization feature can be manually disabled from the Service:Alignment:Battery Equalization screen. This screen also allows the equalization process to be manually started, as long as the BATTERY type supports equalization. When a battery is selected, the station will set the station's transmit output power utilizing the number programmed in the Battery Backup field, on the Channel Information Screen, whenever AC power is lost. For Quantro stations, the BATTERY field may be toggled between NONE and INSTALLED. The Quantro station utilizes this field for selecting the station's transmit output power from the Battery Backup field whenever AC power is lost. This field does NOT control the battery charging circuitry. Battery charging on a Quantro station is manually set on the power supply itself. For high power Quantar stations, the station will maintain the PA output power as defined in this field as long as the DC input voltage is above 27.5 Volts. When the DC voltage drops below 27.5 Volts, the output power will be derated based upon the input DC voltage level, until that level drops to 21 Volts. At that point, the output power will be shut down to protect the batteries. For low power Quantar stations, the station will maintain the PA output power as defined in this field as long as the DC input voltage is above 13.8 Volts. When the DC voltage drops below 13.8 Volts, the output power will be derated based upon the input DC voltage level, until that level drops to 10.5 Volts. At that point, the output power will be shut down to protect the batteries.
SYSTEM TYPE HELP
The System Type may be toggled between CONVENTIONAL, TRUNKING (6809
SmartZone), TRUNKING (6809 SMARTNET), INTELLIREPEATER 2.0.3/2.7E,
INTELLIREPEATER 3.0/3.5, DSSIII and QUANTAR DATA BASE STATION.
CONVENTIONAL operation implies either a Base or Conventional Repeater
operation. IntelliRepeater implies a Trunked, system operation.
NOTE: If the station is configured as a 'local channel' (Console and/or
Interconnect interface) in a 6809-SmartZone system this field must be
set to 6809-Smartnet.
If changed, the selected SYSTEM TYPE may be verified with the
station by pressing the Validate Configuration Button. Any mismatch with the
hardware configuration will be reported by the RSS.
WARNING: When the SYSTEM TYPE is changed, the resulting codeplug will
contain one channel, and any other channel information will be lost.
Other fields throughout the RSS, which are dependent on the SYSTEM TYPE,
may be changed.
NOTE: When changing the Station Type or System Type, the DIGITAL
IDLE LINK CHECK field on the Wireline Configuration screen,
Page 2, gets set to a default.
Before downloading the codeplug, make sure that the field is
set as needed by the system configuration.
INTELLIREPEATER FREQ BAND HELP
The selection of IR Freq Band is dependent on the type of license and the
selected range of frequency in the Rx Freq Band.
If the Rx Freq Band 1 is set to VHF_R1 or VHF_R2 then the IR Freq Band is
set to VHF.
If the Rx Freq Band 1 is set to either UHF_R1 or UHF_R2 or UHF_R3 or UHF_R4
then the IR Freq Band is set to UHF.
If the Rx Freq Band 1 is set to 900 MHz then the IR Freq Band is set to 900.
If the Rx Freq Band 1 is set to NONE then the IR Freq Band is set to NONE.
If the Rx Freq Band 1 is set to 800 MHz then the IR Freq Band provides
11 choices.
The first 5 choices provide the channelization selections which have been
used for IntelliRepeater thru release R13.00. The next 6 choices have been
added to support the 800 MHz rebanding project.
==========================================
The first 5 choices for the 800 MHz IR frequency band are:
800-821 USA, 800-821 USA SP, 800-821 INTL, 800-821 INTL SP, 805-826 6.25 kHz.
Note: The 805-826 6.25 KHz choice should be chosen only if the System Type
is INTELLIREPEATER 5.0.
The next 6 choices which were added for 800 MHz rebanding are:
806-824, 806-824 SHF, 806-824 USA SHF, 806-824 USA SPL SHF, 806-825 INTL SHF,
and 806-825 INTL SPL SHF.
====================================================
Beginning with release R14.00, six new choices, 806-824 and 806-824 SHF have
been added to the band plans.
The first two choices are new; the other 4 choices are shuffled versions of
the original band plans. The table below provides the relationship between
shuffled and unshuffled frequency band plans.
BAND PLAN SHUFFLED VERSION
--------- ----------------
800-821 USA 806-824 USA SHF
800-821 USA SP 806-824 USA SPL SHF
800-821 INTL 806-825 INTL SHF
800-821 INTL SP 806-825 INTL SPL SHF
806-824 806-824 SHF
805-826 6.25 kHz. (none)
===========================================
IntelliRepeater Frequency BAND/CHANNELIZATION Description:
800-821 USA - Channelization starts at 806.0125 MHz; the frequencies are
spaced 25 kHz apart up to 823.9875 MHz. Channelization continues at
821.000 MHz, with the frequencies spaced 25 kHz apart, up to 823.975 MHz.
Using this band allows frequencies to be selected at 25 kHz intervals
from 806.0125 MHz to 820.9875 MHz and 12.5 kHz intervals from 821 MHz
to 823.9875 MHz
800-821 USA SP - Channelization for the splinter(SP) frequencies starts at
806.0000 MHz; the frequencies are spaced 25 KHz apart up to 820.975 MHz.
Channelization continues at 821.0125 MHz, with the frequencies spaced
25 kHz apart up to 823.9875 MHz. Channelization further continues at
821 MHZ with the frequencies spaced 25 kHz apart up to 823.975.
Using this band allows frequencies to be selected at 25 kHz intervals
from 806.025 MHz to 820.975 MHz and 12.5 kHz intervals from 821 MHz
to 823.9875 MHz
800-821 INTL - Channelization starts at 806.0125 MHz; the frequencies are
spaced 25 kHz apart up to 824.9875 MHz.
Using this band allows frequencies to be selected at 25 kHz intervals
from 806.0125 MHz to 824.9875 MHz
800-821 INTL SP - Channelization for the splinter(SP) frequencies starts
at 806.0000 MHz; the frequencies are spaced 25 kHz apart up to 824.975 MHz.
Using this band allows frequencies to be selected at 25 kHz intervals
from 806 MHz to 824.975 MHz
806-826 6.25 kHz - Channelization starts at 806.0125 MHz; the frequencies
are spaced 12.5 kHz apart up to 824.9875 MHz.
Using this band allows frequencies to be selected at 12.5 kHz intervals
from 806.0125 MHz to 824.9875 MHz. This band is only used in ASTRO 25
6.x Systems.
806-824 - Channelization starts at 806.0125 MHz, goes up to 816.9875 MHz;
then continues at 806.025 MHz and goes up to 809 MHz with frequencies spaced
25 kHz apart. Channelization resumes at 821.0125 MHz, goes up to
823.9875 MHz, continues at 821 MHz and ends at 823.975 MHz with frequencies
spaced 25 kHz apart.
Using this band allows frequencies to be selected at 12.5 kHz intervals
from 806.0125 MHz to 809 MHz and from 821 MHz to 823.9875. 25 kHz
intervals are selected from 809.0125 MHz to 816.9875 MHz. Frequencies
cannot be selected from 817 MHz to 820.9875 MHz.
806-824 SHF - Channelization starts at 816.9875 MHz; the frequencies are
spaced 25 kHz apart and go down to 809.0125 MHz. Channelization continues at
809 MHz; from here, frequencies are spaced 12.5 kHz apart and go down to
806.0125 MHz. Channelization resumes at 823.9875 MHz, frequencies are spaced
12.5 KHz apart and go down to 821.0000 MHz
Using this band allows frequencies to be selected at 12.5 kHz intervals
from 806.0125 MHz to 809 MHz. 25 kHz intervals are selected from
809.0125 MHz to 816.9875 MHz. Frequencies cannot be selected from
817 MHz to 820.9875 MHz.
806-824 USA SHF - Channelization starts at 822.9875 MHz; the frequencies are
spaced 12.5 kHz apart and go down to 820.9875 MHz. Channelization continues
at 820.9625 MHz; from here, frequencies are spaced 25 kHz apart and go down
to 806.0125 MHz. Channelization further continues at 823.9875; the
frequencies are spaced 12.5 kHz apart and go down to 823 MHz.
Using this band allows frequencies to be selected at 25 kHz intervals
from 806.0125 MHz to 820.9875 MHz. Frequencies at 12.5 kHz
intervals are selected from 821 MHz to 823.9875 MHz.
806-824 USA SPL SHF - Channelization starts at 822.9875 MHz; the frequencies
are spaced 12.5 kHz apart and go down to 821. Channelization continues
at 820.975 MHz; from here, frequencies are spaced 25 kHz apart and go down
to 806.025 MHz. Channelization further continues at 823.9875; the
frequencies are spaced 12.5 kHz apart and go down to 823 MHz.
Using this band allows frequencies to be selected at 25 kHz intervals
from 806.025 MHz to 820.975 MHz. Frequencies at 12.5 kHz
intervals are selected from 821 MHz to 823.9875 MHz.
806-825 INTL SHF - Channelization starts at 824.9875 MHz; the frequencies
are spaced 25 kHz apart and go down to 806.0125 MHz.
Using this band allows frequencies to be selected at 25 kHz intervals
from 806.0125 MHz to 824.9875 MHz
806-825 INTL SPL SHF - Channelization starts at 824.975 MHz; the frequencies
are spaced 25 kHz apart and go down to 806 MHz.
Using this band allows frequencies to be selected at 25 kHz intervals
from 806 MHz to 824.975 MHz
SCANNING RECEIVER HELP
Setting this field to ENABLED turns on the Scanning Receiver function in the station. Valid choices for this field are: ENABLED/DISABLED
STATION TYPE HELP
The Station Type field defines the overall signaling capabilities of the station both over the air and over the wireline link. Valid choices for this field are ANALOG ONLY, ASTRO CAPABLE, ASTRO CAI CAPABLE, (SECURENET) SEC XL CAPABLE, and (SECURENET) SEC CFB CAPABLE. These choices are always all available. The choices available depend on the System type selected and the code plug version being modified. Station Type chosen on the Hardware Configuration screen will affect the Modulation Types available for each channel on the Channel Information screen as well as the options for wireline operation. If changed, the selected Station Type may be verified with the station by pressing the Validate Configuration Button. Any mismatch with the hardware configuration will be reported by the RSS. If ANALOG ONLY is selected, the station will operate in the ANALOG only mode. The station will be capable of transmitting over the air signaling such as PL/DPL/CSQ and use wireline protocols such as Tone Remote Control and DC Control. If ASTRO CAPABLE or ASTRO CAI CAPABLE is selected, the station will operate in the ASTRO or ASTRO CAI mode. Station operation can then be further defined through the modulation selection field in the Channel Information Screen. The station there can be defined to operate in the ANALOG mode only, ASTRO or ASTRO CAI mode only, or ANALOG/ASTRO or ANALOG/ASTRO CAI mixed mode. In all cases, the wireline operation is ASTRO mode using either an ASTRO modem, V.24 or a V.24 Hybrid link. If ASTRO CAI CAPABLE is selected the station will operate in ASTRO CAI mode (ASTRO Common Air Interface as defined by APCO Project 25). ASTRO CAI operation and capabilities are similar to those for ASTRO, however ASTRO CAI uses different protocols than ASTRO both over the air and over the wireline and requires ASTRO CAI capability in other infrastructure and subscriber equipment communicating with the station in ASTRO CAI mode. If ASTRO CAI CAPABLE is selected, the Noise Canceller field on the Channel Information screen's Advanced tab must be set to DISABLED. If SEC CFB/XL CAPABLE (SECURENET) is selected, the station will operate in SECURENET mode. Station operation can then be further defined through the modulation selection field in the Channel Information Screen. The station there can be defined to operate in the ANALOG mode only, SECURENET mode only, or ANALOG/SECURENET mixed mode. The wireline, if present, will operate only in TRC mode. The SECURENET choice provides two further choices: XL, and Cipher Feed Back (CFB). In XL mode, the station will provide an 80 millisecond buffer for the receive to wireline, repeat and wireline to transmitter paths and will attempt to never truncate any SECURENET signal that it receives while it is trying to establish code detect. In CFB mode, the station will not provide any buffering and will truncate any input SECURENET signal that it receives while it is trying to establish code detect. In CFB mode the station will have approximately 40 milliseconds of throughput delay from Rx to wireline and Tx, and from wireline to Tx. In previous products (Micor and MSF), there was no throughput delay in CFB mode.
ANTENNA RELAY HELP
For Base Station operation where Tx Freq = Rx Freq, an antenna relay is used. Antenna Relay may be toggled between ENABLED or DISABLED. Initial default setting is DISABLED.
SERVICE:HARDWARE CONFIGURATION HELP
HARDWARE CONFIGURATION: This section allows the user to view and
modify the main operating parameters of the station.
Validate Configuration Button:
The Validate Configuration Button will allow the user to verify that the
data displayed on the Hardware Configuration screen matches the station
hardware capabilities and the codeplug currently loaded in the station.
The hardware validation will check that the displayed Tx Frequency
Band and the HW PLATFORM match the station hardware. It will also verify
the Frequency Reference source selected also matches the hardware present
in the station (Release 3 station firmware and later). The remaining
displayed fields on the screen will be validated against the codeplug
currently programmed in the station.
NOTE: To be able to Validate the current hardware configuration, the RSS
must be currently connected to a station when The Validate Configuration Button is pressed.
SERIAL NUMBER is the current assigned serial number of the station.
This number should match the back plane serial number. Initially, this
field will indicate the number downloaded from the station or codeplug.
The Serial Number may be changed by the user; However, make sure that
the serial number always matches the current station serial number.
Otherwise, upon pressing the Validate Configuration button, the RSS will report
a serial number mismatch.
STATION NAME can be used to identify a station. This field accepts up
to 21 alphanumeric characters.
HARDWARE PLATFORM can be toggled through types QUANTAR, QUANTRO,
ASTRO-TAC RECEIVER, and QUANTAR SATELLITE RECEIVER.
SYSTEM TYPE may be toggled between CONVENTIONAL,
INTELLIREPEATER 2.0.3/2.7E, INTELLIREPEATER 3.0/3.5/4.1,
TRUNKING (6809), DSS-III, or QUANTAR DATA BASE STATION.
NOTE: When changing the Station Type or System Type, the DIGITAL
IDLE LINK CHECK field on the Wireline Configuration screen,
Page 2, gets set to a default.
Before downloading the codeplug, make sure that the field is
set as needed by the system configuration.
RX FREQ BAND 1 can be toggled through all currently available frequency
bands.
Valid choices are: UHF R0, UHF R1, UHF R2, UHF R3, UHF R4, VHF R1, VHF R2,
800 MHz, & 900 MHz.
RX FREQ BAND 2 can be toggled through all currently available frequency
bands.
Valid choices are: UHF R0, UHF R1, UHF R2, UHF R3, UHF R4, VHF R1, VHF R2,
800 MHz, & 900 MHz.
If changed, the entered Rx Freq Band 1 and Rx Freq Band 2 may be
verified with the station by pressing the Validate Configuration Button.
Any mismatch with the hardware configuration will be reported by the RSS.
NOTE: To be able to Validate the current station configuration, the RSS
must be currently connected to a station when The Validate Configuration Button is pressed.
TX FREQ BAND can be toggled through all currently available
frequency bands.
Valid choices are: UHF R0, UHF R1, UHF R2, VHF R1, VHF R2, 800 MHz,
& 900 MHz.
NOTE: If the Tx Freq Band choice is set to NONE in the currently loaded and
in-use code plug, validation will not work correctly. When the Tx Freq Band
is set to NONE, the station control module does not communicate with the
Exciter and thus the Exciter ID and the PA ID are not available for
validation.
NOTE: The code plug becomes "in-use" after the code plug is loaded to the
station and the station is reset.
PA POWER RATING is dependent upon the selected TX FREQUENCY
BAND and the HW PLATFORM according to the following table:
TX FREQ BAND HW PLATFORM PA POWER RATING (Watts)
--------------------------------------------------------------
VHF R1,R2 QUANTAR 25, 125
UHF R0 QUANTAR 110
UHF R1,R2 QUANTAR 25
UHF R1,R2,R3 QUANTAR 110
UHF R4 QUANTAR 100
800 MHz QUANTAR 20
900 MHz QUANTAR 100
VHF R1,R2 QUANTRO 350
UHF R1,R2 QUANTRO 6, 40, 110, 225
UHF R3 QUANTRO 110
UHF R4 QUANTRO 100
800 MHz QUANTRO 35, 75, 150
WIRELINE may be toggled between 8-Wire, 4-Wire and NONE.
WILDCARD is only available if a Wireline module is present and may
be toggled between ENHANCED, BASIC and DISABLED if the Wireline is
8-wire and between BASIC and DISABLED if the Wireline is 4-wire.
POWER SUPPLY may be toggled between AC LOW, AC HIGH, DC LOW, and DC HIGH.
Once the Power Supply type is changed, the BATTERY field should also
be inspected.
The BATTERY field may be toggled between NONE, LEAD ACID LINEAR,
LEAD ACID NONLINEAR, and NICAD.
STATION TYPE choices may be toggled between ASTRO CAPABLE,
(SECURENET) SEC XL CAPABLE, (SECURENET) SEC CFB CAPABLE and ANALOG ONLY.
Station Type chosen on the Hardware Configuration screen will affect
the Modulation Types available for each channel on the
Channel Information screen.
FREQUENCY REFERENCE selects between INTERNAL - STANDARD, EXTERNAL - 5 MHZ
(External 5 MHz Source), EXTERNAL - 10 MHZ (External 10 MHz Source), and
INTERNAL - HIGH STABILITY (Internal High Stability Source UHSO).
If changed, the entered Frequency Reference choice may be verified with
the station by pressing the Validate Configuration Button. Any mismatch with
the hardware configuration will be reported by the RSS.
NOTE: To be able to Validate the current hardware configuration, the RSS
must be currently connected to a station when The Validate Configuration Button is pressed.
SIMULCAST OPERATION may be Enabled or Disabled. To properly enable this
feature the feature option must have been purchased. Refer to the Price
Pages for more information.
For Simulcast systems, make certain that the following fields are set
properly if Simulcast is enabled:
Hardware Configuration:Frequency Reference = External - 5 or 10 MHz selected
RF Configuration:Repeater Operation = BASE
Channel Information: Repeater Activation = OFF
Channel Information: Repeater Hold-In = OFF
Channel Information: Call Sign = blanked (DISABLED)
Channel Information: Alarm Tones over Air = DISABLED
Wireline Configuration:Wireline Operation = 4 WIRE FULL DUPLEX
Wireline Configuration:Comparator = SPECTRA-TAC or DIGI-TAC or ASTRO-TAC or
ASTRO-TAC WITH DIGI-TAC
Wireline Configuration:Fall Back In-Cabinet Repeat = DISABLED
PHONE PATCH INTERFACE may be toggled between Enabled or Disabled. To
properly enable this feature the Phone Patch option must have been
purchased. Refer to the Price Pages for more information.
RESTORE ARCHIVE DIRECTORY FROM BACKUP HELP
ENTER ARCHIVE DIRECTORY NAME: Enter the directory path of the directory that you wish to restore. Drive letters must be followed by a colon (:), and all legal MS-DOS characters may be entered. Complete the entry by pressing the ENTER key. Initially, the current directory pathname will be displayed in this field. If the directory exists, the RSS will display the current contents of the directory on the screen. If the directory does not exist, an error message will be displayed. If the directory holds more files than can be viewed on one screen, use the Page Up Down or Arrow Up Down keys to scroll the directory contents on the screen. ENTER BACKUP DIRECTORY NAME: Enter the directory path of the directory that you will retrieve backup files. Directory validation is handled in the same manner as the archive directory name. The files in this directory will overwrite the files in the target directory. Tab, or Shift-Tab may be used to move between the fields displayed on the screen. Press the ENTER key to copy the files in the backup directory to the target directory. Any common files are overwritten by the backup files. A warning message will appear asking if you are sure you wish to perform the backup; press F2 for yes, F10 for no.
GET CODEPLUG FROM FILE SCROLL REGION HELP
Use Up/Down Left/Right Arrow Keys to select a file. Use PgUp/PgDn to bring up new files to the screen and select one. Tab: Moves cursor to filename field. Shift Tab: Moves cursor to the directory field. Enter: Read selected file.
VIEW INFORMATION HELP
The View Info button will recall the comment header of the selected codeplug file for viewing. Any editing of this header can only be done from the Save Codeplug to File screen.
SAVE CODEPLUG DATA TO ARCHIVE DISK FILE HELP
ENTER DIRECTORY NAME: Enter the directory path of the directory that you
wish to view. Drive letters must be followed by a colon (:), and all
legal MS-DOS characters may be entered. Complete the entry by pressing
the ENTER key. Initially, the current directory pathname will be displayed
in this field.
If the directory exists, the RSS will display the current contents of the
directory on the screen. If the directory does not exist, an error message
will be displayed.
If the directory holds more files than can be viewed on one screen, use the
Page Up Down or Arrow Up Down keys to scroll the directory contents on the
screen.
Tab, or Shift-Tab may be used to move between the fields displayed on the
screen.
ENTER FILENAME: Once a directory is chosen, select a filename by typing the
filename into the field, (create new file), or by moving the highlight bar
to the desired filename by means of the Page Up or Down and Arrow Up or
Down keys, or the TAB key (overwrite old file).
If you desire to add a note to the codeplug file before saving it, press F3
(EDIT INFO) to call up a edit window into which you can add desired notes.
When finished adding notes, press F10 to return to the Read/Save Codeplug
screen. Press ENTER to save the codeplug to the desired file.
If no notes are desired, just press the ENTER key to save the codeplug to
the desired file.
After the file is saved, the RSS will return to the READ/SAVE CODEPLUG
screen.
Button Descriptions:
F1 - Will recall this screen.
F3 - EDIT INFO will recall the comment header of the selected codeplug
file for editing. Once editing is completed, press OK to save the
notes entered to the codeplug file.
F8 - SAVE codeplug (with entered notes) to a file.
Special Keys:
Tab: Moves cursor to filename in the same row in the next column.
If cursor is in last column the cursor will move to the last
file.
Shift Tab: Moves cursor to filename in the same row in the previous
column. If cursor is in first column on first page then cursor
will move up to the directory pathname field so that a new
directory pathname may be entered.
SAVE CODEPLUG TO FILE SCROLL REGION HELP
Use Up/Down Left/Right Arrow Keys to select a file. Use PgUp/PgDn to bring up new files to the screen and select one. Tab: Moves cursor to directory field. Shift Tab: Moves cursor to the filename field. Enter: Overwrite selected file.
EDIT INFORMATION HELP
The Edit Info button will recall the comment header of the selected codeplug file for editing. Once editing is completed, press OK to save the notes entered to the codeplug file.
USER NAME HELP
Enter the name or other identification of the person to last modify the codeplug into this field. Once complete, press ENTER or TAB to move to the next field. NOTE: Entry is optional in this field.
DATE HELP
Enter the date of the modification to the codeplug in this field. NOTE: The RSS will automatically read the current date from the PC and will insert it into this field. If desired, the contents of this field may be changed. Entry must be in the format MM/DD/YY. NOTE: Entry is optional in this field.
COMMENTS HELP
Enter the desired comments about this codeplug into this field. When completed, press OK. When the codeplug is saved, the entered comments will also be saved automatically. NOTE: Entry is optional in this field.
STATION CONTROL DIAGNOSTIC TESTS HELP
The Station Control Diagnostic tests are a set of tests that can be run with the goal of verifying the basic operation of the Station Control module. These tests can be run to verify that the internal operation of the Station Control Module is within specified operational limits. The Service Technician may select which diagnostics tests are to be run on the station, and when these tests should be executed. The technician may select any or all of the tests to be run at station power up (Cold Start), Station reset (Warm Start) or on demand (Run Diagnostics Now). Once all desired tests are selected, exiting the screen will automatically save the current set of Cold Start and Warm Start tests to the codeplug. Note: DSS-III Data Stations early versions will not execute the Cold and Warm Start diagnostic tests if selected, and will indicate this fact by means of the RSS displaying a warning message on entry to the Diagnostic Menu. Note that the Run Now tests are not saved in the station and will default to all tests deselected (off) when the Service Software is entered. The tests to be run are selected by first entering the desired Diagnostic Test Screen, and then moving the cursor to be on the same line as the desired test. The cursor can be moved to the desired column to select when the test should be run. Pressing the Space Bar will place an 'X' in the current column. Pressing the Space Bar a second time will deselect the test and remove the 'X' in the current column. Press the Run Now Tests button to run the. The information window will display the test currently being run, and the main screen will indicate PASS or FAIL (or PURCH_OP for tests that are not currently available or planned for implementation. If they do become available it would be as a purchased upgrade) for completed tests. All selected tests on all Diagnostic screens will be executed. To abort a Run Now Test run, press F7. Any tests not yet executing will not be started.
STATION CONTROL BASIC DRAM TEST HELP
This test may not be selected on a Run Now basis. It will only be executed at the initial power up or reset of the station. This test verifies the proper operation of the DRAM memory on the station control module. If this test fails, the indication will be flashing LEDs on the front panel of the station control module. A DRAM test failure is indicated by the Rx Fail and Aux LED LEDs flashing rapidly back and forth and the Control Fail or Intercom LEDs being constantly on. If this test fails the station will not come out of reset.
STATION CONTROL EXTENSIVE DRAM TEST HELP
This is a purchasable option.
STATION CONTROL BASIC ROM TEST HELP
This test may not be selected on a Run Now basis. Will only be executed at the initial power up or reset of the station. This test verifies proper operation and contents of the ROMs on the Station Control board. If this test fails, the indication will be flashing LEDs on the front of the station control board. A ROM test failure is indicated by the Rx2 Active and Rx Fail LEDs flashing rapidly back and forth and the Control On LED being continually on. If this test fails the station will not operate.
STATION CONTROL BASIC EEPROM TEST HELP
This is a purchasable option.
STATION CONTROL EXTENSIVE EEPROM TEST HELP
This is a purchasable option.
STATION CONTROL DUART LOOPBACK TEST HELP
This is a purchasable option.
STATION CONTROL SPI TEST HELP
This is a purchasable option.
STATION CONTROL DSP GLUE ASIC TEST HELP
This is a purchasable option.
STATION CONTROL AUDIO LOOPBACK TEST HELP
This is a purchasable option.
STATION CONTROL HDLC LOOPBACK TEST HELP
This is a purchasable option.
= STATION CONTROL REFERENCE OSCILLATOR TEST HELP
This is a purchasable option.
STATION CONTROL DSP RAM TEST HELP
This is a purchasable option.
STATION CONTROL DSP SANITY TEST HELP
This is a purchasable option.
STATION CONTROL WIRELINE TDM LOOPBACK TEST HELP
This is a purchasable option. The DSS-III station does not support this test.
STATION CONTROL WIRELINE LOOPBACK TEST HELP
This is a purchasable option. The DSS-III station does not support this test.
STATION CONTROL FLASH TEST HELP
This test verifies the proper operation of the FLASH memory on the station control module. This test should not be selected as a Warm Start test, as the DSS-III station does not support this mode. Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the manual for further actions to be taken.
WIRELINE TEST HELP
The Wireline Diagnostic tests are a set of tests that can be run with the goal of verifying the basic operation of the Wireline module. These tests can be run to verify that the internal operation of the Wireline Module is within specified operational limits. The Service Technician may select which diagnostics tests are to be run on the station, and when these tests should be executed. The technician may select any or all of the tests to be run at station power up (Cold Start), Station reset (Warm Start) or on demand (Run Diagnostics Now). Once all desired tests are selected, exiting the screen will automatically save the current set of Cold Start and Warm Start tests to the codeplug. Note that the Run Now tests are not saved in the station and will default to all tests deselected (off) when the Service Software is entered. The tests to be run are selected by first entering the desired Diagnostic Test Screen, and then moving the cursor to be on the same line as the desired test. The cursor can be moved to the desired column to select when the test should be run. Pressing the Space Bar will place an 'X' in the current column. Pressing the Space Bar a second time will deselect the test and remove the 'X' in the current column. To run the Run Now Tests selected, press OK. The information window will display the test currently being run, and the main screen will indicate PASS or FAIL (or PURCH_OP for tests that are not currently available or planned for implementation. If they do become available it would be as a purchased upgrade) for completed tests. All selected tests on all Diagnostic screens will be executed. To abort a Run Now Test run, press F7. Any tests not yet executing will not be started.
WIRELINE SRAM TEST HELP
This test is always run during a cold start, and never during a warm start. The user has no control over the execution of this test. This test verifies proper operation of the SRAM memory on the wireline board. If the test fails, the indication will be flashing LEDs on the front of the wireline board. An SRAM test failure is indicated by the LED's blinking two or three times repetitively.
WIRELINE EXTENSIVE SRAM TEST HELP
This is a purchasable option.
WIRELINE BASIC ROM TEST HELP
This test is always run during a reset. The user has no control over the execution of this test. This test verifies proper operation and contents of the ROM on the Wireline module. If this test fails, the indication will be flashing LEDs on the front of the Wireline module. A ROM test failure is indicated by the LED's blinking once repetitively.
WIRELINE HDLC LOOPBACK TEST HELP
This is a purchasable option.
WIRELINE MODEM LOOPBACK TEST HELP
This is a purchasable option.
WIRELINE 9.6V POWER SUPPLY TEST HELP
This is a purchasable option.
WIRELINE -9.6V POWER SUPPLY TEST HELP
This is a purchasable option.
WIRELINE COMPATIBILITY TEST
This is a purchasable option.
WIRELINE COMMUNICATIONS TEST HELP
This test checks for proper communications between the wireline module and the station control module. Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the manual for further actions to be taken.
WIRELINE A/D TEST HELP
This is a purchasable option.
RECEIVER TEST HELP
The Receiver Diagnostic tests are a set of tests that can be run with the goal of verifying the basic operation of the Receiver module. module. These tests can be run to verify that the internal operation of the Receiver Module is within specified operational limits. The Service Technician may select which diagnostics tests are to be run on the station, and when these tests should be executed. The technician may select any or all of the tests to be run at station power up (Cold Start), Station reset (Warm Start) or on demand (Run Diagnostics Now). Once all desired tests are selected, exiting the screen will automatically save the current set of Cold Start and Warm Start tests to the codeplug. Note: DSS-III Data Stations early versions will not execute the Cold and Warm Start diagnostic tests if selected, and will indicate this fact by means of the RSS displaying a warning message on entry to the Diagnostic Menu. Note that the Run Now tests are not saved in the station and will default to all tests deselected (off) when the Service Software is entered. The tests to be run are selected by first entering the desired Diagnostic Test Screen, and then moving the cursor to be on the same line as the desired test. The cursor can be moved to the desired column to select when the test should be run. Pressing the Space Bar will place an 'X' in the current column. Pressing the Space Bar a second time will deselect the test and remove the 'X' in the current column. To run the Run Now Tests selected, press OK. The information window will display the test currently being run, and the main screen will indicate PASS or FAIL (or PURCH_OP for tests that are not currently available or planned for implementation. If they do become available it would be as a purchased upgrade) for completed tests. All selected tests on all Diagnostic screens will be executed. To abort a Run Now Test run, press F7. Any tests not yet executing will not be started.
RECEIVER COMMUNICATIONS TEST HELP
This test checks for proper communications between the receiver module and the station control module. Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the manual for further actions to be taken.
RECEIVER COMPATIBILITY TEST HELP
This is a purchasable option.
RECEIVER 5V POWER SUPPLY TEST HELP
This test checks for proper operation of the 5 Volt regulator on the receiver. Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the manual for further actions to be taken.
RECEIVER 10V POWER SUPPLY TEST HELP
This test checks for proper operation of the 10 Volt regulator on the receiver. Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the manual for further actions to be taken.
RECEIVER 14V POWER SUPPLY TEST HELP
This test checks for proper operation of the 14 Volt regulator on the receiver. Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the manual for further actions to be taken.
RECEIVER PREAMP BIAS TEST HELP
This test checks for proper preamp bias on the receiver. Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the manual for further actions to be taken.
RECEIVER 2.1 MHZ REFERENCE LEVEL TEST HELP
This test checks for proper 2.1 MHz Reference Level on the receiver. NOTE: The 2.1 MHZ reference frequency from the reference oscillator must be present for this test to be valid. Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the manual for further actions to be taken.
RECEIVER INJECTION TEST HELP
This test checks for proper injection level on the receiver. Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the manual for further actions to be taken.
RECEIVER SYNTHESIZER TEST HELP
This test checks for proper operation of the synthesizer on the receiver. Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the manual for further actions to be taken.
RECEIVER ABACUS CLOCK/DATA TEST HELP
This is a purchasable option.
POWER AMPLIFIER TESTS HELP
The Power Amplifier Diagnostic tests are a set of tests that can be run with the goal of verifying the basic operation of the Power Amplifier module. These tests can be run to verify that the internal operation of the Power Amplifier Module is within specified operational limits. The Service Technician may select which diagnostics tests are to be run on the station, and when these tests should be executed. The technician may select any or all of the tests to be run at station power up (Cold Start), Station reset (Warm Start) or on demand (Run Diagnostics Now). Once all desired tests are selected, exiting the screen will automatically save the current set of Cold Start and Warm Start tests to the codeplug. Note: DSS-III Data Stations early versions will not execute the Cold and Warm Start diagnostic tests if selected, and will indicate this fact by means of the RSS displaying a warning message on entry to the Diagnostic Menu. Note that the Run Now tests are not saved in the station and will default to all tests deselected (off) when the Service Software is entered. The tests to be run are selected by first entering the desired Diagnostic Test Screen, and then moving the cursor to be on the same line as the desired test. The cursor can be moved to the desired column to select when the test should be run. Pressing the Space Bar will place an 'X' in the current column. Pressing the Space Bar a second time will deselect the test and remove the 'X' in the current column. To run the Run Now Tests selected, press OK. The information window will display the test currently being run, and the main screen will indicate PASS or FAIL (or PURCH_OP for tests that are not currently available or planned for implementation. If they do become available it would be as a purchased upgrade) for completed tests. All selected tests on all Diagnostic screens will be executed. To abort a Run Now Test run, press F7. Any tests not yet executing will not be started.
POWER AMPLIFIER COMMUNICATIONS TEST HELP
This is a purchasable option.
POWER AMPLIFIER COMPATIBILITY TEST HELP
This is a purchasable option.
POWER AMPLIFIER POWER SUPPLY TEST HELP
This is a purchasable option.
POWER AMPLIFIER HEATSINK TEMPERATURE TEST HELP
This is a purchasable option.
POWER AMPLIFIER FAN ALARM TEST HELP
This is a purchasable option.
EXCITER DIAGNOSTIC TESTS HELP
The Exciter Diagnostic tests are a set of tests that can be run with the goal of verifying the basic operation of the Exciter module. These tests can be run to verify that the internal operation of the Exciter Module is within specified operational limits. The Service Technician may select which diagnostics tests are to be run on the station, and when these tests should be executed. The technician may select any or all of the tests to be run at station power up (Cold Start), Station reset (Warm Start) or on demand (Run Diagnostics Now). Once all desired tests are selected, exiting the screen will automatically save the current set of Cold Start and Warm Start tests to the codeplug. Note: DSS-III Data Stations early versions will not execute the Cold and Warm Start diagnostic tests if selected, and will indicate this fact by means of the RSS displaying a warning message on entry to the Diagnostic Menu. Note that the Run Now tests are not saved in the station and will default to all tests deselected (off) when the Service Software is entered. The tests to be run are selected by first entering the desired Diagnostic Test Screen, and then moving the cursor to be on the same line as the desired test. The cursor can be moved to the desired column to select when the test should be run. Pressing the Space Bar will place an 'X' in the current column. Pressing the Space Bar a second time will deselect the test and remove the 'X' in the current column. To run the Run Now Tests selected, press OK. The information window will display the test currently being run, and the main screen will indicate PASS or FAIL (or PURCH_OP for tests that are not currently available or planned for implementation. If they do become available it would be as a purchased upgrade) for completed tests. All selected tests on all Diagnostic screens will be executed. To abort a Run Now Test run, press F7. Any tests not yet executing will not be started.
EXCITER COMMUNICATIONS TEST HELP
This test checks for proper communications between the exciter module and the station control module. Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the manual for further actions to be taken.
EXCITER BASIC RAM TEST HELP
This test is always run at powerup or reset. This test verifies proper operation of the SRAM memory on the Exciter module. If the test fails, the only indication will be flashing LEDs on the front of the Exciter module. An SRAM test failure is indicated by the PA Low and PA Fail LEDs flashing rapidly back and forth and the PA Full LED being constantly on. If this test fails the exciter will not function. Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the manual for further actions to be taken.
EXCITER EXTENSIVE RAM TEST HELP
This is a purchasable option.
EXCITER BASIC EPROM TEST HELP
This test is always run during reset. This test verifies proper operation and contents of the ROM on the Exciter module. If this test fails, the indication will be flashing LEDs on the front of the Exciter module. A ROM test failure is indicated by the PA Low and PA Fail LEDs flashing rapidly back and forth and the Tx Lock LED being constantly on. If this test fails the exciter will not operate. Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the manual for further actions to be taken.
EXCITER BASIC EEPROM TEST HELP
This test is always run during reset. This test verifies proper operation and contents of the EEPROMs on the Exciter Module. If this test fails, an alarm will be logged on the station control module. If this test fails the exciter will not operate until the station is re-aligned; minimally, the Tx Deviation and the Reference Modulation Compensation alignments must be performed. Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the manual for further actions to be taken.
EXCITER EXTENSIVE EEPROM TEST HELP
This is a purchasable option.
EXCITER 2.1 MHZ REFERENCE LEVEL TEST HELP
This is a purchasable option.
EXCITER SYNTHESIZER LOCK TEST HELP
This test checks for proper operation of the synthesizer on the Exciter module. Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the manual for further actions to be taken.
POWER SUPPLY TESTS HELP
The Power Supply Diagnostic tests are a set of tests that can be run with the goal of verifying the basic operation of the Power Supply module. These tests can be run to verify that the internal operation of the Power Supply Module is within specified operational limits. The Service Technician may select which diagnostics tests are to be run on the station, and when these tests should be executed. The technician may select any or all of the tests to be run at station power up (Cold Start), Station reset (Warm Start) or on demand (Run Diagnostics Now). Once all desired tests are selected, exiting the screen will automatically save the current set of Cold Start and Warm Start tests to the codeplug. Note: DSS-III Data Stations early versions will not execute the Cold and Warm Start diagnostic tests if selected, and will indicate this fact by means of the RSS displaying a warning message on entry to the Diagnostic Menu. Note that the Run Now tests are not saved in the station and will default to all tests deselected (off) when the Service Software is entered. The tests to be run are selected by first entering the desired Diagnostic Test Screen, and then moving the cursor to be on the same line as the desired test. The cursor can be moved to the desired column to select when the test should be run. Pressing the Space Bar will place an 'X' in the current column. Pressing the Space Bar a second time will deselect the test and remove the 'X' in the current column. To run the Run Now Tests selected, press OK. The information window will display the test currently being run, and the main screen will indicate PASS or FAIL (or PURCH_OP for tests that are not currently available or planned for implementation. If they do become available it would be as a purchased upgrade) for completed tests. All selected tests on all Diagnostic screens will be executed. To abort a Run Now Test run, press F7. Any tests not yet executing will not be started.
POWER SUPPLY COMMUNICATIONS TEST HELP
This test checks for proper communications between the Power supply module and the station control module. Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the manual for further actions to be taken.
POWER SUPPLY MODULE FAIL TEST HELP
This test checks for overall failure of the Power Supply module. Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the manual for further actions to be taken.
POWER SUPPLY INPUT VOLTAGE TEST HELP
This test checks for proper input voltage to the Power Supply module. Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the manual for further actions to be taken.
POWER SUPPLY 28V TEST HELP
This test checks the 28 Volt output of the Power Supply module. Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the manual for further actions to be taken.
POWER SUPPLY 14V TEST HELP
This test checks the 14 Volt output of the Power Supply module. Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the manual for further actions to be taken.
POWER SUPPLY 5V TEST HELP
This test checks the 5 Volt output of the Power Supply module. Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the manual for further actions to be taken.
POWER SUPPLY BATTERY TEMPERATURE TEST HELP
This is a purchasable option.
POWER SUPPLY HEAT SINK TEMPERATURE TEST HELP
This test checks for an overheated heatsink on the Power Supply module. Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the manual for further actions to be taken.
POWER SUPPLY VOLTAGE RIPPLE TEST HELP
This test checks for excessive voltage ripple on the Power Supply module. This test is not available for certain types of Power Supplies. Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the manual for further actions to be taken.
POWER SUPPLY BATTERY VOLTAGE TEST HELP
This test checks for proper battery voltage on those Power Supply modules equipped with battery backup. Upon failure of this test refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the manual for further actions to be taken.
POWER SUPPLY FAN ALARM TEST HELP
This test checks for proper operation of the fans on the Power Supply module. This test is only valid for Quantar stations and certain types of power supplies. Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the manual for further actions to be taken.
STATUS PANEL/SOFTWARE VERSION/SET STATION DATE AND TIME MENU HELP
The Status Panel Display is available only when the RSS is connected
to a station or comparator.
The Status Panel Display screen will allow the user to view and/or modify
the connected device's parameters.
Button Descriptions:
Help - Recalls this Help Screen.
F2 - Status Panel Display.
Displays information of the device's different parameters. In an
expanded conventional comparator configuration, this screen is
only accessible from the PRIMARY comparator and will display
information for all of the comparators in the expanded comparator
configuration.
F3 - Device Software Version.
Displays information of device's software versions.
F9 - Set Device's Date/Time.
STATUS PANEL DISPLAY HELP
WARNING: Keeping the RSS in Status Panel Mode, particularly for
IntelliRepeater stations, may result in the station resetting due
to task overloads. this reset will occur only if the station is
sufficiently 'busy'.
The Status Panel Display screen allows the user to view and/or modify
selected station parameters of the station front panel.
The user can change current channel, speaker volume level, speaker
squelch, wireline squelch, intercom, and disable access to the station
by non-RSS users.
Use the buttons to change the current operating mode of the station.
The RSS will send a command to the station
to reflect the desired change on a specific station parameter.
NOTE: The ability to change the station settings for these fields is
greatly affected by how 'busy' the station currently is. If you
attempt to change Channels, Speaker Volume Level, Access Disable
Intercom, Squelch or attempt to Reset the station and the station
does not accept the change, please try again.
The STATION MODE field displays the station's current operating mode. This
field will display: BOGUS, CONTROL, FAILSOFT, FAILSOFT/ACTIVE MASTER, FORCED
SIMULCAST, NORMAL SIMULCAST, VOICE/SCANNING, VOICE, or VOICE/ACTIVE MASTER.
The LOCAL SPEAKER VOLUME field displays the current volume level of the
local station speaker as a percentage of Full Volume.
Use the left and right arrow buttons to change the volume of the speaker.
The ACCESS DISABLE field displays the current state of the station.
The access disable can be ON/OFF.
If ACCESS DISABLE is ON, all of the keyups are disabled, except for local
PTT and RSS Diagnostic keyups.
If ACCESS DISABLE is OFF, the station operates on its normal state.
Use the "Access Enable" and "Access Disable" buttons to change the access
disable state.
The CHANNEL NUMBER field displays the station's current operating channel.
Use the "Prev Channel" and "Next Channel" buttons to change the current
channel.
For Release 3.1 and later station firmware:
The RCVR SQUELCH field displays the station's current speaker and wireline
squelch operating modes. The squelch modes are: CSQ/PL/OFF.
Use the "OFF/CSQ/PL" button to change the squelch operating mode.
The INTERCOM field displays the station's current intercom state.
The intercom can be ON/OFF.
Use the Intercom "ON" and "OFF" buttons to change the intercom state.
NOTE: The RSS Status Panel displays the Tx Frequency associated with the
currently active receive channel frequency and not the frequency
of the current channel. The current channel defines the frequency
that the station is actually transmitting on. Since the RSS always
displays an RX/TX frequency pair as defined in the channel
configuration screens, it was not possible to display the actual
receive frequency and transmit frequency. Thus, the RSS displays the
RX/TX frequency pair associated with the active receive activity.
Following are the possible states displayed and their meanings:
CONTROL ON - The control module is fully functional. (Normal Operation)
CONTROL FAIL - The control module is no longer able to handle all
functional tasks. Service is required.
TX LOCK - Synthesizer is locked and Exciter Microprocessor
is functional.
TX UNLOCKED - Synthesizer is unlocked and not functional.
RX ACTIVE - A valid received RF signal has been detected.
RX INACTIVE - The Receiver is currently inactive. (Normal Operation)
RX2 ACTIVE - A valid received RF signal has been detected on the Second
Receiver.
RX2 INACTIVE - The Second Receiver is currently inactive. (Normal
Operation)
RX2 NOT INST - A Second Receiver module is not installed in the station.
WL ON - The Wireline module is fully functional. (Normal Operation)
WL FAIL - The Wireline module has malfunctioned or power is off.
REF ACTIVE - External reference or UHSO active (if present).
REF INACTIVE - No external reference available or UHSO inactive.
PA INACTIVE - PA is operational but not keyed. (Normal Operation)
PA FULL - Station is keyed and at expected power.
PA LOW - Station is keyed and at reduced power.
PA FAIL - PA not making minimum forward voltage, or PA fan fail,
Final PA VSWR alarm, Open Power Loop Alarm, Power Level
problem, or Overdrive alarm. NOTE: The station will still
be able to be keyed.
RX LOCK - Receiver is locked.
RX2 LOCK - The Second Receiver is locked.
RX2 UNLOCKED - The Second Receiver is unlocked.
RX2 FAIL - The second receiver is absent or not functioning properly.
AC ON - Power Supply module is receiving AC Power.
AC FAIL - Power Supply Malfunction.
UHSO COLD - UHSO not yet at operating temperature in the station
(7.5 minute warm-up may be overridden at the SERVICE:
ALIGNMENT menu)
SITE DISABLED - site is not trunking and not failsoft, no communication
available
SITE LOCAL TRUNK - performing local trunking functionality, no inter-site
communication
SITE WIDE TRUNK - inter-site communication available
SITE FAILSOFT - site is not trunking, no inter-site communication
SITE TEST - station is being put through initialization and
diagnostic routines, no communication is available
PIB ENABLED - PIB is functional
PIB DISABLED - PIB is not functional
PIB DIAG ENABLED - running diagnostics
PIB DIAG DISABLED - running diagnostics while PIB is disabled
PIB NO STATE - hardware is missing or PIB failed
PIB MALFUNCTION - test failed on PIB
ANALOG LINK ENABLED - analog link is functional
ANALOG LINK DISABLED - analog link is not functional
ANALOG LINK DIAG ENABLED - running diagnostics
ANALOG LINK DIAG DISABLED - running diagnostics while analog link is
disabled
ANALOG LINK NO STATE - hardware is missing or analog link failed
ANALOG LINK MALFUNCTION - test failed on analog link
DIGITAL LINK ENABLED - digital link is functional
DIGITAL LINK DISABLED - digital link is not functional
DIGITAL LINK DIAG ENABLED - running diagnostics
DIGITAL LINK DIAG DISABLED - running diagnostics while digital link is
disabled
DIGITAL LINK NO STATE - hardware is missing or digital link failed
DIGITAL LINK MALFUNCTION - test failed on digital link
DLAN1 UP - station is communicating with other stations at site
DLAN1 DOWN - station is isolated
TRANSMIT ENABLED - exciter is functional
TRANSMIT DISABLED - exciter is not functional
TRANSMIT DIAG ENABLED - running diagnostics
TRANSMIT DIAG DISABLED - running diagnostics while exciter is disabled
TRANSMIT NO STATE - hardware is missing or exciter module failed
TRANSMIT MALFUNCTION - test failed on exciter module
RECEIVE ENABLED - receiver is functional
RECEIVE DISABLED - receiver is not functional
RECEIVE DIAG ENABLED - running diagnostics
RECEIVE DIAG DISABLED - running diagnostics while receiver is disabled
RECEIVE NO STATE - hardware is missing or receiver module failed
RECEIVE MALFUNCTION - test failed on receiver module
BOOSTER N/I - no booster amp is installed in the station
BOOSTER ON - external booster amp is operational
BOOSTER FAIL - external booster amp has failed
STATUS MESSAGES:
The bottom line of the screen will display any Status message
that occurs while the Status Panel screen is visible.
Only the last received status message will be displayed.
To view the entire message use the Left-Arrow and Right-Arrow keys.
Status messages indicate (in order, left to right): First Occurrence of
message, Most Recent Occurrence of message, Number of times message has
occurred, and description. The user may refer to the RSS manual,
Diagnostics and Status section for the proper action to take if a specific
alarm is seen.
NOTE: The Status messages will also be queued in the station's memory and
can be recalled from the Service:Status Report Screen.
Button Descriptions:
Help - Recalls this Help Screen.
Next Channel - Change to Next Channel. (Non-Trunked stations only)
Prev Channel - Change to Previous Channel. (Non-Trunked stations only)
IR Channel Enable - Enable Repeater.
IR Channel Disable - Disable Repeater.
Reset - Reset the station.
Access Disable - Turn Access Disable ON.
Access Enable - Turn Access Disable OFF.
KeyUp - Keyup the station.
Dekey - Dekey the station.
INTELLIREPEATER STATUS PANEL DISPLAY HELP
The Status Panel Display screen allow the user to view and/or modify
selected station parameters of the station front panel.
The user can Enable, Disable, and Test a Repeater.
Use the buttons to change the current operating mode of the repeater.
The RSS will send a command to the repeater
to reflect the desired change on a specific repeater parameter/function.
NOTE: The ability to change the repeater settings for these fields is
greatly affected by how 'busy' the repeater currently is. If you
attempt to change the functionality of a repeater and the repeater
does not accept the change, please try again.
The REPEATER NUMBER field displays the repeater number of an IR site.
The REPEATER MODE field displays the repeater's current operating mode.
The repeater mode can be: VOICE, VOICE/ACTIVE MASTER,
CONTROL, CONTROL/ACTIVE MASTER,
FAILSOFT, FAILSOFT/ACTIVE MASTER
Following are the possible states displayed and their meanings:
RECEIVE - ENABLED, DISABLED, DIAG ENABLED, DIAG DISABLED,
NO STATE, MALFUNCTION
TRANSMIT - ENABLED, DISABLED, DIAG ENABLED, DIAG DISABLED,
NO STATE, MALFUNCTION
WIRELINE - ENABLED, DISABLED, DIAG ENABLED, DIAG DISABLED,
NO STATE, MALFUNCTION
DLAN1 - UP, DOWN
DLAN2 - UP, DOWN
SITE - DISABLED, LOCAL TRUNK, WIDE TRUNK, FAILSOFT, TEST
STATUS MESSAGES:
The bottom line of the screen will display any Status message
that occurs while the Status Panel screen is visible.
Only the last received status message will be displayed.
To view the entire message use the Left-Arrow and Right-Arrow buttons.
Status messages indicate (in order, left to right): First Occurrence of
message, Most Recent Occurrence of message, Number of times message has
occurred, and description. The user may refer to the RSS manual,
Diagnostics and Status section for the proper action to take if a specific
alarm is seen.
NOTE: The Status messages will also be queued in the station's memory and
can be recalled from the Status Report Screen.
DATE HELP
Enter the current date in this format: YYYY-MM-DD
where: YYYY represents the year,
MM represents the month,
DD represents the day of the month.
After the date has been entered, press button "OK" or "Apply" to send the new
date and time to the connected device.
TIME HELP
Enter the current time in this format: HH:MM:SS
Where HH ranges from 00 through 24 (hours)
MM ranges from 00 through 59 (minutes)
SS ranges from 00 through 59 (seconds)
After the time has been entered, press button "OK" or "Apply" to send the new
date and time to the connected device.
CHANNEL INFORMATION HELP
This screen is used to Modify channel-specific parameters for the single channel in the station.
CHANNEL INFORMATION HELP
This screen is used to Add, Delete, and Modify channel-specific
parameters for all channels desired in the station. Values entered will
only apply to the currently selected channel.
Button Descriptions:
Help - Recalls this Help Screen.
Add Channel - Add New Channel to end of Channel List.
(Conventional, non-Multi-PL stations Only)
Previous Channel - Display the previous Channel Data.
(Conventional, non-Multi-PL stations Only)
Next Channel - Display the next Channel Data.
(Conventional, non-Multi-PL stations Only)
Delete Channel - Delete Currently Displayed Channel.
(Conventional, non-Multi-PL stations Only)
WARNING: When deleting a channel, make sure that any references to that
channel number in TRC, DC, or WildCard tables are changed to
another defined channel number. Inconsistent station operation
may result if the TRC, DC, or WildCard tables attempt to reference
an undefined channel number.
NOTE: When adding a channel, the parameters of the currently displayed
channel will be copied to the new channel automatically. The added channel
will always be added to the end of the current channel list.
Audio Filters: There may be special applications where the station is used
as an RF modem and not for analog voice applications. There are three
filters which are used in analog voice applications which can be bypassed
to improve the RF modem application. These three filters are: Pre-
emphasis, De-emphasis, and Rx Hi-Pass Filter. The removal of these
filters enables the analog audio signal to be transmitted and received
by the station without it being altered by the filters and, in essence,
provides a flat audio path through the station.
CHANNEL NUMBER HELP
Enter the desired channel in this field. Press Enter or Tab to accept and to display the channel information for the new channel. Valid range is 1 to the current number of channels programmed, up to the absolute maximum of 16 channels for Conventional operation, except in 6809 Trunking systems, and DSS-III data stations, where only one channel is allowed. NOTE: Adding or deleting channels will not be allowed while the cursor is in this field. First move to another field then attempt adding or deleting channels.
RX FREQUENCY HELP
Enter the desired receive frequency, (in MHz), into this field. Press
Enter or Tab to validate the frequency entered and to move to the next
field.
If the station is equipped with two receivers, only one receiver can
be active at any given time. The user specifies which receiver is
inactive for that channel by setting its receive frequency to zero.
NOTE: If frequencies are defined for both Rx1 and Rx2, only Rx1 will
be used.
NOTE: If a frequency is entered which is not divisible by 6.25 kHz or
5.00 kHz for UHF, 800 and 900 MHz bands or 3.125 kHz or 2.5 KHz for the
VHF band, a warning will be displayed to the user. However, the
frequency may be still accepted if the user desires.
It is allowable to enter frequencies not in the currently enabled
RX Frequency or Tx Frequency bands. (See the SERVICE:STATION
CONFIGURATION screen for current settings). A warning will be issued
to the user if an out-of-band frequency is entered; however, the
frequency may be still accepted if the user desires.
NOTE: Splinter Frequencies
The station will synthesize the following VHF frequencies even though
the RSS rejects them as not being divisible by 3.125 or 2.5 kHz.
Splinter
Frequency
> 154.37125
> 154.46375
> 154.47125
> 154.47875
> 169.17200
> 169.80700
RX2 FREQUENCY HELP
The Rx2 Frequency field is not editable when the Rx Freq Band 2 field
on the Hardware Configuration screen is set to NONE.
Enter the desired receive frequency, (in MHz), into this field. Press
Enter or Tab to validate the frequency entered and to move to the next
field.
If the station is equipped with two receivers, only one receiver can
be active at any given time. The user specifies which receiver is
inactive for that channel by setting its receive frequency to zero.
NOTE: If frequencies are defined for both Rx1 and Rx2, only Rx1 will
be used.
NOTE: If a frequency is entered which is not divisible by 6.25 kHz or
5.00 kHz for UHF, 800 and 900 MHz bands or 3.125 kHz or 2.5 KHz for the
VHF band, a warning will be displayed to the user. However, the
frequency may be still accepted if the user desires.
It is allowable to enter frequencies not in the currently enabled
RX Frequency or Tx Frequency bands. (See the SERVICE:STATION
CONFIGURATION screen for current settings). A warning will be issued
to the user if an out-of-band frequency is entered; however, the
frequency may be still accepted if the user desires.
NOTE: Splinter Frequencies
The station will synthesize the following VHF frequencies even though
the RSS rejects them as not being divisible by 3.125 or 2.5 kHz.
Splinter
Frequency
> 154.37125
> 154.46375
> 154.47125
> 154.47875
> 169.17200
> 169.80700
TX FREQUENCY HELP
Enter the desired transmit frequency, (in MHz), into this field. Press
Enter or Tab to validate the frequency entered and to move to the next
field.
NOTE: If a frequency is entered which is not divisible by 6.25 kHz or
5.00 kHz for UHF, 800 and 900 MHz bands or 3.125 kHz or 2.5 KHz for the
VHF band, a warning will be displayed to the user. However, the frequency
may be still accepted if the user desires.
It is allowable to enter frequencies not in the currently enabled
RX Frequency or Tx Frequency bands. (See the SERVICE:STATION
CONFIGURATION screen for current settings). A warning will be issued
to the user if an out-of-band frequency is entered; however, the
frequency may be still accepted if the user desires.
NOTE: The Tx Idle Frequency must be set to a non-zero value regardless
of the Tx Frequency value. For DBS Stations, the Tx Idle Frequency
will be automatically set to match the Tx Frequency.
The actual channel keyup time (i.e. time for the station to switch
from the Idle frequency to the channel transmit frequency) will be directly
proportional to the frequency difference between the Tx Frequency and the
Tx Idle Frequency. Certain applications (Trunking and Data) require minimal
delay when switching between TX IDLE and TX Frequencies in order to maximize
system throughput. In these configurations, the TX IDLE Frequency
should be set to match the Tx Frequency.
NOTE: Splinter Frequencies
The station will synthesize the following VHF frequencies even though the
RSS rejects them as not being divisible by 3.125 kHz or 2.5 kHz.
When the user enters a VHF Tx frequency that is considered a splinter
frequency, the user must then enter an idle frequency that is divisible
by 2.5 kHz or 3.125 kHz. The frequency calculated by the RSS
may not be synthesizable and must be manually corrected by the user.
When TX and RX frequencies are the same, the Idle frequency is calculated
by the RSS to be 90 Khz below the transmit frequency and must be corrected
as shown below.
Splinter Calculated Corrected
Frequency Idle Frequency Idle Frequency
> 154.37125 154.28125 OK
> 154.46375 154.37375 Change to 154.375
> 154.47125 154.38125 OK
> 154.47875 154.38875 Change to 154.38
> 169.17200 169.08200 Change to 169.0825
> 169.80700 169.71700 Change to 169.7175
TX IDLE FREQUENCY HELP
Enter the desired transmit idle frequency (in MHz) into this field.
Press Enter or Tab to validate the frequency entered and to move to the
next field.
NOTE: If a frequency is entered which is not divisible by 6.25 kHz or
5.00 kHz for UHF, 800 and 900 MHz bands or 3.125 kHz or 2.5 KHz for the
VHF band, a warning will be displayed to the user. However, the frequency
may be still accepted if the user desires. If the RX and TX frequencies
are different, the TX IDLE frequency should be set equal to the TX
frequency.
It is allowable to enter frequencies not in the currently enabled
RX Frequency or Tx Frequency bands. (See the SERVICE:STATION
CONFIGURATION screen for current settings). A warning will be issued
to the user if an out-of-band frequency is entered; however, the
frequency may be still accepted if the user desires.
NOTE: The actual channel keyup time (i.e. time for the station to switch
from the Idle frequency to the channel transmit frequency) will be directly
proportional to the frequency difference between the Tx Frequency and the
Tx Idle Frequency. Certain applications (Trunking) require minimal delay
between switching between these states. In Trunking configurations, make
the Tx Idle frequency the same as the Tx Frequency.
NOTE: In order for the station to work properly, the Tx Idle Frequency
must be set to a non-zero value even if the transmitter is disabled by
setting the Tx Freq to zero unless it the station's hardware platform
is QUANTAR SATELLITE RECEIVER or ASTRO-TAC RECEIVER.
NOTE: Splinter Frequencies
The station will synthesize the following frequencies even though the RSS
rejects them as not being divisible by 3.125 or 2.5 kHz.
When the user enters a Tx frequency that is considered a splinter
frequency, the user must then enter an idle frequency that is divisible
by 2.5 kHz or 3.125 kHz. The frequency calculated by the RSS
may not be synthesizable and must be manually corrected by the user.
When TX and RX frequencies are the same, the Idle frequency is calculated
by the RSS to be 90 Khz below the transmit frequency and must be corrected
as shown below.
Splinter Calculated Corrected
Frequency Idle Frequency Idle Frequency
> 154.37125 154.28125 OK
> 154.46375 154.37375 Change to 154.375
> 154.47125 154.38125 OK
> 154.47875 154.38875 Change to 154.38
> 169.17200 169.08200 Change to 169.0825
> 169.80700 169.71700 Change to 169.7175
RECEIVE CHANNEL BANDWIDTH HELP
Press the Up/Down Arrows to select between the four toggle choices for
this field. Allowed choices are WIDE 25 - 30 kHz, NPSPAC 25 kHz
NARROW 12.5 - 15 kHz, and NARROW 12.5 kHz.
Typically, NPSPAC 25 KHz should be selected for 821-824 MHz
installations within the U.S.
Typicial installations:
Receive Channel Bandwidth Tx Rated Deviation
------------------------- ------------------
25 kHz 5.0 kHz
NPSPAC 4.0 kHz
12.5 - 15 kHz 2.5 kHz
12.5 kHz 2.5 kHz
Press Enter or Tab to validate the selection and to move to the next
field.
NOTES:
Uses for the various types of receive bandwidth filters -
- 25 kHz - Typically used in 25 kHz channels for VHF, UHF and 800 MHz.
This filter is used for SECURENET applications. ASTRO may be used on
this channel with this bandwidth selected.
- NPSPAC - Only used in the US for 821-824 MHz band for Public Safety
installations where 25 kHz channels are used but are geographically
planned for 12.5 kHz separation. ASTRO may be used on this channel
with this bandwidth selected.
- 12.5 - 15 kHz - Typically used for European 12.5 kHz channels and for
the US in the 900 MHz band. This filter provides 40 dB ACIPR in a 12.5
kHz channel. ASTRO may be used on this channel with this bandwidth
selected.
- 12.5 kHz Narrow - This filter is used for 12.5 kHz channels where
ASTRO operation is desired. Operation on these channels is either
digital (ASTRO) only or mixed mode digital/analog. This filter provides
60 dB ACIPR in a 12.5 kHz channel. When the 12.5 kHz Narrow filter is selected,
the Noise Canceller field on the Channel Information screen's Advanced tab
must be set to DISABLED.
TX RATED DEVIATION HELP
Use the Up/Down Arrow keys to toggle between legal choices for this
channel. Possible choices are: 2.500, 4.000, and 5.000 kHz.
Press Enter or Tab to validate the selection and to move to the next field.
Typicial installations:
Receive Channel Bandwidth Tx Rated Deviation
------------------------- ------------------
12.5 KHz 2.5 KHz
25 KHz 5.0 KHz
NPSPAC 4.0 KHz
Default Rated Deviation is 5.000 KHz.
CALL SIGN HELP
Enter the assigned Call Sign for the site into this field. Press Enter or Tab to validate the entry and to move to the next field. The station will transmit the Call Sign only if the station was keyed up at least once during the time specified in the Call Sign Interval timer field (On the RF CONFIGURATION screen). NOTE: Entry in this field is optional - no Call Sign is required for normal station operation. If this field is completely blanked, then no Call Sign will be transmitted by the station.
CALL SIGN OVER WIRELINE HELP
If this field is ENABLED, the entered call sign (see CALL SIGN help) will be transmitted over the wireline. Use the Up/Down Arrows to toggle between the choices ENABLED and DISABLED. Press Enter or TAB to validate the entry and to move to the next field. Note: ENABLED is not allowed in Spectra-TAC systems. Also, If Status Tone is enabled at the WIRELINE CONFIG screen, then Call Sign Over Wireline should be disabled.
=== ACCESS CODE TABLE HELP ===
This field displays the Access Code Table currently assigned to this channel. The Access Code Table number has a range of 1 to 16. Access Code Tables are used to specify the PL, DPL, and ASTRO Network Access Codes, NAC, to be used by each channel. Each channel must have an Access Code Table associated with it, even channels that are set up for Carrier Squelch operation. For both ANALOG and ASTRO systems, the code plug can be programmed for up to 16 Access Code Tables. A minimum of one Access Code Table is required in each codeplug. NOTE: More than one channel may use the same Access Code Table, and any channel may use any access code table. The code plug can contain Access Code Tables that are not associated with any channel. These unassigned tables can be dynamically assigned to a channel using Wild Card commands or, in ASTRO systems, from DIU commands received on the wireline.
CARRIER SQUELCH TRANSITION HELP
Carrier squelch performance provides two threshold selections, NORMAL and SHIFTED. NORMAL operation sets squelch performance so that the receiver unsquelches in 20 milliseconds for signals above squelch set level and unsquelches in 180 milliseconds for signals below the squelch set level but above receiver sensitivity. SHIFTED operation sets squelch performance so that the receiver unsquelches in 20 milliseconds for signals above 1 microvolt and unsquelches in 180 milliseconds for signals below 1 microvolt but above the receiver sensitivity.
MODULATION TYPE HELP
This field is dependent on the Station Type selected at the SERVICE:HARDWARE CONFIGURATION screen. Depending on the Station type, this field may be toggled through a subset of the following legal choices: ASTRO SECURENET ANALOG/ASTRO ANALOG/SECURENET ANALOG ASTRO RX WIDE DEV Press Enter or TAB to validate the entry and to move to the next field. NOTE: If ASTRO RX WIDE DEV is selected it is highly recommended that the Tx Rated Deviation be set to 5.00 kHz and Receive Channel BW be set to WIDE 25-30 kHz Channel Spacing. This field must be manually set to match the capabilities enabled by both the DISPATCH CAPABILITY field and the SECURE CAPABILITY field.
RX ACTIVATION HELP
Press the Up/Down Arrow buttons to toggle through the allowed choices
of ON, OFF, S=Carrier Squelch (Rx carrier detected), C=PL/DPL,
(Legal PL detected), or SC=Carrier and PL/DPL (Both Rx Carrier
and legal PL detected).
If ON=Unsquelched is selected, the Receiver will always be unsquelched.
If OFF is selected, the Receiver will always be fully squelched.
Initial Default setting is 'S=Carrier Squelch'.
If 'Carrier Squelch' or 'Carrier Squelch and PL/DPL' is selected be certain
that a valid PL or DPL code is defined and selected in the Access Code
Table for the Receiver for this channel; otherwise, this function will not
work. (In this case, CSQ is not a valid choice in the PL field in the
Access Code Table screen).
NOTE: In MCS Multi-PL applications, only SC=Carrier and PL/DPL and C=PL/DPL
are valid choices.
REPEATER ACTIVATION HELP
Press the Up/Down Arrow buttons to toggle through the allowed choices
of ON, OFF, S=Carrier Squelch (Rx carrier detected), C=PL/DPL,
(Legal PL detected), or SC=Carrier and PL/DPL (Both Rx Carrier
and legal PL detected).
If ON=Unsquelched is selected, the Repeater will always be unsquelched.
If OFF is selected, the Repeater will always be fully squelched.
Initial default setting is 'S=Carrier Squelch'.
If 'Carrier Squelch' or 'Carrier Squelch and PL/DPL' is selected be certain
that a valid PL or DPL code is defined and selected in the Access Code
Table for the Receiver for this channel; otherwise, this function will not
work. (In this case, CSQ is not a valid choice in the PL field in the
Access Code Table screen).
NOTE: In MCS Multi-PL applications, only SC=Carrier and PL/DPL and C=PL/DPL
are valid choices.
REPEATER HOLD_IN HELP
Press the Up/Down Arrow buttons to toggle through the allowed choices
of ON, OFF, S=Carrier Squelch (Rx carrier detected), C=PL/DPL,
(Legal PL detected), or SC=Carrier and PL/DPL (Both Rx Carrier
and legal PL detected).
If ON is selected, the Repeater will always be On.
If OFF is selected, the Repeater will always be Off.
Initial default setting is 'S=Carrier Squelch'.
If 'Carrier Squelch' or 'Carrier Squelch and PL/DPL' is selected be certain
that a valid PL or DPL code is defined and selected in the Access Code
Table for the Receiver for this channel; otherwise, this function will not
work. (In this case, CSQ is not a valid choice in the PL field in the
Access Code Table screen).
NOTE: In MCS Multi-PL applications, only SC=Carrier and PL/DPL and C=PL/DPL
are valid choices.
ANALOG RPTR ACCESS HELP
For systems where this parameter is set to NONE, the station will repeat on carrier detect and/or PL/DPL detect. For systems in which the subscriber units utilize MDC preamble or DTMF or Singletone to access the repeater, then this field must be set to MDC/TONE. For these systems, the station will require not only the carrier squelch and PL/DPL conditions described above, but also an MDC or DTMF or Singletone preample to enable the repeat function. This field is normally set to NONE.
TX POWER OUT HELP
Use the digit keys to enter the desired Tx output power for this channel into the field. Press Enter or Tab to validate the entry and to move to the next field. NOTE: Enter the desired power level, within the limits as displayed in the top right status window when help is exited. If the Limited Power Ouptut option is enabled, the upper limit will be determined by that option or the normal upper limit, which ever is lower.
TX POWER OUT-BATTERY BACKUP HELP
Use the digit keys to enter the desired Tx output power for this channel when operating from the Backup Battery power supply. Press Enter or Tab to validate the entry and to move to the next field. For high power Quantar stations, the station will maintain the PA output power as defined in this field as long as the DC input voltage is above 27 Volts. When the DC voltage drops below 27 Volts, the output power will be derated based upon the input DC voltage level, until that level drops to 21 Volts. At that point, the output power will be shut down to protect the batteries. For low power Quantar stations, the station will maintain the PA output power as defined in this field as long as the DC input voltage is above 13.5 Volts. When the DC voltage drops below 13.5 Volts, the output power will be derated based upon the input DC voltage level, until that level drops to 10.5 Volts. At that point, the output power will be shut down to protect the batteries. NOTE: Enter the desired power level, within the limits as displayed in the top right status window when help is exited. If the Limited Power Output option is enabled, the upper limit will be determined by that option or the normal upper limit, which ever is lower.
LINE PTT TIME OUT TIMER HELP
Enter the desired PTT Time Out Timer value into this field.
Allowed range is 0 to 2550 seconds, where 0 indicates no TOT (TOT Disabled).
Default value is 120 seconds
NOTE: The TOT time can only be set in increments of 10 seconds.
The RSS will allow entry of values in 1 second increments
but will truncate the last digit and change it to 0.
NOTE: In voting systems, the Wireline Time Out Timer should normally be
set to 0; that is, disabled.
When subscribers talk back and forth, the comparator adds
a drop out delay to each transmission making the session
between subscribers look like a long single WL transmission.
Thus the station may easily time out on the wireline
transmission.
In ASTRO CAI systems, the comparator also adds a drop out
delay to the console transmission, thus making subscriber
to console sessions also look like a single long wireline
transmission to the station. For voting systems, both the
repeater time out timer and the wireline timeout timer should
be programmed in the comparator, not the station.
Press Enter or Tab to validate the entry and to move to the next
field.
LOCAL PTT TIME OUT TIMER HELP
Enter the desired LOCAL Time Out Timer value into this field.
Allowed range is 0 to 2550 seconds, where 0 indicates that
the TOT is disabled.
Default value is 0 seconds (TOT Disabled).
NOTE: The TOT time can only be set in increments of 10 seconds.
The RSS will allow entry of values in 1 second increments
but will truncate the last digit and change it to 0.
Press Enter or Tab to validate the entry and to move to the next
field.
REPEATER PTT TIME OUT TIMER HELP
Enter the desired REPEATER Time Out Timer value into this field.
Allowed range is 0 to 2550 seconds, where 0 indicates that
the TOT is disabled.
Default value is 60 seconds.
NOTE: The TOT time can only be set in increments of 10 seconds.
The RSS will allow entry of values in 1 second increments
but will truncate the last digit and change it to 0.
Press Enter or Tab to validate the entry and to move to the next
field.
PHONE PATCH PUSH TO TALK TIMEOUT TIMER HELP
Use this field to set the default push to talk timeout for Phone Patch.
(See the field Phone Patch Interface under the Hardware Configuration
screen before setting this field.) The value entered in this field defines
the maximum time in seconds a user may retain the Phone Patch Interface by
holding the Push to Talk button before the system cuts off the transmission.
A value of 0 disables the timer and allows users to retain the channel
indefinitely and is the default value for the timer as set in the factory.
This field is only accessible if Phone Patch Interface is Enabled in the
Hardware Configuration screen and has a valid range of 0 - 2550 seconds,
where 0 indicates that the TOT is disabled.
.
Default value is 0 seconds (TOT Disabled)
NOTE: The TOT time can only be set in increments of 10 seconds.
The RSS will allow entry of values in 1 second increments
but will truncate the last digit and change it to 0.
PHONE PATCH OPERATION HELP
Use this field to Select whether Phone Patch Operation is ENABLED or DISABLED. (See the field Phone Patch Interface under the Hardware Configuration screen before setting this field.) When Phone Patch Interface under the Hardware Configuration screen is set to enabled, each channel is by default set to be Phone Patch operational. Using this field each channel can be individually configured to utilize the Phone Patch Interface by selecting either ENABLED or DISABLED (Also see the field Phone Patch Timeout Timer on this screen. Note the field Phone Patch Timeout Timer is blanked and set to 0 when System Type is SmartNet).
REPEATER DROP OUT DELAY TIMER HELP
Enter the desired REPEATER DROP OUT DELAY Timer value into this field.
Allowed range is 0 to 2550 seconds, where 0 indicates zero seconds
delay.
Default value is 2 seconds.
NOTE: Unlike other TOTs, no 'infinite' timeout is available. Setting the
timer to 0 seconds will result in basically no delay before drop out.
Press Enter or Tab to validate the entry and to move to the next
field.
RPTR HOLDOFF HELP
This parameter will delay the receive audio signal to the transmit path for repeaters. Enabling this parameter will truncate the received signal at the beginning of the reception for the amount of time specified. The station will key up, optionally with PL/DPL if selected, as soon as the receive qualifiers have been met; and after the holdoff timer expires, receive audio is gated to the transmitter. This parameter is typically used in systems with subscriber MDC ID. This feature will prevent the MDC ID from being repeated. Allowed range is 0 to 2550 milliseconds. Default value is 0 msec.
COMPANDER HELP
The Compander field is used to selectively enable or disable the compander function in the Base Station. Use the Up/Dn Arrow Keys to toggle between the choices ENABLED and DISABLED. Default is DISABLED.
NOISE CANCELLER HELP
The Noise Canceller field is used to selectively enable or disable the Flutter Fighter function in the Base Station. For Multi-Coded Squelch systems, the Noise Canceller field will be set to DISABLED and cannot be set to ENABLED. The Noise Canceller field (Channel Information screen - Advanced tab) must not be ENABLED when the Station Type is set to ASTRO CAI OR when the narrow 12.5 kHz receive bandwidth filter is ENABLED. Use the Up/Dn Arrow Keys to toggle between the choices ENABLED and DISABLED. Default is DISABLED.
PTT PRIORITY HELP
Five types of PTT's exist: wireline(W), repeater(R), local(L), Phone Patch(M), and fast_key_up(D). Fast_key_up is typically used for data. The PTT's and their priority order are entered by the user. '>' (greater than) and '=' (equals) may be used to indicate priority precedence and equal levels of priority. Only the letters W R L M and D plus the symbols '>' and '=' may be entered. If any other letter or symbol is entered, the user will be forced to change it. If only a subset of the allowed letters is entered, the RSS will assume the default order for the remaining PTT types. The default configuration is W>R>M>D>L. NOTE: If desired, the default configuration may be restored by blanking the current PTT PRIORITY field completely. When the cursor is moved to the next field, the default configuration will again be displayed.
ILLEGAL CARRIER SIGNAL LEVEL HELP
Enter the desired ILLEGAL CARRIER SIGNAL LEVEL value into this field. Allowed range is -50 to -125 dBm. Default value is -90 dBm. Press Enter or Tab to validate the entry and to move to the next field.
RCV (Receive) SIGNAL INVERSION HELP
This field determines if the DSP will invert the phase of the recovered modulation (data). The standard operating mode is to configure the receiver audio path to be non-inverting. The user is given the ability to change this status on a per channel basis if necessary for specialized system operation. The inversion status must be correct for the proper operation with signals using asymmetrical data such as DPL, selective signaling, trunking low speed data and most other data systems. This field may be toggled between ENABLED and DISABLED. Default setting is DISABLED.
MONITOR BEFORE TRANSMIT HELP
Toggle between ENABLED and DISABLED by pressing the Up/Down Arrow keys. Monitor before transmit should only be enabled in systems that have data capability. If this receiver is part of a voted channel, all receivers on that channel must have the same setting for this feature (all ENABLED or all DISABLED). When enabling this feature, the following must also be configured on the Channel Information Screen: Analog Rx Activation, Analog Rptr Activation, and Analog Rptr Hold-In must be set for 'SC=Carrier and PL/DPL'. When ENABLED, the station will monitor the receive channel for co-channel users. If a co-channel user is detected, the station will notify the infrastructure (wireline) every 5 seconds. If the RNC is ENABLED to listen to this message, then the RNC will not transmit data once it receives this message. If the RNC is DISABLED from listening to this message, then the RNC will ignore this message. When co-channel activity stops, the station will again notify the infrastructure (wireline). The RNC will resume data transmission once it receives this message. When DISABLED, the station will not look for or notify the infrastructure (wireline) of any co-channel users.
ANALOG REPEATER BOOST HELP
Toggle between ENABLED and DISABLED by pressing the Up/Down Arrow keys. When ENABLED (default state), an incoming 40% rated system deviation signal will be boosted to 60% rated system deviation for re-transmission. For example, in a 5KHz maximum deviation channel, a signal coming in at 2 KHz deviation will be transmitted at 3 KHz deviation. When DISABLED, the transmitted signal will be at the same deviation as the incoming signal. Default setting is DISABLED.
BRSTAT HELP
This field is used to operate the receiver as a voting receiver in ASTRO 25 6.x systems. When this field is ENABLED, a BRSTAT message is sent to the comparator. The BRSTAT message includes receiver state information, operational or failed, and illegal carrier status. Toggle between ENABLED and DISABLED by pressing the Up/Down Arrow keys. For Dynamic Frequency Blocking (DFB) channels, change the BRSTAT field value to ENABLED and set the Carrier Malfunction Timer on the RF Configuration Screen to 254 (disabled). For all other channels, if the Carrier Malfunction Timer on the RF Configuration Screen is 254, change the BRSTAT field to DISABLED. Default setting is DISABLED.
ALARM TONE OVER AIR HELP
Toggle between ENABLED and DISABLED by pressing the Up/Down Arrow keys.
When Enabled, any Alarm Tones will be transmitted over the air. Default
state is ENABLED.
- When ENABLED on the Channel screen, tone beeps are transmitted over
the air and are mixed with an analog voice transmission. The beeps
are also transmitted during analog hang time.
- The tones are transmitted every 10 seconds
- The tones are sent out in analog mode only in conventional systems.
- The tones are NOT sent out during ASTRO calls nor during ASTRO hang time
- The tones are sent to the local speaker all the time and are heard
provided the speaker is turned on
The number of beeps generated identifies a specific alarm:
1 beep = battery revert/AC lost
2 beeps = PA failure or PA low
3 beeps = TX or Rx synthesizer out of lock
4 beeps = battery over voltage
ALARM TONE OVER WL HELP
Toggle between ENABLED and DISABLED by pressing the Up/Down Arrow keys.
When enabled, any Alarm Tones will be transmitted over the wireline.
Default state is ENABLED.
- When ENABLED on the Channel screen, tone beeps are sent out over the
wireline and are mixed with a received analog call
- The tones are sent out in analog mode only in conventional systems
- The tones are transmitted every 10 seconds
- The tones are NOT sent out during ASTRO calls
- The tones are sent to the local speaker all the time and are heard
provided the speaker is turned on.
The number of beeps generated identifies a specific alarm:
1 beep = battery revert
2 beeps = PA failure or PA low
3 beeps = TX or Rx synthesizer out of lock
4 beeps = battery over voltage
MAX CODE DETECT WINDOW HELP (SECURE ONLY)
Enter the desired Max Code Detect Window time in this field. Value may range between 0 and 120 milliseconds. Default value is 80 milliseconds.
TAKEOVER EOM LENGTH HELP (SECURE ONLY)
Enter the desired Takeover EOM Length time in this field. Value may range between 0 and 255 milliseconds. Default value is 80 milliseconds.
TX CODE DETECT FADE TIMER HELP (SECURE ONLY)
Enter the desired TX Code Detect Fade Timer value in this field. Value may range between 0 and 255 milliseconds. Default value is 10 milliseconds.
DC GLITCH LENGTH HELP (SECURE ONLY)
Enter the desired DC Glitch Length value in this field. Value may range between 0 and 50 milliseconds. Default value is 34 milliseconds.
MINIMUM EOM LENGTH HELP (SECURE ONLY)
Enter the desired Minimum EOM Length value in this field. Value may range between 0 and 255 milliseconds. Default value is 80 milliseconds.
CLEAR PTT DELAY HELP (SECURE ONLY)
Enter the desired Clear PTT Delay value in this field. Value may range between 0 and 255 milliseconds. Default value is 90 milliseconds.
CLEAR RECEIVER DELAY HELP (SECURE ONLY)
Enter the desired Clear Receiver Delay value in this field. Value may range between 0 and 255 milliseconds. Default value is 90 milliseconds.
RF CONFIGURATION HELP
The parameters listed on this screen normally are not required to be adjusted for proper system operation. However, for more complete flexibility of configuration, they may be adjusted as required. NOTE: The SECURENET-related parameters may be changed even if the station is not currently enabled for Secure operation (See the SERVICE:HARDWARE CONFIGURATION screen). If SECURENET is not enabled, the user will be warned that normal station operation will not be affected by the changes.
MONITOR TYPE HELP
The Monitor Type may be selected between COLOR and MONO. If the RSS is installed on a computer which is not color capable, the RSS will not allow COLOR to be selected. If in MONO mode, no color selections for the various text lines will be visible. NOTE: If operating in COLOR mode on a laptop and the highlighted cursor contrast is not acceptable, select MONO mode. Once all color settings have been completed, press OK to Save these settings to disk. If desired, F9 will restore the default color values.
TEXT COLOR HELP
Scroll through the legal choices by means of the Up/Down arrow keys. Press ENTER when done to validate the field.
STATUS LINE COLOR HELP
Scroll through the legal choices by means of the Up/Down arrow keys. Press ENTER when done to validate the field.
MESSAGE LINE COLOR HELP
Scroll through the legal choices by means of the Up/Down arrow keys. Press ENTER when done to validate the field.
HIGHLIGHT COLOR HELP
Scroll through the legal choices by means of the Up/Down arrow keys. Press ENTER when done to validate the field.
SCREEN OUTLINE COLOR HELP
Scroll through the legal choices by means of the Up/Down arrow keys. Press ENTER when done to validate the field.
BACKGROUND COLOR HELP
Scroll through the legal choices by means of the Up/Down arrow keys. Press ENTER when done to validate the field.
SCREEN COLOR CONFIGURATION HELP
Set the desired display colors on this screen. If operating on a computer
which is not color capable, the RSS will default to Monitor Type MONO and
will not allow COLOR to be selected. NOTE: Most laptop computers are
color capable - if operating a laptop in COLOR mode and the highlighted
cursor contrast is not acceptable, select MONO mode.
Once all color settings have been completed, press OK to Save these
settings to disk. If desired, F9 will restore the default color values.
buttons Descriptions:
Help - Recalls this Help Screen.
F8 - SAVE color settings to disk file.
F9 - RESET DEFAULT color settings.
ENTER DIRECTORY NAME HELP
Enter the desired directory pathname where the codeplug is stored into this field. Any MS-DOS legal pathname is allowed. Wildcards may be appended to the pathname to display only desired files in the directory. Press ENTER or TAB to accept the pathname and to display the directory contents. When this pathname is changed, the RSS will use the new pathname as its default the next time the RSS is entered. Pressing the F5 key will restore the directory name to the default archive path name for the current version of the RSS.
ENTER FILENAME HELP
Enter the desired filename in this field. Any legal MS-DOS filename characters are allowed. (To select an existing file, the filename highlighted by the cursor will automatically be copied to the 'Enter Filename' field; either select this file by pressing Enter or TAB or type over the existing filename). Press Enter or TAB to select the file.
SELECT CODEPLUG FILE FROM LIST HELP
Use the Up/Dn, Left/Right Arrow Keys to select a codeplug file from the given list. The filename will automatically be placed in the FILENAME field. To Read the file press the ENTER key. Press the TAB key to move to the FILENAME field. Press the SHIFT TAB key to move to the DIRECTORY field. Press ESC or Cancel to exit the READ CODEPLUG FILE screen without reading a codeplug from a file.
OVERWRITE CODEPLUG FILE FROM LIST HELP
Use the Up/Dn, Left/Right Arrow Keys to select a codeplug file from the given list. The filename will automatically be placed in the FILENAME field. To Overwrite the file press the ENTER key. Press the TAB key to move to the DIRECTORY field. Press the SHIFT TAB key to move to the FILENAME field. Press ESC or Cancel to exit the WRITE CODEPLUG FILE screen without writing a codeplug to a file.
METERING MENU HELP
This menu contains selections for monitoring the station operation at
internal, predefined measurement points. The computer running the RSS
must be connected to the station under test to enter any of the
following Metering screens.
Once entered, the station will continually update the RSS display with
the values of the various measurements.
NOTE: Depending on how 'busy' the station is, communications error may
sometimes be noted on attempting to exit the RSS metering screens. This
error is not serious and does not indicate a station problem. If this
error is observed, try to exit the screen again.
Button Descriptions:
Help - Displays this screen.
F2 - Select Wireline Metering measurements.
(Not available for DSS-III or Quantar Data Base Stations)
F3 - Select Exciter/PA Metering measurements.
F4 - Select Receiver Metering measurements. A pop-up window will
appear to allow the selection of Receiver 1 or Receiver 2
metering screens.
F5 - Select Power Supply Metering measurements.
F6 - Selects UHSO Metering measurements.
METER WIRELINE HELP
The Wireline Metering screen displays the type of Wireline Module present in the station and the measured voltages of the power supplies to the Wireline Module.
METERING EXCITER HELP
The Exciter Metering screen displays the type of Exciter Module present
in the station and the measured parameters relevant to the Exciter Module.
When the 'PA TEST MODE is ACTIVE' the PA will not act on any alarms that
it receives. Use PA TEST ON to turn test mode on. PA TEST OFF turns the
test mode off again.
CAUTION: The station will still generate (report) alarms of the PA, but
the built-in circuitry that protects the PA will be disabled
(the protection built-in circuitry will not operate!).
Do NOT leave the station running on the 'PA TEST MODE' longer than it
is required!.
Exiting the screen will automatically order the station to exit the PA
TEST MODE.
METERING POWER AMPLIFIER HELP
The Wattmeter readings are not accurate unless the station's Power Output
has been properly aligned using the Alignment for Power Output which is
available in the Alignment Menu. Stations shipping from the factory are
properly aligned for Power Output.
The Power Amplifier Metering screen displays the type of PA Module present
in the station and the measured parameters relevant to the PA Module.
When the 'PA TEST MODE is ACTIVE' the PA will not act on any alarms that
it receives. Use PA TEST ON to turn test mode on. PA TEST OFF turns the
test mode off again.
CAUTION: The station will still generate (report) alarms of the PA, but
the built-in circuitry that protects the PA will be disabled
(the protection built-in circuitry will not operate!).
Do NOT leave the station running on the 'PA TEST MODE' longer than it
is required!.
Exiting the screen will automatically order the station to exit the PA
TEST MODE.
METER RECEIVER HELP
The Receiver Metering screen displays the type of Receiver Module present in the station and the measured parameters relevant to the Receiver Module.
METER RECEIVER 2 HELP
The Second Receiver Metering screen displays the type of Receiver Module present as the second receiver in the station and the measured parameters relevant to the Receiver Module.
METER POWER SUPPLY HELP
The Power Supply Metering screen displays the type of Power Supply Module present in the station and the measured parameters relevant to the Power Supply Module. NOTE: The Power Supply metering screen is only relevant for Quantar stations. "N/A" (Not Applicable) will be displayed for all fields if the station is a Quantro.
ACCESS CODE TABLE NUMBER HELP
Enter the desired Access Code Table number in this field. To be accepted, the Access Code table must exist. To the right of this field will be displayed the current legal range of access code tables. NOTE: To add or delete Access Code Tables, move to the next field before pressing Add or Delete.
SQUELCH TYPE HELP
Use the Up/Dn arrow keys to change the selection between CSQ, PL, and DPL. Press Enter or TAB to move to the next field. The Rx Squelch Type selected must match the values chosen at the Channel Information screen for the Rx Activation, Repeater Activation, and Repeater Hold-In fields. If C or SC is selected for any of the above fields, make certain that a valid PL or DPL code is defined and selected in the Rx PL/DPL Code field for the Receiver for this channel; otherwise, this function will not work. (In this case, CSQ would not be a valid choice in the PL field in the Access Code Table screen). When changing the Rx squelch from PL/DPL to CSQ consider that a channel may be associated with this Access Code Table and that the channel may still be configured for PL/DPL receiver activation. If this is the case, please correct the Channel RX Activation or Repeater Activation or Repeater Hold In settings before writing the codeplug to the station. Either change the Channel activation settings to CSQ or change the channel or channels associated with this ACT.
PL/DPL CODE HELP
Enter the desired code value here to match the type chosen in the previous field. Acceptable values are defined below. When PL is selected, either the Code or the Frequency may be entered. The RSS will automatically display the equivalent value in the field next to the value entered. VALID PL CODES: CODE FREQ (Hz) CODE FREQ (Hz) CODE FREQ (Hz) WA 74.4 WB 79.7 WZ 69.3 XA 71.9 XB 77.0 XZ 67.0 YA 85.4 YB 88.5 YZ 82.5 ZA 94.8 ZB 97.4 ZZ 91.5 M1 203.5 M2 210.7 M3 218.1 M4 225.7 M5 233.6 M6 241.8 M7 250.3 1A 103.5 1B 107.2 1Z 100.0 2A 114.8 2B 118.8 2Z 110.9 3A 127.3 3B 131.8 3Z 123.0 4A 141.3 4B 146.2 4Z 136.5 5A 156.7 5B 162.2 5Z 151.4 6A 173.8 6B 179.9 6Z 167.9 7A 192.8 7Z 186.2 8Z 206.5 9Z 229.1 VALID DPL CODES: 023, 025, 026, 031, 032, 043, 047, 051, 054, 065, 071, 072, 073, 074, 114, 115, 116, 125, 131, 132, 134, 143, 152, 155, 156, 162, 165, 172, 174, 205, 223, 226, 243, 244, 245, 251, 261, 263, 265, 271, 306, 311, 315, 331, 343, 346, 351, 364, 365, 371, 411, 412, 413, 423, 431, 432, 445, 464, 465, 466, 503, 506, 516, 532, 546, 565, 606, 612, 624, 627, 631, 632, 654, 662, 664, 703, 712, 723, 731, 732, 734, 743, 754 UNSUPPORTED DPL CODES: These are for special applications and are not part of the standard Quantar product offering. 053, 122, 212, 225, 246, 252, 266, 325, 425, 446, 452, 455, 521, 525, 552, 564, 645, 652, 725, 726
RX NAC Operation
This field controls the mode of operation of the receiver and transmitter in an ASTRO CAI system. There are four choices that can be selected, NORMAL, CR $F7F, NAC $F7E and DCS. NORMAL In NORMAL mode of operation, the receiver will accept any ASTRO signal with the NAC specified in the Rx ASTRO Access Code field and ignores all other received NACs. The transmitted ASTRO packets, data or voice, will include the NAC specified in the Tx ASTRO Access Code field. Community Repeater Operation - CR $F7F Community Repeater Operation allows the receiver to accept any NAC except $F7F and $F7E. The ASTRO voice packets are repeated with the same NAC that was received with the voice. In this case, the Tx ASTRO Access Code field is only used to specify which NAC is transmitted with wireline/console voice packets unless the Transmit Using Last Received NAC is ENABLED. The RX ASTRO Access Code field is set to F7F and cannot be edited. The Tx ASTRO Access Code field is defaulted to 293 and can be edited. NOTE: The user is expected to configure the rest of the station parameters that are required for repeater operation. The RSS does not force these other parameters so that special configurations can still be made. NOTE: Since this feature describes the operation of a repeater, it is not intended to be used in a SIMULCAST System. Receiver Monitor - NAC $F7E Receiver Monitor Operation allows the receiver to accept any NAC except $F7F and $F7E. If repeat is enabled, The ASTRO voice packets are repeated with the NAC that is programmed in the Tx ASTRO Access Code field. In this case, the Tx ASTRO Access Code field is used to specify which NAC is transmitted with both receive and wireline/console voice and data packets unless the Transmit Using Last Received NAC is ENABLED. The RX ASTRO Access Code field is set to F7F and cannot be edited. The Tx ASTRO Access Code field is defaulted to 293 and can be edited. NOTE: This application is intended for non-repeater or base operation. The user is expected to configure the rest of the station parameters that are required for base operation. The RSS does not force these other parameters so that special configurations can be still be made. NOTE: This feature is not recommended for use in a Simulcast system. Digital Carrier Squelch - DCS Digital Carrier Squelch is the selection used to enable or disable digital carrier squelch in a conventional station. With this selection, the station will be capable of receiving any RX ASTRO Access Code (between 000 and FFF), qualifying it as a valid ASTRO Network Access Code, and will repeat the signal with the default transmit ASTRO Tx Access Code of 293. When this choice is made, both the RX and TX ASTRO Access Code Fields are not editable. NOTE: This choice is provided to maintain compatibility with older systems that may have made this selection. This mode of operation is being replaced by the Community Repeater and Receiver Monitor functions.
RX/TX ASTRO VOICE HELP
Enter the desired ASTRO Network Access Codes into the RX and TX ASTRO Access Code fields. Unless otherwise restricted, any hexadecimal value, in the range of 000 to FFF may be entered. NOTE: If the Modulation Type selected at the Service:Hardware Configuration screen is not 'ASTRO CAI CAPABLE', these fields are not visible and the RSS will not allow the user to edit the RX or TX ASTRO Access Code fields.
TRANSMIT USING LAST RECEIVED NAC HELP
This field controls the TX NAC that is transmitted with wireline audio. The station will transmit wireline audio using the programmed Tx NAC unless the "Transmit Using Last Received NAC" field is ENABLED. When this field is ENABLED, wireline audio will be transmitted using the NAC obtained from the last voice reception, that is TX NAC is set equal to last received NAC. This operation is gated by a timer. The TX NAC is set to equal last received NAC for the duration of the timer. When the timer expires, the TX NAC is reverted back to equal the programmed TX NAC. The intended use of this function is to allow a console to talk to a particular group. So as long as the console talks to this particular group, the TX NAC is kept equal to the RX NAC. When the conversation dies off and the timer expires, the TX NAC reverts to the programmed TX NAC until the next group calls in and then the TX NAC will be programmed to that group and the console will talk to the group.
EXPIRATION TIME HELP
The timer control the length of time that TX NAC is set to equal the last received NAC. The timer is reset after every reception. If there is a lot of back and forth conversation with the subscribers and the console, then the TX NAC stays set to the RX NAC until the conversation dies off and the timer expires. The timer has a default value of 5 minutes and a range of 1 to 30 minutes The intended use of this function is to allow a console to talk to a particular group. So as long as the console talks to this particular group, the TX NAC is kept equal to the RX NAC. When the conversation dies off and the timer expires, the TX NAC reverts to the programmed TX NAC until the next group calls in and then the TX NAC will be programmed to that group and the console will talk to the group.
CHANNELS USING THIS TABLE HELP
NOTE: This field is view only. To change the channels using this table, go to the Channel Information screen for that channel. This field displays the current channels using this Access Code Table. Up to 16 channels may be displayed here. If 16 or more channels are currently using this table, the message "16+ CHANNELS ARE USING THIS ACCESS CODE TABLE" will be displayed.
CONNECT TONE # 1 HELP
This is the System Connect Tone. Select one of the tones from the available
list. The Station requires that tone be received in order to provide repeat
function in analog systems.
The connect tone is a subaudible (below 300 Hz) tone that is transmitted
by a subscriber radio to the system, any time the unit is keyed. The site
and the radio unit MUST be programmed with the same value for the connect
tone.
NOTE:
For ASTRO CAI systems this field is used not only as the Analog Mode
Connect Tone, but it is also used to calculate the ASTRO Network ID.
The Connect Tones are 0 - 7 and they have the corresponding Frequency
(in Hz) next to the Connect Tone number.
Legal Choices are: 0 : 105.9 Hz
1 : 76.6 Hz
2 : 83.7 Hz
3 : 90.0 Hz
4 : 97.3 Hz
5 : 116.1 Hz
6 : 128.6 Hz
7 : 138.5 Hz
Default is '0 : 105.9 Hz'. (Connect Tone 0).
CONNECT TONE # 2 HELP
This is a second programmable Connect Tone that is used when the RSTAT MODE
field is set to DUAL CT. Please refer to the RSTAT
MODE help screen for more information on the use of this field.
When the RSTAT Mode field is set to NORMAL, this field must be set to DISABLED.
Default value is: DISABLED
The connect tone is a subaudible (below 300 Hz) tone that is transmitted by
a subscriber radio to the system, any time the unit is keyed. The site and
the radio unit MUST be programmed with the same value for the connect tone.
The Connect Tones are 0 - 7 and they have the corresponding Frequency (in
Hz) next to the Connect Tone number.
Legal Choices are: 0 : 105.9 Hz
1 : 76.6 Hz
2 : 83.7 Hz
3 : 90.0 Hz
4 : 97.3 Hz
5 : 116.1 Hz
6 : 128.6 Hz
7 : 138.5 Hz
DISABLED
Rx/Tx ASTRO ACCESS CODE HELP
When ASTRO operation is enabled, the Station will require a Network ID to be defined. This Network ID is entered in this field, and it is composed of three hex characters. NOTE: Both Rx ASTRO Access Code and Tx ASTRO Access Code MUST be the same in ASTRO Trunked systems. NOTE: When the system is ASTRO CAI this field is calculated for the system utilizing the Connect Tone number and the System ID and the field is not editable. Make sure that the correct System ID has been entered. For 6809 systems the System ID is located on the 6809 Trunking Interface screen. Valid Range for Network ID: 000 - FFF
TRUNKING ACCESS CODE TABLE FORM HELP
This screen contains the Connect Tone fields and the Rx/Tx ASTRO Access Code fields. The connect tones are used to provide repeat functionality when a tone is received. The ASTRO Access Codes are used as Network IDs. A Network ID is composed of three hex characters. ASTRO Access Codes are available only if the Station is an ASTRO capable Station.
WIRELINE CONFIGURATION HELP
The Wireline Configuration screen allows the user to configure station parameters related to the Wireline. If Wireline is disabled at the Station Configuration screen, this screen will not be accessible. See this individual field helps for more information.
WIRELINE OPERATION HELP
If Wireline is enabled at the Service:Hardware Configuration screen, this
field is editable and may be toggled between a subset of the following
choices:
2 WIRE HALF DUPLEX
4 WIRE FULL DUPLEX
4 WIRE HALF DUPLEX
6 WIRE FULL DUPLEX
8 WIRE FULL DUPLEX
The subset displayed are the valid choices based on the configuration
of the station.
The initial default value is 4 WIRE FULL DUPLEX.
If 2 Wire Half Duplex is selected, and the Station Type on the Station
Configuration screen has been set to Secure Capable, then make certain
that the SECURENET to Wireline field on the Wireline Configuration
screen is Disabled. Otherwise, improper station operation will result.
Hardware Jumper Changes (2 Wire/4 Wire):
NOTE: When changed between the 2 wire and the 4 wire configurations,
a jumper on the Wireline module MUST also be changed. For 2 wire,
jumper JU1010 should be moved to the upper position. For 4 wire,
jumper JU1010 should be moved to the lower position.
(The lower position is also marked by the white jumper symbol on the
PC board).
For further information, refer to the Wireline Interface Board Theory
of Operation section in the Station Installation Manual.
SIMULCAST OPERATION HELP
This field should be ENABLED when the Station is used in a simulcast system. Note: When making a change to this field, a Reference Modulation Compensation alignment should be performed. For Simulcast systems, make certain that the following fields are set properly if Simulcast is enabled: Hardware Configuration:Frequency Reference = External - 5 or 10 MHz selected RF Configuration:Repeater Operation = BASE Channel Information: Repeater Activation = OFF (or user choice for Fall Back In-Cabinet Repeat) Channel Information: Repeater Hold-In = OFF (or user choice for Fall Back In-Cabinet Repeat) Channel Information: Call Sign = User Optional Channel Information: Alarm Tones over Air = DISABLED Wireline Configuration:Wireline Operation = 4 WIRE FULL DUPLEX Wireline Configuration:Comparator = SPECTRA-TAC or DIGI-TAC or ASTRO-TAC or ASTRO-TAC WITH DIGI-TAC Wireline Configuration:Fall Back In-Cabinet Repeat = DISABLED (or user choice of ENABLED) When station is configured as Conventional and ASTRO, SELECT will be an additional choice. It allows non-Simulcast Analog Wireline transmissions.
PHONE PATCH INTERFACE HELP
Enabling Phone Patch will enable either the MRTI or ZETRON phone patch. As MRTI was discontinued, ZETRON's phone patch is its replacement. Use this field to Select whether the Phone Patch Interface is ENABLED or DISABLED. The Phone Patch is a hardware option which bridges the base station with conventional telephone equipment to allow subscribers to place telephone calls. Phone Patch can be operational only for Conventional system types and is not compatible with Simulcast. If this interface is enabled, the base station will be configured to be Phone Patch for every channel. (See the fields Phone Patch Operation and Phone Patch Timeout Timer under the second page of the Channel Information screen).
MAIN/STANDBY HELP
Choices are MAIN/STANDBY/DISABLED This field can only be configured when the station is set as a Conventional, Non-ASTRO, ENHANCED WildCard station. When the station does not meet this criteria, MAIN/STANDBY is DISABLED. Setting this field to MAIN will delete any currently existing STANDBY tables in the WildCard Tables and insert the default MAIN tables at the beginning of the WildCard Tables. Setting this field to STANDBY will delete any currently existing MAIN tables in the WildCard Tables and insert the default STANDBY tables at the beginning of the WildCard Tables. When this field is DISABLED, all MAIN/STANDBY tables will be deleted from the WildCard Tables. It is highly recommended NOT to alter the description in the MAIN/STANDBY tables as they may not be automatically deleted then.
RT/RT CONFIGURATION HELP
The RT/RT CONFIGURATION indicates if the ASTRO Base Station is to be connected to another ASTRO Base Station via the Wireline connection. Use the Up/Dn Arrow Keys to toggle between the choices ENABLED and DISABLED. Initial default value is DISABLED.
COMPARATOR HELP
This field will allow you to select ASTRO-TAC, SPECTRA-TAC, DIGI-TAC,
ASTRO-TAC WITH DIGI-TAC, or NONE. The choices reflect the type of
comparator to which the station is connected. The selection is provided
so that the station can make minor adjustments that allow operation
with each of these comparator configurations. Other items affected are:
how the ASTRO and analog links are tested, and the setting of the
Status Tone Mute Timer. (For SPECTRA-TAC, this internal timer will be set to
20 msec; for DIGI-TAC, this internal timer will automatically be set to 0.)
This field also enables two RSS parameters: the Fall Back In-Cabinet
Repeat field and the Fall Back Timer field on the 6809 Trunking screen.
This field must be set to NONE in 2-wire systems.
NOTE: In voting systems, the Wireline Time Out Timer (on page 2 of the
Channel Screen) should normally be set to 0; that is, disabled.
When subscribers talk back and forth, the comparator adds
a drop out delay to each transmission making the session
between subscribers look like a long single WL transmission.
Thus the station may easily time out on the wireline
transmission.
In ASTRO CAI systems, the comparator also adds a drop out
delay to the console transmission, thus making subscriber
to console sessions also look like a single long wireline
transmission to the station. For voting systems, both the
repeater time out timer and the wireline timeout timer should
be programmed in the comparator, not the station.
Voting Receivers and ASTRO capable stations:
For ASTRO-capable stations, if the COMPARATOR field is not set to
ASTRO-TAC WITH DIGI-TAC and the Wireline Interface field is set to
V.24 HYBRID, then Analog Idle Link Check should be ENABLED.
(The Wireline Interface field and the Analog Idle Link Check field
are found on page 2 of the Wireline Configuration screen.)
For ASTRO-TAC Comparator hardware configurations, Status Tone will
be disabled and blanked.
For ASTRO-TAC WITH DIGI-TAC comparators, Status Tone must be manually
enabled.
Voting Receivers and non-ASTRO capable stations:
For Non-ASTRO hardware configurations, when COMPARATOR is SPECTRA-TAC or
DIGI-TAC alone, then Status Tone must also be manually ENABLED.
The Status Tone field is found on page 1 of the Wireline Configuration
screen. (In some systems the Status Tone field doesn't apply, therefore
it will not be shown on the screen).
Voting Receivers and Rx Notch Filter:
The Rx Notch Filter field should also be checked on page two of the
WIRELINE CONFIGURATION screen. (This field only appears
for non-ASTRO systems). The Rx Notch Filter should be DISABLED (bypassed)
unless all other voting receivers in the system are using a receive
wireline notch filter.
When COMPARATOR is not set to NONE, the Repeater Operation field on
the RF Configuration screen will be set to BASE.
FALL BACK IN-CABINET REPEAT HELP
A Quantar station configured as a BASE has two methods to enable in cabinet repeat. The first is the automatic mode which is configured using the RSS in this screen. The second mode is an external input designed to be used manually to place the station into In-Cabinet repeat mode. The use of these two modes is exclusive; that is, only one method can be selected. If the station is configured to use both modes simultaneously, the station will not work properly. The station will work correctly only when one of the methods is selected. In a conventional station, when Fallback In-Cabinet Repeat is ENABLED the station will automatically fall back to In-Cabinet repeat mode if the Spectra-TAC or DIGI-TAC or ASTRO-TAC comparator should fail to respond to a receive session or there is a digital link failure. When receive activity is detected and meets the programmed criteria specified by the RX ACTIVATION parameters, the station starts the FALLBACK IN-CABINET REPEAT timer. If the timer expires and a key up command has not been received by the station, the station will go into In-Cabinet repeat mode. The station will then use the REPEATER ACTIVATION and the REPEATER HOLD IN parameters to gate the repeat function. When the Fallback In-Cabinet Repeat is DISABLED the station can be manually placed into In-Cabinet repeat by grounding the 16th pin of the 50 pin TELCO connector. When this pin is grounded the station will fall back to In- Cabinet repeat mode. When receive activity is detected and meets the programmed criteria specified by the RX ACTIVATION parameters the station will repeat the audio received. In a trunking station, when Fallback In-Cabinet Repeat is ENABLED the station will automatically fall back to In-Cabinet repeat mode if a Digital Link failure is detected. During In-Cabinet repeat mode the station will transmit failsoft modulation. When qualified receive activity is detected the station will repeat the audio it received along with the failsoft indication. When the Fallback In-Cabinet Repeat is DISABLED the trunked station can be manually placed into In-Cabinet repeat by grounding both the 16th pin and the 11th pin of the 50 pin TELCO connector. When qualified receive activity is detected the station will repeat the audio it receives along with failsoft modulation. NOTE: This feature can be enabled in SIMULCAST systems. When this mode is enabled in simulcast systems, synchronization of transmitted audio, analog or digital from multiple stations is not possible. The system designer must take this into account so that only a few selected stations have this feature enabled to provide back up coverage and minimize the creation of overlap areas where the transmitted audio may not be able to be picked up by the subscribers. FBICR Configurations: Automatic mode: Conventional Analog: Available on both simulcast and voting systems. To set it, put the Fall Back In Cabinet Repeat field to EANBLED and the Fall Back Timer Field to the appropriate value for your system. Conventional Astro (CAI): Available on both simulcast and voting systems. To set it, put the Fall Back In Cabinet Repeat field to ENABLED and the Fall Back Timer Field to the appropriate value for your system. Trunked (SmartZone or Smartnet) ASTRO (CAI, VSELP): Available only on simulcast systems. It is enabled through the use of the Fall Back In-Cabinet Repeat together with the Failsoft Modulation parameters which are set up through the RSS. This mode does not use a timer. When Fall Back In-Cabinet repeat is enabled, the Failsoft Modulation Type is ASTRO and a digital link failure is detected then the station will revert into In- Cabinet repeat mode. When in FBICR mode the station will transmit Failsoft beeps and the subscriber will give the Failsoft indication. Note that this feature is only supported in Failsoft mode. External mode: Conventional Analog Available on both simulcast and voting systems. The Fall Back In Cabinet Repeat field set to DISABLED. It is enabled through the 16th pin (In Cabinet Repeat) of the 50 pin Telco connector. When this input is grounded, the station will enable In-Cabinet repeat operation. Conventional ASTRO (CAI) Available on both simulcast and voting systems. The Fall Back In Cabinet Repeat field set to DISABLED. It is enabled through the 16th pin (In Cabinet Repeat) of the 50 pin Telco connector. When this input is grounded, the station will enable In-Cabinet repeat operation. Trunked (SmartZone or Smartnet) Analog Available on both simulcast and voting systems. The Fall Back In-Cabinet Repeat field set to ENABLED. It is enabled through pins number 11(External Failsoft) and number 16(In Cabinet Repeat) on the 50 pin Telco Connector. When these pins are grounded, the trunking simulcast station will revert to In-Cabinet repeat operation and it will ignore any wireline transmit activity, ignore the EXT PTT line, and assert the TSTAT line. When in FBICR mode, the station will transmit failsoft beeps and the subscribers will display their failsoft indication. Note that this feature is only supported in Failsoft mode. Example: Program the station as ANALOG ONLY, with simulcast ENABLED. To use FBICR functionality, program the following fields on the RSS as follows: Go to the Wireline Configuration screen. Set the Comparator field to the type of comparator you have in your system. Set the Fall Back In-Cabinet Repeat field to ENABLED and the Fall Back Time to 0 ms. Go to the 6809 Trunking Interface screen. Set the modulation type field to Analog. This will allow correct FBICR functionality. Trunked (SmartZone or Smartnet) ASTRO (CAI, VSELP) Available only on simulcast systems. The Fall Back In Cabinet Repeat field set to DISABLED. It is enabled through pins number 11 (External Failsoft) and number 16 (In Cabinet Repeat) on the 50 pin Telco Connector. When these pins are grounded the trunking simulcast station will revert to In-Cabinet repeat operation and it will ignore any wireline transmit activity, ignore the EXT PTT line, and assert the TSTAT line. When in FBICR mode the station will transmit failsoft beeps and the subscribers will display their failsoft indication. Note that this feature is only supported in Failsoft mode.
FALLBACK TIMER HELP
When Fallback In-Cabinet Repeat is ENABLED, the Station waits the specified time entered in this field, before starting a repeat session. The Station starts the timer after a valid receive session is declared. The receive session is declared when the receive qualifiers specified in the channel information screen are met. As soon as a key up request is received from the wireline, the timer is cancelled. If the timer expires, that is, a key up request has not been received on the wireline, then the Station will enable the repeat function provided that the repeat qualifiers specified in the channel information screen are met. NOTE: For all Station Types except ASTRO CAI, setting the Fallback Timer set to 0 will disable the Fallback In-Cabinet Repeat function. NOTE: For ASTRO or ASTRO CAI systems that utilize modems for connecting a station to a comparator, it is recommended that the fallback timer be set to a minimum of 500 msec. NOTE: For SIMULCAST ASTRO CAI 3.0 systems the fallback timer must be set to a minimum of 800 msec. NOTE: Setting the fallback timer to 0 in ASTRO CAI systems forces the Fall Back mode to be entered only when the link between the station and the comparator fails. Normally the timer is utilized to wait for a key up command from the comparator after a valid receive sequence is forwarded to the comparator. The timer must be set to 0 in systems where data or voice site steering is utilized. If the timer is set to a value other than 0 in a site-steered data or voice system, a non- steered station will go into in-cabinet repeat mode after the timer expires, creating an undesirable transmission.
WIRELINE STATUS TONE HELP
When ENABLED, the Wireline Status Tone will be set to 13db below peak audio level as shown on the Alignment:Rx Wireline screen. NOTE: Wireline Status Tone should only be enabled for Secure, SPECTRA-TAC, DIGI-TAC, and ASTRO-TAC WITH DIGI-TAC systems. Also, if Status Tone is enabled, the Call Sign over Wireline field at the Channel Information screen should be disabled. This field is never enabled in 2-wire systems. Initial default is DISABLED. NOTE: For IntelliRepeater systems, the Status Tone level needs to be aligned. Status Tone is used as a diagnostic tool to verify that the wireline links are established. Refer to the RSS Manual, the RX Wireline Alignment Procedure for details. For Hybrid Links, Status Tone is used as the Analog Link Monitor Tone (ALMT).
STATUS TONE FREQUENCY HELP
When Status Tone is Enabled via the Status Tone field, Status tone will be generated by the station at the frequency entered by the user in the Status Tone Frequency field. Initial default value is 2175 Hz. Programmable range for Status Tone Frequency is 300 to 3400 Hz. When ENABLED, the Wireline Status Tone will be set to 13db below the Rx Wireline Level set at the SERVICE:ALIGN:RX WIRELINE screen. (This value is typical only and may be changed at the Service:Rx Wireline Alignment screen). NOTE: Wireline Status Tone should only be enabled for Secure and Spectra-TAC systems. Also, if Status Tone is enabled, the Call Sign over Wireline field at the Channel Information screen should be disabled. When DISABLED, no Wireline Status Tone will be used. This field is never enabled in 2-wire systems. Initial default is DISABLED. NOTE: For IntelliRepeater systems, the Status Tone level needs to be aligned. Status Tone is used as a diagnostic tool to verify that the wireline links are established. Refer to the RSS Manual, the RX Wireline Alignment Procedure for details. For Hybrid Links, Status Tone is used as the Analog Link Monitor Tone (ALMT).
EQUALIZATION HELP
This field determines if equalization is performed on the station's analog receive wireline output. Equalization is performed in analog voting sys- tems to compensate for phone line frequency response differences of the links between the station receivers and the voting comparator. If this equalization field is ENABLED, equalization adjustment can be performed using the Rx Wireline alignment screen. If this field is DISABLED, the Rx Wireline alignment screen will be non-functional. Allowed selections for this field are ENABLED and DISABLED.
RX SECURENET TO WIRELINE HELP (SECURE ONLY)
Use the Up/Down arrow keys to toggle through the choices. This field controls whether ASTRO or SECURENET signals are passed to the wireline for ASTRO or SECURENET Systems respectfully. When ENABLED, the received Rx SECURENET or ASTRO signals will be passed to the wireline. When DISABLED, the Wireline will not receive the SECURENET or ASTRO Rx signal. Initial default state is ENABLED. If at the Analog Wireline Operation field the selected operation is 2 Wire Half Duplex, make certain that the SECURENET to Wireline is Disabled. Otherwise, improper station operation will result.
WIRELINE CONFIGURATION TRC/ASTRO HELP
Fields visible on this screen will change depending on the current system
configuration. If the station is not ASTRO Capable, and the Wireline is
set to 4 WIRE on the Hardware Configuration screen, this screen will
display the HLGT Frequency, Automatic Level Control, and Tx and Rx Notch
Filter settings. Please see the help for each of these fields for more
information.
If the station is ASTRO Capable, this screen will display the ASTRO Wire-
line Interface, Transmit Clock, Modem Input and Modem Output Levels, and
RT/RT Configuration fields. Please see the help for each of these fields
for more information.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="remote_control_help"><content>REMOTE CONTROL TYPE HELP
The Remote Control Type field shows the type of wireline protocol
used to control the station. The field is normally non-editable
and reflects the type of remote control required of other system
parameters including System Type and Modulation Type. For a
Conventional system with Analog modulation the field may be used
to select between TRC and DC remote control. Otherwise the field
displays NONE, TRC or ASTRO depending on other system settings.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="hlgt_frequency_help"><content>HLGT FREQUENCY HELP
Enter the desired High Level Guard Tone Frequency in this field.
Value may range from 1900 Hz to 3000 Hz in 5 Hz increments. When the
System Type or Station Type changes on the Hardware Configuration screen,
the High Level Guard Tone Frequency will be set to the default, which
is 2175 Hz.
Due to a potential conflict, if the HLGT set is within 40 Hz of a
TRC Tone, ALL commands for that TRC Tone will be deleted.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="llgt_undetect_help"><content>LLGT UNDETECT TIME HELP
Enter the desired Low Level Guard Tone Undetect Time in this field.
Value may range from 60 to 2000 milliseconds in 5 millisecond intervals.
(The station will round the entry to the nearest 5 millisecond interval).
Default value is 150 msec.
The Low Level Guard Tone Undetect Time is the time from the moment the
station no longer detects LLGT to the moment it will dekey. Delay
is provided to allow for dropouts on the wireline.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="trc_detection_algorithm_help"><content>TRC DETECTION ALGORITHM HELP
This field allows you to choose normal or tight (more restrictive) function tones detecting algorithm.
When TRC detection is set to NORMAL, High Level Guard Tone must be at
least 60 msec. When TRC detection is set to TIGHT, High Level Guard Tone
must be at least 100 msec. The minimum times are required to detect HLGT
and properly configure the gain for Automatic Line Control.
Automatic Line Control calculates the wireline gain using the amplitude of HLGT.
Default TRC detection algorithm is NORMAL.
This parameter is applicable to SC software version R20.14.043 and later.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="function_tones_detected_help"><content>FUNCTION TONES DETECTED HELP
This field determines a number of TRC function tones, which may be detected by station after single HLGT.
When set to 1, the station looks for only one function tone after High Level
Guard Tone; then the station looks for Low Level Guard Tone.
When set to 2, the station looks for up to two function tones after High Level
Guard Tone; then the station looks for Low Level Guard Tone.
Default value is 2.
This parameter is applicable to SC software version R20.14.043 and later.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="auto_level_ctrl_help"><content>AUTOMATIC LEVEL CONTROL (ALC) HELP
When ENABLED, the Station will automatically align the Wireline Input level
so that average voice will result in 60% of Max Deviation. In a typical
5 kHz Max Deviation System, this level will be 3 kHz. Average voice is a
level which is 6 dB below the High Level Guard Tone level.
NOTE: When ALC is ENABLED, the Tx Wireline alignment is NOT required.
When ALC is DISABLED, the Tx Wireline alignment is highly recommended.
For IntelliRepeater systems, ALC should always be DISABLED.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="wl_tx_notch_filter_help"><content>WIRELINE TX NOTCH FILTER HELP
This field is only applicable for Wireline Equipped stations. Changing
its setting on non-wireline equipped stations will have no effect on
station operation.
The Tx Notch filter setting may be selected between ENABLED and DISABLED.
When ENABLED, the Tx Notch filter will notch out High Level Guard Tone
and Low Level Guard Tone from the Tx audio path to prevent the guard
tone from being audible along with voice audio. The proper setting of
the Tx Notch filter is determined by your specific system equipment
and configuration.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="wl_rx_notch_filter_help"><content>WIRELINE RX NOTCH FILTER HELP
This field is only applicable for Wireline Equipped stations. Changing
its setting on non-wireline equipped stations will have no effect on
station operation.
The Rx Notch filter setting may be selected between ENABLED and DISABLED.
When ENABLED, the Rx Notch filter will notch out voice at the guard tone
frequency to prevent station false detection of HLGT in 2 Wire Half
Duplex phone line systems. If this is not a problem for your installation
disabling the Rx Notch filter will improve voice audio quality.
There may be Spectra-TAC systems where the Rx Notch filter is needed in
the station. The use of the filter is based on system design requirements.
For typical Spectra-TAC systems, the filter is usually ENABLED. If it is
set to DISABLED, you could encounter falsing due to interference of 2175 Hz
components.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="astro_wl_interf_help"><content>ASTRO WIRELINE INTERFACE HELP
In an ASTRO System, an external ASTRO link connection is established either
with an ASTRO modem or a V.24 interface. Each interface requires that a
unique module be installed as a daughter board on the wireline module and
the user needs to define which module is installed.
If the Wireline Interface field is set to V.24 HYBRID and the Comparator
field is not ASTRO-TAC WITH DIGI-TAC, then Analog Idle Link Check
should be ENABLED.
If the Wireline Interface field is set to "MODEM", then the Analog Idle
Link Check will be set to "DISABLED" and the field will be uneditable.
For Trunked 6809 Astro-Only Simulcast systems that have Control Channel
capability, the Wireline Interface needs to be set to "Hybrid Link".
The Control Channel uses the analog path, and the Voice channel uses
the digital path.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="ir_wl_interf_help"><content>ASTRO WIRELINE INTERFACE HELP
In an ASTRO System, an external ASTRO link connection is established either
with an ASTRO modem or a V.24 interface. Each interface requires that a
unique module be installed as a daughter board on the wireline module and
the user needs to define which module is installed.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="ext_tx_clock_help"><content>EXTERNAL TRANSMIT CLOCK HELP
This field requires that the ASTRO Wireline Interface be V.24 and provides
the user with the option to select an external source for the transmit
clock. This feature is useful for Stations that are connected through micro-
wave channel banks where clock synchronization is best sourced from the
channel bank.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="modem_rx_level_help"><content>MODEM INPUT LEVEL HELP
The MODEM INPUT LEVEL which is the signal which comes from the Tx Wireline
is the desired receive level of the ASTRO Wireline modem.
This signal is received by the station, via the phone line, from the
connecting infrastructure equipment.
Valid choices are: 0 To -28 dBm
-9 To -37 dBm
Before starting the level optimization procedures, it is necessary to
know the parameters and specifications of each device related to the
wireline levels and modem sensitivity. Given below is the information
related to each device.
Quantar/Quantro Station/Receiver & ASTRO-TAC Receiver
1. Modem input sensitivity: In the RSS use High 0 to -28 dBm
The modem input level will be in the middle of the range -14 for
unity gain and -21 for phone lines
2. Wireline output Levels: QAM: 0 to -20 dBm in steps of 2 dB
Analog: 0 to -20 dBm in steps of 1 dB
NOTE: The output of QAM and analog levels are independently set
through the RSS. Refer to the current RSS manual for level
setting procedure.
Refer to "System Upgrade Manual for ASTRO Conventional System Release 1.5.1"
for more information.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="modem_tx_level_help"><content>MODEM OUTPUT LEVEL HELP
The MODEM OUTPUT LEVEL is the signal which is sent to the Rx Wireline and
is the desired output level of the ASTRO Wireline modem. This signal is
driven out of the station, down the phone line, to the connecting
infrastructure equipment.
Valid range is 0 to -20 dBm. Initial default is -11 dBm.
Before starting the level optimization procedures, it is necessary to
know the parameters and specifications of each device related to the
wireline levels and modem sensitivity. Given below is the information
related to each device.
Quantar/Quantro Station/Receiver & ASTRO-TAC Receiver
1. Modem input sensitivity: In the RSS use High 0 to -28 dBm
The modem input level will be in the middle of the range -14 for
unity gain and -21 for phone lines
2. Wireline output Levels: QAM: 0 to -20 dBm in steps of 2 dB
Analog: 0 to -20 dBm in steps of 1 dB
NOTE: The output of QAM and analog levels are independently set
through the RSS. Refer to the current RSS manual for level
setting procedure.
Refer to "System Upgrade Manual for ASTRO Conventional System Release 1.5.1"
for more information.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="rf_config_gen_help"><content>RF CONFIGURATION HELP
The RF Configuration screen allows the user to configure parameters that will
affect the RF being transmitted by the station. Please see the individual
field helps for more information. Actual fields editable on this screen
will vary depending on the station system configuration.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="call_sign_inter_help"><content>CALL SIGN INTERVAL HELP
Enter the desired time interval between automatic transmissions
of the stations programmed call sign.
Value may range from 1 to 60 minutes.
Initial default value is 15 minutes.
NOTE: The station will transmit the call sign only if the station was
keyed up at least once during the time specified in the interval.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="max_deviation_help"><content>MAX DEVIATION HELP
Enter the desired maximum deviation in percent for the current channel.
Value may range from 0% to 100%.
Initial default value is 92%.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="ant_relay_delay_help"><content>ANTENNA RELAY DELAY HELP
This field allows customization for a particular antenna
relay response time before keying the station.
Enter the desired antenna relay delay time in milliseconds.
Value may range from 30 to 900 milliseconds.
Initial default is 30 milliseconds.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="repeater_oper_help"><content>REPEATER OPERATION HELP
The Repeater Operation may be toggled between REPEATER and BASE.
Repeater Operation is selected for Standalone Repeater systems. For Wide
Area Spectra/ASTRO-TAC operation, BASE operation should be selected.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="start_last_active_chn_help"><content>STARTUP ON LAST ACTIVE CHANNEL HELP
When the station cycles through a Cold Reset or Warm Start, the startup
channel will be the last active channel when this field is set to ENABLED.
When DISABLED, the station will start up on the Startup channel as
programmed on the RF CONFIGURATION screen.
Use Up/Down arrow keys to toggle through the choices.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="startup_chn_help"><content>STARTUP CHANNEL HELP
The Startup Channel is the channel that the station will select after Reset.
The Startup Channel has a legal range of 1 to the maximum number of channels
present in the station, up to 16.
Default is Channel 1.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="ir_startup_chn_help"><content>IR STARTUP CHANNEL HELP
The Startup Channel is the channel that the station will select after Reset.
The Startup Channel has a legal range of 1 to the maximum number of
repeaters present at the IR Site.
NOTE: The Startup Channel is the Repeater Number at the Site.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="rdlap_repeat_help"><content>PACKET DATA REPEAT HELP
The PACKET DATA REPEAT Field is used to selectively enable or disable repeating
Packet Data in an ASTRO Repeater system configuration. Repeated data is used to
support P25 OTAR (Over The Air Rekeying) and GPS location applications.
Other applications using repeated data may or may not operate as desired.
Use the Up/Dn Arrow Keys to toggle between the choices ENABLED and DISABLED.
Initial Default is DISABLED.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="rdlap_wl_dod_help"><content>PACKET DATA WIRELINE DROP OUT DELAY HELP
The PACKET DATA Wireline Drop Out Delay field indicates the amount of hang
time added to the end of an PACKET DATA and Astro CAI WL transmission.
Value may range from 0 to 255 seconds.
Initial default value is 0 sec.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="rx_code_timer_help"><content>SECURE RX CODE DETECT FADE TIMER HELP
Enter the desired Rx Code Detect Fade Timer value in this field.
NOTE: This field should only be edited if a Secure Capable Modulation Type
is selected at the HARDWARE CONFIGURATION screen.
The legal range is 0 to 9999 msec.
Initial default value is 80 msec.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="fade_eom_timer_help"><content>SECURE FADE EOM TIMER HELP (EOM TIME AT END OF FADE TIME)
Enter the desired Tx EOM Time at End of Fade Time value in this field.
NOTE: This field should only be edited if a Secure Capable Modulation Type
is selected at the HARDWARE CONFIGURATION screen.
The legal range is 0 to 9999 msec.
Initial default value is 80 msec.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="fast_keyup_help"><content>FAST KEY-UP HELP
Fast Key-Up brings the transmitter to at least 90% programmed power
output from an external input, and routes either wideband (Gen Tx Data +/-)
or Aux Tx (Aux Tx) audio. In wideband routing, the transmitter will be at
90% programmed power output in 10 milliseconds or less. In Aux Tx routing,
the transmitter will be at 90% within 20 milliseconds.
This feature guarantees key-up times of 10 milliseconds (Wideband routing)
and 20 milliseconds (Aux Tx) for the following station types:
900 MHz Quantar
800 MHz Quantar and Quantro
UHF Quantar
VHF Quantro
VHF Quantar and UHF Quantro stations currently guarantee key-up times of 12
milliseconds (Wideband routing) and 20 milliseconds (Aux Tx routing).
This feature can only be enabled for Conventional Analog Non-Simulcast
systems with Enhanced WildCard only.
The choices for Fast Key-Up is DISABLED, WIDEBAND, and AUX TX.
The default for Fast Key-Up is DISABLED.
If wideband receive audio is required, a Wildcard table must be configured
to route discriminator audio to the Aux Rx port. The Wildcard choice for
this option is "RXDSC-AUXRX ON." Enabling Fast Key-up will not
automatically configure this table entry.
In order to ensure Fast Key-up times, the station must be dekeyed for at
least 30 milliseconds before asserting a Fast Key-up. A Fast Key PTT
must remained keyed for at least 30 milliseconds to preserve normal
operation of the station.
NOTE: To ensure that the station keys up in the time specified when the
Fast Key-Up option is set to either WIDEBAND or AUX TX, the Forward and
Reflected power values are not reported to MOSCAD.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="car_malf_tot_help"><content>CARRIER MALFUNCTION TIMER HELP
Enter the desired CARRIER MALFUNCTION TIMER value into this field.
Allowed range is 1 to 245 seconds. The value 254 seconds indicates that
the CARRIER MALFUNCTION TIMER is DISABLED.
For Dynamic Frequency Blocking (DFB) channels, change the CARRIER
MALFUNCTION TIMER to 254 (disabled) and set the BRStat field on Page 2
of the Channel Screen to ENABLED.
For all other channels, if the Carrier Malfunction Timer is 254, change
the BRSTAT field on Page 2 of the Channel Screen to DISABLED.
Default setting is 50 seconds
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="trunking_6809_gen_help"><content>TRUNKING 6809 HELP
This screen allows the user to configure system parameters related to 6809
Trunking systems. This screen is not editable in non-6809 Trunking systems.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="trunk_sys_type_help"><content>TRUNKED SYSTEM TYPE HELP
The TRUNKED SYSTEM TYPE field indicates the type of trunked system the Base
Station is being used in.
Legal choices are: SMARTNET
SmartZone
Default is SMARTNET.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="rstat_mode_help"><content>RSTAT MODE HELP
The RSTAT MODE field indicates if RSTAT should be toggled according to
normal RSTAT criteria, or if it should be toggled only according to the
state of connect tone detection.
This field affects the operation of the RSTAT control signal
that the station provides to the 6809 Central Controller.
There are two options for this field:
NORMAL
DUAL CT
Default is NORMAL.
NORMAL - (default) In this mode RSTAT is used to indicate the presence of a
carrier frequency, on the specific channel, to the Central Controller.
DUAL CT - In this mode RSTAT will be used to indicate the presence of either
connect tone, selected on the ACCESS CODE TABLE Screen, to the Central Controller.
When this option is selected, select a second connect tone for use on the ACCESS
CODE table screen. Special firmware must be installed in the 6809 Central
Controller in conjunction with this mode of operation. When this option is
selected DUAL CT FAILSOFT ONLY mode cannot be enabled.
NOTE: THIS OPTION IS RESERVED FOR USE BY MOTOROLA SERVICE PERSONNEL TO AID
IN CONNECT TONE MIGRATION ON EXISTING SYSTEMS. THIS MODE IS NOT INTENDED FOR
PERMANENT OR LONG TERM OPERATION.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="failsoft_help"><content>LOCAL FAILSOFT HELP
The FAILSOFT field indicates if the Base Station should enter failsoft mode
if the failsoft criteria is met.
The Failsoft parameter only controls Local Failsoft and it has no effect
on Site Failsoft. In a Simulcast or Voting system, Site Failsoft is
controlled by the Comparator.
Use the Up/Dn Arrow Keys to toggle between the choices ENABLED and DISABLED.
Initial default value: ENABLED.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="line_trc_encode_help"><content>FAILSOFT LINE TRC ENCODE HELP
FAILSOFT LINE TRC ENCODE is used to determine if a HLGT/LLGT TRC sequence is
sent down when the Base Station is in Failsoft.
If CONSOLE PRIORITY is set to ENABLED (on the WIRELINE CONFIGURATION screen)
and the STATION TYPE field is ANALOG ONLY (on the STATION
CONFIGURATION screen), then FAILSOFT LINE TRC ENCODE must be set to ENABLED.
Otherwise, it must be set to DISABLED.
If FAILSOFT LINE TRC ENCODE is ENABLED, then the STATUS TONE field (on the
WIRELINE CONFIGURATION SCREEN) must be set to DISABLED.
Use the Up/Dn Arrow Keys to toggle between the choices ENABLED and DISABLED.
Initial default value: DISABLED.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="trk_tickle_tot_help"><content>TRUNKING TICKLE SOURCE TIME OUT TIME HELP
The TRUNKING TICKLE SOURCE TIME OUT TIME field indicates the amount of
time that activity has not been detected from the Failsoft source before
entering Failsoft.
Value may range from 1 to 72 seconds.
Initial default value is 1 sec and this value is normally used with a
Trunking Tickle Source of TX DATA LINE. If the Trunking Tickle Source
is changed to the MUTE LINE, this field should be changed to 72 seconds.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="carrier_squelch_help"><content>FAILSOFT CARRIER SQUELCH HELP
The FAILSOFT CARRIER SQUELCH field is used to indicate if the Base Stations
Rx and RPTR activation parameters should revert to S (Carrier Squelch Only)
when in Failsoft.
Use the Up/Dn Arrow Keys to toggle between the choices ENABLED and DISABLED.
Initial default value: DISABLED
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="dual_ct_only_help"><content>FAILSOFT DUAL CT FAILSOFT ONLY HELP
The DUAL CT FAILSOFT ONLY field allows the station to respond to one or two
connect tones when in failsoft.
The two options for this field are:
ENABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED - (default) This selection will cause the station to accept and
respond to the connect tone value entered in the ACCESS CODE TABLE: CONNECT
TONE #1 during failsoft operation.
ENABLED - This selection will cause the station to accept the selectable
connect tone value entered in the ACCESS CODE TABLE:CONNECT TONE #1 and
in addition, the station will, by default, accept connect tone zero
(0 : 105.9 HZ). This feature must be enabled to accommodate subscriber
units that default (unselectable) to connect tone zero during failsoft.
NOTE: When RSTAT MODE is set to DUAL CT this field must be set to DISABLED.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="trk_tickle_src_help"><content>TRUNKING TICKLE SOURCE HELP
The TRUNKING TICKLE SOURCE field indicates which 6809 input, MUTE LINE
or TX DATA LINE, that is monitored to determine if the Base Station
should enter failsoft. For Privacy Plus Systems, the TICKLE SOURCE is
normally set to MUTE LINE thus providing for SLOW FAILSOFT determination.
For Smartnet Systems, the TICKLE SOURCE is normally set to TX DATA LINE
thus providing for FAST FAILSOFT determination.
Legal choices are: MUTE LINE and TX DATA LINE.
Default is TX DATA LINE.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="pl_ct_disable_help"><content>SMART CONNECT TONE DECODER HELP
The SMART CONNECT TONE DECODER field allows the trunked repeater to enter
repeat mode before connect tone is actually detected. The trunked repeater
will remain in the repeat mode without detecting connect tone for the time
specified in the Smart Connect Tone Disable Delay Timer field.
Once connect tone is detected, the trunked repeater will terminate the
Smart Connect Tone Decoder function and remain in repeat mode until the
Connect Tone is no longer detected, or Disconnect Tone is detected.
Smart Connect Tone Decoder function can be started by either detecting
carrier (UNSQUELCH) or by detecting the mute line tickle pulse (MUTE
TICKLE).
The Smart Connect Tone Decoder is NOT just for Repeat qualifiers. It is
actually for Receive qualifiers. Meaning, that when "Mute Tickle" is
selected, the "Analog Rx Activation" and "Analog Rptr Activation" fields
are made "S" (Carrier Squelch) for the first 700ms (or the SCT Disable
Delay) instead of SC (default Carrier Sq. plus Connect Tone).
The function can be totally disabled by selecting DISABLED.
Legal choices are: DISABLED
MUTE TICKLE
UNSQUELCH
Default is MUTE TICKLE.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="disable_delay_help"><content>SMART CONNECT TONE DISABLE DELAY HELP
The SMART CONNECT TONE DISABLE DELAY field indicates the time the trunked
repeater will remain in the repeat mode without detecting connect tone.
Value may range from 0 to 1000 msec.
Initial default value: 700 msec.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="low_speed_data_help"><content>LOW SPEED DATA/PL DPL DEVIATION HELP
The LOW SPEED DATA/PL DEVIATION field specifies the percentage of Full
System Deviation that is set for Low Speed TDATA deviation for trunking
systems and PL/DPL deviation for conventional systems.
Value may range from 0 to 25.0%.
Initial default value for 25 kHz channels: 17.0% or 850 Hz
Initial default value for 12.5 kHz channels: 18.0% or 450 Hz
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="con_priority_help"><content>CONSOLE PRIORITY HELP
The CONSOLE PRIORITY field indicates the presence of a console in a trunked
SMARTNET system. This field applies to ANALOG, SECURENET and ASTRO systems.
Use the Up/Dn Arrow Keys to toggle between the choices ENABLED and DISABLED.
Initial default value is DISABLED.
Console Priority and PTT Priorities:
Setting CONSOLE PRIORITY to ENABLED will also change the PTT Priorities to
change to W>R>L. When DISABLED, the PTT Priorities will revert to R>W>L.
FOR ANALOG AND SECURENET SYSTEMS:
=====================
Console Priority and Failsoft:
If CONSOLE PRIORITY is ENABLED and the STATION TYPE field is set to ANALOG
ONLY (on the HARDWARE CONFIGURATION screen), then the 6809
TRUNKING:FAILSOFT LINE TRC ENCODE field must be set to ENABLED.
If CONSOLE PRIORITY is DISABLED, then the 6809 TRUNKING:FAILSOFT LINE TRC
ENCODE field must also be set to DISABLED.
Console Priority and TRC:
When CONSOLE PRIORITY is DISABLED, the TRC table is cleared. When CONSOLE
PRIORITY is ENABLED, the TRC table is cleared and the guard tone frequency
is assigned the KEY command. Note that the TRC table is non-editable for
6809 Trunking systems.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="frequency_ref_gen_help"><content>FREQUENCY REFERENCE HELP
temporary help for FORM
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="ref_selection_help"><content>FREQUENCY REFERENCE HELP
The FREQUENCY REFERENCE indicates whether the Base Station is to utilize
the internal reference that comes standard with most products, or if a
higher stability reference is to be used. The allowed choices for most
systems are:
INTERNAL - STANDARD
INTERNAL - HIGH STABILITY
EXTERNAL - 10 MHZ
EXTERNAL - 5 MHZ
The default for most systems is INTERNAL - STANDARD.
NOTE: For 900 MHz systems, the INTERNAL - STANDARD selection is not a
valid selection. The default selection for this case is EXTERNAL - 5 MHZ.
The INTERNAL HIGH selection requires an internal UHSO hardware card to
be installed in the station.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="rx_carrier_timer_help"><content>RX CARRIER DETECT FADE TIMER HELP (ASTRO)
The Rx Carrier Detect Fade Timer will maintain the carrier detect qualifier
for the specified time value after losing carrier detect at the receiver.
This will help prevent the wireline modems from lost framing during brief
Rx fades of an analog receive call.
The legal range is 0 to 9999 msec.
Initial default value is 80 msec.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="rxline1"><content>RX LOCAL OSCILLATOR STEERING LINE 1 TEST HELP
This test checks for proper operation of Local Oscillator 1 on the
Receiver module.
Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="rxline2"><content>RX LOCAL OSCILLATOR STEERING LINE 2 TEST HELP
This test checks for proper operation of Local Oscillator 2 on the
Receiver module.
Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="trc_commands"><content>TRC COMMANDS HELP
For each Function Tone (FT) listed, enter the desired command sequence for
the station to execute when the tone is decoded. Up to eight separate
commands may be entered for each FT. Use the TAB key to move to
the next field, or the Shift TAB key to move to the previous field.
If the HLGT is set to within 40 Hz of a TRC Function Tone, that Function
Tone is not allowed to have any commands associated with it.
Function tone 16 and 17 are available only for station control software
release R14.06.00 and later.
WARNING: Make sure all CHN XXX commands reference valid channel numbers.
If an undefined channel number is referenced from the TRC table,
inconsistent station operation may result.
NOTE: The station provides for three methods of keying up from the
console, TRC, DC or EXT PTT. In all cases the console audio is
connected to Line 1. The three methods are exclusive and cannot be
used at the same time. To key up from the console use either
TRC or DC or EXT PTT. Only one method should be used.
NOTE: There are two commands that were designed to handle changes in
station operation while maintaining proper control of a station which
is scanning. These commands are SCAN SUSPEND and SCAN RESUME. If an
external input causes the station to change any of its operating modes,
then the TRC, DC or WildCard action table that contains these
commands must also include the SCAN SUSPEND and SCAN RESUME commands.
Scan operation must be stopped, the change invoked in the station and
then SCAN can commence. An example is as follows:
EXAMPLE: SCAN SUSPEND CHN 3 SCAN RESUME
COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS:
ALARM ON This command will enable the alarm beeps to be routed as
defined in the codeplug. This command would normally
follow an ALARM OFF command.
ALARM OFF This command will disable the alarms from being set to
both the RF and the wireline as selected in the codeplug.
Alarm beeps can be turned on again using the ALARM ON
command.
CHN XXX Commands station to tune transmitter and receiver to the
specified channel; channel must exist on the Channel
Information table.
Example: CHN 002
GATEACC ON Enable Multi-Coded Squelch GATED PL's/DPL's to repeat.
GATEACC OFF Disable Multi-Coded Squelch GATED PL's/DPL's from
repeating.
KEY Commands station to key transmitter and remain keyed as
long as low level guard tone is received.
KEY ON Commands station to key transmitter indefinitely; trans-
mitter may be de-keyed by the KEY OFF command.
KEY OFF Commands station to de-key transmitter.
MORE Commands station to look for next function tone.
The MORE Command is not required for the Quantar/Quantro
Station to look for the next function. The Station will
do this automatically. The MORE Command is only provided
to allow for complete compatibility with older Stations
that did require this command.
MONITOR Commands station to turn on receiver-to-wireline audio
path; overrides all squelch requirements, if any.
MRTI ON This command enables Phone Patch operation after it was
disabled by a MRTI OFF command.
MRTI OFF This command will disable Phone Patch operation. Phone Patch
operation is always enabled at startup (RESET).
RXPL ON Commands station to turn on appropriate receiver squelch
(as programmed in Channel Information table for affected
channel); includes CSQ, PL, and DPL.
RXPL OFF Commands station to turn off appropriate squelch (as pro-
grammed in Channel Information table for affected channel);
includes CSQ, PL, and DPL.
RPT ON Enables repeater mode (if repeater capable); station will
repeat when qualifiers (as programmed in Rptr Activation
field in Channel Information table) are met.
RPT OFF Disables repeater mode (if repeater capable); station will
not repeat regardless of qualifiers (as programmed in Rptr
Activation field in Channel Information table).
SCAN ON If the Scanning Receiver Option has been purchased, the
station begins the scanning operation. Scanning continues
until it is turned off or suspended. The scan begins on
the first channel in the Scan List.
SCAN OFF Turns scanning off and the stations returns to the CURRENT
channel.
SCAN RESUME If the scanning function has been suspended by the
SCAN SUSPEND command and the scanning function is on,
the station will restart the scan function on the SCAN
channel. SCAN RESUME restarts the scan timers.
SCAN SUSPEND If the scanning function is on, the station will stop
scanning and place the station on the CURRENT channel.
If the scanning function is off, the station will ignore
this command.
SELALARM ON This command will negate the effect of the SELALARM OFF
command. If an alarm condition exists and the beeps had
been turned off by the SELALARM OFF command, this command
will turn the alarm beeps back on.
SELALARM OFF This command will turn off the alarm beeps to both the
RF and wireline. However, if a new alarm condition is
established, then those beeps will be sent to either or
both the RF and wireline depending on codeplug configuration.
TXPL ON Commands station to turn on appropriate transmitter squelch
code (as programmed in Channel Information table for the
affected channel); includes CSQ, PL, and DPL.
TXPL OFF Commands station to turn off appropriate transmitter squelch
code (as programmed in Channel Information table for the
affected channel); includes CSQ, PL, and DPL.
WAIT xxxx Commands station to wait certain amount of time before
executing the next command. The units of the time for this
command are milliseconds (ms) and the value will be
rounded to the nearest 10 milliseconds.
Example: WAIT 1000
(This command tells the station to wait for 1000 ms).
Sample TRC Commands
The following shows the typical TRC commands for a station programmed for
4 channel operation, and controlled by a 4 channel tone remote console:
GUARD TONE: MORE
2175 Hz
F TONE 01: MON
F TONE 02: CHN 001 KEY
F TONE 03: CHN 002 KEY
F TONE 04:
F TONE 05:
F TONE 06:
F TONE 07:
F TONE 08: CHN 003 KEY
F TONE 09: CHN 004 KEY
F TONE 10: MORE
F TONE 11: MORE
F TONE 12:
F TONE 13:
F TONE 14:
F TONE 15:
F TONE 16:
F TONE 17:
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="dc_commands"><content>DC COMMANDS HELP
The DC Command Table defines for each DC current used in DC Remote
Control a series of commands the station should perform upon activation
of the current (DETECT) and deactivation of the current (UNDETECT). Up
to eight separate commands may be entered for each current DETECT and
UNDETECT state. Use the TAB key to move to the next field,
or the Shift TAB key to move to the previous field.
WARNING: Make sure all CHN XXX commands reference valid channel numbers.
If an undefined channel number is referenced from the DC Command
Table, inconsistent station operation may result.
NOTE: The station provides for three methods of keying up from the
console, TRC, DC or EXT PTT. In all cases the console audio is
connected to Line 1. The three methods are exclusive and cannot be
used at the same time. To key up from the console use either
TRC or DC or EXT PTT. Only one method should be used.
NOTE: There are two commands that were designed to handle changes in
station operation while maintaining proper control of a station which
is scanning. These commands are SCAN SUSPEND and SCAN RESUME. If an
external input causes the station to change any of its operating modes,
then the TRC, DC or WildCard action table that contains these
commands must also include the SCAN SUSPEND and SCAN RESUME commands.
Scan operation must be stopped, the change invoked in the station and
then SCAN can commence. An example is as follows:
EXAMPLE: SCAN SUSPEND CHN 3 SCAN RESUME
COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS:
ALARM ON This command will enable the alarm beeps to be routed as defined
in the codeplug. This command would normally follow an ALARM OFF command.
ALARM OFF This command will disable the alarms from being set to both
the RF and the wireline as selected in the codeplug. Alarm beeps
can be turned on again using the ALARM ON command.
CHN XXX Commands station to tune transmitter and receiver to the
specified channel; channel must exist on the Channel
Information table. Example: CHN 002
GATEACC ON Enable Multi-Coded Squelch GATED PL's/DPL's to repeat.
GATEACC OFF Disable Multi-Coded Squelch GATED PL's/DPL's from
repeating.
KEY ON Commands station to key transmitter indefinitely; transmitter
may be de-keyed by the KEY OFF command. KEY OFF Commands station
to de-key transmitter.
MONITOR Commands station to turn on receiver-to-wireline audio path;
overrides all squelch requirements, if any.
MRTI ON This command enables Phone Patch operation after it was disabled
by a MRTI OFF command.
MRTI OFF This command will disable Phone Patch operation. Phone Patch
operation is always enabled at startup (RESET).
RXPL ON Commands station to turn on appropriate receiver squelch
(as programmed in Channel Information table for affected
channel); includes CSQ, PL, and DPL.
RXPL OFF Commands station to turn off appropriate squelch (as programmed
in Channel Information table for affected channel); includes
CSQ,PL, and DPL.
RPT ON Enables repeater mode (if repeater capable); station will
repeat when qualifiers (as programmed in Rptr Activation field
in Channel Information table) are met.
RPT OFF Disables repeater mode (if repeater capable); station will not
repeat regardless of qualifiers (as programmed in Rptr
Activation field in Channel Information table).
SCAN ON If the Scanning Receiver Option has been purchased, the
station begins the scanning operation. Scanning continues until
it is turned off or suspended. The scan begins on the first
channel in the Scan List.
SCAN OFF Turns scanning off and the stations returns to the CURRENT
channel.
SCAN RESUME If the scanning function has been suspended by the SCAN
SUSPEND command and the scanning function is on, the station
will restart the scan function on the SCAN channel. SCAN RESUME
restarts the scan timers.
SCAN SUSPEND If the scanning function is on, the station will stop
scanning and place the station on the CURRENT channel. If the
scanning function is off, the station will ignore this command.
SELALARM ON This command will negate the effect of the SELALARM OFF
command. If an alarm condition exists and the beeps had been
turned off by the SELALARM OFF command, this command will turn
the alarm beeps back on.
SELALARM OFF This command will turn off the alarm beeps to both the RF
and wireline. However, if a new alarm condition is established,
then those beeps will be sent to either or both the RF and
wireline depending on codeplug configuration.
TXPL ON Commands station to turn on appropriate transmitter squelch
code (as programmed in Channel Information table for the
affected channel); includes CSQ, PL, and DPL.
TXPL OFF Commands station to turn off appropriate transmitter squelch
code (as programmed in Channel Information table for the
affected channel); includes CSQ, PL, and DPL.
WAIT xxxx Commands station to wait certain amount of time before
executing the next command. The units of the time for this
command are milliseconds (ms). Legal range is 1 to 2550 ms.
Example: WAIT 1000 (This command tells the station to wait for 1000 ms).
Sample DC Commands:
The following shows a typical DC command set for a station
programmed for 4 channel operation and controlled by a 4
channel DC remote console:
+12.5 ma detect CHN 2 KEY ON
undetect KEY OFF
+5.5 ma detect CHN 1 KEY ON
undetect KEY OFF
+2.5 ma detect
undetect
-2.5 ma detect MON
undetect
-5.5 ma detect CHN 3 KEY ON
undetect KEY OFF
-12.5 ma detect CHN 4 KEY ON
undetect KEY OFF
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="alarm_screen_help"><content>STATUS REPORT SCREEN HELP
The RSS displays all of the status messages that the Connected Device has
previously logged.
To view the entire message use the Left-Arrow and Right-Arrow keys.
Status messages indicate (in order, left to right): First Occurrence of
message, Most Recent Occurrence of message, Number of times message has
occurred, and description. The user may refer to the RSS manual,
Diagnostics and Status section for the proper action to take if a specific
alarm is seen.
The message text message may be too long to display on the screen. Use the
scroll bar to view the entire message.
NOTE: The Status Message Report will only display messages that have already
occurred. It will not display status messages as they occur. For this
ability, use the Service:Status Panel screen.
The Status Report Screen will also indicate the versions of Firmware present
in the device and the current codeplug version. This information will be
important for possible analysis of the Status Messages.
When connected to older version devices, some of the firmware version
fields may be blank. This will also occur if the device does not have
the hardware installed, i.e., no Wireline module is present.
Button Descriptions:
Help - Displays this screen.
Clear All - Clear all the status messages.
Save Report - Save all status messages to a file.
Save Alerts - Save Alerts to File (for ASTRO-TAC 3000 Comparator only)
Otherwise not used.
Refresh - Refresh the current report.
Note: For the ASTRO TAC 3000 Comparator, the Save Alerts function is
provided. This function will save the debug alert messages from the
comparator to a file. However, this should only be done at the request
of Schaumburg Engineering. Downloading the Alerts might take quite a
while and the channel performance of the comparator might be degraded
by this process.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="save_alarm_file"><content>SAVE STATUS REPORT HELP
The Save Status Report function allows the user to save the current
Device's Status Report to a disk file that can be printed later.
On the Save Status Report to File screen, the Directory Name field
displays the current selected directory. Drive names and wildcards may
be included.
The Filename field consists of a filename entered by the user.
A filename may be entered in one of two fashions. The first one is to type
the filename directly in the field. The second one is to navigate through
the files using the following keys in the section that lists all of the
files.
PgUp/PgDn: Display more files if all of the directory's files can not fit
on one page.
Up/Dn Arrow: These keys will move cursor up or down to the next file.
Tab: Moves cursor to the next field.
ShiftTab: Moves cursor to the previous field.
Right Arrow: Moves cursor to filename in the same row in the next column.
If cursor is in last column the cursor will move to the last
filename.
Left Arrow: Moves cursor to filename in the same row in the previous
column. If cursor is in first column on first page then cursor
will move up to the directory pathname field so that a new
directory pathname may be entered.
Enter: Will save the file that is displayed on the 'Enter Filename' line.
If a file already exists, the user will be asked if he wants to
overwrite it. Overwriting a file will create a '.bak' version of
the original file.
Button Descriptions:
Help - Displays this screen.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="alarm_directory"><content>ENTER DIRECTORY NAME HELP
Enter the desired directory pathname where the status report is stored
into this field. Any MS-DOS legal pathname is allowed. Wildcards may be
appended to the pathname to display only desired files in the directory.
Press ENTER or TAB to accept the pathname and to display the directory
contents.
When this pathname is changed, the RSS will use the new pathname as its
default the next time the RSS is entered.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="alarm_filename"><content>ENTER FILENAME HELP
Enter the desired filename in this field. Any legal MS-DOS filename
characters are allowed. (To select an existing file, the filename
highlighted by the cursor will automatically be copied to the
'Enter Filename' field; either select this file by pressing Enter or TAB
or type over the existing filename).
Press Enter or TAB to select the file.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="alarm_dir_contents_help"><content>OVERWRITE STATUS REPORT FILE FROM LIST HELP
Use the Up/Dn, Left/Right Arrow Keys to select a status report file from
the given list. The filename will automatically be placed in the FILENAME
field. To overwrite the file press the ENTER key.
Press the TAB key to move to the DIRECTORY field.
Press the SHIFT TAB key to move to the FILENAME field.
Press ESC or Cancel to exit the WRITE STATUS REPORT FILE screen without
writing the status report to a file.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="access_screen_help"><content>ACCESS CODE TABLE INFORMATION HELP
This screen is used to Add, Delete, and Modify access code table
information. Values entered will only apply to the currently selected
access code table.
Button Descriptions:
Help - Displays this screen.
Add Table - Add New Access Code Table to end of the List.
Previous Table - Will display previous Access Code Table in the List.
Next Table - Will display next Access Code Table in the List.
Delete Table - Delete Currently Displayed Access Code Table.
NOTE: The added Access Code Table will always be added to the end of the
current channel list.
MULTI-NAC
=========================================================
When MCS is set to MULTI-NAC, the Access Code Table is enhanced to include
a table for up to eight sets of ASTRO NACs for transmit and receive. RX NAC
operation as a choice is removed. The receiver will accept any of the RX
NACs that are programmed in the table. If repeat is enabled for the channel,
the station will repeat with the Tx NAC associated with the Rx NAC in the
table.
For use with WILD CARD, the MCS USER Number is set to the table entry
number which corresponds to the RX NAC that is being received.
ASTRO CAI stations provide mixed mode analog and ASTRO operation. The Access
Code Table in this case only provides the choice for one PL. Reception of
multiple PLs is only allowed in ANALOG only stations not in ASTRO CAI
stations.
ASTRO CAI stations with MCS set to MULTI-NAC allow multiple channels, each
channel can have its own unique access code table.
ANALOG stations with MCS set to MULTI PL only allow one channel and that
channel can only have one access code table.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="option_screen_help"><content>OPTIONS HELP
The Option Screen allows the user to configure the currently enabled
station features such as Wireline, Simulcast, and ASTRO operations. These
features are enabled at the HARDWARE CONFIGURATION screen.
Refer to the help for each individual field for specific information.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="read_codeplug_file"><content>READ/MERGE FILE HELP
The Directory Name field displays the current selected directory. Drive
names and wildcards may be included.
The Filename field consists of a filename entered by the user.
A filename may be entered in one of two fashions. The first one is to type
the filename directly in the field. The second one is to navigate through
the files using the following keys in the section that lists all of the
files.
If the archive directory pathname was changed, the button F5 may
be used to restore the default pathname for the archive directory.
PgUp/PgDn: Display more files if all of the directory's files can not fit
on one page.
Up/Dn Arrow: These keys will move cursor up or down to the next file.
Tab: Moves cursor to the next field.
ShiftTab: Moves cursor to the previous field.
Right Arrow: Moves cursor to filename in the same row in the next column.
If cursor is in last column the cursor will move to the last
filename.
Left Arrow: Moves cursor to filename in the same row in the previous
column. If cursor is in first column on first page then cursor
will move up to the directory pathname field so that a new
directory pathname may be entered.
Enter: Will read the file that is displayed on the 'Enter Filename' line.
Button Descriptions:
Help - Displays this screen.
F3 - View File Info.
F5 - Restore Archive Directory To Default Path Name.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="save_codeplug_file"><content>SAVE CODEPLUG HELP
Button Descriptions:
Help - Displays this screen.
F3 - Edit File Info.
F5 - Restore Archive Directory To Default Path Name.
On the Save Codeplug to File screen, the Directory Name field displays
the current selected directory. Drive names and wildcards may be included.
The Filename field consists of a filename entered by the user.
A filename may be entered in one of two fashions. The first one is to type
the filename directly in the field. The second one is to navigate through
the files using the following keys in the section that lists all of the
files.
PgUp/PgDn: Display more files if all of the directory's files can not fit
on one page.
Up/Dn Arrow: These keys will move cursor up or down to the next file.
Tab: Moves cursor to the next field.
ShiftTab: Moves cursor to the previous field.
Right Arrow: Moves cursor to filename in the same row in the next column.
If cursor is in last column the cursor will move to the last
filename.
Left Arrow: Moves cursor to filename in the same row in the previous
column. If cursor is in first column on first page then cursor
will move up to the directory pathname field so that a new
directory pathname may be entered.
Enter: Will save the file that is displayed on the 'Enter Filename' line.
If a file already exists, the user will be asked if he wants to
overwrite it. Overwriting a file will create a '.bak' version of
the original file.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="intellimenu_help"><content>INTELLIREPEATER MENU HELP
This screen is the main menu used to program IntelliRepeaters.
Access each of the selections, program the necessary screens,
and proceed to the next menu selection until all screens required
at install have been accessed and programmed.
Button Descriptions:
Help - Displays this screen.
F2 - Site Frequency - Modify or view the Assigned Channel blocks,
and Channel spacing (VHF and UHF ONLY).
F3 - Site General - Changing and viewing of general Site information.
F4 - Site Timer - Changing and viewing Site Time Out Timers.
F5 - Radio ID Partitioning - Partition ID's for frequency band and
modulation capabilities.
F6 - Repeater General - Change/View individual repeater information.
F7 - Repeater Summary - Viewing and reordering repeaters.
F8 - Changing and viewing the RF Configuration information.
F9 - WildCard Menu.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="intellimenu_50_help"><content>INTELLIREPEATER 5.0 MENU HELP
This screen is the main menu used to program 5.0 IntelliRepeaters.
Access each of the selections, program the necessary screens,
and proceed to the next menu selection until all screens required
at install have been accessed and programmed.
Button Descriptions:
Help - Displays this screen.
F2 - Not Used
F3 - Site General - Changing and viewing of general Site information.
F4 - Site Timer - Changing and viewing Site Time Out Timers.
F6 - Repeater General - Change/View individual repeater information.
F7 - Repeater Summary - Viewing and reordering repeaters.
F8 - Setting Zone Controller IP Addresses
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="intellirepeater_gen"><content>INTELLIREPEATER REPEATER INFORMATION HELP
This is screen help for the IntelliRepeater Repeater Operation screen.
This screen allows the user to setup channel-specific parameters for each
IntelliRepeater in the system. Refer to the individual field helps for
more information.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="repeater_number"><content>REPEATER NUMBER HELP
This field indicates the number of the repeater whose data is currently
displayed. Repeater Number is used to uniquely identify each repeater
in the trunked system. Duplicate numbers are not allowed, and the assigned
number may range from 1 to the number of repeaters that exist for this site,
up to an absolute maximum of 28.
If Voice On Control is enabled at the Site General Screen, only 4 repeaters
will be allowed to be programmed.
Enter the number of the repeater to be viewed. Press Enter or Tab to
display the repeater data.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="repeater_number_50"><content>REPEATER NUMBER HELP
This field indicates the number of the repeater whose data is currently
displayed. Repeater Number is used to uniquely identify each repeater
in the trunked system. Duplicate numbers are not allowed, and the assigned
number may range from 1 to the number of repeaters that exist for this site,
up to an absolute maximum of 28.
Enter the number of the repeater to be viewed. Press Enter or Tab to
display the repeater data.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="active_master"><content>ACTIVE MASTER RANK HELP
Sets the rank for the channel to become the ACTIVE MASTER.
The first repeater to power up will become the AM, so the only
time this enters in is if the AM fails and a new AM comes up.
Legal range is 1 through 99. 1 is the highest priority and 99 the lowest.
WARNING: Each repeater MUST be assigned a unique priority ranking.
If the user does not configure all the repeater rankings properly,
the RSS will assign the next available ACTIVE MASTER RANK with the lowest
priority when the user exits the screen.
Changing the number to a lower value will increase the possibility that
this repeater will become the active master. Increase the value to
decrease the possibility of this repeater becoming the active master.
Enter the desired ranking in this field. Press Enter or Tab to move
to the next field.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="ir_serial_number"><content>SERIAL NUMBER HELP
This field will indicate the serial number of the repeater that is assigned
the current repeater number. This field MUST have a serial number displayed
to be legal. When a new repeater is added to the site, a unique serial
number must be supplied or no more repeaters may be added to the list.
Enter the desired serial number in this field. Press Enter or Tab to
move to the next field.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="ir_rx_freq"><content>IR RX FREQUENCY HELP
Receive frequency in MHz for the selected repeater.
Enter the desired Rx channel frequency for the IntelliRepeater into this
field. The frequency range depends on the band selected.
Either digit keys, or the Up/Down arrow keys may be used to scroll
through the legal channel frequencies for this field.
For VHF or UHF ranges, the Entered frequency must be within the currently
legal block frequency ranges as entered at the SITE
FREQUENCY screen.
For 800 MHz ranges, This field is non-editable and will be automatically
calculated based on the entered Tx Channel Frequency.
The Rx Freq has an Rx Channel Number associated with it as designated
by the FCC.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="ir_tx_freq"><content>IR TX FREQUENCY HELP
Transmit frequency in MHz for the selected repeater.
Enter the desired Tx channel frequency for the IntelliRepeater into this
field. The frequency range depends on the band selected.
Either digit keys, or the Up/Down arrow keys may be used to scroll
through the legal channel frequencies for this field.
For VHF or UHF ranges, the Entered frequency must be within the currently
legal block frequency ranges as entered at the SITE
FREQUENCY screen.
For 800 MHz ranges, the Entered frequency must be within the currently
legal frequency range as determined at the Hardware Configuration:
IntelliRepeater Frequency Band field.
The Tx Freq has a Tx Channel Number associated with it as designated
by the FCC.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="ir_tx_freq_50"><content>IR TX FREQUENCY HELP
Transmit frequency in MHz for the selected repeater.
Enter the desired Tx channel frequency for the IntelliRepeater into this
field. The frequency range depends on the band selected.
Either digit keys, or the Up/Down arrow keys may be used to scroll
through the legal channel frequencies for this field.
For 800 Mhz ranges, the Entered frequency must be within the currently
legal frequency range as determined at the Hardware Configuration:
IntelliRepeater Frequency Band field.
The Tx Freq has a Tx Channel Number associated with it as designated
by the FCC.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="base_station_id"><content>IR BASE STATION ID HELP
Enter the assigned Base Station ID for the site into this field. Press
Enter or Tab to validate the entry and to move to the next field.
If this field is completely blanked, then no Base Station ID will be
transmitted by the station. However, in this case, the Repeater
Operation:BSI Capability Field must also be set to DISABLED, or improper
operation will result.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="ctrl_chan_cap"><content>CONTROL CHANNEL CAPABILITY HELP
Indicates whether the station is capable of operating as a CONTROL
CHANNEL station.
Possible choices are ENABLED or DISABLED. Only four channels may
have CONTROL CHANNEL CAPABILITY enabled.
If set DISABLED, the PREFERRED CONTROL CHANNEL RANK field is
set to 0 and skipped. If set ENABLED, the PREFERRED CONTROL
CHANNEL RANK field is set to 4 and may be edited.
Default is DISABLED.
Note: Control Channel Capability and Dynamic Frequency Blocking (DFB)
are incompatible. If either is ENABLED, the other may not be ENABLED.
Also Control Channel Capability and BSI Capability are similarly
incompatible when the site is not Voice or Control capable.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="pref_chn_cap"><content>PREFERRED CONTROL CAPABILITY HELP
Indicates whether the repeater is the PREFERRED CONTROL CHANNEL station.
If the CONTROL CHANNEL CAPABLE field is DISABLED, this field is set to
DISABLED and is non-editable.
Possible choices are ENABLED or DISABLED.
Default is FALSE.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="pccr"><content>PREFERRED CONTROL CHANNEL RANK HELP
Use this field to assign a preference level for the channel's
use as the control channel. The field may only be accessed if the
repeater is control channel capable and is set to 0 and skipped if
if CONTROL CHANNEL CAPABILITY is DISABLED. Values range from 1 to 4
with a value of 1 representing the most preferred control channel
and a value of 4 representing the least preferred. Multiple
control channel capable repeaters may carry the same preference
level. Note only four channels may be selected as control channel
capable.
This field obsoletes the Preferred Control Capability field.
If an earlier version codeplug is used with this RSS, the
codeplug entry for this obsolete field is used in determining the
value for the Preferred Control Channel Rank. The value entered in
the Preferred Control Channel Rank field is used to assign the
appropriate value for this field in the codeplug.
Possible choices are 1, 2, 3, or 4.
Default value is 4.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="dispatch_cap"><content>DISPATCH CAPABILITY HELP
The DISPATCH CAPABILITY and the SECURE CAPABILITY fields determine the type
of calls that the station will handle. These fields need to match the
modulation type. The match needs to be done manually and it is not automatic
as might be expected.
The DISPATCH CAPABILITY field handles voice call processing(dispatch)
capability of the station.
The choices for ANALOG station types are:
DISABLED and ANALOG
The choices for ANALOG/SECURENET station types are:
DISABLED and ANALOG
The choices for ANALOG/ASTRO station types are:
DISABLED, ANALOG, ASTRO and ANALOG/ASTRO
The station type is defined on the HARDWARE CONFIGURATION screen.
If DISABLED, the channel may not be configured for Dispatch operation.
Default is ANALOG.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="dispatch_cap_50"><content>DISPATCH CAPABILITY HELP
The DISPATCH CAPABILITY and the PROTECT CAPABILITY fields determine the type
of calls that the station will handle. These fields need to match the
modulation type. The match needs to be done manually and it is not automatic
as might be expected.
The DISPATCH CAPABILITY field handles voice call processing(dispatch)
capability of the station.
The choices for this field are:
ASTRO and DISABLED
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="failsoft_capable"><content>FAILSOFT CAPABILITY HELP
Indicates whether the repeater can operate in failsoft mode.
Possible choices are ENABLED or DISABLED.
If ENABLED, the IntelliRepeater channel is capable of Failsoft operation.
If DISABLED, the IntelliRepeater may not be selected for Failsoft operation.
Default is DISABLED.
Note Failsoft Capability and Dynamic Frequency Blocking (DFB) are
mutually exclusive. If either is ENABLED, the other may not be ENABLED.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="bsi_capable"><content>BSI (BASE STATION IDENTIFICATION) CAPABILITY HELP
Indicates whether the repeater can operate in the BSI operating mode.
Possible choices are ENABLED or DISABLED.
If ENABLED, the IntelliRepeater channel is capable of sending BSI, and
the BSI field cannot be blank.
If DISABLED, the IntelliRepeater may not be selected to send BSI.
Default is DISABLED.
NOTE: BSI and Dynamic Frequency Blocking (DFB) are mutually exclusive.
If either is ENABLED, the other may not be ENABLED. Also BSI Capability
and Control Channel Capability are similarly incompatible when the site
is not Voice on Control capable.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="dfb_capable"><content>DYNAMIC FREQUENCY BLOCKING CAPABILITY HELP
Indicates whether the repeater is capable of Dynamic Frequency
Blocking. When set ENABLED the channel may not be used to
transmit control, voice, BSI or Failsoft information when the
site is operating in site trunking mode. However, if the site
is operating in wide trunking mode the channel will be used to
transmit voice information only at the discretion of the
site controller.
NOTE: DFB Capability is incompatible with the following
repeater configurations:
Control Channel Capability.
BSI Capability.
Failsoft Capability.
If DFB is ENABLED, none of the three fields may be ENABLED.
If any of the three fields are ENABLED, DFB cannot be ENABLED.
Possible choices are ENABLED or DISABLED.
Default is DISABLED.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="secure_capable"><content>SECURE CAPABILITY HELP
Indicates whether the repeater is capable of operating in Secure mode.
Possible choices are DISABLED, 12 KBIT, and ASTRO SECURE.
If the station is ASTRO CAPABLE, then the 12 KBIT choice is not available.
If the station is not ASTRO CAPABLE, then the ASTRO SECURE choice is not
available.
Default is DISABLED.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="protect_capable_help"><content>PROTECT CAPABILITY HELP
Will protect this repeater from being assigned to a dispatch call
unless it is the only repeater available.
Possible choices are ENABLED or DISABLED.
Default is DISABLED.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="illegal_car_lvl_help"><content>ILLEGAL CARRIER SIGNAL LEVEL HELP
This field defines in dBm the level for this repeater above which
the received signal is considered to be illegal carrier if this
repeater is not assigned to a call.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="subband_capable_help"><content>SUBBAND CAPABILITY HELP
Determines if this repeater is capable of being configured to handle the
subscriber subband mapping, as entered in the Full/Subband
Partition Screen.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="manager_ip_addr_1_help"><content>MANAGER IP ADDRESS 1 HELP
This is the IP address of the first permanent manager registered.
When a Zone Manager does not exist, the Manager IP Address 1 should
be "Not Available" and the corresponding Port should be uneditable.
The addresses in Manager IP Address 1 and Manager IP Address 2 should
not be the same.
Valid Range 000.000.000.000 - 255.255.255.255
NOTE: Format of IP address MUST be xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx with no spaces.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="port_one_help"><content>MANAGER 1 PORT NUMBER HELP
This is the primary port number where traps are to be sent.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="manager_ip_addr_2_help"><content>MANAGER IP ADDRESS 2 HELP
This is the IP address of the second permanent manager registered.
When a Zone Manager does not exist, the Manager IP Address 2 and
corresponding Port should be zero.
The addresses in Manager IP Address 1 and Manager IP Address 2 should
not be the same.
Valid Range 000.000.000.000 - 255.255.255.255
NOTE: Format of IP address MUST be xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx with no spaces.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="port_two_help"><content>MANAGER 2 PORT NUMBER HELP
This is the port number of the second manager where traps are to be sent.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="ip_address_def_help"><content>ZONE CONTROLLER IP ADDRESS HELP
This screen allows the user to enter Zone Controller IP Addresses.
These IP addresses allow the station to communicate with the
Zone Controllers.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="zc_ip_addr_1_help"><content>ZONE CONTROLLER IP ADDRESS 1 HELP
This field defines the first IP address of the Zone Controller.
Valid Range 000.000.000.000 - 255.255.255.255
NOTE: Format of IP address MUST be xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx with no spaces.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="zc_ip_addr_2_help"><content>ZONE CONTROLLER IP ADDRESS 2 HELP
This field defines the second IP address of the Zone Controller.
Valid Range 000.000.000.000 - 255.255.255.255
NOTE: Format of IP address MUST be xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx with no spaces.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="site_general_help"><content>SITE GENERAL HELP
This screen allows the user to view and change IntelliRepeater
Site operating parameters.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="system_id_50_help"><content>SYSTEM ID HELP
This is an address assigned to a system within the domain of the network.
Legal range is 001 to FFE (hexadecimal). The default is 1.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="network_id_help"><content>NETWORK ID HELP
This is an address assigned to the Wide Area Communication Network.
Legal range is 00001 to FFFFE (hexadecimal). The default is 1
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="rfss_id_help"><content>RF SYBSYSTEM ID HELP
This is an address field that indicates the identity of the RF Subsystem.
The RF Subsystem ID must be unique within a system.
Legal range is 1 to 7. The default is 1.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="lra_id_help"><content>LOCATION REGISTRATION AREA ID HELP
This is an address assigned to the region of a Registration area in which
a subscriber unit may roam without the need to indicate a location update.
This is a fixed value and is not editable.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="control_channel_slot_size_help"><content>CONTROL CHANNEL SLOT SIZE HELP
Each control channel message is called a packet which is an integral
multiples of micro slots. This field defines the number of micro slots
required per packet. Selecting SMALL sets the number of micro slots
per frame to 5 (37.5 ms), selecting LARGE sets the micro slots per frame
to 6 (45 ms).
Legal choices are SMALL and LARGE. Default is SMALL.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="time_zone_help"><content>TIME ZONE HELP
Select the time zone where the station is located.
Currently only US and Canada time zones are available.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="daylight_savings_help"><content>DAYLIGHT SAVINGS HELP
Select whether Daylight Savings is ENABLED or DISABLED for
where the station is located.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="access_code_index_help"><content>ACCESS CODE INDEX HELP
This field is used to calculate the ASTRO Access Code
Legal Choices are HEX 0 - F
Default is 0
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="access_code_50_help"><content>ACCESS CODE HELP
This field is calculated for the system utilizing the Access Code Index
and the System ID.
This field is not editable.
Make sure that the correct System ID has been entered.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="system_id_help"><content>SYSTEM ID HELP
Enter the assigned system ID into this field.
Valid range is 0000 to FFFF (hexadecimal).
No default value exists for this field.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="site_id_help"><content>SITE ID HELP
This is a two-digit field for entry of the repeater SITE ID number
used to inform the Zone Controller of the site identity.
Distinguishes one site in a SmartZone system from the others.
Legal range is 1 to 64. The default is 1.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="site_type_help"><content>SITE TYPE HELP
Denotes whether the site is part of a SmartZone (Remote) system or is a
STANDALONE system which operates by itself as part of its normal operation.
If the station is an INTELLIREPEATER 5.0, the legal choice is REMOTE.
Otherwise, the legal choices are REMOTE and STANDALONE.
Default is REMOTE.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="fss_support_help"><content>FULL SPECTRUM SCAN HELP
The "Full Spectrum Scan" Support flag is used only for Other Band
Trunking (OBT) systems. Enabling the flag modifies the System ID OSW to
include the control channel receive frequency. Subscribers using Full
Spectrum Scan need this information to be able to transmit on the control
channel. The flag should be disabled for all non-OBT systems and for OBT
systems if the subscribers do not use Full Spectrum Scan.
The default value is disabled.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="min_rptr_trunk_help"><content>MINIMUM REPEATERS TO TRUNK HELP
Minimum number of repeaters which the site needs when its in standalone
mode before the site can commence trunking operations. This parameter is
only used if the site is supposed to be standalone, or if it gets temp-
orarily disconnected from the Zone Controller in a SmartZone system.
The default value is 2, unless there is only 1 repeater. In this case,
the default will be 1 (and the legal range will begin at 1).
This field will automatically be decremented by the RSS if the user deletes
repeaters from the Repeater General screen (only after the number of
repeaters drops below the MTT).
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="token_rptr_help"><content>IR TOKEN REPEATER HELP
The repeater number which decides which side of a site should trunk if
the MINIMUM REPEATERS TO TRUNK field has been set to half the repeaters
at the site and the site is split into two equal sites.
Legal range is 1 to Number of Repeaters.
Default is 1.
This field will automatically be decremented by the RSS if the user deletes
repeaters from the Repeater General screen (only after the number of
repeaters drops below the TOKEN REPEATER NUMBER).
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="connect_tone_help"><content>CONNECT TONE HELP
The connect tone is a sub-audible (below 300 Hz) tone that is transmitted
by a subscriber radio to the system, any time the unit is keyed. The site
and the radio unit MUST be programmed with the same value for the connect
tone.
NOTE:
For ASTRO CAI systems this field is used not only as the Analog Mode
Connect Tone, but is also used to calculate the ASTRO Network ID.
The Connect Tones are 0 - 7 and they have the corresponding Frequency
(in Hz) next to the Connect Tone number.
Legal Choices are: 0 : 105.9 Hz
1 : 76.6 Hz
2 : 83.7 Hz
3 : 90.0 Hz
4 : 97.3 Hz
5 : 116.1 Hz
6 : 128.6 Hz
7 : 138.5 Hz
Default is '0 : 105.9 Hz'. (Connect Tone 0).
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="cc_tod_rollover_help"><content>CONTROL CHANNEL TIME OF DAY ROLLOVER HELP
Specifies the time in HH:MM:SS format when the CONTROL CHANNEL ROLLOVER
occurs. An entry of 00:00:00 indicates no rollover.
The time at which every day the control channel duties will get switched
from the current control channel to another control capable repeater.
This parameter is used to ensure equal wear and tear amongst all control
capable repeaters. It is recommended that the rollover time chosen be
during a period of little or no call traffic in order to minimize system
disruption. A setting of 0 disables the rolling over of the control channel.
Important Note: A new value for this parameter will not take effect until
after the expiration of the timer which contains the old value. For example,
let's say the current time is 1:00am and the CC Time of Day Rollover value
is set to 3:00am. If the value of CC Time of Day Rollover is changed to
2:00am, the Control Channel Rollover will occur at 3:00am and will occur
at 2:00am the following day and every day thereafter until it is changed
again.
Similarly, if the current time is 1:00am and the CC Time of Day Rollover
value is 2:00am and it gets changed to 3:00am, the Control Channel Rollover
will occur at 2:00am and at 3:00am, and then at 3:00am every day thereafter.
Enter the time in the HH:MM:SS format.
Where HH ranges from 00 through 24 (hours)
MM ranges from 00 through 59 (minutes)
SS ranges from 00 through 59 (seconds)
Examples:
00:00:00 means No rollover.
12:00:00 means rollover at Noon.
24:00:00 means rollover at Midnight.
The default is 00:00:00 (no rollover).
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="secure_type_help"><content>SECURE TYPE HELP
The secure method under which the site operates when processing
all secure calls.
Legal choices are: NONE
ANALOG
ASTRO
Default is NONE.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="site_timers_help"><content>SITE TIMER HELP
The Site Timer screen allows the user to program all of the timers
for the IntelliRepeater Site.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="recovery_tot_help"><content>LINK RECOVERY TIME OUT TIMER HELP
Sets the delay time before noting the loss or recovery of the data
link between the station and zone controller and the time before
exiting failsoft operation after a link recovery.
This time out value is used for three different timers:
1) Minimum Failsoft time, which is the time period the site stays in
failsoft after all conditions have been met for Trunking.
2) Link Timeout time, which is the time period the link repeater waits
after losing communication with the Zone Controller before declaring the
link to be down.
3) Site Recovery time, which is how long the active master repeater waits
after the conditions for wide area trunking are met before it begins the
process which hands over control of the site to the Zone Controller.
Legal range is 5 to 99 seconds.
Default is 15 seconds.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="carrier_malf_tot_help"><content>CARRIER MALFUNCTION TIME OUT TIMER HELP
The time period which determines how long an interfering carrier must
be present on a deassigned channel before that channel is removed from
system use. An entry of 254 seconds disables the timeout.
Legal range is 1 to 254 seconds.
Default is 50 seconds.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="carrier_tot_help"><content>CARRIER/GRANT TIME OUT TIMER HELP
The time period for which an assigned voice channel remains un-muted and
active, receiving only carrier and no handshake connect tones. After the
timeout expires, the channel assumes the disconnect phase.
Legal range is 200 to 6300 milliseconds.
Default is 500 ms.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="carrier_tot_50"><content>GRANT TIME OUT TIMER HELP
The time period for which an assigned voice channel remains assigned and
active, receiving only carrier. After the timeout expires, the channel
enters into the disconnect phase.
Legal range is 200 to 6300 milliseconds.
Default is 500 ms.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="message_trunk_tot_help"><content>MESSAGE TRUNK TIME OUT TIMER HELP
The time period for which a voice channel remains active after receiving
disconnect from the subscriber unit (repeater dropout time). After the
timeout expires, the channel is de-assigned.
Legal range is 100 to 6300 milliseconds.
Default is 1000 ms.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="fade_tot_help"><content>FADE TIME OUT TIMER HELP
The time period for which an assigned voice channel remains active with
no tones or carrier received. After the timeout expires, the channel is
deassigned. Timer is activated after call processing fails to detect
disconnect tone after loss of the low speed connect tone.
Legal range is 100 to 6300 milliseconds.
Default is 1200 ms.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="fade_tot_50"><content>CARRIER FADE TIME OUT TIMER HELP
The time period for which a voice channel remains active with
no carrier received. The timer is activated after call processing
fails to detect disconnect information the transmitting
subscriber
Legal range is 100 to 6300 milliseconds.
Default is 1200 ms.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="intellirepeater_freq"><content>IR FREQUENCY HELP
This is screen provides a block of Base Frequencies to be used by
Repeaters which have VHF or UHF bands.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="rx_base_freq"><content>IR RX BASE FREQUENCY HELP
Base Frequency is the beginning frequency for each block of channels.
Default is 0.000000 MHz.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="tx_base_freq"><content>IR TX BASE FREQUENCY HELP
Base Frequency is the beginning frequency for each block of channels.
Default is 0.000000 MHz.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="channel_spacing"><content>IR CHANNEL SPACING HELP
User programmable for the FCC allocated channel spacing.
Legal values are: 5, 6.25, 10, 12.5, 15, 18.75, 20.25,
30, 31.25, 35, 37.5, 40, 43.75, or 50 kHz.
Default is 5 kHz.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="number_of_channels"><content>IR NUMBER OF CHANNELS HELP
VHF and UHF trunking spectrum is divided by FCC into 380 possible
Rx channels and 380 possible Tx channels (per band).
Default is 380.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="desired_rpt_pos_help"><content>DESIRED REPEATER POSITION HELP
Enter a New Repeater Number in this column for any repeater that needs to
be repositioned at the site.
If the position of a Repeater does not match the physical location of the
Repeater at the site, then reorder the Repeater site data by entering the
right position of the Repeater in the New Rptr # column.
If a Repeater does not need to be reorder/repositioned you may leave its
New Rptr # field blank (the RSS will default blank fields to the value
stored in the Current Rptr # field).
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="repeater_sum_help"><content>REPEATER SUMMARY HELP
This is an overview of the Repeaters at the site.
It shows the Repeaters Positions at the site, along with the Repeaters
Serial Numbers, and the Receive and Transmit Frequencies.
All the Repeaters can be reordered or repositioned by entering the desired
position in the New Rptr # column.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="delete_archive_file"><content>DELETE ARCHIVE FILE HELP
Enter the filename of the file to be deleted. Filename may be either typed
or press Tab to move the cursor to the filename fields, and use the arrow
keys to move to the desired file. Press Enter to select the file for
deletion. (The RSS will ask you if this file should be deleted).
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="archive_dir"><content>ARCHIVE DIRECTORY HELP
Enter the name of the archive directory where you desire to delete or
restore files. Press Enter or Tab when done to move to the Filename
selection field.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="filename"><content>FILENAME HELP
Indicate the desired file by moving the cursor by means of the arrow keys.
Select the file by pressing Enter.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="create_directory_path"><content>FILE MAINTENANCE:CREATE DIRECTORY PATH HELP
This screen allows the user to create a new directory from within the RSS.
Directories to be created can be on any currently legal drive.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="pathname_help"><content>DIRECTORY PATHNAME HELP
Any and all directories indicated in the path that currently do not exist
will be created.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="backup_pathname"><content>BACKUP DIRECTORY NAME HELP
Enter the name of the directory that the files should be backed up
(restored) from. Note that all the files in the backup directory will be
transferred to the current archive directory, overwriting files that already
exist with the same name.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="upgrade_codeplug_help"><content>UPGRADE CODEPLUG HELP
Because of feature enhancements and modifications, the codeplug stored in
the station will periodically be upgraded to a new version. This typically
will be caused by internal configuration parameters being modified for
improved station operation. The latest RSS program will know what features
have been added or modified. To prevent the user from having to manually
re-enter all the station data into a new default codeplug, the Upgrade
utility was created. The utility allows the user to upgrade any previous
codeplug version to the latest known codeplug version without having to
re-type any customer data.
WARNING: Upgrading codeplugs should only be done when the user is upgrading
the station firmware. Upgrading codeplugs without also replacing the
firmware may result in improper station operation.
NOTE: This procedure will only upgrade the image of the codeplug stored in
the RSS. The new upgraded codeplug still needs to be downloaded to the
station to take affect.
This screen displays two items:
1) The current version of the codeplug being used by the RSS.
2) Latest version of the codeplug to which the RSS can upgrade.
To upgrade a Codeplug, load the codeplug into the RSS from the station or
from the archive file and then proceed to the Upgrade Codeplug
screen. Press Upgrade and the RSS will upgrade your Codeplug Data to
the latest known version. By default, the RSS displays the latest version
of Codeplug Data to which it can upgrade.
Once the codeplug has been upgraded, archived, and programmed to the station,
the station should be powered down, and the firmware replaced before
attempting to return the station to normal service.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="next_cp_ver_help"><content>UPGRADE TO CODEPLUG VERSION HELP
To Upgrade press Upgrade.
To cancel the Upgrade operation press Cancel.
For further information, press Help to view the screen help.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="voice_on_cntrl_help"><content>VOICE ON CONTROL HELP
Voice on Control (VOC) is a method of assigning the Intellirepeater control
channel as a voice channel when all the existing voice channels are busy.
As soon as a voice channel is idle, the freed voice channel will become the
controlling channel to handle any pending alarms and emergencies and to
assume all control channel responsibilities.
Initial default value is DISABLED.
When changing the value from DISABLED to ENABLED, the Minimum Repeaters to
Trunk will be set to 1, the VOC Activation Timer on the SITE
TIMER screen will be set to 2 seconds, and the Pended Emergency Request
Timer on the SITE TIMER screen will be set to 0.5 seconds.
When changing the value from ENABLED to DISABLED, Minimum Repeaters to Trunk
will be set to 2, unless there is only one repeater which will keep it at 1.
The VOC Activation Timer and the Pended Emergency Request Timer on the
SITE TIMER screen will be set to zero, and will not be
displayed on the screen. Note Voice on Control cannot be set DISABLED if
any repeater is both Control Channel Capable and BSI Capable, and a warning
is displayed if this is attempted. To disable Voice On Control, ensure
no repeater is both Control Channel Capable and BSI Capable via the
Repeater Information screen.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="voc_act_time_help"><content>VOC ACTIVATION TIME HELP
This field sets the maximum amount of time that call processing will wait
before deciding to convert the site to voice on control mode.
When the Voice on Control field on the SITE GENERAL screen
gets set from DISABLED to ENABLED, this field defaults to 2 seconds. When
the Voice on Control field gets set from ENABLED to DISABLED, this field
gets set to 0 and is no longer displayed on the SITE GENERAL
screen.
The valid range for this field is 1 - 15 seconds in 1 second increments.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="max_cc_range_help"><content>MAXIMUM CONTROL CHANNEL RANGE HELP
The purpose of the Maximum Control Channel Range field is to extend the
control channel range by increasing the ISW decode window size provided
sufficient RF coverage and power exist. This field is NOT intended to,
NOR will it increase, overall system RF coverage.
The default value '<75 mi/125 km' is used for typical trunking systems.
The range can be increased up to '<125 mi/205 km' without impacting ISW
decode reliability. Increasing the range above '<125 mi/205 km' will
increase the ISW window size but it will also increase the probability
of not properly decoding incoming ISW's. Only systems operating under
special conditions will require a setting above the '<125 mi/205 km'
value. For these special systems, Motorola needs to be contacted for
proper setting of this field.
The distances given in the choice list are to be considered approximate;
actual range depends on many different atmospheric and terrain
conditions.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="pend_emrg_req_help"><content>PENDED EMERGENCY REQUEST TIME HELP
This field sets the maximum amount of time the station will wait before
allowing subscriber units to send in any pending requests. Before this
timer expires, only pended affiliations, alarms, emergency call requests,
and interconnect reject requests are sent.
When the Voice on Control field on the SITE GENERAL screen
gets set from DISABLED to ENABLED, this field defaults to 0.5 seconds. When
the Voice on Control field gets set from ENABLED to DISABLED, this field
gets set to 0 and is no longer displayed on the SITE GENERAL
screen.
The valid range for this field is 0.5 - 5.0 seconds in .1 second increments.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="sl_deb_tot"><content>SITE LINK DEBOUNCE TIMER
This field defines the period of time between attempts to bring the
site link back up
Legal range is 2 to 120 seconds.
Default is 2 seconds.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="simul_tx_filter_help"><content>ASTRO TX FILTER HELP
This field is used to select the ASTRO transmit modulation filter in
the station. There are two choices: WIDE PULSE and NARROW PULSE.
WIDE PULSE can only be used on 25 kHz channels;
NARROW PULSE is normally used for 12.5 kHz channels.
At the system designer's discretion, NARROW PULSE can be used on 25 kHz
channels.
WIDE PULSE is typically used for ASTRO Simulcast systems and NARROW
PULSE is typically used for non Simulcast ASTRO Systems. However,
there are exception cases where WIDE PULSE can be selected for
non Simulcast configured stations and NARROW PULSE is selected for
Simulcast configured stations.
The setting of this parameter in the station must be coordinated with
the subscriber setting. The Transmit filter setting in the station
must match the Receiver setting in the subscriber.
Select the appropriate ASTRO Tx Filter for the system.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="simul_rev_burst_help"><content>ANALOG SIMULCAST REVERSE BURST HELP
This field is only applicable for Conventional Simulcast systems.
Field choices are INTERNAL and EXTERNAL.
Select the appropriate Simulcast Reverse Burst for the system.
CHOICE = INTERNAL
When EXT_PTT is removed, the station routes the external PL input
through a phase shift network and after 180 milliseconds dekeys
the station. Thus the station generates a transmit signal with
reverse bursts.
CHOICE = EXTERNAL
When EXT_PTT is removed, the station immediately dekeys. The
external equipment is responsible for generating the phase
shift for PL and also handles the 180 millisecond timing controls
needed to generate reverse burst.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="uhso_align_help"><content>INTERNAL UHSO ALIGNMENT HELP
The UHSO reference modules frequency stability performance is governed
by both long term (i.e. aging) and short term variations (i.e.
temperature). Therefore, the proper procedure for aligning a stations
reference requires that both types of variations are taken into account.
If a station is configured with an INTERNAL - HIGH STABILITY module, then
upon power-up of the station, both the receiver and exciter will stay in an
OUT OF LOCK state for 7.5 minutes. If desired, the technician can override
this timer by pressing UHSO ENABLE. The ovenized element requires
7.5 minutes before it is guaranteed to operate with +/- 0.1ppm of the
desired frequency. However, it is recommended that the station be turned
on for at least 60 minutes in order to guarantee an oven retrace of 10 ppb
for the UHSO.
The reference alignment procedure for the INTERNAL - HIGH STABILITY can be
broken down into two main components. The first component is the
adjustment of the INTERNAL - STANDARD. It is not necessary to align this
component, unless the station receiver and/or transmitter cannot lock.
The second is the alignment of the INTERNAL - HIGH STABILITY (UHSO).
For optimal performance this should be aligned in the field after 14 days
of operation. The long term aging process of the ovenized element is most
severe during the first 14 days of operation.
NOTE: The station MUST be access disabled BEFORE the user attempts any
alignments to protect the user from any inadvertent keyups that may occur
due to normal station activity.
Station output power is reduced from the programmed value for the station
to half power for all stations with rated power less than 150W. For
higher power stations, power output is reduced to 100 W. This is true
for all alignments, with the exception of the Power Out Alignment, which
is performed at full power.
Procedure:
Step 1
To adjust the INTERNAL - STANDARD, the technician should select either
Auto-Net 5 MHz or Manual Net.
A) Auto-Net 5 MHz :
The station will automatically align the INTERNAL STANDARD to the INTERNAL
HIGH STABILITY.
NOTE: The time required to successfully Auto-net depends upon the
frequency error of the INTERNAL STANDARD as compared to the high stability
reference. This netting will take a minimum of 5 minutes to achieve the
highest accuracy possible. Depending how far off the INTERNAL STANDARD
is from the high stability source, the time required for netting could be
significantly greater than this minimum period.
During the Auto-Netting sequence the CONTROL ON LED will flash and the
receiver and exciter will indicate an OUT OF LOCK condition. When
Auto-netting has been completed the RSS will display an appropriate
message. The technician should proceed to step 2.
B) Manual Net
The RSS will display the Reference Oscillator screen and the technician
will be capable of adjusting the INTERNAL STD via the the arrow buttons.
The technician should refer to the help text on the
Reference Oscillator screen , or the RSS Manual for further instructions.
Step 2:
Once the INTERNAL STANDARD has been adjusted, the technician should proceed
to align the INTERNAL HIGH STABILITY (UHSO). The technician should
keyup the station and measure the transmit frequency. To fine adjust the
frequency, press the Arrows buttons to move the oscillator in individual
steps. To coarse adjust the frequency, press the double arrows buttons to
move the oscillator in 10 step jumps. Each step corresponds to
approximately 0.25ppb for the UHSO. The frequency error should be made as
small as possible. Dekey the station, then press OK to store the
desired reference oscillator frequency.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="meter_uhso"><content>UHSO METERING HELP
The UHSO Metering screen displays various measured parameters
relevant to the operation of this module. A block diagram and the basic
theory of operation of this module is included in the stations
installation manual.
If this module is not present in the station, then all metering points
will display 'N/A'.
14.2V
This point indicates the currently measured voltage of the A+ signal
from the station's power supply to the UHSO module.
10V REGULATOR
This point indicates the currently measured voltage of the 10 Volt
regulator on the UHSO module.
5V SUPPLY IN
This point indicates the currently measured voltage of the 5 Volt source
from the power supply.
8 VOLT OSC REFERENCE
This point indicates the functionality of the UHSO ovenized
element by displaying the measured value of its internal 8 Volt regulator.
OSC STR LINE (0-8V)
This point indicates the steering line voltage input to the ovenized
UHSO crystal element.
OSC FREQUENCY
This point indicates whether the 5MHz signal is being properly generated
and distributed from the UHSO module.
VTEMP RT200
This point indicates the ambient temperature in the UHSO module.
5 MHz REFERENCE
This point indicates if the 5 MHz signal has been received by the station
control board.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="uhso_diag_help"><content>UHSO DIAGNOSTICS TESTS HELP
The UHSO Diagnostic tests are a set of tests that can be run
with the goal of verifying the basic operation of the UHSO
module. These tests can be run to verify that the internal operation of
the UHSO Module is within specified operational limits.
The Service Technician may select which diagnostics tests are to be run
on the station, and when these tests should be executed. The technician
may select any or all of the tests to be run at station power up (Cold
Start), Station reset (Warm Start) or on demand (Run Diagnostics Now).
Once all desired tests are selected, exiting the screen will automatically
save the current set of Cold Start and Warm Start tests to the codeplug.
Note: DSS-III Data Stations early versions will not execute the Cold
and Warm Start diagnostic tests if selected, and will indicate this
fact by means of the RSS displaying a warning message on entry to the
Diagnostic Menu.
Note that the Run Now tests are not saved in the station and will default
to all tests deselected (off) when the Service Software is entered.
The tests to be run are selected by first entering the desired Diagnostic
Test Screen, and then moving the cursor to be on the same line as the
desired test. The cursor can be moved to the desired column to select when
the test should be run.
Pressing the Space Bar will place an 'X' in the current column.
Pressing the Space Bar a second time will deselect the test and remove
the 'X' in the current column.
To run the Run Now Tests selected, press OK. The information window will
display the test currently being run, and the main screen will indicate
PASS or FAIL (or PURCH_OP for tests that are not currently available or
planned for implementation. If they do become available it would be as
a purchased upgrade) for completed tests. All selected tests on all
Diagnostic screens will be executed.
To abort a Run Now Test run, press F7. Any tests not yet executing will
not be started.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="uhso_14pt2"><content>UHSO 14.2 VOLT SUPPLY DIAGNOSTICS HELP
This test checks for proper distribution of the A+ signal from the
station's power supply to the UHSO module.
Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="uhso_10v"><content>UHSO 10 VOLT SUPPLY DIAGNOSTICS HELP
This test checks for proper operation of the 10 Volt regulator on the
UHSO module.
Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="uhso_5v"><content>UHSO 5 VOLT SUPPLY DIAGNOSTICS HELP
This test checks for proper distribution of the 5 Volt source from the
power supply.
Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="uhso_8v"><content>UHSO 8 VOLT SUPPLY DIAGNOSTICS HELP
This test checks the steering line voltage input to the ovenized
UHSO crystal element.
Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="uhso_osc_str"><content>UHSO OSC STR DIAGNOSTICS HELP
This test checks the steering line voltage input to the ovenized
UHSO crystal element.
Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="uhso_osc_freq"><content>UHSO OSC FREQ DIAGNOSTICS HELP
This test verifies that the 5MHz signal is being properly generated and
distributed from the UHSO module.
Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="uhso_vtemp1"><content>UHSO VTEMP1 DIAGNOSTICS HELP
This test checks the ambient temperature in the module.
Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="uhso_vtemp2"><content>UHSO VTEMP2 DIAGNOSTICS HELP
This test checks the ambient temperature in the module.
Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="uhso_5mhz_act"><content>UHSO 5 MHZ ACTIVE DIAGNOSTICS HELP
This test verifies that the 5MHz signal has been received by the station
control board.
Upon failure of this test, refer to the Troubleshooting guide in the
manual for further actions to be taken.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="partition_screen_help"><content>FULL/SUB BAND PARTITIONING HELP
The RSS must be setup to allow SUB BAND Restricted users to function
correctly in an IntelliRepeater site.
Some radios cannot operate in a FULL BAND but only in a portion of the
band which is available to the system. These radios are referred to as
SUB BAND restricted. For example early 800 MHz radios are capable of
operating in the 806 to 821 MHz range only (these are referred to as 806
radios and should be considered restricted SUB BAND), later radios were
expanded to operate in the 806 to 824 MHz range (these are referred to as
821 radios and can be considered FULL BAND).
Subscriber units using individual or talk-group IDs designated as belonging
to a restricted SUB BAND will only use channels that are designated as
SUB BAND capable.
Subscriber units using individual or talk-group IDs designated as belonging
to a non-restricted SUB BAND will only use channels that are either
SUB BAND capable or FULL BAND capable, respectively.
The IntelliRepeater needs to know the band in which the radio is capable
of working so that it can be assigned to a channel within that band when
it is involved in a call either as the receiver or the initiator.
The RSS provides the user with a table where he can specify which radios
are FULL BAND and which are SUB BAND. A user may enter up to 32 ranges
in this table. Each range (and each number in the range) represents BOTH
an Individual Radio ID and a Talk-group ID.
NOTE: All 4 Hexadecimal places represent the Radio ID, but only the 3 most
significant hexadecimal places represent a Talk-group ID (the right most
digit is dropped for Talk-group representation). An example of an entry in
the table may be:
0010 - 002F SUB BAND
This represents 32 Hex Radio IDs (0010 - 002F) and 2 Talk-group IDs (001
and 002) that are SUB BAND/Capable.
Since Range Table IDs specify both Radios and Talk-groups with one range,
the following rules will help in definition of the range table.
1) Up to 32 ranges may be specified
2) The smallest range defined needs to include 16 Range Table IDs or one
full talk-group. Ranges must be defined in 16 Range Table ID increments
(since one Talk-group is represented by 16 Table range IDs).
3) The total number of radio IDs specified = total number of Range Table
IDs specified
4) The total number of Talk-group IDs specified = total number of Range
Table IDs specified + 16
5) The ID is the Hexadecimal equivalent of the individual ID - 700000.
Button Descriptions:
Help - Displays this Help screen.
ADD - a new screen will appear allowing you to enter a
new range of IDs. This range will be added with a default band
and modulation.
DELETE - a new screen will appear allowing you to enter
the range of IDs to delete. This range will then be folded
into the next higher band unless only the beginning of the
range is deleted. In this case it will be folded into the
previous band.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="add_new_range"><content>ADD NEW RANGE / DELETE RANGE HELP TEXT
Use this screen to enter the Low Id and High ID of a range to be added
or deleted.
The Low ID must end in a 0 and the High ID must end in an F so that there
are no talk-groups split into different ranges.
The ID is the Hexadecimal equivalent of the individual ID - 700000.
Button Descriptions:
Help - Displays this Help screen.
Ok - if valid, accept the ranges that have been entered to
be added or deleted.
Cancel - do not add or delete any range.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="fade_tolerance_help"><content>ASTRO FADE TOLERANCE HELP
Under weak signal or fading conditions, the message that terminates a
received ASTRO voice call may be missed by the station. In case the
terminator is missed, a secondary mechanism has been put in place to end
the voice call. This mechanism looks at the frame sync in front of every
ASTRO voice frame to see how many are missed in a row. The number of
missed frames is a parameter set by the user to optimize the system's
operation. This parameter allows the user to set the number of missed
frame syncs in a row which will terminate the call. The number
can be set to 1, 2, or 3. The normal setting for this parameter is 3.
Choices are: 1 FRAME
2 FRAMES
3 FRAMES
Initial default value is 3 FRAMES.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="mcs_field_help"><content>MULTI-CODED SQUELCH HELP
Multi-Coded Squelch (MCS) is an option that applies only to Conventional
stations. The station can be configured as ANALOG or ASTRO CAI. The option
provides the capability to detect multiple PLs in an ANALOG only station
or multiple ASTRO NACs in an ASTRO CAI station.
If the station type is set to ANALOG ONLY, the choices for the field will
be DISABLED and MULTI-PL ONLY.
If the station type is set to ASTRO CAI, the choices for the field will
be DISABLED and MULTI-NAC.
The MCS Option is used in a multitude of system applications, and was
designed specifically for community repeater systems.
LIMITATIONS:
ANALOG ONLY Stations
================
For Conventional Multi-Coded Squelch ANALOG ONLY systems, make certain
that the following fields are set properly if MCS is enabled:
Channel Information: Rx Activation = SC or C
Channel Information: Repeater Activation = SC or C
Channel Information: Repeater Hold-In = SC or C
Channel Information: Noise Canceller = DISABLED
Only one channel is allowed if MCS is set to MULTI-PL ONLY.
ASTRO CAI Stations
================
When MCS is set to MULTI-NAC, the Access Code Table is enhanced to include
a table for up to eight sets of ASTRO NACs for transmit and receive. RX NAC
operation as a choice is removed. The receiver will accept any of the RX
NACs that are programmed in the table. If repeat is enabled for the channel,
the station will repeat with the Tx NAC associated with the Rx NAC in the
table.
For use with WILD CARD, the MCS USER Number is set to the table entry
number which corresponds to the RX NAC that is being received.
ASTRO CAI stations provide mixed mode analog and ASTRO operation. The Access
Code Table in this case only provides the choice for one PL. Reception of
multiple PLs is only allowed in ANALOG only stations not in ASTRO CAI
stations.
ASTRO CAI stations with MCS set to MULTI-NAC allow multiple channels, each
channel can have its own unique access code table.
ANALOG stations with MCS set to MULTI PL only allow one channel and that
channel can only have one access code table.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="failsoft_mod_help"><content>FAILSOFT MODULATION TYPE HELP
Valid choices are: ASTRO, ANALOG
During failsoft operation, the station must have predefined which mode it
will transmit in. The subscribers will detect this mode and only allow
the subscribers to reply in the received mode. If the selection is set
to ASTRO, the station reverts to transmitting ASTRO failsoft LC data
messages. If the selection is set to ANALOG, the station reverts to
transmitting analog failsoft low speed data. Analog mode also allows
Securenet operation provided the site is set up for Securenet operation.
NOTE: The system administrator must make sure that the failsoft settings
for each channel match up with the settings in the subscriber
radios.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="site_number_help"><content>SITE NUMBER HELP
For simulcast stations or voting receivers, the station needs to know its
"sub-site" number. This number is used to identify the station for
diagnostic reporting as well as for certain infrastructure messages. The
system installer must be careful that this number matches the sub-site
number known. (For the 6809 determined by placement of the remote site to
prime site cabling on the 6809 ACB board.) This field is used for
Conventional and 6809 trunking systems.
For ASTRO systems this field assigns to the station an address by which
other infrastructure devices may identify it. In a wide area ASTRO system
a dispatcher may "site-steer" transmissions to a particular base station
by selecting that station on the console or data subsystem prior to
transmitting. The comparator then routes traffic to that station utilizing
that station's site number value.
See chart below for the proper site number ranges.
STATION TYPE | SITE NUMBER |
======================================================================|
6809 Trunking | Must be set to 0 |
6809 | Set to system specific site number, range is |
Simulcast/Voting | 1-16 |
Conventional | Default value is 1 |
Conventional | Set to system specific site number, range is |
Simulcast/Voting | 1-62, default value is 1 but must be set to |
| value other than 1 when used with data traffic |
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="csc_log_chan_help"><content>CSC LOGICAL CHANNEL HELP
For ASTRO stations, the standard interface cable between the 6809
controller and the base station does not carry enough information for an
ASTRO station to operate properly. Another cable is needed to tap into
the Zone Controller's RSC-CSC interface to provide call grants to the
stations. Since all stations are hooked to the same cable, a mechanism
is needed to identify what messages go with what station. The logical
channel number is the answer, which is stored in the station's codeplug.
This field is only for 6809 trunking systems.
The value range for the field is 1 to 32 (decimal). The default value
is 29.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="mcs_help"><content>MULTI-CODED SQUELCH HELP
Multi-Coded Squelch (MCS) will only operate in Conventional
stations. There are two modes operation depending on the station type.
If the station type is set to Analog, the choices for the field will
be DISABLED and MULTI-PL ONLY.
If the station type is set to ASTRO CAI, the choices for the field will
be DISABLED and MULTI-NAC.
NOTE: The MCS option is used in a multitude of system applications,
and was designed specifically for community repeater systems.
LIMITATIONS
For Conventional Multi-Coded Squelch (non-ASTRO) systems, make certain
that the following fields are set properly if MCS is enabled:
Channel Information: Rx Activation = SC or C
Channel Information: Repeater Activation = SC or C
Channel Information: Repeater Hold-In = SC or C
Channel Information: Noise Canceller = DISABLED
Only one channel is allowed if MCS is set to MULTI-PL ONLY.
The MCS Accounting Information, which includes the Total Time and
Number of Calls for each User entry, is backed up to Non-Volatile
Memory on the Station once every day at 2:00am.
The Multi-Coded Squelch Option is a tiered option. The initial release
of the option is the low tier option which provides the user with the
choice of 12 unique PLs and one DPL for Rx Code. This choice is affected
by selecting MULTI-PL ONLY as the choice for the Multi-Coded Squelch
option on the HARDWARE CONFIGURATION screen. A subsequent
release is planned to allow the user the choice of 37 PLs and 24 DPLs.
This higher tier option will be enabled by selecting MULTI-PL/MULTI-DPL
as a choice for Multi-Coded Squelch. This higher tier option is not
currently available.
INCOMPATIBLE PL CODES:
ZB is not compatible with ZA or 1Z
8Z is not compatible with M1 or M2
9Z is not compatible with M4 or M5
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="mcs_entry_help"><content>MULTI-CODED SQUELCH ENTRY HELP
The user may highlight a Multi-Coded Squelch entry number by using the
Tab/Shift-Tab keys to move to the desired entry number.
Button Descriptions:
Help - Displays this screen.
Save Report - Save the MCS Table to a file.
Modify User - Modify the current MCS User Number.
Clear Accounting - Clear the MCS Accounting Information on the Station.
Save Report - Save the MCS Table to a file.
The Save MCS Report window will be displayed. The user will be able
to enter a directory and filename where the MCS Data will be stored
as it appears on the MCS screen.
Modify User - Modify the current MCS User Number.
Once the cursor is placed on an entry number, the user may press
the Modify User button to modify that particular entry. If the cursor was
placed on a blank entry number, the user may add a new entry to the
MCS table by pressing the Modify User button and accepting the modifications. For this
release, the MCS table can contain up to 12 unique PL values and one
DPL value for the Rx Code.
In order to delete an entry, the user must choose DELETE from the
User Access field. When the codeplug is sent to the station, the
RSS will delete the tagged user entry just before sending the
codeplug to the station.
RECOMMENDED PROCEDURE: In order to maintain the integrity of the MCS
Accounting data, we suggest that when an MCS entry is to be changed,
first mark the current entry DISABLED and then add a new entry to
the MCS Table. Then, when it is time to do the periodical clearing
of the MCS Accounting Information, the old entry can be set to
DELETE.
Clear Accounting - Clear the MCS Accounting Information on the Station
This button should be used when the user wishes to clear (set to zero)
the MCS Accounting Information on the Station. This includes the
Total Time and Number of Calls for each MCS Entry. Performing this
function should be done on a periodical basis at planned intervals.
It is also advised that the MCS Report be saved to disk prior
to clearing the MCS Accounting Information.
VALID PL CODES:
CODE FREQ (Hz) CODE FREQ (Hz) CODE FREQ (Hz)
WA 74.4 WB 79.7 XA 71.9
XB 77.0 YA 85.4 YB 88.5
YZ 82.5 ZA 94.8 ZB 97.4
ZZ 91.5 M1 203.5 M2 210.7
M3 218.1 M4 225.7 M5 233.6
M6 241.8 M7 250.3 1A 103.5
1B 107.2 1Z 100.0 2A 114.8
2B 118.8 2Z 110.9 3A 127.3
3B 131.8 3Z 123.0 4A 141.3
4B 146.2 4Z 136.5 5A 156.7
5B 162.2 5Z 151.4 6A 173.8
6B 179.9 6Z 167.9 7A 192.8
7Z 186.2 8Z 206.5 9Z 229.1
VALID DPL CODES:
023, 025, 026, 031, 032, 043, 047, 051, 054, 065,
071, 072, 073, 074, 114, 115, 116, 125, 131, 132,
134, 143, 152, 155, 156, 162, 165, 172, 174, 205,
223, 226, 243, 244, 245, 251, 261, 263, 265, 271,
306, 311, 315, 331, 343, 346, 351, 364, 365, 371,
411, 412, 413, 423, 431, 432, 445, 464, 465, 466,
503, 506, 516, 532, 546, 565, 606, 612, 624, 627,
631, 632, 654, 662, 664, 703, 712, 723, 731, 732,
734, 743, 754
INCOMPATIBLE PL CODES:
ZB is not compatible with ZA or 1Z
8Z is not compatible with M1 or M2
9Z is not compatible with M4 or M5
UNSUPPORTED DPL CODES:
These are for special applications and are not
part of the standard Quantar product offering.
053, 122, 212, 225, 246, 252, 266, 325, 425, 446,
452, 455, 521, 525, 552, 564, 645, 652, 725, 726
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="mcs_code_type_help"><content>MULTI-CODED SQUELCH CODE TYPE HELP
The user may select either the PL or DPL code type by using the Up/Dn
Arrow keys. This selection will determine the valid choices for the
Rx and Tx Code fields.
The Multi-Coded Squelch Option is a tiered option. The initial release
of the option is the low tier option which provides the user with the
choice of 12 unique PLs and one DPL for Rx Code. This choice is affected
by selecting MULTI-PL ONLY as the choice for the Multi-Coded Squelch
option on the HARDWARE CONFIGURATION screen. For this
initial release, no more than 12 PLs and no more than one DPL can be
entered for the Rx Code.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="mcs_code_help"><content>PL/DPL CODE/FREQUENCY HELP
Enter the desired code or frequency value here. Acceptable values
are defined below. When a PL Code is selected, either the Code or
the Frequency may be entered in the appropriate field. The RSS will
automatically display the corresponding frequency for a given PL Code,
and the corresponding PL Code for a given PL Frequency.
VALID PL CODES:
CODE FREQ (Hz) CODE FREQ (Hz) CODE FREQ (Hz)
WA 74.4 WB 79.7 XA 71.9
XB 77.0 YA 85.4 YB 88.5
YZ 82.5 ZA 94.8 ZB 97.4
ZZ 91.5 M1 203.5 M2 210.7
M3 218.1 M4 225.7 M5 233.6
M6 241.8 M7 250.3 1A 103.5
1B 107.2 1Z 100.0 2A 114.8
2B 118.8 2Z 110.9 3A 127.3
3B 131.8 3Z 123.0 4A 141.3
4B 146.2 4Z 136.5 5A 156.7
5B 162.2 5Z 151.4 6A 173.8
6B 179.9 6Z 167.9 7A 192.8
7Z 186.2 8Z 206.5 9Z 229.1
VALID DPL CODES:
023, 025, 026, 031, 032, 043, 047, 051, 054, 065,
071, 072, 073, 074, 114, 115, 116, 125, 131, 132,
134, 143, 152, 155, 156, 162, 165, 172, 174, 205,
223, 226, 243, 244, 245, 251, 261, 263, 265, 271,
306, 311, 315, 331, 343, 346, 351, 364, 365, 371,
411, 412, 413, 423, 431, 432, 445, 464, 465, 466,
503, 506, 516, 532, 546, 565, 606, 612, 624, 627,
631, 632, 654, 662, 664, 703, 712, 723, 731, 732,
734, 743, 754
INCOMPATIBLE PL CODES:
ZB is not compatible with ZA or 1Z
8Z is not compatible with M1 or M2
9Z is not compatible with M4 or M5
UNSUPPORTED PL CODES:
PL Codes XZ (67.0 Hz) and WZ (69.3 Hz) are not supported.
UNSUPPORTED DPL CODES:
These are for special applications and are not
part of the standard Quantar product offering.
053, 122, 212, 225, 246, 252, 266, 325, 425, 446,
452, 455, 521, 525, 552, 564, 645, 652, 725, 726
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="mcs_access_help"><content>USER ACCESS HELP
System user groups may be ENABLED, DISABLED, or GATED, depending on
their status. Calls with PLs or DPLs that are marked ENABLED are repeated,
while the calls with PLs or DPLs that are marked as DISABLED are not
repeated.
If an entry is marked GATED, the incoming calls are either repeated or
not repeated, depending on whether GATING is allowed or not. GATING
is turned ON and OFF by using commands programmed in the TRC table.
These commands are initiated by a console operator which result in a TRC
sequence received by the station and the proper assignment of the
function tones. A selected function tone in the table is programmed
with the GATEACC ON keyword; when this function tone is received then
the calls associated with the GATED table entry are repeated.
When another function is received and this function tone is programmed in
the TRC table with the GATEACC OFF keyword, then the incoming calls
associated with the GATED function will not be allowed. The association
of the calls to the GATED function is done thru the PL/DPL which is
received.
The GATING function can also be enabled or disabled from the SAM module.
The SAM GATING control feature is enabled or disabled by setting the
ANALOG REPEATER ACCESS field to MDC/TONE; this field is found on the
CHANNEL INFORMATION screen. The SAM module is then programmed for any
of the signaling formats which it supports, MDC, DTMF, Singletone,
Select B, or other custom tones sequences.
If it is necessary to delete a User Entry, the User Access field should
be set to DELETE. The next time the codeplug is downloaded to the
station, all entries tagged for deletion will be removed from the list,
and the MCS Accounting Information will be cleared.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="save_mcs_file"><content>SAVE MCS REPORT DATA TO ARCHIVE DISK FILE HELP
ENTER DIRECTORY NAME: Enter the directory path of the directory that you
wish to view. Drive letters must be followed by a colon (:), and all
legal MS-DOS characters may be entered. Complete the entry by pressing
the ENTER key. Initially, the current directory pathname will be displayed
in this field.
If the directory exists, the RSS will display the current contents of the
directory on the screen. If the directory does not exist, an error message
will be displayed.
If the directory holds more files than can be viewed on one screen, use the
Page Up Down or Arrow Up Down keys to scroll the directory contents on the
screen.
Tab, or Shift-Tab may be used to move between the fields displayed on the
screen.
ENTER FILENAME: Once a directory is chosen, select a filename by typing the
filename into the field, (create new file), or by moving the highlight bar
to the desired filename by means of the Page Up or Down and Arrow Up or
Down keys, or the TAB key (overwrite old file).
Press the ENTER key to save the MCS Report to the desired file.
After the file is saved, the RSS will return to the :MCS
screen.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="sv_mcs_directory"><content>ENTER MCS REPORT DIRECTORY NAME HELP
Enter the directory pathname where the MCS report is to be stored
into this field. Any MS-DOS legal pathname is allowed. Wildcards may be
appended to the pathname to display only desired files in the directory.
Press ENTER or TAB to accept the pathname and to display the directory
contents.
When this pathname is changed, the RSS will use the new pathname as its
default the next time the RSS is entered. Press button F5 to
recall the default RSS Archive directory.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="sv_mcs_filename"><content>ENTER MCS REPORT FILENAME HELP
Enter the desired filename of the MCS Report in this field. Any legal
MS-DOS filename characters are allowed. (To select an existing file,
the filename highlighted by the cursor will automatically be copied to the
'Enter Filename' field; either select this file by pressing Enter or TAB
or type over the existing filename).
Press Enter or TAB to select the file.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="mcs_dir_contents_help"><content>OVERWRITE MCS REPORT FILE FROM LIST HELP
Use the Up/Dn, Left/Right Arrow Keys to select an MCS Report file from
the given list. The filename will automatically be placed in the FILENAME
field. To overwrite the file press the ENTER key.
Press the TAB key to move to the DIRECTORY field.
Press the SHIFT TAB key to move to the FILENAME field.
Press ESC or F10 to exit the WRITE MCS REPORT FILE screen without
writing the MCS Report to a file.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="pre_emph_help"><content>Audio Pre-Emphasis Help
FM modulation requires that the analog audio be pre-emphasized by
passing it through a filter with a positive 6 dB/octave slope
(Pre-emphasis is ENABLED). There are applications where this
characteristic is not desired and the analog audio signal is
transmitted without being passed through the pre-emphasis filter
(Pre-emphasis is DISABLED).
The default for Pre-emphasis is ENABLED.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="de_emph_help"><content>Audio De-Emphasis Help
In order to properly recover analog audio received through an FM system,
the analog signal is de-emphasized by passing it through a filter with
a negative 6 dB/octave slope (De-emphasis is ENABLED). This filter cancels
out the effects of the pre-emphasis filter used in the transmission
process. There are applications where this characteristic is not desired
and the analog audio signal is received without being passed through the
de-emphasis filter (De-emphasis is DISABLED).
The default for De-emphasis is ENABLED.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="hi_pass_help"><content>Rx High Pass Filter Help
In systems which utilize low frequency signaling, PL or DPL, there
is the possibility that the low frequency signaling can be heard
in the speaker. In order to prevent this unwanted effect, a high
pass filter is applied to the receive audio analog path (Hi-Pass
Filter is ENABLED). This filter will pass only the information
above 300 Hz and will severely attenuate the information below
300 Hz for improved audio quality. There are applications where
this characteristic is not desired and the analog audio signal
is received without being passed through the high pass filter
(Hi-Pass Filter is DISABLED).
The default for Hi-Pass Filter is ENABLED.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="csq_delay_time"><content>SECURENET WL CSQ Mute Timer Help
The WL CSQ Mute Timer parameter is used to mute the beginning of Rx Audio
on the wireline in a station that has been configured for 12 kpbs
SECURENET operation and RX ACTIVATION is set to Carrier Squelch.
When carrier is detected, the station does gate Receive Audio
immediately to the wireline L2, but waits a predetermined amount of
time specified by the WL CSQ Mute Timer parameter. The reason for the
delay is to give the station's receiver time to detect the presence
of 12 kpbs signaling, should it be present, and properly gate that
signaling to the wireline and prevent the "passing of coded
information thru the clear path".
The default value for the timer is 150 msec.
The range is 0 - 1000 msec.
In systems where PL is used, the WL mute timer is not used since PL
detect time provides the protection of preventing of "passing of coded
information thru the clear path".
If a channel's modulation is set to Analog, this field has no effect.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="modem_config"><content>CONFIGURATION:MODEM CONFIGURATION HELP
The modem configuration screen is used to configure the
RSS for use with a modem instead of a direct link to connect
to a station. The fields on the screen store a variety of
strings which are both commands which the RSS sends to
the modem to establish a connection with a remote modem
and messages the modem uses to communicate to the PC
the status of its connection over the phone line. To setup
RSS to be used with a modem the strings must be
configured to match those for your modem. If a modem is
not already connected to the station see the either the RSS
manual or the last section of this help screen for a
description of how to configure the station modem.
Initialization String: This field stores the string the RSS first
sends to the modem to initialize it to the correct parameters
to communicate with the modem connected to the station.
The default is ATE1Q0V1X4&K0S0=0^M
Dial Prefix: This is the modem command string to initiate the
dialing sequence. The two simplest choices for this field are
ATDT and ATDP for tone or pulse dialing respectively. The
default is ATDT
Hangup: This is the command string sent to the modem to
hang it up. The default is +++Bryan (talk)ATH0
Drop DTR to Hang up: This field enables or disables
dropping of the RS-232 DTR line when hanging up the
modem. Default is ENABLED
Connect: This field stores some part of the string the modem
sends whenever it connects to a remote modem. The default
is CONNECT
Busy: This is the response string the modem sends to the
PC when it receives a busy signal when dialing. The default
is BUSY
Failure: These four fields store strings the modem sends to
the PC on a failure condition when trying to connect to a
remote modem. The default four strings are
NO CARRIER
ERROR
NO DIALTONE
TIMEOUT
Wait for Connect: This is the maximum time the modem will
wait to successfully connect to a remote modem. If after
dialing commences the time in this field expires, the RSS
dialer will recycle and attempt to connect to the remote
modem again. Default is 60 seconds.
Pause between Calls: This is the time in seconds the RSS
pauses between attempts to connect to a remote modem.
Default is 5 seconds.
buttons:
PREVIOUS SETTINGS : Restores last saved configuration
SAVE: Saves current settings to disk
LOAD DEFAULTS : Loads RSS default settings
Configuring modems for remote RSS
This document describes how to set up a station modem (i.e. a modem
connected to the station with a serial cable) and a PC modem (a modem
connected to the PC on which RSS is running) for remote RSS. Remote
RSS allows a station to be configured with RSS remotely via modem. The
basic method for remote RSS is to connect a common computer modem
configured to answer incoming calls to the station and to a telephone line,
and to use a modem connected to the PC on which RSS is running to dial
and connect to the station. No special firmware is required of the station
for remote RSS, however station password protection which is introduced in
firmware version 5.0 is preferred for securing the station against
unauthorized access. RSS version 5.0 or better is required to configure the
PC modem and to dial to a station.
1.1. Quick setup
Briefly, to setup both the station and RSS modems used for remote
RSS the following configuration is required:
The modem connected to the station (the station modem) must be
configured as follows:
- Disable character echoing from the modem to the station
- Disable transmission of result codes from the modem to the station
- Enable auto-answer
- Set the modem to ignore DTR
- Set the modem to allow only 9600 bps connections
- Disable XON/XOFF (and disable RTS/CTS)
The modem connected to the PC should be configured via the RSS
modem initialization string as follows
- Disable XON/XOFF (and disable RTS/CTS)
(The PC modem's factory default settings are adequate for parameters other
then those mentioned above)
Data compression may be used but will not significantly improve
performance. Error control should be used but is not required. The station
modem configuration must be stored in NVM so that it is active when the
modem is powered up, while the RSS modem may be configured via the
initialization string field under the modem configuration string. Both the
station and PC modems should be connected to their respective units with a
standard 9 pin or 25 pin serial cable commonly found at any computer
supply store.
The remainder of the document elaborates on the procedure for
configuring the modems. Note that many of the commands described in this
document for configuring the modem are non standard and should be
referenced in the manual supplied with the modem.
1.2. Detailed Station Modem Configuration
A communications program such as Windows Terminal must be used
to configure the station modem. Once performed the configuration
must be stored in non-volatile memory so that when powered up the
modem is ready for remote RSS operation.
Once the station modem is connected to the PC with an appropriate 9
or 25 pin serial cable and the communications program is running, the
first thing to be done is to issue the following command followed by
<ENTER> (or the equivalent command specific to the modem) to set
the current modem settings to the factory defaults:
AT&F
Each command described in the following sections must be issued.
Finally the settings must be stored in the station modem's non-
volatile memory and the modem must be set to fetch the
configuration upon powerup with the command
AT&W0&Y0
This is the last command to be issued. With exceptional luck the
following three commands will completely configure the station
modem (Note that the modem will not respond after the second
command is issued so no characters or responses are seen while
typing):
AT&F
ATE0Q1&D0&K0N0S37=9S0=1
AT&W0&Y0
If the modem does not seem to work correctly after issuing these
three commands, the modem reference booklet supplied with the
modem must be used to find the appropriate configuration
commands. If this is the case, reset the modem to its factory defaults
with the AT&F command, continue through this document issuing
each command described or the equivalent thereof for the modem
being used, and finally store the configuration to the powerup settings
with the AT&W0&Y0 command. If the three commands listed above
configure the station modem nothing more needs to be done for the
station modem.
1.2.1. Disable echoing of characters to station
The modem connected to the station must not echo back to the station
any characters transmitted by the station. The standard Hayes
command for disabling character echo is ATE0
1.2.2. Disable transmission of command result strings
The standard Hayes command for disabling result strings is ATQ1
1.2.3. Set modem to ignore RS-232 DTR line
The default settings for most modems require DTR to be high in
order to answer an incoming call. Because this line is not asserted by
the station, the modem must be set to ignore it. Most modems can be
set to ignore DTR with AT&D0
1.2.4. Disable software flow control.
This is usually done with the command AT&K0 but again is vendor
dependent. It is critical that the station modem is not set to use
RTS/CTS or hardware flow control. The modem most likely will be
configured to use RTS/CTS flow control in its factory settings.
1.2.5. Set maximum connection speed
The host modem must be configured to allow connections only at
9600 baud. It is likely two 14400 bps capable modems or better will
be used to bridge the station and the RSS which under their default
settings will attempt to connect at their highest common speed which
the station cannot not support. To set the modem on the host end to
accept only 9600 bps connections the common set of commands is
ATN0 (which sets the modem to limit connections to the speed code
in register S37) and ATS37=9 which sets the register to 9, the speed
code for 9600 bps. These commands may vary between modem
vendors. If the host modem is configured correctly to accept only
9600 bps connections it will automatically negotiate this speed with
any calling modem.
1.2.6. Set modem to answer after n rings
The modem must be configured to answer calls. The register S0 holds
the number of rings the modem should wait for before answering and
can be set with ATS0=1 or however many rings are preferred. Use of
the S0 register for this purpose is standard across vendors.
1.2.7. Error Control and Data Compression
Most modems by default will attempt to connect to one another using
the most sophisticated error control and data compression protocols
common between them. The station modem should be configured in
its factory settings to use any protocols it supports that the calling
requests, so it should not need to be manually configured. The PC
modem should be configured (through the initialization string in the
RSS) to use the most sophisticated protocol the station modem
supports and nothing greater. If the PC modem attempts to negotiate
with the station modem a protocol the station modem does not
support, the characters sent by the PC modem requesting the protocol
are ignored by the station modem and passed on to the station as
garbage which while benign may cause the RSS to act erratically
when it first issues commands to the station.
1.3. PC modem configuration
The modem attached to the PC running RSS is configured via RSS
through the Initialization String field on the Modem Configuration
Screen. The initialization string is the command issued to the modem
before dialing a remote station and should configure the modem
settings required of remote RSS. While the default Initialization
String shipped with the RSS should be adequate, the following
configuration should be performed through the Initialization String:
Settings likely to be defaults for the modem whose commands are
standard across vendors:
- Enable character echoing (E1)
- Enable command response codes (Q0)
- Enable verbal command response codes (as opposed to numeric) (V1)
- Enable full set of command response codes (X4)
- Disable automatic answer (S0=0)
Settings not likely to be defaults whose commands are non-standard
across vendors:
- Disable XON/XOFF flow control (and disable CTS/RTS flow control) (&K0)
- Enable most robust error control which station modem supports
If the PC modem cannot be correctly configured through the
initialization string, using the same method for configuring the
station modem, issue the AT&F to reset the modem to factory defaults
and write the configuration to the power-up settings with AT&W0&Y0
1.4. Troubleshooting
Common problems and solutions:
1. The modems are connecting at a speed greater than 9600 bps.
Often this may be detected by examining the status LEDs on either
of the modems. Check that the modem can be and is configured
for 9600 connections. Look for Auto-mode Enable in the
modem's reference booklet.
2. The station modem answers but does not seem to transmit or
receive data. It is likely the station modem is expecting the CTS
line connected to it to be asserted, i.e. the modem is configured for
RTS/CTS or hardware flow control. Disable anything to do with
RTS/CTS flow control.
3. The station modem will not answer incoming calls. Either register
S0 is set to 0, or the modem is expecting the DTR line to be
asserted. The primary symptom of the latter is a modem with the
AA indicator LED illuminated that won't answer incoming
calls. Check the &D or appropriate setting for the modem and
ensure DTR monitoring is disabled.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="init_str"><content>INITIALIZATION STRING HELP
The Modem Initialization string is the command sent to the
modem by the RSS to set the modem to parameters needed
for using RSS over a telephone link. There is no standard
Hayes compatible modem command to properly initialize the
modem for remote RSS, and you very likely will need to set
the string for the commands your modem provides. The
default initialization string shipped with the RSS is:
ATE1Q0V1X4&K0S0=0
See the end of the MODEM CONFIGURATION help text (by
pressing Help) or the RSS manual for a detailed description
of how to set up the connected device and PC modems for
using RSS remotely over a telephone link.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="dial_prefix"><content>DIALING PREFIX HELP
The dialing prefix is the command string sent to the modem
by the RSS to initiate the dialing sequence. The default
Dialing Prefix shipped with the RSS is:
ATDT
This command instructs the modem to dial the modem using
touch tone. The most common reason to change the Dialing
Prefix String is for use with lines limited to pulse or rotary
dialing, in which case the string should be set to:
ATDP
You may also change the dialing prefix to set the modem to
your preferences, such as the volume level of the modem
speaker or to dial a code before every number in the dialing
directory. For example to dial out of a PBX system that
requires 9 to be dialed before any phone number, enter
ATDT9W in this field which instructs the modem to dial 9
and wait for a subsequent dial tone before dialing any
number in the dialing directory. Refer to your modem manual
for more information on such settings.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="dial_suffix"><content>DIALING SUFFIX HELP
The Dialing Suffix is the string appended to the dialing
command string to terminate the command and instruct the
modem to begin dialing. The default setting shipped with the
RSS is
^M
which is a carriage return, and should be adequate for all
Hayes compatible modems.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="hangup_str"><content>HANGUP STRING HELP
The Hang up String is the command sent to the modem to
force it to hang up. The default string shipped with the RSS is
+++Bryan (talk)ATH0^M
which should be adequate for any Hayes compatible modem. Each
of the tildes (~) in the string is interpreted by the RSS as a
half second pause and is not sent to the modem as part of the
command string.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="drop_dtr"><content>DROP DTR TO HANGUP HELP
Use this field to select whether the RS-232 Data Terminal
Ready (DTR) line between the PC and the MODEM should
be dropped when hanging up the modem. Many Modems
either require this line to be low to hang up or will
automatically hangup when the line is low. The default
value is ENABLED which is adequate for most modems.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="connect_str"><content>CONNECT STRING HELP
This field stores a fragment of the connect string sent from
the modem to the PC whenever a connection is established.
Most modems send elaborate connect strings containing
information about the speed and protocol of the connection
but always include somewhere in the message the string
CONNECT. The default is
CONNECT
which is adequate for Hayes compatible modems.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="busy_str"><content>BUSY STRING HELP
This field stores the string the modem sends to the PC when
it detects a busy signal after dialing. The default string
shipped with the RSS is
BUSY
which is adequate for Hayes compatible modems.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="failure_str"><content>FAILURE STRINGS
The four failure string fields store strings the modem sends
to the PC when a command fails, such as when it attempts
to dial and no dial tone is present or when the connection
with a remote modem is lost. When the RSS is attempting to
connect to a remote modem it monitors the responses from
the modem to determine whether the MODEM has successfully
connected. If when dialing any of the strings entered into
these fields is encountered in a modem response the RSS
acknowledges the failed attempt and will reset the modem
and attempt to connect to the device again. The default
entries for these four fields are
NO CARRIER
ERROR
NO DIALTONE
TIMEOUT
which should be adequate for any Hayes compatible modem.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="control_str"><content>CONTROL STRING HELP
========
This field is being provided for user convenience to allow the user to send
commands to a remote device or even the station.
For example: Electronic switches are being utilized
at sites to allow a single dial up modem to access several devices. In order
to change the routing of the switch to connect to a specific device,
special commands are needed by the switch to establish that connection.
This field allows the user to sends those commands directly to the switch
without exiting and reentering the RSS.
The field may contain any alphanumeric and control character. Control
characters are represented by alphabetical characters preceded by a
carat ^. For example, if the wake up character of the switch is a
control p and the port accessed is port 4, then the string sequence that
is entered to achieve switching the switch to port 4 is ^p4.
To actually send the Control String, press the SEND CONTROL STRING
button when the modem configuration screen is displayed.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="wait_connect"><content>WAIT FOR CONNECT HELP
This field stores the maximum time in seconds the RSS will
wait for a connection when dialing a remote modem. If after
dialing the RSS has not connected to the remote modem within the
time entered in this field it hangs up and attempts to connect
again. The default value is 60 seconds.
NOTE: If the RSS is run in anything other than DOS only mode,
the timing of the Wait For Connect may not be accurate.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="wait_btwn_calls"><content>PAUSE BETWEEN CALLS HELP
This field stores the time in seconds the RSS will wait
between successive attempts to connect to a remote modem.
If the RSS fails to connect to a remote modem the RSS will
pause for the time entered in this field before redialing.
The default value is 5 seconds.
NOTE: If the RSS is run in anything other than DOS only mode,
the timing of the Pause Between Calls may not be accurate.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="dial_description"><content>DIALING DIRECTORY DESCRIPTION HELP
The dialing directory description field allows the user to
enter a descriptive name to identify the corresponding
phone number.
The RSS remote dial-up facility is designed specifically for
RSS to station/comparator communication, and is not suitable
for other applications.
The remote dial-up facility is used establish a connection
to a remote device via a modem link. Before using the
feature configure the RSS for the modem type and COMM port
used on the PC. This can be done updating the MODEM
CONFIGURATION and SERIAL PORT CONFIGURATION screens on
the SETUP COMPUTER CONFIGURATION MENU.
The user may move to a particular dialing directory entry or
phone number by using the Tab/Shift Tab to move
the cursor to the desired field. The directory currently
supports up to 11 entries.
The user may add/modify/delete any entry by moving to the field
and entering any printable character.
Once the cursor is on the desired description or phone number
field, pressing Connect/Dial will dial the number and attempt to establish
a connection with the remote modem. Once the connection is made,
the RSS will operate as if the station were connected locally.
When the RSS is dialing and attempting to connect to the remote
modem, a status window will appear on the screen indicating the
call's current status.
Button Descriptions:
Help - Displays this screen.
Connect/Dial - Dials highlighted entry phone number via a Hayes
compatible modem and establishes a remote connection.
Disconnect/Hang up - Disconnects current remote session.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="dial_number"><content>PHONE NUMBER FIELD HELP
The phone number field allows the user to enter the phone number
of a remote modem.
If a dialing prefix is necessary in order to dial outside an
internal telephone system, the prefix can be specified in the
Dialing Prefix field on the Modem Configuration screen.
The phone number field will hold up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
The RSS remote dial-up facility is designed specifically for
RSS to station/comparator communication, and is not suitable
for other applications.
The remote dial-up facility is used establish a connection
to a remote device via a modem link. Before using the
feature configure the RSS for the modem type and COMM port
used on the PC. This can be done updating the MODEM
CONFIGURATION and SERIAL PORT CONFIGURATION screens on
the CONNECTION SCREEN.
The user may move to a particular dialing directory entry or
phone number by using the Tab/Shift Tab and Enter keys to move
the cursor to the desired field. The directory currently
supports up to 11 entries.
The user may add/modify/delete any entry by moving to the field
and entering any printable character.
Once the cursor is on the desired description or phone number
field, pressing Connect/Dial will dial the number and attempt to establish
a connection with the remote modem. Once the connection is made,
the RSS will operate as if the station were connected locally.
When the RSS is dialing and attempting to connect to the remote
modem, a status window will appear on the screen indicating the
call's current status.
Button Descriptions:
Help - Displays this screen.
Connect/Dial - Dials highlighted entry phone number via a Hayes
compatible modem and establishes a remote connection.
Disconnect/Hang-up - Disconnects current remote session.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="dial_dir_help"><content>CONFIGURATION:REMOTE DIAL-UP HELP
The RSS Remote Dial-up facility is designed specifically for
RSS to station/comparator communication, and is not suitable
for other applications.
The remote dial-up facility is used establish a connection
to a remote device via a modem link. Before using the
feature configure the RSS for the modem type and COMM port
used on the PC. This can be done updating the MODEM
CONFIGURATION and SERIAL PORT CONFIGURATION screens
on the CONNECTION SCREEN.
The user may move to a particular dialing directory entry or
phone number by using the Tab/Shift Tab and Enter keys to move
the cursor to the desired field. The directory currently
supports up to 11 entries.
The user may add/modify/delete any entry by moving to the field
and entering any printable character.
Once the cursor is on the desired description or phone number
field, pressing Connect/Dial will dial the number and attempt to establish
a connection with the remote modem. Once the connection is made,
the RSS will operate as if the device were connected locally.
When the RSS is dialing and attempting to connect to the remote
modem, a status window will appear on the screen indicating the
call's current status.
Button Descriptions:
Help - Displays this screen.
Connect/Dial - Dials highlighted entry phone number via a Hayes
compatible modem and establishes a remote connection.
Disconnect/Hang-up - Disconnects current remote session.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="password_form_help"><content>PASSWORD PROTECTION
This Device is password protected. In order to communicate with
this Device, the user must type in the appropriate password.
When the Password Entry window is on the screen, the user types
in the password, followed by OK to accept.
Asterisk (*) characters are echoed to the screen during password
input for added security. The user is allowed 5 incorrect password
attempts. After five incorrect password attempts, the Device
will time out, and the RSS will not be able to communicate with
the Device for approximately 60 seconds.
IF A PASSWORD IS FORGOTTEN:
In the event that the password is lost or forgotten, the password
can be erased. When the RSS prompts the user to enter a password,
the user should type in LOST. Then while holding down the top two
buttons on the front panel of the device, the user should press
OK to complete the erasing of the current password.
TEMPORARY BYPASS OF A UNKNOWN PASSWORD:
If a password protected device must be serviced, and the password
is not known, the user may still access the device without
disabling password protection. When the RSS prompts the user to
enter a password, the user should type in SERVICE. Then while
holding down the top two buttons on the front panel of the device,
the user should press OK to complete the temporary bypass
of the device password. Password protection will be bypassed as if
the correct password had been entered.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="password_field"><content>ENTER PASSWORD HELP
This screen is opened when the device is password protected. In order
for the RSS to establish a session with the device to obtain service
screen information or to change the configuration of the device, the
device password must be entered. If the password is not known, see the
help text below.
Once the device accepts the entered password, it establishes an open
session with the RSS and the service technician can access all the
service screens provided by the device and can also change the
configuration for the device. The session stays open for as long as
there is activity between the RSS and the device. If there is no
activity for a period of 10 minutes, the device times out and when the
service technician attempts to open a service screen, the RSS will
prompt the technician for a password.
When the Password Entry window is on the screen, the user types in the password,
and then the OK button to accept. The password must be at least 5, but no more than
8 characters in length. Asterisk (*) characters are echoed to the screen during password
input for added security. The user is allowed 5 incorrect password attempts.
After five incorrect password attempts, the device will time out, and the RSS will not
be able to communicate with the device for approximately 60 seconds.
IF A STATION PASSWORD IS FORGOTTEN:
In the event that the password is lost or forgotten, the password can be erased.
When the RSS prompts the user to enter a password, the user should type in LOST.
Then, while holding down the top two buttons on the front panel of the device,
the user should press the OK button to complete the erasing of the current password.
TEMPORARY BYPASS OF A UNKNOWN PASSWORD:
If a password protected device must be serviced, and the password is not known,
the user may still access the device without disabling password protection.
When the RSS prompts the user to enter a password, the user should type in SERVICE.
Then, while holding down the top two buttons on the front panel of the device,
the user should press the OK button to complete the temporary bypass of the
device's password. Password protection will then be bypassed as if the
correct password had been entered.
CHANGING OR DISABLING THE STATION PASSWORD:
In order to change or disable the password the user should use the "Set Device Password" screen.
To use this screen select the "Set Device Password" option from the "Tools" menu.
IF AN UNEXPECTED PASSWORD PROMPT IS SHOWN:
If a user is asked to enter a password in order to access a station it might be caused by the
fact that RSS is not connected to the supported device. Check if the serial cable is connected to
the proper device and the proper COM port is being used to communicate with it.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="change_pswd_help"><content>CHANGE PASSWORD HELP
The Set Device Password window has been provided to allow the user to
change the password in a password protected device, or to disable
the password protection.
Password protection is available in Quantar/Quantro software
releases 5.0 and later, and all ASTRO TAC 3000 Comparators.
To change the password, the user must know the old password (if it
exists), and determine a new password.
Asterisk (*) characters are echoed to the screen during password
input for added security. The user is allowed 5 incorrect password
attempts. After five incorrect password attempts, the device
will time out, and the RSS will not be able to communicate with
the device for approximately 60 seconds.
CHANGING THE PASSWORD:
When the user selects the "Set Device Password" option from the "Tools" menu,
the user will be prompted to enter the old password as well as the new
password (the newly chosen password will have to be typed in twice).
Pressing the "Apply" or "OK" button will send the data to the device
for verification. Passwords are case insensitive.
If the old password matches the password stored in the device,
the RSS will advise the user that the password has been changed.
Once the new password has been accepted, the device encrypts and
stores the new password to NVM.
The words LOST, SERVICE, and QUIT are reserved keywords and
cannot be used as a password.
Password input characters are echoed to the screen as asterisks for security.
ERASING PASSWORDS THROUGH THE RSS:
If you know the password and are connected to the device,
you may erase the current password as follows.
Select the "Set Device Password" option from the "Tools" menu.
On the screen that gets displayed only enter the value for the
current password. Leave the other two fields blank. Once done
press the "Apply or "OK" buttons. If the current password was
typed in correctly, a pop-up will appear indicating that
password protection has been disabled.
NOTE:
With the password erased, all future RSS sessions will be allowed
without entering a password. You may create another password by
repeating the Change password process.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="mradid_help"><content>RADIO ID PARTITIONING MENU HELP
This menu lists the types of radio ID partitioning supported in the RSS.
Button Descriptions:
Help - Displays this screen.
Full/Sub Band Partitioning - Modify or view band partitioning.
Modulation ID Partitioning - Modify or view modulation
partitioning.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="modid_partition_help"><content>MODULATION PARTITIONING HELP
The RSS provides the user with a table where he can specify which radios
support ASTRO modulation and which support ANALOG modulation. A user
may enter up to 32 ranges in this table. Each range (and each number in
the range) represents BOTH an Individual Radio ID and a Talk-group ID.
NOTE: All 4 Hexadecimal places represent the Radio ID, but only the 3 most
significant hexadecimal places represent a Talk-group ID (the right most
digit is dropped for Talk-group representation). An example of an entry in
the table may be:
0010 - 002F ASTRO
This represents 32 Hex Radio IDs (0010 - 002F) and 2 Talk-group IDs (001
and 002) that are ASTRO Capable.
Since Range Table IDs specify both Radios and Talk-groups with one range,
the following rules will help in definition of the range table.
1) Up to 32 ranges may be specified
2) The smallest range defined needs to include 16 Range Table IDs or one
full talk-group. Ranges must be defined in 16 Range Table ID increments
(since one Talk-group is represented by 16 Table range IDs).
3) The total number of radio IDs specified = total number of Range Table
IDs specified
4) The total number of Talk-group IDs specified = total number of Range
Table IDs specified + 16
5) The ID is the Hexadecimal equivalent of the individual ID - 700000.
NOTE: In a SmartZone system, the zone manager will overwrite the
modulation partitioning data from its own database. The user-
specified data is used only if the station is not communicating
with the zone manager after being reset or powered up.
Button Descriptions:
Help - Displays this Help screen.
ADD - a new screen will appear allowing you to enter a
new range of IDs. This range will be added with a default
modulation.
DELETE - a new screen will appear allowing you to enter
the range of IDs to delete. This range will then be folded
into the next higher modulation unless only the beginning of
the range is deleted. In this case it will be folded into
the previous band.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="alm_help"><content>ANALOG IDLE LINK CHECK MAINTENANCE HELP
Analog Idle Link Check is used to make sure links between analog
stations are operational during idle periods. Messages are passed
between wireline modules, and if messages are missed, the link will
be reported as failed.
If the Wireline Interface field is set to V.24 HYBRID and the Comparator
field is not ASTRO-TAC WITH DIGI-TAC, then Analog Idle Link Check
should be ENABLED otherwise it should be DISABLED.
If the Wireline Interface field is set to "MODEM", then the Analog Idle
Link Check will be set to "DISABLED" and the field will be uneditable.
Valid choices for this field are ENABLED and DISABLED.
Default value is DISABLED.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="dlm_help"><content>DIGITAL IDLE LINK CHECK HELP
Digital Idle Link Check is used to make sure links between ASTRO
stations are operational during idle periods. Messages are passed
between wireline modules, and if the messages are missed, the link
will be reported as failed.
Valid choices for this field are ENABLED and DISABLED.
Default value is ENABLED for all ASTRO CAI stations or Trunked ASTRO stations
otherwise the default value is DISABLED.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="dcondee_help"><content>
Memory EEPROM IC (51-84293T01/T02/T03/T04) used in Quantar/Quantro/Data Base
Stations has been found susceptible to memory corruption in unused portions
of its memory. (The EEPROM IC is used to store codeplug data, alignment info,
and other operation parameters for the station.)
When EEPROM memory is corrupted and the station experiences a reset, the
overall memory IC checksum no longer is its expected value. This will
result in the station "Control Fail" red LED lighting, and the station
will not be operational. Only RSS communications will be possible.
The RSS attempts to correct this problem by conditioning the EEPROM.
Conditioning writes a specific pattern to the unused portion of the
EEPROM IC to prevent the memory corruption from occurring.
Whenever the user attempts to read or write codeplug data to or from the
station, the RSS checks the EEPROM to see if the EEPROM has been
conditioned. If it has NOT been conditioned, the RSS will present the user
with a screen explaining that the EEPROM needs conditioning.
The user should attempt to condition the EEPROM at this point.
In most cases, conditioning of the EEPROM will take less than 10 minutes.
The station will be access disabled during that time.
NOTE: It is important that there is a current archive of the station's
codeplug before continuing with the conditioning procedure!
Not having an archive of the codeplug would result in the user
having to manually re-enter all the customer codeplug data in the
event of a problem occurring while performing the conditioning.
The EEPROM conditioning only needs to be done once. After the EEPROM has
been conditioned, the RSS will no longer present the conditioning screen
to the user.
NOTE: When upgrading a station to newer version firmware and codeplug,
the RSS may inform the user that the codeplug needs to be
conditioned again, even though it had been previously
conditioned. This is normal and is required to condition any
new codeplug data sections added during the upgrade.
The station EEPROM may only be conditioned when the RSS is connected to the
RS-232 port on the front of the station. If the RSS is connected to the
rear port of the station, conditioning will not be attempted.
IMPORTANT: It is recommended that conditioning NOT be done via modem
connection. Phone lines can be unreliable and could cause a failure in
the conditioning process. If the conditioning process is interrupted,
it will fail and could result in a non-functional station! (See "IF
CONDITIONING FAILS", below.)
SPECIAL NOTE FOR INTELLIREPEATER STATIONS:
=============================
Conditioning MUST be done at the site and for each individual station!
Conditioning is only done to the EEPROM of the station connected to the
RSS PC. Conditioning is not cross loaded to other Ethernet connected
stations in the system. Care must be taken to condition the EEPROMs of
each of the stations in the system.
IntelliRepeater stations must be put into "RSS_only" mode while the EEPROM
is being conditioned. "RSS_only" mode means that the station will only
communicate with the RSS. No normal station operations are allowed.
To place the IntelliRepeater into "RSS_only" mode:
1. Reset the Station by pressing the Volume UP, Volume Down and
Intercom buttons (the top two and the bottom buttons) on the
front panel simultaneously.
2. At the point in the reset sequence when the bottom two Station
Control LEDs are the only ones lit, press and hold the Volume
Down and CSQ-PL-OFF buttons (the middle two buttons) on the front
panel of the station simultaneously.
3. Continue to hold these down until 15 seconds after the "Control
Fail" and the "PA Fail" red LEDs are both lit.
4. If these LEDs do not remain lit, repeat steps 1-3.
5. When these LEDs remain lit, you are ready to condition the
EEPROM.
6. After successfully conditioning the EEPROM, you must reset the
station again to exit "RSS_only" mode and return to normal
operation.
IF CONDITIONING FAILS (the RSS will inform the user if a failure occurs):
=============================================================
Reset the station.
If the station comes up "green", the failure occurred during the reading
of the EEPROM and the only step needed is to retry the conditioning when
the RSS requests it.
If the station does not come up "green" after a reset, the user will have
to do all the steps needed for installing a new station: write the archived
codeplug out to the station, attempt conditioning again and, if successful,
re-align the station.
If unable to restore the station to normal operation by repeating these
steps, contact the Motorola Support Center at 1-800-221-7144,
(International) 1-847-576-7300, FAX 1-847-576-2172.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="mwldcd"><content>WILDCARD CONFIGURATION MENU HELP
These functions are used to configure the WildCard tables for
the Station's Codeplug.
Button Descriptions:
Help - Recalls this Help Screen.
Input Configuration - Change/View The WildCard Inputs.
Output Configuration - Change/View The WildCard Outputs.
State Condition/Action Tables - Change/View The WildCard
State Condition/Action Tables
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="wildcard_oper"><content>
WildCard Operation Help
The WildCard option is only available if a Wireline module is present.
The WildCard option is for advanced users of the QUANTAR/QUANTRO station.
WildCard Operation provides a utility whereby a user can affect
station's functions by asserting external inputs to the station by
monitoring station states. The user can ascertain station status by
programming the station's outputs to reflect the station states.
The QUANTAR station has dedicated a set of external individual inputs and
outputs to provide this function. The inputs and outputs are
accessible via the 50 pin Telco connector.
The WildCard feature is provided in two tiers, BASIC and ENHANCED.
The difference between the two tiers is the number of inputs/outputs,
commands and states that are available. The ENHANCED option requires
the 8 Wire Wireline module and has the full command set available from
the RSS. The BASIC option requires the 4 Wire Wireline module and has
a reduced command set available from the RSS.
The functions defined in the station's manual will no longer work
once WildCard is enabled. To restore the functions as defined in the
station's manual the user may set the WildCard tables to their
defaults or disable WildCard.
If a 4 Wire Wireline module is present, the choices for WildCard are
DISABLED and BASIC. BASIC WildCard allows the user to control station
operations based on inputs to the station and/or station states.
The BASIC WildCard has 8 inputs, 7 of which are transistors and 1 that
is optocoupled, and 4 outputs, 3 of which are transistor closure to
ground and 1 is a relay closure.
If an 8 Wire Wireline module is present, the choices also include
the ENHANCED choice. The ENHANCED WildCard in addition to more complex
station control also has audio routing capabilities. The 8 Wire ENHANCED
WildCard has 12 inputs, 4 of which are optocoupled and 8 are transistors,
and 10 outputs, 4 of which are relay closures and 6 of which are
transistor closure to ground.
In either case the choice of DISABLED keeps the station in it's
normal operation.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="wc_input_screen_help"><content>WILDCARD INPUT CONFIGURATION SCREEN HELP
This screen defines how the inputs will be used to control the station.
The inputs can be used individually or they can be grouped in a binary
group. Binary groups are selected by using the arrow keys to scroll
through the choices in the group fields. The active level is set for
the whole binary group by selecting the active level for that group,
again using the arrow keys to scroll through the choices.
The binary groups are used to control the current channel number
or access code table being used by the station. The group's least
significant to most significant bit goes from the lowest bit number
to the highest.
The Input types and possible behaviors are listed below. When an input
is assigned to a binary group, the assignment to that group is displayed.
ENHANCED
Input HW Input Type Active Level Behavior
1 Transistor Input HI/LO BINARY- BIT 0
2 Transistor input HI/LO BINARY- BIT 1
3 Transistor Input HI/LO BINARY- BIT 2
4 Transistor Input HI/LO BINARY- BIT 3
5 Transistor Input HI/LO BINARY- BIT 4
6 Transistor Input HI/LO BINARY- BIT 5
7 Transistor Input HI/LO BINARY- BIT 6
8 Transistor Input HI/LO BINARY- BIT 7
9 Optocoupler Input HI/LO BINARY- BIT 0
10 Optocoupler Input HI/LO BINARY- BIT 1
11 Optocoupler Input HI/LO BINARY- BIT 2
12 Optocoupler Input HI/LO BINARY- BIT 3
BASIC
Input HW Input Type Active Level Behavior
1 Transistor Input HI/LO BINARY- BIT 0
2 Transistor Input HI/LO BINARY- BIT 1
3 Transistor Input HI/LO BINARY- BIT 2
4 Transistor Input HI/LO BINARY- BIT 3
5 Transistor Input HI/LO
6 Transistor Input HI/LO
7 Transistor Input HI/LO
9 Optocoupler Input HI/LO
Set To Default Button - Resets the screen to the default settings which are no binary
groups selected, Transistor active levels set to LO, and
Optocoupler active levels set to HI.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="wc_input_group"><content>WILDCARD INPUT BINARY GROUP HELP
This field allows the user to control a Channel / Access Code Table.
The choices are as follows:
ENHANCED Choices BASIC Choices
Group 1 Inputs 1-4 Group 1 Inputs 1-4
Group 2 Inputs 1-8 NONE
Group 3 Inputs 9-10
Group 4 Inputs 9-12
NONE
BASIC WildCard allows only 1 binary group to be selected.
NOTE: Group 2 has been designed for future use.
For ENHANCED WildCard, when multiple groups of outputs are designated they
cannot overlap. Selecting Group 1 and Group 3 is OK but Group 1 and
Group 2 overlap and cannot be selected simultaneously.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="wc_output_screen_help"><content>WILDCARD OUTPUT CONFIGURATION SCREEN HELP
This screen defines how the outputs will be used to control the station.
The outputs can be used individually or they can be grouped in a binary
group. Binary groups are selected by using the arrow keys to scroll
through the choices in the group fields. The active level is set for
the whole binary group by selecting the active level for that group,
again using the arrow keys to scroll through the choices.
The binary groups are used to reflect the station's current channel number
or Access Code Table or MCS user. The group's least significant to most
significant bit goes from the lowest bit number to the highest.
The Output types and possible behaviors are listed below. When an output
is assigned to a binary group, the assignment to that group is displayed.
ENHANCED
Output HW Output Type Active Level Behavior
1 Transistor HI/LO BINARY- BIT 0
2 Transistor HI/LO BINARY- BIT 1
3 Transistor HI/LO BINARY- BIT 2
4 Transistor HI/LO BINARY- BIT 3
5 Transistor HI/LO BINARY- BIT 4
6 Transistor HI/LO BINARY- BIT 5
7 Relay HI/LO BINARY- BIT 0
8 Relay HI/LO BINARY- BIT 1
9 Relay HI/LO BINARY- BIT 2
10 Relay HI/LO BINARY- BIT 3
BASIC
Output HW Output Type Active Level Behavior
1 Transistor HI/LO BINARY- BIT 0
2 Transistor HI/LO BINARY- BIT 1
3 Transistor HI/LO
7 Relay HI/LO
Set To Default Button - Resets the screen to the default settings which are no binary
groups selected and all active levels set to LO.
NOTE: In order for the console interface to function properly when
WILDCARD is enabled, WILDCARD OUTPUT 2 must be programmed LO,
and any WILDCARD table which configures OUTPUT 2 to drive
RX CD DETECT must be changed.
OUTPUT 2 is used to drive the hardware gate that switches the
console line between analog and Securenet. Thus when RX CD
DETECT is active, the line is switched to Securenet. Other-
wise, the console line is switched to analog.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="wc_out_grp_help"><content>WILDCARD OUTPUT BINARY GROUP HELP
This field allows you to define what information to reflect on the
output lines for a Channel Number/ MCS User/ Access Code Table.
Your choices are as follows:
ENHANCED Choices BASIC Choices
Group 1 Outputs 1-2 Group 1 Outputs 1-2
Group 2 Outputs 1-4 NONE
Group 3 Outputs 5-6
Group 4 Outputs 1-6
Group 5 Outputs 7-8
Group 6 Outputs 7-10
NONE
BASIC WildCard Only allows 1 group to be selected.
For ENHANCED WildCard, when multiple groups of outputs are designated
they cannot overlap. Selecting Group 1 and Group 3 is OK but Group 1
and Group 2 overlap and cannot be selected simultaneously.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="wc_grp_act_level_help"><content>GROUP ACTIVE LEVEL HELP
The Active Level field defines at which level the input/output is to be
considered active. When selecting the active level for a group, that
level will be true for all inputs/outputs within that group.
The choices for Active Level are HI and LO and blank. Active Level will
be blank if no group is selected, and must NOT be blank when there is
a group selected. Below is a table describing the HI and LO settings.
Active
Level | Transistor |Relay/Optocoupler
======|============|=================
HI | +5V | OPEN
------|------------|-----------------
LO | GROUND | CLOSED
When you lose power to the station, the relays and the transistors
will be open regardless of the WildCard Settings.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="wc_act_level_help"><content>WILDCARD ACTIVE LEVEL HELP
The Active Level field defines at which level the input/output is to be
considered active.
The choices for Active Level are HI and LO.
Below is a table describing the HI and LO settings.
Active
Level | Transistor |Relay/Optocoupler
======|============|=================
HI | +5V | OPEN
------|------------|-----------------
LO | GROUND | CLOSED
When you lose power to the station, the relays and the transistors
will be open regardless of the WildCard Settings
The default setting for the Active Level is LO.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="wc_state_cond_act_tbl_help"><content>WILDCARD STATE CONDITION/ACTION TABLE SCREEN HELP
The WILDCARD feature provides for the entry of external inputs or
station states into a State Condition table. Each State Condition
will allow three entries that can be logically AND'ed, OR'ed,
AND NOT'ed, or OR NOT'ed with each other. These states and conditions
will be evaluated simply from left to right, no parenthesis.
The result of this logical combination will result in the execution of
the commands in the ACTION or INACTION table. The commands in the
ACTION table will be executed sequentially whenever the result of the
State Condition table becomes TRUE, the INACTION table commands will
be executed sequentially whenever the result becomes FALSE.
All commands will be executed even if the condition that initiated them
is no longer true.
Add Table - Adds a State Condition/Action table to the end of the list and
brings up the screen for it.
Set To Default - Resets all of the State Conditions/Action Tables to the default
settings. The default settings are determined by the
system configuration.
Previous Table - Displays the State Condition/Action Table previous to the one
currently displayed.
Next Table - Displays the State Condition/Action Table after the one currently
displayed.
Delete Table - Deletes the State Condition/Action Table currently displayed.
Programming Rules - Displays the WildCard Programming Rules (Not available on the
condition fields)
NOTE: In order for the console interface to function properly when
WILDCARD is enabled, WILDCARD OUTPUT 2 must be programmed LO,
and any WILDCARD table which configures OUTPUT 2 to drive
RX CD DETECT must be changed.
OUTPUT 2 is used to drive the hardware gate that switches the
console line between analog and Securenet. Thus when RX CD
DETECT is active, the line is switched to Securenet. Other-
wise, the console line is switched to analog.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="wc_jump_to_help"><content>WILDCARD JUMP TO ___ HELP
Use this field to enter the table number that you wish displayed on the
screen then press tab or enter and that table (if it exists) will be
displayed. It is merely a quick way to display a particular table.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="wc_state_description_help"><content>WILDCARD STATE CONDITION DESCRIPTION HELP
The Description field will accept 15 alphanumeric characters. These are
entered by the user and are for comments only and are stored in the
codeplug as well.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="wc_state_help"><content>WILDCARD STATE HELP
The States specify:
- discrete inputs
- discrete outputs
- station states listed below
Select one of the States that are in the list.
This table lists the WildCard states, the system types they were intended
for and whether they are included in the BASIC or ENHANCED state set.
Every state marked BASIC is also included in the ENHANCED list of states.
NOTE: ASTRO denotes ASTRO/ANALOG (mixed mode) systems, not ASTRO only<cr>
systems.
NOTE: ASTRX denotes ASTRO-TAC RECEIVER.
WILDCARD STATES |ASTRO|| CONV| 6809| IR |ASTRX|TBAND||BASIC| ENH |
=========================|=====||=====|=====|=====|=====|=====||=====|=====|
ACC CODE TBL | X || X | | | X | X || X | X |
ACC DISABLED | X || X | X | X | X | X || X | X |
ANLG LINK ALARM | X || X | X | X | X | || | X |
ASTRO LINE PTT | X || X | | | X | || | X |
ASTRO RPTR PTT | X || X | | | X | || | X |
BATTERY REVERT | X || X | X | X | | X || X | X |
BOOSTER FAIL | X || X | X | X | X | X || X | X |
BTRY OVR ALARM | X || X | X | X | | X || X | X |
CLR LINE PTT | || X | | | X | X || X | X |
CLR RPTR PTT | || X | | | X | X || X | X |
COLD RESET | X || X | X | X | X | X || X | X |
CONTROL CHN | X || | X | X | X | || X | X |
CUR CHN | X || X | X | X | X | X || X | X |
DATA PTT | X || X | | | X | || | X |
DGTL LINK ALARM | X || X | X | X | X | || | X |
EVENT FLAG 1-16 | X || X | X | X | X | X || | X |
EXCITER ALARM | X || X | X | X | | X || | X |
EXT WM FWD ALM | X || X | X | X | X | X || X | X |
EXT WM REFL ALM | X || X | X | X | X | X || X | X |
FAILSOFT | || | X | | | || X | X |
FWD PWR ALARM | X || X | X | X | | X || | X |
HLGT DETECT | || X | | | X | X || X | X |
INPUT 1 | X || X | X | X | | X || X | X |
INPUT 2 | X || X | X | X | | X || X | X |
INPUT 3 | X || X | X | X | | X || X | X |
INPUT 4 | X || X | X | X | | X || X | X |
INPUT 5 | X || X | X | X | | X || X | X |
INPUT 6 | X || X | X | X | | X || X | X |
INPUT 7 | X || X | X | X | | X || X | X |
INPUT 8 | X || X | X | X | | X || | X |
INPUT 9 | X || X | X | X | | X || X | X |
INPUT 10 | X || X | X | X | | X || | X |
INPUT 11 | X || X | X | X | | X || | X |
INPUT 12 | X || X | X | X | | X || | X |
INTERCOM | X || X | | | X | X || X | X |
LINE PTT | X || X | | | X | X || X | X |
LLGT DETECT | || X | | | X | X || X | X |
LOCAL PTT | X || X | | | | X || X | X |
MAIN | || X | | | | || | X |
MCS USER | || X | | | X | X || | X |
MRTI PTT | X || X | X | | | X || | X |
OUTPUT 1 | X || X | X | X | | X || X | X |
OUTPUT 2 | X || X | X | X | | X || X | X |
OUTPUT 3 | X || X | X | X | | X || X | X |
OUTPUT 4 | X || X | X | X | | X || | X |
OUTPUT 5 | X || X | X | X | | X || | X |
OUTPUT 6 | X || X | X | X | | X || | X |
OUTPUT 7 | X || X | X | X | | X || X | X |
OUTPUT 8 | X || X | X | X | | X || | X |
OUTPUT 9 | X || X | X | X | | X || | X |
OUTPUT 10 | X || X | X | X | | X || | X |
PA ALARM | X || X | X | X | | X || X | X |
PIB ALARM | || | | X | | || | X |
PWR SPLY ALARM | X || X | X | X | | X || | X |
REFL PWR ALARM | X || X | X | X | | X || | X |
RPTR PTT | X || X | | | | X || X | X |
RPTR QUAL MET | X || X | | | | X || | X |
RPTR SET UP | X || X | | | | X || | X |
RX ANALOG | X || X | X | X | X | X || | X |
RX1 ALARM | X || X | X | X | X | X || | X |
RX ASTRO ID | X || X | X | X | X | || | X |
RX CAR DETECT | X || X | X | X | X | X || X | X |
RX CD DETECT | || X | X | X | X | || X | X |
RX INHIBITED | X || X | | | X | X || X | X |
RX1 LOCK | X || X | X | X | X | X || X | X |
RX PL DETECT | || X | X | | X | X || X | X |
RX PL DISABLED | || X | | | X | X || X | X |
RX QUAL MET | X || X | | | X | X || X | X |
SAM ALARM | X || X | | | | || | X |
SAM COMMAND | X || X | | | | || | X |
SCAN SUSPENDED | || X | | | X | || X | X |
SCANNING RX | || X | | | X | || X | X |
SECUR LINE PTT | || X | X | | X | || | X |
SECUR RPTR PTT | || X | X | | | || | X |
STN ALARM | X || X | X | X | X | X || | X |
STN KEYED | X || X | X | X | | X || X | X |
TIMER DONE 1-10 | X || X | X | X | X | X || | X |
TRC TONE | || X | | | X | X || | X |
TX INHIBITED | X || X | X | X | | X || X | X |
TX LOCK | X || X | X | X | | X || X | X |
TX PL DISABLED | || X | | | | X || X | X |
TX WL1 CD DET | || X | | | | || X | X |
UHSO ALARM | X || X | X | X | | || | X |
WARM RESET | X || X | X | X | X | X || X | X |
WL ALARM | X || X | X | X | X | X || | X |
Below is a brief description of each state.
1PPS TRACKING ALARM
This state is inactive at reset. If a TRACKING message is reported
by the DSP, this state should be set to active. After being set to
active, if any one of the other 5 states is reported by the DSP,
this state should be set to inactive.
This state will only become active when the DSP first loses the
1PPS signal after it had aquired it. The DSP will try to re-sync
to the 1PPS signal while this state is active. If the DSP cannot
re-sync to the 1PPS after x? period of time, the DSP will report a
RE_SYNC_1PPS_FAILURE.
1PSS INIT SYNC ALARM
This state is inactive at reset. Once the INIT_SYNC_FAILURE
message is detected from the DSP, this state should be set to
active. After being set to active, if RE_SYNC, RE_SEARCH,
TRACKING, or READY(TO SIMULCAST) states are reported by the DSP,
this state should be set to inactive.
This state will only become active when the DSP fails to sync to
the 1PPS signal after reset or power up. As soon as the 1PPS signal
is acquired, this alarm will clear.
1PPS INIT SRCH ALARM
This state is inactive at reset. Once the
INIT_SEARCH_1PPS_FAILURE message is detected from the DSP, this
state should be set to active. After being set to active, if
RE_SYNC, RE_SEARCH, INIT_SYNC, or READY states are reported by the
DSP, this state should be set to inactive.
This state will only become active when the DSP cannot detect the
physical presence of the 1PPS signal after a reset or power up.
If any of the other alarms or the READY state is reported by the
DSP, this alarm will be inactive.
1PSS RT SYNC ALARM
This state is inactive at reset. Once the RE_SYNC_1PPS_FAILURE
message is detected from the DSP, this state should be set to
active. After being set to active, if any of the other 5 states
are reported by the DSP, this state should be set to inactive.
This state will indicate a Run-Time (RT) failure of the 1PPS
signal. Once the 1PPS signal has been successfully acquired, any
subsequent loss of the 1PPS signal will trigger a TRACKING alarm. At
this point, the DSP will attempt to re-sync to the 1PPS signal. If
that process fails, this alarm state will be activated. If TRACKING
or READY are reported by the DSP, this alarm state will be inactive.
1PPS RT SRCH ALARM
This state is inactive at reset. Once a RE_SEARCH_1PPS_FAILURE
message is detected from the DSP, this state should be set to
active. If any of the other 5 ALARM states are reported by the
DSP, this state should be set to inactive.
This state will indicate a Run-Time (RT) failure of the 1PPS
signal. This state will only become active when the DSP cannot
detect the physical presence of the 1PPS signal after it has been
successfully acquired (READY). If RE_SYNCH, TRACKING, or READY
is reported by the DSP, this alarm will be inactive.
1PPS READY
This state is inactive at reset. Once a READY_TO_SIMULCAST
message is detected from the DSP, this state should be set to
active. If any of the other 5 states are reported by the DSP,
this state should be set to inactive.
This state will indicate if the station has locked onto the 1PPS
signal. This state will only become active when the DSP reports
READY_TO_SIMULCAST. If any of the other states are reported by
the DSP, this alarm will be inactive.
ACC CODE TBL XX (1-16)
This state indicates the currently active ACC TABLE command.
ACC DISABLED
When this state is active, remote controlled station keyups are
halted. Local control of the station is operational via the front
panel while in this mode. External requests are ignored.
ANLG LINK ALARM
This state applies only to stations which are part of an ASTRO system.
It will become active whenever the analog link to another ASTRO
infrastructure device becomes active. This state will only become
active when the link type is V.24 Hybrid.
ASTRO LINE PTT
The station is keyed and is gating ASTRO from the wireline to
the transmitter.
ASTRO RPTR PTT
The station is keyed and is gating ASTRO from the receive ASTRO
audio to the transmitter.
BATTERY REVERT
The station has lost AC power and is now operating exclusively from
the battery.
BOOSTER FAIL
The station has detected that there is no Booster Amp installed.
BTRY OVR ALARM
The power supply has detected that the battery is charged above the
normal setting.
CLR LINE PTT
The station is keyed and is gating analog audio from the wireline to
the transmitter.
CLR RPTR PTT
The station is keyed and is gating analog audio from the receiver
to the transmitter.
COLD RESET
Station has just been powered up and completed the reset sequence.
The status report is cleared.
CONTROL CHN
Station is operating as a trunked control channel.
CUR CHN XX (1-16)
This is the current channel of the station.
DATA PTT
The station is keyed and is transmitting data.
DGTL LINK ALARM
This state applies only to stations which are part of an ASTRO system.
It will become active whenever the digital link to another ASTRO
infrastructure device becomes active. This state will become active
for any type of link: V.24 Hybrid, V.24 only, or Modem.
EVENT FLAG XX (1-16)
Used to coordinate activities. Set and Cleared from SET EVENT FLAG
and CLR EVENT FLAG XX commands. This state is evaluated as TRUE
when the EVENT FLAG is set; FALSE when the EVENT FLAG is cleared.
EXCITER ALARM
An eprom checksum or communication failure has occurred on the
Exciter module.
EXT WM FWD ALM
The station has detected a forward output power problem as reported by
the external wattmeter. This alarm is generated if the output power
is below 50% of expected power output.
This alarm does not apply to Quantro Stations.
EXT WM REFL ALM
The station has detected a reflected output power problem as reported
by the external wattmeter. This alarm is generated if the output
power is above 25% of expected power output.
This alarm does not apply to Quantro Stations.
FAILSOFT
Trunked Station has lost communication with the 6809 Central and is
in Failsoft Mode.
FWD PWR ALARM
The PA has detected a problem with the output power. This alarm is
generated if the output power is below 50% of expected power output.
This alarm does not apply to Conventional Quantro Stations.
HLGT DETECT
Station has detected High Level Guard Tone.
INPUT XX (1-7,9 for BASIC or 1-12 for ENHANCED)
Specifies one of the available inputs. This state is evaluated as
TRUE when the input level matches the corresponding Active Level
in the WILDCARD INPUT CONFIGURATION SCREEN.
INTERCOM
When Intercom is active, the station control module treats
a Local PTT as an Intercom PTT. Local audio is gated to the
Wireline when a Local PTT is generated, and the PA is not keyed.
LINE PTT
The modulated audio source is the inbound TX Wireline port, line 1,
when Line PTT is active. The RSS has a field on the Channel
Information screen to control the maximum amount of time this
state can be active.
LLGT DETECT
Station has detected Low Level Guard Tone.
LOCAL PTT
The PTT type is Local. The modulated audio source is from the
local (microphone) input on the front of the station. The RSS
has a field on the Channel Information screen to control the
maximum amount of time this state can be active.
MAIN
When the MAIN state is true the station is operating in Main
mode. When the MAIN state is false, the station is operating
in Standby mode.
MCS USER XX (1-13)
MCS User XX becomes true when the corresponding PL,DPL or NAC is being received.
When the station type is set to ANALOG and Multi Coded Squelch is set to Multi-PL, XX
represents the slot number which matches the PL or DPL currently being detected by the
receiver.
When the station type is set to ASTRO CAI and Multi Coded Squelch is set to Multi-NAC,
XX represents the slot number which matches the ASTRO NAC (Network Access Code)
currently being detected by the receiver.
MRTI PTT
The station is keyed and is gating Phone Patch audio to the transmitter.
OUTPUT XX (1,2,3,7 for BASIC or 1-10 for ENHANCED)
Specifies one of the available outputs. This state is evaluated as
TRUE when the output level matches the corresponding Active Level
in the WILDCARD OUTPUT CONFIGURATION SCREEN.
PA ALARM
A failure has occurred on the PA module.
PIB ALARM
A failure has occurred on the Phone Interconnect Board.
PWR SPLY ALARM
A failure has occurred on the Power Supply module.
This alarm does not apply to Quantro Stations.
REFL PWR ALARM
The PA has detected a problem with the output power and generates
this alarm if the reflected power is above 25% of the expected power
output.
This alarm does not apply to Conventional Quantro Stations.
RPTR PTT
The station is keyed and gating Rx audio to the transmitter.
Repeater PTT is also active during the drop out delay of the
station. The RSS has a field on the channel screen to control
the maximum amount of time this state can be active.
RPTR QUAL MET
All qualifications have been satisfied to repeat the receive audio.
These qualifiers can be found on the RSS Channel Information screen.
RPTR SET UP
When this state is true, the station is capable of repeating.
When it is false, the repeater is knocked down and will not repeat.
RX ANALOG
Station is receiving analog audio.
RX1 ALARM
A failure has occurred on the receiver module.
The Rx Fail LED blinks once per second.
RX ASTRO ID
Receiver has detected a valid 12 bit ASTRO network ID on the
current channel.
RX CAR DETECT
The receiver module has detected the carrier frequency for the
current channel.
RX CD DETECT
The receiver module has detected the presence of SECURENET (12 Kbit)
data.
RX INHIBITED
Rx 1 is disabled.
RX1 LOCK
Indicates that the receiver module's VCO is locked onto the frequency
programmed for the current channel.
RX PL DETECT
The receiver has detected the presence of a PL, DPL or Connect tone.
RX PL DISABLED
The Rx PL qualifier is removed from the list of receive activation
qualifiers.
RX QUAL MET
All receiver qualifications have been met to unsquelch and pass
receiver audio. The analog receive activation qualifiers can be
found on the RSS Channel Information screen.
SAM ALARM
SAM (Station Access Module) has failed. The Rx fail LED blinks
twice per second.
SAM COMMAND XX (0-15)
Detect bits 4-7 on the SPI bus from the Rx2 slot, the SAM module, and
provide a decimal equivalent (0-15). SAM COMMAND 0 is the SAM reset
state and should only be used to indicate that SAM has reset. Bit 7
is the most significant bit and bit 4 is the least significant bit in
the SAM COMMAND nybble.
SAM Wildcard SAM Wildcard Corresponding
Output Output SAM COMMAND
ADDRESS TARG BIT SPI bus bit
----------- ------------ -------------
004C 4 4
004C 5 5
004E 3 6
004E 4 7
This activity needs to be coordinated with programming the SAM module
using the SAM RSS.
SCAN SUSPENDED
The scanning process has been suspended in the station.
SCANNING RX
The scanning process is active in the station.
SECUR LINE PTT
Station is keyed and is gating SECURENET to the transmitter from
the Wireline Line 1.
SECUR RPTR PTT
Station is keyed and is gating SECURENET to the Transmitter.
STN ALARM
If any one of the following alarms is active, then STN ALARM
will be active. All of these alarms must be inactive (not have
occurred) for STN ALARM to be inactive.
The alarms included are:
EXCITER ALARM, FWD PWR ALARM, PA ALARM, PWR SPLY ALARM,
REFL PWR ALARM, RX1 ALARM AND WL ALARM.
BTRY OVR ALARM, PIB ALARM, SAM ALARM AND UHSO ALARM are also
included when those options are installed.
STN KEYED
The PA is keyed up at full power. The PA FULL led is on.
TIMER DONE (1-10)
Timer (1-10) has expired. Timers are set using the START TIMER (1-10)
command.
TRC TONE XX (1-17 for release R14.06.00 and later, 1-15 otherwise)
Station has detected one of the available TRC tones.
TX INHIBITED
Station is inhibited from keying the PA.
TX LOCK
Indicates that the Exciter module's VCO is locked onto the frequency
programmed for the current channel.
TX PL DISABLED
The station transmits analog only without PL or DPL.
TX WL1 CD DET
Wireline input 1 has detected 12kbit SECURENET.
UHSO ALARM
A failure has occurred on the UHSO module. The Rx fail LED will
blink twice per second.
WARM RESET
Station has just been reset, but power has not been lost.
The status report is preserved.
WL ALARM
A failure has occurred on the WL module.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="wc_state_value_help"><content>WILDCARD STATE VALUE HELP
Certain states require values. Enter the value desired for the state
in the previous field.
Valid values for states are:
STATE RANGE
========================
CUR CHN 1-16
MCS USER 1-13
SAM COMMAND 0-15
TRC TONE 1-17 (1-15 for releases older than R14.06.00)
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="wc_condition_help"><content>WILDCARD CONDITION HELP
The condition field logically connects station states. The first two
states are logically evaluated and that result is then logically
evaluated with the third state.
It is a scrollable entry field with the choices of AND, OR, AND NOT, and
OR NOT. The evaluation of the States and Conditions is done left to right
without parentheses.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="wc_command_help"><content>WILDCARD ACTION/INACTION TABLE HELP
These commands will be queued up for execution in a sequential order by
the station whenever the related state condition changes state.
Commands in ACTION tables are executed sequentially when the state
changes from false to true, commands in INACTION tables are executed
sequentially when the state changes from true to false.
Each table is filled with commands from the COMMANDS List. You may use the
up/down arrows keys, or click on the down arrow to scroll the list. Alternately
you may type the first letter of the command to bring you to the first
command with that letter - subsequent typing of that letter will bring
you to the next command in the list that begins with that letter. Pressing
enter will select the highlighted command and close the choice list.
Any or all of these command entries may be left blank but they will be
compressed together when stored in the codeplug.
This table lists the WildCard commands, the system types
they were intended for and whether they are included in the BASIC
or ENHANCED command set. Every command marked BASIC is also included
in the ENHANCED list of commands.
WARNING: Make sure all CHN commands reference valid channel numbers and
all ACC TBL commands reference valid Access Code Tables. If an
undefined channel number or Access Code Table is referenced from
the WildCard Action/Inaction table, inconsistent station
operation may result.
NOTE: ASTRO denotes ASTRO/ANALOG (mixed mode) systems, not ASTRO only<cr>
systems.
NOTE: ASTRX denotes ASTRO-TAC RECEIVER.
WILDCARD COMMANDS |ASTRO|| CONV| 6809| IR |ASTRX|TBAND||BASIC| ENH |
=========================|=====||=====|=====|=====|=====|=====||=====|=====|
ABORT TIMER 1-10 | X || X | X | X | X | X || | X |
ACC TABLE 1-16 | X || X | | | X | X || X | X |
ACC TBL NORM | X || X | | | X | X || X | X |
ALARM NORMAL | X || X | | | X | X || X | X |
ALARM OFF | X || X | | | X | X || X | X |
ALM TONES ON X | || X | | | X | X || X | X |
ALM TONES NORML X | || X | | | X | X || X | |
AUXPL+TX OFF | || X | | | | X || | X |
AUXPL+TX ON | || X | | | | X || | X |
AUXTX-TX OFF | || X | | | | X || | X |
AUXTX-TX ON | || X | | | | X || | X |
CHN (1-16) | X || X | | | X | X || X | X |
CLR EVENT FLAG XX (1-16) | X || X | X | X | X | X || | X |
CLR OUTPUT XX (1,2,3,7) | X || X | X | X | | X || X | X |
CLR OUTPUT XX (1-10) | X || X | X | X | | X || | X |
CLR SAM SPI X (3-5) | X || X | | | | || | X |
DEKEY FROM WB | || X | X | | | || X | X |
DEKEY FROM WL | || X | | | | X || X | X |
DEKEY PL | || X | | | | X || | X |
DPLX DISABLE | || | X | | | || X | X |
DPLX ENABLE | || | X | | | || X | X |
EXT CD DETECT | || X | X | X | X | || X | X |
EXT CD UNDETEC | || X | X | X | X | || X | X |
FAILSOFT NORM | || | X | | | || X | X |
FAILSOFT OFF | || | X | | | || X | X |
FAILSOFT ON | || | X | | | || X | X |
HLGT ON XXXX(1-1000 msec)| || X | | | X | X || | X |
KEY FROM WB | || X | X | | | || X | X |
KEY FROM WL | || X | | | X | X || X | X |
KEY WITH PL | || X | | | | X || | X |
LLGT OFF | || X | | | X | X || | X |
LLGT ON | || X | | | X | X || | X |
MAIN | || | | | X | || | X |
MRTI DISABLE | X || X | | | | X || | X |
MRTI ENABLE | X || X | | | | X || | X |
MUTE TX | || X | | | | X || | X |
NULL | X || X | X | X | X | X || X | X |
RESET | X || X | X | X | X | X || X | X |
RF TONE OFF | || X | | | | X || | X |
RF TONE ON XXXX (Hz) | || X | | | | X || | X |
RPTR KNOCKDOWN | X || X | | | | X || X | X |
RPTR QUAL FORCE | || X | | | | X || | X |
RPTR QUAL NORM | X || X | | | | X || | X |
RPTR SETUP | X || X | | | | X || X | X |
RSTR SVD CHN | X || X | | | X | X || X | X |
RX ENABLE | X || X | | | X | X || | X |
RX INHIBIT | X || X | | | X | X || | X |
RX WL ENABLE | || X | | | X | X || X | X |
RX WL INHIBIT | || X | | | X | X || X | X |
RX WL MUTE | || X | | | X | X || X | X |
RX PL DISABLE | || X | | | X | X || X | X |
RX PL ENABLE | || X | | | X | X || X | X |
RX QUAL FORCE | || X | | | X | X || X | X |
RX QUAL NORM | || X | | | X | X || X | X |
RX1+AUXRX OFF | || X | | | | X || | X |
RX1+AUXRX ON | || X | | | | X || | X |
RX1-AUXRX OFF | || X | | | | X || | X |
RX1-AUXRX ON | || X | | | | X || | X |
RXDSC-AUXRX OFF | || X | | | | X || | X |
RXDSC-AUXRX ON | || X | | | | X || | X |
SAVE CUR CHN | X || X | | | | X || X | X |
SCAN OFF | || X | | | X | || X | X |
SCAN ON | || X | | | X | || X | X |
SCAN RESUME | || X | | | X | || X | X |
SCAN SUSPEND | || X | | | X | || X | X |
SEL ALM DISABL | || X | | | X | X || X | X |
SEL ALM ENABLE | || X | | | X | X || X | X |
SET EVENT FLAG XX (1-16) | X || X | | X | X | X || | X |
SET OUTPUT xx (1,2,3,7) | X || X | X | X | X | X || X | X |
SET OUTPUT xx (1-10) | X || X | X | X | | X || | X |
SET SAM SPI X (3-5) | X || X | | | | || | X |
ST DISABLE | || X | | | X | X || | X |
ST ENABLE | || X | | | X | X || | X |
STANDBY | || X | | | X | || | X |
START TIMER 1-10 | X || X | | X | X | X || | X |
(1-65535msec) | || | | | X | || | |
TRC FT XX (1-17) | || X | | | | X || | X |
TRUNK RPT OFF | || | X | | | || X | X |
TRUNK RPT ON | || | X | | | || X | X |
TSTAT ACTIVE | X || | X | | | || X | X |
TSTAT NON-ACTIV | X || | X | | | || X | X |
TSTAT NORM | X || | X | | | || X | X |
TX ENABLE | X || X | X | X | | X || X | X |
TX INHIBIT | X || X | X | X | | X || X | X |
TX PL DISABLE | || X | | | | X || X | X |
TX PL ENABLE | || X | | | | X || X | X |
UNMUTE TX | || X | | | | X || | X |
WAIT XXXX (1-1000 msec) | X || X | X | X | X | X || X | X |
WL TONE OFF | || X | | | X | X || | X |
WL TONE ON (300-3500 Hz) | || X | | | X | X || | X |
WL1+AUXRX OFF | || X | | | | X || | X |
WL1+AUXRX ON | || X | | | | X || | X |
WL1+WL2 OFF | || X | | | | X || | X |
WL1+WL2 ON | || X | | | | X || | X |
WL1-AUXRX OFF | || X | | | | X || | X |
WL1-AUXRX ON | || X | | | | X || | X |
WL1-WL2 OFF | || X | | | | X || | X |
WL1-WL2 ON | || X | | | | X || | X |
WL3+TX OFF | || X | | | | X || | X |
WL3+TX ON | || X | | | | X || | X |
WL3+WL2 OFF | || X | | | | X || | X |
WL3+WL2 ON | || X | | | | X || | X |
WL3-TX OFF | || X | | | | X || | X |
WL3-TX ON | || X | | | | X || | X |
WL3-WL2 OFF | || X | | | | X || | X |
WL3-WL2 ON | || X | | | | X || | X |
Below is a brief description of each command.
ABORT TIMER XX (1-10)
The ABORT TIMER command will stop the timer process that was initiated
by the START TIMER XX command, and any commands in the TIMER DONE XX
condition table will not be executed.
ACC TABLE XX (1-16)
This command changes the Access Code Table to xx that the channel
is using without changing the channel number. The Access Code Table
contains the PL/DPL, and the ASTRO Access Codes.
ACC TABLE NORM
This command changes the Access Code Table to the table that the
codeplug has defined for the current channel without changing the
channel number. The Access Code Table contains the PL/DPL, and the
ASTRO Access Codes.
ALARM NORMAL
This command applies to the alarm tones that are generated after an
alarm condition is declared. These tones are sent out either over the
RF and/or over the wireline depending on the codeplug configuration.
The alarm tones are enabled, only if they are enabled in the codeplug,
and stay enabled until an Alarm Off command is executed. After a
station resets, the alarms are either enabled or disabled depending
on the conditions defined in the codeplug.
ALARM OFF
The alarm tones that are generated by the station when an alarm occurs
are disabled and stay disabled until an Alarm Enable Command is
executed. After a station reset, the alarms are either enabled or
disabled depending on the conditions defined in the codeplug.
ALM TONES ON X
This command forces the generation of the alarm tones attached to the alarm
condition specified by X below. The alarm tones are generated as if
the alarm had actually occurred. The alarm tones are generated provided
that the alarm tones have been enabled on the Channel Information screen.
The alarm tone condition stays active until a SET ALM TONES OFF X
or a SEL ALM DISABLE command is executed.
X = 1 = AC failure = Generates 1 alarm beep
X = 2 = PA failure = Generates 2 alarm beeps
X = 3 = Tx or RX Synthesizer failure = Generates 3 alarm beeps
X = 4 = Battery Overvoltage = Generates 4 alarm beeps
ALM TONES NORML X
This command removes the forcing function created by the SET ALM TONES ON X
command and returns the control of the generation of the alarm tones to
a normal condition, that is, the alarm tones will only be generated when
an actual alarm occurs.
X = 1 = AC failure alarm determination normal
X = 2 = PA failure alarm determination normal
X = 3 = Tx or Rx Synthesizer failure alarm determination normal
X = 4 = Battery Overvoltage failure alarm determination normal
AUXPL+TX OFF
The station stops mixing AUX PL AUDIO from the AUX TX AUDIO port
with any other signals currently present at the transmitter.
AUXPL+TX ON
The station mixes AUX PL AUDIO from the AUX TX AUDIO port with
any other signals currently present at the transmitter. The
allowable frequency range for AUX PL AUDIO is 1.0Hz - 300.0Hz.
The required signal level for AUX PL AUDIO into the AUX TX AUDIO
port is -10dbm.
AUXTX-TX OFF
The station stops routing AUX TX AUDIO from the AUX TX AUDIO port to
the transmitter.
AUXTX-TX ON
The station routes AUX TX AUDIO from the AUX TX AUDIO port to the
transmitter.
CHN XX (1-16)
The station changes the current channel and set it to the number
described by xx. The RSS will allow channel numbers 1-16.
Undefined channel numbers received through ASTRO or WildCard commands
will be ignored and a channel change will not be executed.
CLR EVENT FLAG XX (1-16)
The station clears the specified one of sixteen event flags.
CLR OUTPUT XX (1,2,3,7 for BASIC or 1-10 for ENHANCED)
The station clears the requested output line.
CLR SAM SPI X (3-5)
The station clears the selected bit on the SPI bus for the second
receiver, usually occupied by the SAM module. Bits 3-5 correspond
to SAM Wildcard Inputs 11-13, respectively.
This activity needs to be coordinated with programming the SAM
module using the SAM RSS.
DEKEY FROM WB
Dekey the transmitter and stop the gating of the Wideband Tx audio to
the transmitter from the WIDEBAND TX PORT.
DEKEY FROM WL
Dekey the transmitter and stop the gating of the Tx wireline audio
to the transmitter.
DEKEY PL
Dekey the transmitter and stop the gating of only PL to the transmitter.
DPLX DISABLE
This command is used to terminate the duplex mode established with
the Duplex Enable command. After this command is executed, default
repeat routing is performed.
This command is valid for 6809 Trunked systems without a comparator.
DPLX ENABLE
When this command is executed, qualified receive audio is not gated
to the transmitter. WL Tx audio becomes gated instead to the
transmitter. All other trunking functions are not affected. Out of
reset, the station allows gating of qualified receive audio to the
transmitter.
This command is valid for 6809 Trunked systems without a comparator.
EXT CD DETECT
The station immediately assumes incoming signal is SECURENET.
Without using this command, the station waits for the code detect
algorithm and relies on the output of the algorithm to drive its
internal SECURENET functions.
EXT CD UNDETEC
The station immediately assumes incoming signal is not SECURENET.
After this command is received, the station's wireline code detect
algorithm, which normally declares whether or not the Tx wireline
port has 12 kbps on it, is reactivated.
FAILSOFT NORM
The station goes into Failsoft mode if communication from the
central is lost and the station has failsoft enabled.
FAILSOFT OFF
The station will not go into Failsoft mode if the trunked station
loses communication with the central.
FAILSOFT ON
The station is forced into Failsoft mode even if the station has
failsoft disabled.
HLGT ON xxxx (msec) (1 - 1000)
The station generates HLGT for the number of milliseconds requested.
Minimum resolution is 10 msec.
All times will be rounded to the NEXT 10 millisecond interval. The
frequency of HLGT is specified in the Wireline Configuration Screen
in the RSS.
Every HLGT ON XXXX must be followed by either a LLGT ON Command or
a Function Tone Command. HLGT ON XXXX by itself is an invalid TRC
sequence.
KEY FROM WB
The station keys up the transmitter and route GEN TX DATA to the
transmitter, as long as the station is not access disabled.
The user must provide an external splatter filter and level/deviation
control for this input.
The station will expect -10 dBm and provide 60% of max deviation.
This command is only valid for Simulcast systems.
KEY FROM WL
The station keys up the transmitter if not access disabled, and
gates the audio from the Tx Wireline port to the transmitter.
Audio is gated from the wireline to the transmitter and it is passed
through the same filters which is are used for normal station operation.
KEY WITH PL
Key only with PL and only gate PL to the transmitter, audio is muted.
LLGT OFF
The station terminates the generation of LLGT to WL 2.
LLGT ON
The station generates LLGT to WL 2.
MAIN
In a Main/Standby configuration, the station becomes the MAIN station.
Upon reset, in a Main/Standby configuration, the station checks the
WildCard tables to see if it's supposed to startup in the MAIN or
STANDBY mode.
MRTI DISABLE
Disables the phone patch.
MRTI ENABLE
Enables the phone patch.
MUTE TX
The station mutes the analog audio being transmitted. This command
does not mute PL.
NULL
This command, as the name describes, does nothing. It is used to fill
out unused table entries where necessary.
RESET
An unconditional station reset is initiated.
RF TONE OFF
The station ceases generating a tone to the Exciter at the level
specified for average voice. Alarm tones are then unmuted if the
alarm tones have been enabled. This command also dekeys the station.
RF TONE ON XXXX (Hz)
The station generates a xxxx Hz tone to the Exciter at the level
specified for average voice. Alarm tones are muted under this condition.
This command also keys the station.
Range to use for RF TONE ON is 300 - 3000.
Note: The RF TONE ON command is generated with PL, if enabled in the
Access Code Table. To disable PL use the TX PL DISABLE command.
RPTR KNOCKDOWN
When this command is received, the repeat function is not allowed to
occur. If station type is set to BASE, this command is ignored.
RPTR QUAL FORCE
The station assumes that all repeater qualifiers have been met.
NOTE: In an ASTRO Station with Wild Card Enabled, this command will
not enable repeat for analog calls.
RPTR QUAL NORM
The station reverts to the codeplug specified qualifiers for
repeater activity.
RPTR SETUP
When this command is received the repeat function is allowed to occur
only if station type is not set to BASE. The repeat function occurs
when the conditions attached to the parameters specified in the
Repeater Activation Field are met. When the parameters are met, the
transmitter is keyed up and processed receive audio is gated to the
transmitter. The station starts out of reset with repeater set
up when the station is defined as a REPEATER in the RSS Station
Configuration Screen.
RSTR SVD CHN
The station changes channels to the channel saved by the SAVE CUR CHN
command. This command must be preceded by a SAVE CUR CHN command.
RX ENABLE
The station's receiver function is enabled. This command normally
follows an RX INHIBIT command since after a reset, the station
enables the receiver.
RX INHIBIT
The station's receiver is turned off and will not generate any
qualified receive or repeat activity. After a reset, the station
sets the receiver to enable.
RX WL ENABLE
The station's receive audio is enabled to be sent to the wireline.
This is the normal state of the station when it comes out of reset
provided that there is a wireline module present.
RX WL INHIBIT
The station's receive audio is inhibited from being sent to the
wireline. In the typical case, the Rx wireline would just be muted.
If the station has status tone enabled, then the Rx wireline would have
status tone on it.
RX WL MUTE
The station's receive wireline is totally muted. If the station has
status tone enabled, then status tone is also muted. Alarms are also
muted under this condition. Any possible audio that could be sent down
the wireline is muted.
RX1 PL DISABLE
This command disables the station from using the qualifiers specified
by the RSS to qualify receive audio. After this command is received,
the station will only use carrier squelch as the qualifier for receive
audio. PL in this command is the same as DPL.
Note: This command cannot be used when the station is scanning as
execution of this command will interrupt the station's scanning
sequence. Make sure scanning is stopped before using this command.
RX1 PL ENABLE
Provided that a valid PL or DPL or connect tone has been defined for
the currently active channel, this command will enable the station to
use the qualifiers specified in the RSS Channel Screen RX Activation
field to initiate station tasks driven by the reception of the received
audio signal.
RX1 QUAL FORCE
The station assumes that all receiver qualifiers have been met.
Note: This command cannot be used when the station is scanning as
execution of this command will interrupt the station's scanning
sequence. Make sure scanning is stopped before using this command.
RX1 QUAL NORM
The station reverts to the receiver qualifiers as they are programmed
in the Channel Info Screen.
RX1+AUXRX OFF
The station stops mixing filtered receive audio with any other
signals present at the AUX RX AUDIO port.
RX1+AUXRX ON
The station mixes filtered receive with any other signals present at
the AUX RX AUDIO port.
RX1-AUXRX OFF
The station stops routing filtered receive audio to the AUX RX AUDIO
port.
RX1-AUXRX ON
The station routes filtered receive audio to the AUX RX AUDIO port.
RXDSC-AUXRX OFF
The station stops routing discriminator audio to the AUX RX AUDIO port.
RXDSC-AUXRX ON
The station routes discriminator audio to the AUX RX AUDIO port.
SAVE CUR CHN
The current channel number is stored in the station's memory.
Station operation on this channel can be restored by using
the RSTR SVD CHN command.
SCAN OFF
Turns the scanning receiver process off and the stations returns
to the CURRENT channel.
SCAN ON
Turns the scanning receiver process on.
SCAN RESUME
If the scanning function has been suspended by the SCAN SUSPEND
command and the scanning function is on, the station will restart
the scan function on the SCAN channel. SCAN RESUME restarts the
scan timers.
SCAN SUSPEND
If the scanning function is on, the station will stop scanning and
place the station on the CURRENT channel. If the scanning function
is off, the station will ignore this command.
SEL ALM DISABL
This command applies to the alarm tones that are generated after an
alarm condition is declared. These tones are sent out either over
the air or over the wireline. Upon execution of this command, the
alarm tones are disabled and stay disabled until a different alarm
occurs. This command allows a console operator to turn off alarm tones
because they may be deemed a nuisance since the initial alarm is known.
However, new alarms will be reported. After a station reset, the alarms
are either enabled or disabled depending on the conditions defined in
the codeplug.
SEL ALM ENABLE
This command applies to the alarm tones that are generated after an
alarm condition is declared. These tones are sent out either over the
RF or over the wireline. Upon execution of this command, alarm tones
are enabled and stay enabled. After a station reset , the alarms are
either enabled or disabled depending on the conditions defined in
the codeplug.
This command is used to enable alarms which had been previously
disabled by a Selective Alarm Disable command. The SEL ALM ENABLE command
applies to the alarm tones that are generated after an alarm condition
occurs. These tones are sent out either over the RF or over the wireline.
Upon execution of this command, alarm tones are enabled and stay enabled.
After a station reset, the alarms are either enabled or disabled depending
on the conditions defined in the Channel Information screen.
The console operator may want to periodically check to see if an
alarm condition is still active. The operator may have previously shut
off the alarms and through the use of this command will know, by hearing
the tones, if the alarm(s) are still there.
SET EVENT FLAG XX (1-16)
The station sets the specified event flag.
SET OUTPUT XX
The station sets the requested output line.
Below is a table describing the HI and LO settings.
Active
Level | Transistor |Relay/Optocoupler
======|============|=================
HI | +5V | OPEN
------|------------|-----------------
LO | GROUND | CLOSED
When you lose power to the station, the relays and the transistors
will be open regardless of the WildCard Settings.
SET SAM SPI X (3-5)
The station sets the selected bit on the SPI bus for the second
receiver, usually occupied by the SAM module. Bits 3-5 correspond
to SAM Wildcard Inputs 11-13, respectively.
This activity needs to be coordinated with programming the SAM
module using the SAM RSS.
ST DISABLE
This command disables Status Tone until a ST ENABLE or a WL TONE OFF
command is executed.
This command is valid when Status Tone is ENABLED in the codeplug
via the WIRELINE CONFIGURATION SCREEN.
ST ENABLE
This command enables Status Tone.
This command is valid when Status Tone is ENABLED in the codeplug
via the WIRELINE CONFIGURATION SCREEN.
STANDBY
In a Main/Standby configuration, the station becomes the STANDBY
station. Upon reset, in a Main/Standby configuration, the station
checks the WildCard tables to see if it's supposed to startup in the
MAIN or STANDBY mode.
START TIMER(1-10) XXXXX (msec)
This command is used to start a timer for xxxxx milliseconds. When the
specified time has expired the TIMER DONE may be used as a station
state to execute additional commands. The ABORT TIMER command will
stop the timer process and the commands in the TIMER DONE X condition
table will not be executed.
TRC FT XX (1-17 for release R14.06.00 and later, 1-15 otherwise)
The station generate the requested
TRC function tone. Function Tones :
1 - 2050 Hz 7 - 1450 Hz 13 - 850 Hz
2 - 1950 Hz 8 - 1350 Hz 14 - 750 Hz
3 - 1850 Hz 9 - 1250 Hz 15 - 650 Hz
4 - 1750 Hz 10 - 1150 Hz 16 - 550 Hz
5 - 1650 Hz 11 - 1050 Hz 17 - 450 Hz
6 - 1550 Hz 12 - 950 Hz
If HLGT matches any function tone, that function tone should not be
used.
TRUNK RPT OFF
This command complements the Trunking in Cabinet Repeat command
TRUNK RPT ON.
TRUNK RPT ON
The station gates qualified receive audio, analog or SECURENET, instead
of Tx wireline audio to the transmitter. Out of reset, The station
normally gates Tx wireline audio to the transmitter for this
configuration since it is connected to a comparator.
TSTAT ACTIVE, NON-ACTIV, AND NORM
Normal operation of the Quantar Software with respect to the assertion
of TSTAT:
1 - TSTAT is set to ACTIVE when a call is assigned and there are no
station failures. TSTAT is set to ACTIVE when there are station
failures and a call is not assigned.
2 - TSTAT is set to NON-ACTIV when there are no station failures and a
call is not assigned. TSTAT is set to NON-ACTIV when a call is
assigned and there are station failures.
3 - Normal operation requires that TSTAT be ACTIVE during a call and
INACTIVE when a call is not assigned. TSTAT is also required to be
active when the central controller performs a transmitter test by
keying up the station.
4 - The central controller takes the station out of service when:
a)TSTAT is ACTIVE and a call is not assigned, or
b)at the end of an assigned call and TSTAT is NON-ACTIV.
TX ENABLE
This command enables the station to key the transmitter. It is normally
used after a Tx Inhibit command since the station normally comes out of
reset with the ability to key the transmitter enabled.
TX INHIBIT
This command inhibits the station from keying the transmitter.
TX PL DISABLE
When this command is executed, The station stops transmitting PL or DPL
with the Analog audio signal. It is entirely possible that for a
current channel, PL or DPL have not been defined, in this case, this
command does not do anything. But if a channel change occurs and that
channel has PL or DPL defined, then transmitting that PL/DPL is
inhibited until a TX PL ON command is received. This command is
executed whenever it is received. If the command is received in the
middle of a transmission, then the transmission switches from a PL
transmission to a non-PL transmission.
TX PL ENABLE
Provided that a valid PL or DPL has been defined for the currently
active channel, this command will enable the station to attach that
PL or DPL to the analog signal that is to be transmitted. When the
station comes out of reset, the station transmits with PL/DPL on
channels programmed with PL/DPL.
UNMUTE TX
The station allows analog audio to be transmitted.
WAIT XXXX (msec) (max 1000)
This command is used to delay the execution of the next command in the
Action/Inaction table. The station delay the time specified above
before executing the next command in the queue. Minimum time is
10 msec. All times will be rounded to the NEXT 10 millisecond interval
when stored in the codeplug.
NOTE: If a time period longer than 1000 milliseconds is needed,
it is recommended that the START TIMER command (1-10) be
used instead.
WL TONE OFF
The station turns off the tone currently being generated to the receive
wireline as a result of a WL TONE ON command. The receive wireline is
restored to normal service; that is, the operations for receive audio,
status tone, if enabled in the codeplug, and alarms, if enabled in the
codeplug, are then processed normally to the wireline. This is the
normal state of the station when it comes out of reset provided that
there is a wireline module present.
WL TONE ON XXXX (Hz) (300-3500 recommended)
The station generates a xxxx Hz tone to receive wireline at the
level specified for average voice. This is the level specified for
the receive wireline level alignment. If the station has status
tone enabled, then status tone is disabled. Alarms are also muted
under this condition. This function is typically used to test the
phone line to the console.
WL1+AUXRX OFF
The station stops mixing TX WL1 audio with any signal present at
the AUX RX AUDIO port.
WL1+AUXRX ON
The station mixes TX WL1 audio with any signal present at the
AUX RX AUDIO port.
WL1+WL2 OFF
The station stops mixing TX WL1audio with any signal present on RX WL2.
WL1+WL2 ON
The station mixes TX WL1audio with any signal present on RX WL2.
WL1-AUXRX OFF
The station stops routing TX WL1 audio to the AUX RX AUDIO port.
WL1-AUXRX ON
The station routes TX WL1 audio to the AUX RX AUDIO port.
WL1-WL2 OFF
The station stops routing TX WL1 audio to RX WL2.
WL1-WL2 ON
The station routes TX WL1 audio to RX WL2.
WL3+TX OFF
This command will stop mixing the audio from WL3 with signal present
at the transmitter. The Wireline Operation field on the Wireline
Configuration Screen must be set to 6 or 8 WIRE FULL DUPLEX.
WL3+TX ON
The station mixes the audio from WL3 with signal present at the
transmitter. The Wireline Operation field on the Wireline
Configuration Screen must be set to 6 or 8 WIRE FULL DUPLEX.
WL3-TX OFF
The station stops routing the audio from WL3 to the transmitter.
The Wireline Operation field on the Wireline Configuration Screen
must be set to 6 or 8 WIRE FULL DUPLEX.
WL3-TX ON
The station routes the audio from WL3 to the transmitter. The Wireline
Operation field on the Wireline Configuration Screen must be set to
6 or 8 WIRE FULL DUPLEX.
WL3+WL2 OFF
This command will stop mixing the audio from WL3 with signal present
on WL2. The Wireline Operation field on the Wireline Configuration
Screen must be set to 6 or 8 WIRE FULL DUPLEX.
WL3+WL2 ON
The station mixes the audio from WL3 with signal present on WL2. The
Wireline Operation field on the Wireline Configuration Screen must be
set to 6 or 8 WIRE FULL DUPLEX.
WL3-WL2 OFF
The station stops routing the audio from WL3 to WL2. The Wireline
Operation field on the Wireline Configuration Screen must be set to
6 or 8 WIRE FULL DUPLEX.
WL3-WL2 ON
The station routes the audio from WL3 to WL2. The Wireline Operation
field on the Wireline Configuration Screen must be set to 6 or 8
WIRE FULL DUPLEX.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="wc_command_value_help"><content>WILDCARD COMMAND VALUE HELP
Certain commands require values. Enter the value desired for the command
in the previous field.
Valid values for commands are:
COMMAND BASIC WILDCARD ENHANCED WILDCARD
===================================================
ACC TABLE 1-16 1-16
CHN 1-16 1-16
CLR EVENT FLAG 1-16
CLR OUTPUT 1,2,3,7 1-10
CLR SAM SPI 3-5
HLGT ON 1-1000 msec
RF TONE ON 1-65534 Hz(use 300-3000)
SET EVENT FLAG 1-16
SET OUTPUT 1,2,3,7 1-10
SET SAM SPI 3-5
START TIMER 1-10 1-65534 msec 1-65534 msec
TRC FT 1-17 (1-15 for releases older than R14.06.00)
WAIT 1-1000 msec 1-1000 msec
WL TONE ON 1-65534 Hz
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="scan_list_help"><content>SCAN LIST SCREEN HELP
The SCAN LIST screen allows the user to configure parameters that
will affect the scanning operation by the station. Please see the
individual field help for more information.
In order to configure a station with Phone Patch and Scan, 3 timers need
to be configured:
1) SUBSCRIBER PRETIME - Subscribers have the ability to generate carrier
for a programmable amount of time before sending a DTMF tone for Phone
Patch access. As long as this time period is long enough for scanning
to detect the carrier and lock on to the channel, they should be able to
get in to the Phone Patch.
The time will vary based upon the time delays set on Scan configuration
screen, and the number of channels in the station.
2) RESUME SCAN TIMER - The "Resume Scan Timer" on the scan configuration
screen must be long enough to cover the worst case delay between the
time a Phone Patch detects the last phone access request tone, and the
time the Phone Patch returns back with a PTT request. The time has been
measured on Phone Patch to be 2 seconds. Thus the Resume Scan Timer needs
to be at least 2 seconds.
3) SUBSCRIBER HANG TIME - Subscribers have the ability to program the
length of carrier sent after a Phone Patch access tone. Thus the total
of this carrier "hold-in" + Resume Scan Timer time is at least 2
seconds. This parameter can be used to lower the Resume Scan Timer.
NOTE:
For channels set to SC=Carrier and PL/DPL, it is strongly recommended
that channel marking be turned on to avoid constantly scanning a channel
that might have carrier, but an invalid PL/DPL.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="scan_at_reset_help"><content>SCAN ON AT RESET HELP
When this field is set to ENABLED, the station will begin scanning the
selected channels for activity as soon as it comes out of reset.
When this field is set to DISABLED, the scan function will begin whenever
a TRC/DC, wildcard, or ASTRO wireline command is generated.
Default: DISABLED
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="priority_chnl_help"><content>PRIORITY CHANNEL HELP
A priority channel is scanned between all other channels programmed for
scanning. The station can have only one priority channel at any given
time.
When this field is set to NONE, there is no priority channel. A numeric
entry sets the priority channel to that channel number. When this field
is set to FLOAT, the priority channel is determined by the Floating
Priority field.
Default: NONE
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="float_priority_help"><content>FLOATING PRIORITY HELP
When the Priority Channel field is set to FLOAT, the station is
allowed to have a variable priority channel. The priority channel
is then determined by the Floating Priority field.
When Floating Priority is set to RX, the last active receiver channel
is the priority channel.
When Floating Priority is set to TX, the last active transmit channel
is the priority channel.
When Floating Priority is set to RX & TX, the last active transmit
channel or the last active receive channel is the priority channel.
When Floating Priority is set to OFF, then there is no priority channel.
Default: OFF
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="channel_marking_help"><content>CHANNEL MARKING HELP
Channel Marking allows the station to skip channels that have carrier
activity but have been previously determined to have invalid PL/DPL
or an invalid ASTRO NetID. Marking a channel prevents the station from
trying to qualify the audio during the RX Qualify Time.
A channel is unmarked when one of the following occurs: (1) The channel
loses carrier, (2) Valid activity is found on another scan channel, or
(3) Scan is suspended or stopped. After a channel is unmarked, it will
be scanned as usual.
Default: OFF
NOTE:
For channels set to SC=Carrier and PL/DPL or having an ASTRO NAC, it
is strongly recommended that channel marking be turned on to avoid
constantly scanning a channel that might have carrier, but an invalid
PL/DPL or invalid ASTRO NAC.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="scan_delay_help"><content>SCAN DELAY FIELD HELP
This parameter indicates the amount of time that the scan process waits
after losing non-priority channel activity before resuming the scan.
When activity is detected on the non-priority channel while the timer is
in progress, the timer is reset.
Default: 3000 milliseconds
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="pri_scan_delay_help"><content>PRIORITY SCAN DELAY HELP
This parameter indicates the amount of time that the scan process waits
after losing priority channel activity before resuming the scan. When
activity is detected on the priority channel while the timer is in
progress, the timer is reset.
Default: 3000 milliseconds
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="scan_sample_time_help"><content>SCAN SAMPLE TIME HELP
This parameter specifies the time during which a channel is checked
for carrier.
Default: 30 milliseconds
NOTES:
Securenet Stations:
This parameter specifies the time during which a channel is checked
for Securenet audio. When the station is configured for Securenet, the
Scan Sample time must be at least 90 milliseconds.
Astro Stations:
To enhance the probability of detecting Astro voice frames at RF levels
below the squelch setting, the sample time should be set to 200
milliseconds. The station can decode ASTRO audio without detecting
carrier, and 200 milliseconds is the worst case time that the station
could decode the frame sync and NAC. However, if the squelch setting
is aligned at sensitivity (5% Bit Error Rate), the sample time can be
configured as low as 30 milliseconds.
ASTRO-Only Stations:
When a sample time less than 200 milliseconds is configured, the squelch
setting must be aligned to improve the probability of detecting ASTRO
audio.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="priority_recheck_tm_help"><content>PRIORITY RECHECK TIME HELP
This parameter specifies how often a priority channel is checked
while a non-priority channel is active. The Priority Recheck time
must be greater than the PL/DPL Pre-Detect Time.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="rx_qualify_tm_help"><content>Rx QUALIFY TIMER HELP
This parameter specifies the time allocated to detect PL/DPL, ASTRO
NetID, or Securenet after a carrier is detected.
Default: 250 milliseconds
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="resume_scan_tm_help"><content>RESUME SCAN TIMER HELP
This parameter specifies the time that the station must wait before
scanning when scan is resumed or turned on.
Default: 2000 milliseconds
NOTE:
Console or front panel keyups suspend scan, and termination of transmit
activity resumes scan. Therefore, the station will wait the resume scan
time before scanning after a console keyup ends.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="scan_help"><content>SCAN HELP
When ENABLED, this channel is added to the scan list.
Default: DISABLED
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="tx_slave_help"><content>TX SLAVE HELP
The TX Slave option changes the current station channel when scan activity
is detected. The following are key points concerning the current station
channel: (1) Outbound audio is transmitted on the current channel, (2) The
station reverts to the current channel when scan is suspended or turned off,
and (3) Console channel commands control the current channel.
When the station detects activity on a TX slaved channel, the current
station channel is changed to the scan channel that is receiving
activity. Therefore, outbound audio is transmitted on that channel and
the station will operate on that channel when scan is turned off or
suspended.
When the TX Slave option is disabled, the current channel will not be
changed when receive audio is detected.
The TX Slave option typically applies only to repeater configurations.
Default: DISABLED
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="outbound_link_timer_help"><content>OUTBOUND ANALOG LINK TIMER HELP
In a mixed mode ASTRO system, during analog sessions infrastructure
devices periodically report to one another that an analog call is in
progress.
The outbound analog link timer field is used to program the frequency
of these reports when the devices are linked with ASTRO modems. The
frequency over V.24 Hybrid links is fixed at 500 milliseconds.
The purpose for sending these reports is to provide a link integrity
check during analog calls. If the Analog session ends before the timer
does, the station will check the links in the normal fashion, otherwise
it will specifically check at the timer interval.
Use this field to set the frequency at which the station will report
to its connected device that it is receiving an analog call. The valid
range is 20 to 300 seconds; however, this parameter will be rounded
to the nearest 10 second interval before it is stored in the
codeplug.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="wl_squelch_hlp"><content>WIRELINE SQUELCH, THRESHOLD AND HYSTERISIS HELP
Wireline Squelch is a station function which will mute the analog
wireline transmit analog audio path when the input wireline
level drops below a predetermined threshold. This is needed to
comply with the line regulations for some countries (especially
in Europe). The intent is to inhibit the transmission of low-
level signals in order to prevent cross-talk. The default
setting for Wireline Squelch is DISABLED.
The Squelch Threshold is the level at which wireline transmit
audio will be muted. This value is country dependent. The
Squelch Threshold field is not editable when Wireline squelch is
Disabled. The default value for Squelch Threshold is -50 dBm.
Squelch Hysterisis is used to keep a station from continuously
toggling between muted and unmuted when the input signal is
hovering around the Squelch Threshold. The wireline transmit
audio is muted when the input level drops below the Squelch
Threshold. It is not unmuted until the input level exceeds the
threshold by the Squelch Hysterisis value.
The Squelch Hysterisis value is country dependent. This field
is not editable when Wireline Squelch is Disabled. The default
value for Squelch Hysterisis is 1 dB.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="ref_level_hlp"><content>REFERENCE LEVEL HELP
Enter the desired input level in the field shown on the screen.
This value should correspond to the level of the tone that is
input to the station for alignment. It will yield a 60% transmit
deviation. This value is also used as a reference for Wireline
Squelch alignment and adjustment. The legal range is 0 to -35
dBm. The current level stored in the station is displayed under
"Stored". You can change this value by entering a new value
under "Current" and then performing the alignment.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="rx_discrim_hlp"><content>RX DISCRIMINATOR TYPE HELP
6809 Trunking Systems require that all stations at the same site
match their Rx Discriminator Audio characteristics. This is now
accomplished through the Rx Discriminator Type field setting.
The choices for Rx Discriminator Type are QUANTAR/MICOR or MSF. The
default is QUANTAR/MICOR. At 900 MHz, stations are predominantly
MSF based.
Note: The Micor and MSF stations are incompatible in a 6809 Trunking
configuration as Control Channels. Voice channels do not have this
restriction.
The Rx Discriminator Type field affects the setting of the internal
switched capacitor filter that controls the bandwidth of the Rx Audio
signal that goes to the Input Recovery Board discriminator input.
The bandwidth of the discriminator signal varies depending upon the
RF band, IF bandwidth, and type of station. The Rx Discriminator
Type field should be set according to the following guidelines.
Band Adding a New Quantar or
(MHz) Quantro to a 6809 site with: Rx Discriminator Type
--------------------- ---------------------
800 MHz MSF Control Channel MSF
Micor Control Channel QUANTAR/MICOR
900 MHz MSF Control Channel MSF
Note: For Release 6 and earlier, Rx Discriminator Type cannot be
changed. Release 7 RSS and later will allow the selection to occur,
but Pre-Release 7 Station Firmware will ignore it.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="rx_sel_menu"><content>RECEIVER SELECTION MENU
Button Descriptions:
Help - Displays this screen.
Select Receiver 1 measurements.
Select Receiver 2 measurements.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="wc_rules"><content>
WILDCARD PROGRAMMING RULES
AUDIO ROUTING COMMAND RULES
There are two types of WildCard Audio Routing Commands: Audio Mixing
(adding) and Audio Routing.
Audio Mixing commands are displayed as <source>+<destination>. For
example, WL1+WL2 mixes (or adds) the audio signal input at WL1 with
the signal currently being sent to WL2.
Audio Routing commands are displayed as <source>-<destination>. For
example, RX1-WL4 routes (connects) the signal from RX1 (Receiver
Module 1)to WL4 (Wireline Module Line 4).
The Audio Mixing and Audio Routing commands are provided in ON/OFF
pairs. For example, WL1+WL2 ON and WL1+WL2 OFF comprise the WL1+WL2
ON/OFF pair.
In order to insure proper audio command functionality, the following
rules should be applied when using WildCard audio commands:
- Simultaneous routing and mixing to the same audio destination is
not supported. For example, WL1+WL22 ON and RX1-WL2 ON may not be
active simultaneously, since the "destination" in each command is
WL2. In this example, before you use the RX1-WL2 ON command, you
must first terminate the WL1_WL2 ON command by using the WL1+WL2 OFF
command.
- Simultaneous WL1 and WL3 audio commands are not supported
- Simultaneous AUXPL+TX ON and AUXTX-TX ON commands are not
supported.
MAIN/STANDBY RULES
The first 10 default WildCard tables for stations configured with
Main/Standby as MAIN or STANDBY on the Hardware Configuration Screen
are the Main/Standby WildCard Tables and should not be altered.
These tables will be changed or deleted automatically based on the
Hardware Configuration Screen.
Also, if a station is set as MAIN or STANDBY it is a good idea NOT
to use the following event flags in user-configured tables
as they are used by the MAIN/STANDBY tables:
EVENT FLAG 1,2,3,4,5,6,7
When the Main/Standby stations have a Phone Patch, the Phone Patch should
be DISABLED when the station is Standby and then ENABLED when it becomes
the Main Station.
The Phone Patch enable/disable function is automatically handled in the
default tables for Main/Standby, but if the tables are altered, the MRTI
ENABLE command should appear before the MAIN command and the MRTI DISABLE
command should appear after the STANDBY command.
METHODS OF KEYING FROM THE CONSOLE:
The station provides for three methods of keying up from the console,
TRC, DC or EXT PTT. In all cases the console audio is connected to
Line 1. The three methods are exclusive and cannot be used at the same
time. To key up from the console use either TRC or DC or EXT PTT. Only
one method should be used.
SAM MODULE RULES
In order for the audio to be routed to the SAM module, a special table
must exist in the WildCard tables when both WildCard and SAM are enabled.
If the Analog Rptr Access field on ANY channel is not set to NONE, the
RTE AUDIO - SAM table must be added to the WildCard State/Condition
tables.
If the above condition is true, this is automatically added when the
SET TO DEFAULT button is pressed, however if you make any changes to this
field after your WildCard tables are set, you must add this table
by hand or reset your WildCard tables to Default (and lose any tables
you may have created).
To add this table by hand, press ADD button, then set the new
table to look like this:
Description: RTE AUDIO - SAM
STATE and CONDITION SETTINGS
State Cond State Cond State
WARM RESET OR COLD RESET
==========================================================
ACTION: INACTION:
RXDSC-AUXRX ON NULL
SCANNING RECEIVER RULES
There are two commands that were designed to handle changes in station
operation while maintaining proper control of a station which is scanning.
These commands are SCAN SUSPEND and SCAN RESUME. If an external input
causes the station to change any of its operating modes, then the TRC,
DC or WildCard action table that contains these commands must also include
the SCAN SUSPEND and SCAN RESUME. Scan operation must be stopped, the
change invoked in the station and then SCAN can commence. An example
WILD CARD ACTION is displayed below.
Description: CHANNEL 2 TABLE ? OF ? Jump to Table
STATE and CONDITION SETTINGS
State Cond State Cond State
TRC TONE 3
==========================================================
ACTION: INACTION:
- SCAN SUSPEND -
- CHN 3 -
- SCAN RESUME -
- -
- -
A TRC or DC table would contain the same three commands for a channel
change.
STATUS TONE RULES
If Status Tone is used, TRC ENCODE and Wireline Tones cannot be used.
WIRELINE TONE GENERATION RULES
If Wild Card tables, containing commands which generate wireline
tones, are set up in stations configured for 2-wire wireline
connections, then these tables must also take into account that
the tones must be muted BEFORE an incoming console call. The muting
must be handled in the wild card tables. The WildCard feature will
not automatically mute the WildCard generated tones thus an incoming
call CANNOT be detected.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="motac_hlp"><content>CHANGE/VIEW CODEPLUG MENU HELP
This section allows the user to view and change the comparator's operating
parameters. Some screens may be disabled based on the current hardware
configuration.
button Description:
Help - Recalls this Help Screen.
Change and view configuration parameters which are specific to
a conventional system configuration. This screen is disabled if
the system type field in the Hardware Configuration screen is not
set to CONVENTIONAL.
Change and view configuration parameters which are specific to a
SmartZone system configuration. This screen is disabled if the
system type field in the Hardware Configuration screen is not
set to SMARTZONE.
Change and view configuration parameters which are applied to the
voting algorithm for analog signals. This screen is disabled if the
system type field in the Hardware Configuration screen is set to
CONVENTIONAL and the comparator type field in the Hardware
Configuration screen is set to EXPANDED.
Change and view configuration parameters that are port specific.
The link type, link delay, and output levels are among the
parameters which are present in this section. This screen is disabled
in expanded conventional systems when the chassis number field in
the Hardware Configuration Screen is set to SECONDARY1 through
SECONDARY4. Port Control parameters may only be modified on a PRIMARY
expanded comparator.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_dgen_hlp"><content>CONVENTIONAL SYSTEM PARAMETERS SCREEN HELP
This screen is used to view and modify comparator parameters which are
only applicable to conventional system configurations. Access to this
screen is denied if the system type field in the Hardware Configuration
screen is not set to CONVENTIONAL.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_voice_rpt_hlp"><content>VOICE REPEAT OPERATION HELP
The voice repeat setting controls the routing of subscriber voice signals
by the comparator. When voice repeat is set to enabled, received
subscriber voice signals will be rebroadcast over the air. This allows
all other subscriber users to receive the signal.
When voice repeat is set to disabled, received subscriber voice signals are
sent only to consoles which are connected to the comparator. Hence,
subscriber users will be unable to speak to one another in systems with the
voice repeat feature disabled.
In conventional operation, when the Repeater Set Up and Knockdown
wireline commands are sent from a console/DIU to enable or disable voice
repeat operation, these commands will override the current comparator
RSS setting and will change the voice repeat state of the comparator.
Refer to the DIU programming instructions for console commands
(typically 1450 and 1550 Hz function tones) that cause the DIU to send a
repeat enable/disable command to the comparator.
The parameter applies to both analog voice calls and digital voice calls.
The default setting for this field is ENABLED.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_vote_prior_hlp"><content>VOTE PRIORITY HELP
This parameter is used to control which type of incoming voted signal has
higher priority. Note that this parameter only affects voted signals.
Voted signals are voice/data signals which enter the comparator from a
base station. The user may select one of three configurations.
In the explanation below, an analog signal is the equivalent of an analog
voice call. Digital signals may be either digital voice calls or digital
data calls in the following explanation.
FIRST IN - In this configuration, voted analog signals and voted
digital signals have equal priority. In this case, the
voted signal which arrives at the comparator first will
have the highest priority of any voted signals. It will
retain the highest voted signal priority until the call ends.
For example, a user makes a digital call on subscriber A.
While subscriber A is keyed, a second user makes an analog
call on subscriber B. The best (voted) signal from
subscriber A will have priority over the best signal for
subscriber B. Now suppose subscriber A's call ends and a
new subscriber, C, is keyed up in digital mode. Subscriber
B's voted signal has the highest priority of the voted
signals because out of the two signals, B and C, it was the
first to arrive at the comparator.
ANALOG>DIGITAL - In this configuration, voted analog signals will take
priority over voted digital signals. A digital call
from a subscriber will be preempted by an analog call
from a subscriber in this configuration.
DIGITAL>ANALOG - In this configuration, voted digital signals will take
priority over voted analog signals. A call from an
analog subscriber will be preempted by a call from a
digital subscriber in this configuration.
The default configuration is FIRST IN.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_src_base_hlp"><content>SOURCE-BASED PRIORITY HELP
This parameter determines signal priority based on the device that
sourced the signal arriving at a wireline port. This parameter
applies to both voted and non-voted signals. The user may select
one of two configurations.
CONSOLE - Signals arriving from a console will have higher priority
than the signals received from a station. In this
configuration, a call from a console will preempt a call
from a subscriber.
REPEAT - Signals arriving from a station will have higher priority
than the signals received from a console. In this
configuration, a call from a subscriber will preempt a
call from a console.
Please note that this field applies to voice and data sessions. Control
information from a console such as the "channel change" command will
always take priority over signals sourced from a station.
The default configuration is CONSOLE.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_diu_rpt_hlp"><content>PARALLEL AUDIO OPERATION HELP
This parameter enables or disables the routing of console/DIU port sourced
analog and digital voice and control traffic arriving at the ATAC3000
to all other console/DIU ports. When this parameter is disabled the ATAC3000
will not route console/DIU port sourced traffic to other console/DIU ports
but only send this traffic to the station/receiver ports. When this parameter
is enabled the ATAC3000 will repeat analog and digital voice and control
traffic received from a console/DIU port to all other console/DIU ports
(except the sourcing port) and to station/receiver ports.
WARNING:
If not used properly, this feature can have adverse effects on system operation.
Users who are not aware of these operational constraints should contact
Motorola’s System Support Center at 1-800-221-7144, or access the
"ASTRO-TAC 3000 Conventional Parallel Audio Option User Guidelines" (6871009P07)
available at Motorola Online (MOL) for detailed user information before enabling
the Parallel Audio feature.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="console_echo_cancel_hlp"><content>CONSOLE ECHO CANCEL OPERATION HELP
The Console Echo Cancellation Feature provides the capability, for ASTRO
Conventional Systems, to mute inbound audio when the console is transmitting
outbound. This feature is normally used in simplex systems where the transmit
frequency is the same as the receive frequency and the transmitting station
and the outlying receivers will receive whatever is being transmitted and return
it to the comparator for processing as inbound audio.
The RSS allows this feature to be enabled at any time since the comparator has
no knowledge of the RF configuration of the system and relies on the installer
to judiciously configure the comparator for proper operation. Simplex systems are
normally configured with the repeat function in the comparator disabled.
This feature can also be enabled when the comparator is configured to repeat
and the system is not a Simplex system and the comparator will mute any inbound voice.
This feature only mutes voice; it does not mute inbound data or ASTRO control
signaling, such as Call Alert signaling.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="console_echo_cancel_delay_hlp"><content>CONSOLE ECHO CANCEL DELAY HELP
When Console Echo Cancel feature is enabled, this parameter specifies the
amount of echo cancellation time after the console stops transmitting.
The range is 0 to 2000 miliseconds. Resolution is in 10 miliseconds.
The default is 0 miliseconds.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_an_rep_hng_hlp"><content>ANALOG VOICE REPEAT HANGTIME HELP
This parameter specifies the amount of time that base stations connected
to a comparator will remain keyed-up and transmitting silence at the
conclusion of an analog voice call sourced by a subscriber. The period of
silence may preempted by any incoming signal.
This field is ignored if the Voice Repeat Operation field is set to
DISABLED.
The range is 0.0 to 15.0 seconds. Resolution is in tenths of seconds.
The default is 2.0 seconds.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_an_con_hng_hlp"><content>ANALOG VOICE CONSOLE HANGTIME HELP
This parameter specifies the amount of time that base stations connected
to the comparator will remain keyed-up and transmitting silence at the
conclusion of an analog voice call sourced by a console (DIU port). The
period of silence may preempted by any incoming signal.
The range is 0.0 to 15.0 seconds. Resolution is in tenths of seconds.
The default is 0.0 seconds.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_dig_rep_hng_hlp"><content>DIGITAL VOICE REPEAT HANGTIME HELP
This parameter specifies the amount of time a base station connected to a
comparator will remain keyed-up and transmitting silence at the conclusion
of a digital voice call sourced by a subscriber unit. The period of silence
may preempted by any incoming signal.
This parameter is ignored by the comparator if the Voice Repeat Operation
field is set to DISABLED.
The range is 0.0 to 15.0 seconds. Resolution is in tenths of seconds.
The default is 5.0 seconds.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_dig_con_hng_hlp"><content>DIGITAL VOICE CONSOLE HANGTIME HELP
This parameter specifies the amount of time a base station connected to the
comparator will remain keyed-up and transmitting silence at the conclusion
of a digital voice call sourced by a console. The period of silence may
be preempted by any incoming signal.
The range is 0.0 to 15.0 seconds. Resolution is in tenths of seconds.
The default is 0.0 seconds.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_dig_datcon_hng_hlp"><content>DIGITAL DATA CONSOLE HANGTIME HELP
This parameter specifies the amount of time a base station connected to the
comparator will remain keyed-up and transmitting silence at the conclusion
of a digital data call sourced by a console (DIU port). The period of
silence may be preempted by any incoming signal.
The range is 0.0 to 15.0 seconds. Resolution is in tenths of seconds.
The default is 0.0 seconds.
NOTE: This field should not be set to 0 if this is a simulcast system.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_ht_hdlc_help"><content>HANGTIME HDLC ADDRESS HELP
This parameter specifies which station(s) will transmit hangtime
generated by the Comparator. The field can be configured such
that hangtime is transmitted by all connected stations or
steered to a single connected station.
For system configurations in which simulcast is enabled and
data capability is used, this field should be set to steer hangtime
to the transmitting station associated with the largest number of
data users. The configuration steps for this situation are
as follows:
1. Determine which transmitting station connected to the
Comparator communicates with the largest number of data
users during normal system use.
2. Determine the HDLC address for the station selected in
step 1. The HDLC address can be obtained from the
status panel screen in the Comparator RSS. The station
HDLC address can also be determined by executing the
station RSS, reading in the station's codeplug, and
examining the site number field in the hardware config
screen.
3. Enter the station's HDLC in the Hangtime HDLC Address field.
4. Save the codeplug to the Comparator.
For non-simulcast systems or voice-only systems, this field should be
set to 3F.
The field value of 3F indicates that all transmit capable stations
will transmit hangtime generated by the comparator.
The range for this parameter is 0 to 3F (hex).
The default value for this parameter is 3F (hex).
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_def_tx_help"><content>DEFAULT TRANSMITTER STEERING ADDRESS HELP
This parameter specifies the address that the comparator
uses when there is no unique address specified in the source
message which the comparator is sending to base stations.
This field will not affect the address used when the signal
destination is a DIU or AEB.
Generally, this field is set to 3F (hex) unless signals are
to be steered to an individual transmitter by default. The
comparator will use the default transmitter steering address
in the codeplug unless the console operator selects a new
transmit address. The comparator will revert to the default
transmitter steering address upon power up.
A value of 0 for this field will result in all connected
stations ignoring the signal sent by the comparator.
Values ranging from 2 to 3E (hex) are used to select an
individual transmitter to be used as the default case. The
address for an individual station can be configured in the
Site Number field on the RSS Hardware Configuration Screen.
The address may also be obtained by reading the codeplug from
the desired stations and recording the address displayed on
the hardware configuration screen.
A value of 3F (hex) for this field corresponds to a broadcast
address. In this case, all stations connected to the
comparator will transmit the signal sent from the comparator.
The range for this parameter is 0 to 3F (hex).
The default value for this parameter is 3F (hex).
The Comparator's own address is 01, so if data site steering
will be used in the system, all stations must be configured
for a Site Number that is not equal to 01.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_dtrkotac_hlp"><content>SMARTZONE SYSTEM PARAMETERS SCREEN HELP
This screen is used to view and modify comparator parameters which are
applicable to SmartZone system configurations. Access to this screen
is denied if the system type field in the Hardware Configuration screen
is not set to SMARTZONE.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_failsoft_hlp"><content>FAILSOFT HELP
This field enables/disables the failsoft mechanism. If the Comparator
cannot detect any OSW's on the CSC link for more than 300 ms, it forces
the radios to switch to pre-assigned channels for Failsoft operation. The
failsoft feature is a fall-back mechanism which allows the channel to
operate in a stand-alone state should the system be unable to support
site trunking operation.
Setting this field to DISABLE will cause the Comparator to ignore gaps
in OSW's, and in effect disable the Failsoft function. With failsoft
disabled, a call will not be supported by the comparator when a CSC link
activity failure (lack OSW's for 300 ms) is detected.
With the failsoft field set to ENABLE, calls can be made between radios
programmed to the same failsoft channel when a CSC link activity failure
is detected by the comparator. In addition, the comparator will order
the radios assigned to its channel to emit a short tone every ten seconds
when the channel is in the failsoft state. During failsoft, a radio user
will have limited access to the system and will be notified that the system
is in failsoft by a short tone emitted by the radio every ten seconds.
The failsoft feature is only valid for comparators configured for a
trunked (SmartZone) system. The field will be ignored for comparators
configured for conventional systems. The comparator's configuration
is determined by the system type field in the hardware configuration
screen which is selected from the service menu.
The default setting for this field is DISABLED.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_fs_mode_hlp"><content>FAILSOFT MODE HELP
This parameter indicates which mode will be used when Failsoft is enabled
(see Failsoft Enable parameter). There are two valid settings: ANALOG and
DIGITAL. The default is DIGITAL.
When the Comparator enters failsoft, and the Failsoft Mode parameter
indicates ANALOG, the Comparator will start a silent analog call for the
duration of the Failsoft. Radio users can still access the system and
make a call to radios which revert to this channel during failsoft. To
the radio user, this silent failsoft call should appear and be treated
as infinite hangtime.
If the Failsoft Mode parameter indicates DIGITAL, the Comparator will
periodically transmit signaling information to the radio which indicates
the system is in failsoft. The signaling information will command the
radio to emit a short tone every 10 seconds. The user may still make
a call, but this call is limited to radios which revert to this
comparator's channel during failsoft.
This field setting should coincide with the signal type field of the
failsoft talk group selected in the trunking personality section of
the ASTRO Portable or ASTRO Mobile RSS codeplug for a given radio for
the failsoft feature to operate correctly.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_chan_no_hlp"><content>CHANNEL NUMBER HELP
This field must be set to the trunked channel identification number.
This number ranges from 1 to 28.
The default is NONE which is an invalid channel identification number.
This is done to prevent multiple comparators from defaulting to the
same valid ID, and responding to commands from the CSC that are not
intended for them.
The channel number field should agree with the labeled channel number
on the front of the comparator (if present). The comparator is connected
to the Central Site Controller (CSC) via a serial link. The CSC serial
connector on the comparator is J20 on the backplane. The serial link
leaving the comparator is connected to a data broadcast box. The data
broadcast box is connected to the CSC-TSC link of the CSC. The channel
number field should agree with the channel port on the data broadcast
box to which the comparator is connected.
Note: This field was handled differently in the ASTRO-TAC. The valid
range for the ASTRO-TAC was 0 - 27, and 28 for invalid/default
Channel Number. ASTRO-TAC's channel 0 corresponds to ASTRO-TAC
3000's channel 1, ASTRO-TAC's channel 1 corresponds to ASTRO-TAC
3000's channel 2, etc.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_dvoice_hlp"><content>ANALOG VOTING PARAMETERS SCREEN HELP
This screen allows reading and modification of parameters
which determine the characteristics of the analog voting algorithm.
The algorithm is used when a call is received by the comparator from
a station/receiver or group of stations/receivers. Access to this
screen is denied if system type field in the Hardware Configuration
screen is set to CONVENTIONAL and the comparator type field in the
Hardware Configuration screen is set to EXPANDED.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_vote_samp_hlp"><content>ANALOG VOTING SAMPLE PERIOD HELP
This parameter is used to allow for greater accuracy in
determining the noise content of a signal by increasing the
interval of time over which the analog signal quality is averaged.
It may be used to solve more difficult voting anomalies in particular
systems. Higher values allow for better accuracy in computing the
noise content of a signal, but may significantly delay the voting
decision between ports. This parameter is rarely altered.
This parameter is specified in units of milliseconds.
The default value for this parameter is 50 milliseconds.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_fvote_set_hlp"><content>ANALOG FIRST VOTE SETTLE TIME HELP
This parameter is used to prevent infrastructure induced transients
at the beginning of a call from degrading the initial voting decisions
for each PTT, and allows the analog voter to obtain a significant audio
sample before making a first vote decision. This is more important in
non-voiced analog signaling systems where the first vote decision is
critical. This value should not exceed the period of time between the
removal of the modem signal input to the comparator and the beginning
of actual analog information (voice or signaling).
This parameter is specified in units of milliseconds.
The default value for this parameter is 40 milliseconds.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="ot_voicehold_op_help"><content>ANALOG VOTE AND HOLD OPERATION HELP
This parameter specifies the state of the analog vote and hold
feature. This feature applies only to analog voice calls.
If the feature is enabled, a single vote will be performed at the
beginning of an analog call and result of this vote will be routed
for the remainder of the analog call. The voting algorithm will
effectively use an infinite value for the analog first vote hold
time for this case. Hence, the analog first vote hold time field
is ignored when the analog vote and hold operation is enabled.
If analog vote and hold operation is disabled, the signal will be
periodically voted throughout the analog call.
When this parameter is switched from ENABLED to DISABLED, the Analog
First Vote Hold Time parameter is set to its default value.
This parameter may be set to ENABLED or DISABLED.
The default value for this parameter is DISABLED.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_fvote_hold_hlp"><content>ANALOG FIRST VOTE HOLD TIME HELP
This parameter is used to ensure the voted port does not switch for a
fixed amount of time after it is chosen as voted port for the
first time. This parameter is usually set to a value larger than
(length of the MDC preamble + MDC Pretime) - System Truncation.
This will prevent the preamble from being corrupted due to the
analog voter switching to a new audio source. This field applies only
to the initial vote decision of an analog call unlike the analog vote
hold time field which applies to all voting decisions following the
initial vote.
This field is cannot be edited if the analog vote and hold operation
is enabled. Analog vote and hold operation is equivalent to setting
this field to an infinite value so that the signal will be voted only
once during the entire analog call.
This parameter is specified in units of milliseconds.
The default value for this parameter is 250 milliseconds.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_vote_hold_hlp"><content>ANALOG VOTING HOLD TIME HELP
This parameter is used to ensure the voted port does not switch for a
fixed amount of time after it is chosen as the voted port. If the
parameter is set too low, the signal may incur frequent interruption
or "popping" noises during the call due to the analog voter switching
input signals too often. Conversely, if this parameter is set too high,
a less than optimum signal may be routed as output frequently because
the hold time will prevent the comparator from switching to the best
signal for a long period of time. This parameter differs from the
analog first vote hold time in that the analog first vote hold time
applies only to the initial voting decision of an analog call whereas
the analog voting hold time applies to all vote decisions after the
initial vote.
This parameter is rarely adjusted in the field.
This parameter is specified in units of milliseconds.
The default value for this parameter is 250 milliseconds.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_vote_swtch_hlp"><content>ANALOG SIGNAL QUALITY DEBOUNCE TIME HELP
This field dictates the amount of time a signal must be of higher
quality than the current voted port before it is eligible to be
routed as the voted port. Debouncing the signal quality prevents
spikes of strong signaling on a port from inducing a change in
the voted port. This condition typically occurs during transitions
on a modem link.
This parameter is used to ensure that a port with infrastructure-
induced silence is not chosen over a port which continues to carry
valid analog audio. This infrastructure-induced silence is usually
present when a subscriber signal fades from a receiver but is still
being heard by another receiver in the system. The time between the
squelch in the faded receiver and the transition of the infrastructure
link from analog to digital is the amount of silence this parameter
will typically be chosen to compensate for. Higher values will
prevent ports with greater amounts of infrastucture-induced silence
from being chosen as the voted port, but at the same time will delay
the changing of voted ports when the actual signal quality is better.
Therefore, care should be taken in choosing a value no higher than
is necessary to prevent the voted port from changing on the
infrastructure-induced silence.
This parameter is specified in units of milliseconds.
The default value for this parameter is 150 milliseconds.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_line_trans_hlp"><content>ANALOG LINE TRANSIENT SETTLE HELP
This parameter is used to ensure that any transient on a port during
the initial portion of an analog call is excluded from the signal
quality measurement. The line transient settle time should be set to
the time period from when carrier detect is lost (falsed) to when the
transient settles on a modem link. Signal quality measurements may
be taken after the line transient settle time has expired. This is
the highest priority timer in the analog voting process. It specifies
the amount of time to wait after transitioning to analog before
beginning the voting process.
This parameter applies to modem links only.
This parameter is specified in units of milliseconds.
The default value for this parameter is 20 milliseconds.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_vote_hyst_hlp"><content>ANALOG VOTING HYSTERISIS HELP
This parameter is used to ensure that ports with signals of
imperceptible difference in noise content are not alternately
being chosen as the voted port. Higher values will require
that the noise content of a port with a receive analog signal
that is not currently the voted port be significantly less
than that of the voted port before that port becomes the voted
port.
This value should be set so the voted port only switches on
signals which have a perceptible difference in noise content.
If the difference in noise content between signals is not
perceptible, then there is no need to change voted ports.
The analog voting hysterisis field works in conjunction with
the analog voting hold time for determining when the analog
voter may switch the audio source. The previous voted port
must have been output for the prescribed hold time and the
competing audio source must have a noise content which passes
the voting hysterisis threshold before a change in the voted
port can occur.
This parameter is specified in units of decibels with a
granularity of 0.1 dB.
The default value for this parameter is 1.1 dB.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_dportctl_hlp"><content>PORT CONTROL PARAMETERS SCREEN HELP
This screen allows the user to read and modify parameters
which define the operation of individual infrastructure ports.
The screen displays the entire parameter list for a single port.
The port is identified by its assigned port number which is presented
as a field on the screen.
The user may scroll through the ports by using the buttons.
If the screen is displaying the configuration for port number X and
the user presses Previous Port, the screen will then display the configuration
for port number (X - 1). If the screen is displaying the configuration
for port number X and the user presses Next Port, the screen will display
the configuration for (X + 1).
The user may also modify the Port Number field on the screen to view
the configuration for a desired port.
When the system type field in the Hardware Configuration screen is set to
CONVENTIONAL and the comparator type field in the Hardware Configuration
screen is set to EXPANDED, the user may scroll through all of the comparators
in the expanded comparator configuration by using the Previous/Next Comparator buttons. The
current comparator port information being viewed is denoted by the Current
Chassis # field at the top of the screen which is not editable. Once a
particular comparator has been selected then the sixteen ports for that
comparator may be modified by using the Previous/Next buttons described above. Thus,
if the port information for the PRIMARY chassis is being viewed and the user
presses the Previous Comparator button, then the port information for the SECONDARY4 comparator will be
viewable. Likewise if the port information for the PRIMARY chassis is being
viewed and the user presses the Next Comparator Button, then the port information for the SECONDARY1
comparator will be viewable.
IMPORTANT NOTE: In an expanded conventional comparator configuration each
comparator will need to know the port configuration information for all of
the other comparators. Thus, all of the port information for all of the
comparators will need to be configured in one codeplug and this codeplug
will need to be saved to each comparator after making the appropriate
Hardware Configuration screen Chassis Number changes to reflect the
comparator that the codeplug is being saved to.
Button Descriptions:
Previous Comparator - Display the port configuration information for the previous
comparator. This is only supported for expanded conventional
systems.
Previous Port - Display the port configuration for the previous port.
Next Port - Display the port configuration for the next port.
Next Comparator - Display the port configuration information for the next comparator.
This is only supported for expanded conventional systems.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_port_no_hlp"><content>PORT NUMBER HELP
The port number field is a read-only field which identifies the physical
connection in the comparator which is being viewed or modified. The screen
will display all relevant attributes associated with a specific connection
in addition to the port number field. The user may opt to view or edit a
different port number by pressing the previous port or next port
buttons.
A port number is mapped to directly to a wireline port in the chassis in
the following manner:
FRONT VIEW OF COMPARATOR
W W W W W W W W
L L L L L L L L
S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | |
V V V V V V V V
---------------------------------------------------------
| | | | A | P | C | | | | | |
| | | | U | O | O | | | | | |
| | | | X | W | N | | | | | |
| | | | I | E | T | | | | | |
| | | | L | R | R | | | | | |
| | | | I | | O | | | | | |
| | | | A | S | L | | | | | |
| | | | R | U | | | | | | |
--- | | | | Y | P | C | | | | | |
/ | 12 | 14 | 16 | | P | A | 2 | 4 | 6 | 8 | 10 |
Port --- | | | | P | L | R | | | | | |
Number \ | 11 | 13 | 15 | S | Y | D | 1 | 3 | 5 | 7 | 9 |
--- | | | | | | | | | | | |
---------------------------------------------------------
The type of link connected to a port may require a link interface using
an orange 8-wire connector installed on the comparator backplane. Each
orange connector is capable of supporting two ports. The connectors
each have a unique numerical ID. Note that the orientation of the
connector on the backplane will vary depending on the port numbers
which it supports.
The table below maps each orange 8-wire connector to
the two ports it supports.
Connector ID Supported
on the Backplane Ports
---------------- ---------
61 1,2
62 3,4
63 5,6
64 7,8
65 9,10
66 11,12
67 13,14
68 15,16
PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION OF 8-WIRE CONNECTOR
connection screws
___________|____________
| | | | | | | |
V V V V V V V V
---------------------------
| |
|-------------------------|
|[] [] [] [] | [] [] [] []|
---------------------------
A A A A A A A A
| | | | | | | | | | | |
| o o i i | | o o i i |
| u u n n | | u u n n |
| t t | | t t |
----------- -----------
| |
4-wire set 4-wire set
for the for the
upper port lower port
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_port_type_hlp"><content>PORT TYPE HELP
This field specifies the physical device, if any, to which this infrastructure
port is connected. This following entries may be selected:
DISABLED - This setting applies to two situations. First, the port
is physically inoperable (i.e. no infrastructure link for
this port). The second situation is when the necessary
hardware is present but the user wishes to disable all
communication on this port. Link status alarms are not
generated for disabled ports. Only the port alias field
may be edited when a port is configured to be disabled.
This is the proper setting for ports which are not supported
by the comparator. For example, if a wireline card is not
present in the eighth wireline slot, the port type field for
ports fifteen and sixteen should be set to DISABLED.
In the event that a user wishes to "ignore" a device which
is present, the field should be set to DISABLED. For
example, if the infrastructure supports five station inputs
to the comparator but the user only wishes to utilize four
station inputs, the user only needs to set one of the ports
to DISABLED rather than physically disconnecting the link.
The comparator will disregard all information which is
received on a disabled link and will not transmit
information on a disabled link. The link establishment
process is not performed on a link which is disabled.
DIU - This is the proper port type when the port is connected to
a Digital Interface Unit (DIU). The comparator can only be
connected to a DIU when configured as a conventional
comparator using the system type field in the hardware
configuration screen. In an expanded conventional
comparator configuration, this port type may only be
selected on the PRIMARY comparator.
STATION/RECEIVER - This is the correct port type when the port is connected to
a base station or remote receiver. In an expanded
conventional comparator configuration, this port type
may only be selected on the SECONDARY1 through SECONDARY4
comparators.
AEB - This is the correct port type when the port is connected
an Ambassador Electronics Bank (AEB) interface. This interface
is typically a connection to a T1/E1 channel bank. The port
type is valid only when the comparator system type is set to
SMARTZONE.
The default setting for this parameter is DISABLED.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_port_alias_hlp"><content>PORT ALIAS HELP
This parameter is an alpha-numeric string that may be used to
identify a device connected the comparator by a specific name or location.
For example, a user might assign the alias of "BS1" or "BIGMTNBS" to a
station for identification purposes.
The port alias which is assigned to a specific device on the port
configuration screen will also be displayed on the Status Panel screen.
The default value for this field is the string "NONE".
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_link_type_hlp"><content>LINK TYPE HELP
This parameter specifies the physical interface for the link for the
respective wireline port. Each link can be configured for one of the
following 6 types:
MODEM -28 dBm - ASTRO modem link where the input level into the modem
should be within the range of -28 dBm to 0 dBm. This
link type supports analog and digital calls. Note that
the modem board is a daughterboard on the wireline card
and is located inside the comparator chassis. This link
type can NOT be selected if the system type field on the
Hardware Configuration screen is set to CONVENTIONAL and
the comparator type field on the Hardware Configuration
screen is set to EXPANDED. Expanded conventional systems
support V.24 digital links only.
MODEM -37 dBm - ASTRO modem link where the input level into the modem
should be within the range of -37 dBm to -9 dBm.
This link type supports analog and digital calls. Note
that the modem board is a daughterboard on the wireline
card and is located inside the comparator chassis. This
link type can NOT be selected if the system type field on
the Hardware Configuration screen is set to CONVENTIONAL
and the comparator type field on the Hardware Configuration
screen is set to EXPANDED. Expanded conventional systems
support V.24 digital links only.
V.24 EXT Tx CLK - V.24 digital link with Tx clock sourced by device
at the other end of the link. This link type supports
digital calls only. This is the typical clock setting
for a link interface to a channel bank (i.e. remote
station or AEB link).
V.24 INT Tx CLK - V.24 digital link with Tx clock sourced by the
Comparator. This link type supports digital calls
only. This is the typical clock setting for a co-located
comparator or direct link to a station or DIU.
HYBRID EXT Tx CLK - V.24/4-wire link with Tx clock for the V.24 board sourced
by device at the other end of the link. Hybrid links
support analog and digital calls. The V.24 portion
of the hybrid link supports digital calls. The 4-wire
portion of the link is used to carry the analog voice
during an analog call. The V.24 portion of the link
is, however, required for proper link operation
during an analog call. This is the typical clock setting
for a link interface to a channel bank (i.e. remote
station or AEB link). This link type can NOT be selected
if the system type field on the Hardware Configuration
screen is set to CONVENTIONAL and the comparator type
field on the Hardware Configuration screen is set to
EXPANDED. Expanded conventional systems support V.24
digital links only.
HYBRID INT Tx CLK - V.24/4-wire link with Tx clock for the V.24 board sourced
by the Comparator. Hybrid links support analog and digital
calls. The V.24 portion of the hybrid link supports
digital calls. The 4-wire portion of the link is used to
carry the analog voice during an analog call. The V.24
portion of the link is, however, required for proper
link operation during an analog call. This is the typical
clock setting for a co-located comparator or direct link to
a station or DIU. This link type can NOT be selected
if the system type field on the Hardware Configuration
screen is set to CONVENTIONAL and the comparator type
field on the Hardware Configuration screen is set to
EXPANDED. Expanded conventional systems support V.24
digital links only.
External connections will indicate the type of link (hybrid, modem, or V.24)
that a port has been physically configured to operate on. Specifically, the
external connections involved are the RJ-45 connectors on the comparator
front panel and the orange 8-wire connectors on the backplane. Note that
each orange connector supports two 4-wire ports.
A port is configured for a modem link if the port's 4-wire connection on the
backplane is being used, but the port's RJ-45 connection on the front panel
is not being used or is not present. One modem daughter board supports one
port.
A V.24 link uses only the port's RJ-45 connection on the front panel. One
V.24 daughter board will support both wireline ports.
A hybrid link uses both the port's 4-wire connection on the backplane and the
port's RJ-45 connection on the front panel.
The V.24 daughterboard is populated with two DIP switch sets. Each set
corresponds to a physical port. DIP switch package S101 provides
configuration settings for the lower numbered physical port. DIP switch
package S102 provides configuration settings for the higher numbered physical
port on the wireline card. For a port which is internally clocked, such as a
co-located base station, switch S2 should be ON and S1, S3, and S4 should be
set to OFF. For a port which is externally clocked, such as a remote site or
the AEB link, switch S1 should be ON and S2, S3, and S4 should be set to OFF.
For further information on link configuration and setup, please reference the
3.0 System Release Notes.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_in_level_diff_help"><content>INPUT LEVEL DIFFERENTIAL HELP
This parameter specifies the numerical difference between the
the port's modem or idle tone input signal level and the
port's analog voice input signal level. The input level
differential is computed using the following equation:
Input Level Differential =
(Comparator Modem/Idle Tone Input Level) - (Comparator Analog Voice Input Level)
Since the input level differential is the difference between
the two signals coming into the comparator, the difference
between the two signals leaving the station or DIU will be
the same. Therefore, input levels at the comparator can be
substituted with output levels at the Station or DIU.
For the Station:
Input Level Differential =
(Station Modem/Idle Tone Output Level) - (Station Analog Voice Output Level)
For the DIU:
Input Level Differential =
(DIU Modem/Idle Tone Output Level) - (DIU Analog Voice Output Level)
This parameter must be set correctly for proper operation of
analog voting. The comparator performs gain adjustment when the
link is either in the digital mode or, in the case of hybrid
links, receiving idle tone. The gain adjustment process
amplifies or attenuates the incoming signal so that the
incoming signal is at an optimal level for signal quality
analysis and will be comparable in amplitude to other incoming
signals. Since the gain adjustment is done during the digital
mode, the comparator must know what the analog signal level
will be relative to the digital level for each input port.
This parameter is ignored for ports using V.24 links.
The parameter value has a range of -20 dB to +3 dB.
The default value for this parameter is +0 dB.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_rem_analog_hlp"><content>ANALOG REMOTE TX LEVEL HELP
This field is the Analog Remote Tx Level. The valid range is -20
to +3 dB. The default is -10 dB.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_rem_idltone_hlp"><content>IDLE TONE REMOTE TX LEVEL HELP
This field is the Idle Tone Remote Tx Level. The valid range is -20
to +3 dB. The default is -10 dB.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_rem_modem_hlp"><content>MODEM REMOTE TX LEVEL HELP
This field is the Modem Remote Tx Level. The valid range is -20
to +3 dB. The default is -10 dB.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_out_analog_hlp"><content>ANALOG OUTPUT LEVEL HELP
The analog output level is output signal level that used when
transmitting an analog signal. This is the signal level
on the 2-wire output of the comparator port for a modem link or
hybrid link during an analog call.
Please consult the 3.0 System Release Notes for further information
on obtaining the correct value for this parameter.
The range of values is from 0 dBm to -20 dBm. The analog output
level is adjustable in 1 dB increments.
The default value for this field is -14 dBm.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_out_idltone_hlp"><content>IDLE TONE OUTPUT LEVEL HELP
This is the output level of the idle tone which is the tone sent
by the Comparator to the Station on the analog portion of
the hybrid link when the analog side of the link is idle. This
tone is used for analog link management in a hybrid link. This
field applies only to hybrid link types and is ignored for all
other link types.
Please consult the 3.0 System Release Notes for further information
on obtaining the correct value for this parameter.
The range of values is from 0 dBm to -20 dBm. The idle tone output
level is adjustable in 1 dB increments.
The default value for this field is -10 dBm.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_out_modem_hlp"><content>MODEM OUTPUT LEVEL HELP
This parameter is the output level for a modem link which is operating
in the digital mode. This is the signal level which should be seen
leaving the comparator on the port's 2-wire output when a modem link
is either idle or supporting a digital call.
Incorrect setting of this field will be characterized by a large number
of CRC alarms being generated by the receiving device and the comparator's
inability to initialize the link despite successful modem hardware
initialization.
Please consult the 3.0 System Release Notes for further information
on obtaining the correct value for this parameter.
This cannot be accessed when the Link Type field is not set to a modem
link type.
The range of values is from +3 dBm to -20 dBm. The output level is
adjustable in 1 dB increments. This parameter applies only to modem
link types and is ignored for all other link types.
The default value for this field is -14 dBm.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_in_digital_hlp"><content>DIGITAL INPUT DELAY HELP
Digital Input Delay is the absolute amount of time, in milliseconds, that
is required for a digital signal on this port to travel through the input
portion of the infrastructure and arrive at the comparator. It is the
difference in time from when a signal is transmitted by the station's
wireline port to when the comparator receives the signal on its wireline
port.
This field is a critical factor for digital voting. For the comparator to
perform digital voting properly, the time difference between the port which
incurs the largest delay (the slowest port) and the port which incurs the
least delay (the fastest port) must not exceed 100 milliseconds.
Increasing or over estimating input delay will increase the signal delay
through the comparator, particularly if the slowest port delay is over-
estimated. Underestimating the digital input delay may decrease the audio
quality because the number of signals arriving within the voting window
will be reduced.
The valid range is 0 to 999 milliseconds. The default value is 0
milliseconds.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_in_analog_hlp"><content>ANALOG INPUT DELAY HELP
The Analog Input Delay is the delay, in milliseconds, applied
at the port when a message is received by the comparator on a
analog link.
The valid range is between 0 and 500 milliseconds. The default
is 0 milliseconds.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_diu_rank_hlp"><content>DIU RANK HELP
This parameter allows the DIUs connected to a comparator to be ranked
relative to one another. This parameter will appear on the port
configuration menu for ports in which the port type field is set to DIU.
A DIU's rank is specified by entering an integer number in this field.
The range of the number is zero to fifteen. A value of zero corresponds
to the lowest ranking DIU. Multiple DIUs can be given the same DIU rank
value. For DIUs with equal ranking, the DIU signal which arrives first
will be given priority.
As an example, assume two DIUs, A and B, are connected to the comparator.
DIU A is given a DIU rank of 5. DIU B is given a DIU value of 3. In
this situation, a call on DIU A will always preempt a call on DIU B.
The default setting for this parameter is zero. By default, all DIUs have
an equal ranking.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_link_timr_hlp"><content>OUTPUT ANALOG LINK TIMER HELP
Devices using modem links must be able to detect link failures during
an analog call. Modem signals during an analog call are identical to
those during a link failure. The preferred solution to this problem
is to periodically transition the link to a digital state and send a
message indicating the link is still active and functional. This field
determines how often the digital message is sent.
This is the timeout value which the comparator uses to periodically
generate a continue analog message (during an analog call) to signal
the station/DIU that the link is still functional. If the connected
device does receive the continue analog message within its timeout
value, it will stop the analog call. If this field is configured for
x seconds, the connected device will expect a continue message at least
every (x + 5) seconds. For example, by default the comparator's ports
are configured for a 120 second output analog link timeout value, the
station will determine during link initialization that it should expect
to receive an analog continue message from the comparator at least
every 125 seconds.
The timeout value must be set to provide a satisfactory link recovery
speed in addition to acceptable analog audio quality. Link recovery
speed is improved by decreasing the value of this timer; however, this
will increase the frequency of continue messages over the link which
briefly interrupt the call. Audio holes caused by the continue messages
are decreased by increasing the value of this timer, but this is done at
a cost of increasing the link recovery time. The usual value for this
field is 120 seconds.
This field only applies to modem links.
The default value for this field 120 seconds.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_alt_data_hlp"><content>DATA SITE STEERING PORT
The Data Site Steering Port is the port number of the transmitting base
station that is closest to this port's receiver. If this port is a base
station (not just a receiver), the Data Site Steering Port should
simply be set to this port's own port number. Only ports of type
"Station/Receiver" will be accepted in this field. This parameter will be
used in Data Site Steering.
Data Site Steering is used to transmit data in voted system configurations.
For systems in which two or more transmitters have an overlap area, the data
must be transmitted by only one of the stations to prevent signal interference.
For proper transmission of data, each station or receiver must have this
field set to the physical port number of a base station.
For example, site A has satellite receivers SR1, SR2, and SR3 along with two
transmitting base stations, TR1 and TR2, which cover the area of the site.
Assume a radio user keys a radio and the signal is received only by SR1.
Assume also that TR1's outbound signal is stronger than that of TR2's near SR1.
The comparator will route this data to the DIU. Along with the data the
comparator will also send identification information which states that TR1
should be used if an outbound response is desired. The Data subsystem will
use the identification information provided by the comparator in the event of
a response.
The Data Site Steering Port field is the mechanism by which the comparator
is able to associate TR1 to SR1 in the above example. The Data Site Steering
Port for SR1 is set to the physical port number of TR1.
This parameter applies to data signals only.
The valid range is 1 to 16 for STANDARD (non-expanded) conventional comparators.
For EXPANDED conventional comparators, the valid range is 1 to 16 for the
appropriate chassis number that the base station resides on. Note that
the base station does not need to be on the same chassis as the port being
configured. To select a different chassis number, TAB to the Chassis # field
next to the Data Site Steering Port field and use the UP/DOWN arrow keys to
select the correct comparator.
The default value is the current port number.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="hardware_config_help"><content>HARDWARE CONFIGURATION SCREEN HELP
This screen contains parameters which generally require the purchase
of optional hardware external to the comparator chassis. For example,
the simulcast feature functions correctly only when the comparator is
connected to simulcast-capable stations and a GPS receiver.
The Comparator Name field does not require additional hardware.
Button Descriptions:
Validate Configuration -
Validate the comparator configuration. The RSS will interrogate
the comparator and verify the comparator configuration is identical
to the configuration specified by current codeplug which is being
viewed on the RSS. The RSS will display a warning message if a
configuration conflict is detected.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="ot_system_type_help"><content>SYSTEM TYPE HELP
This field defines the type of the system the Comparator operates in.
Valid settings are SMARTZONE for trunked SmartZone system, and
CONVENTIONAL, for all non-trunking systems.
Depending on setting of this field, some menus and fields may be hidden or
restricted from viewing. For example, if the user configures the system
type field for SmartZone, the user will be denied access to the Conventional
Parameters menu.
The default value for this field is CONVENTIONAL.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="ot_serial_number_help"><content>SERIAL NUMBER HELP
No help available.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="comparator_name_help"><content>COMPARATOR NAME HELP
This is a ten character alpha-numeric string to allow the user to assign an
alias to a comparator. The comparator name field is provided for customer
reference and is not used by the comparator.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="ot_battery_help"><content>BATTERY TYPE HELP
This parameter identifies the battery charging algorithm provided, if any.
This field allows the battery charging circuitry to select the best
recharging rate for the type of battery the comparator is using. If
battery charging is being performed by a device external to the comparator,
set this field to NONE.
This field may be toggled between:
NONE - If there is no backup battery, battery charging is not
desired, or battery is charged using an external device.
NICAD - For NICAD Battery.
LEAD_ACID_NON - For Vented Lead-Calcium Acid Battery.
LEAD_ACID_LIN - For Sealed Lead-Calcium Acid Battery.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="ot_simulcast_help"><content>SIMULCAST FUNCTION HELP
Simulcast is the system configuration in which multiple transmitters
transmit the same signal on the same frequency at the same time such that
their coverage areas overlap without destructive interference. In this way,
Simulcast extends the coverage area of a single frequency and minimizes
transmit frequencies required for the radio system.
A GPS receiver has to be connected to the Comparator to allow
simulcast to operate properly. Specifically, the GPS receiver supplies the
1 pulse per second (1 PPS) input to the comparator. The 1 PPS connector on
the comparator is labeled J21 on the backplane. The GPS link allows the
comparator to very accurately control when signal information is transmitted
over the air from each of the stations to which it is connected. Each
simulcast station will also require a GPS link because the GPS is the
medium used to synchronize the station with the comparator.
NOTE: In an expanded conventional configuration, the GPS receiver needs only
to be connected to the PRIMARY comparator. There is no need to connect it
to the SECONDARY1 through SECONDARY4 comparators.
To enable this feature, the Comparator should have this field set to ENABLED.
Also, other devices (Base Stations) must have this function enabled. The
station is configured for simulcast by enabling the simulcast field in the
codeplug. The field is accessed from the hardware configuration screen in the
base station RSS.
The default value for this parameter is DISABLED.
Note: When Simulcast is ENABLED, Digital Data Console Hangtime (on the Conventional
System Parameters Screen) should be a non-zero value.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="simul_lt_delay_help"><content>SIMULCAST LAUNCH TIME OFFSET HELP
Signals in a simulcast system are subject to delays. The launch time
offset is the worst-case delay incurred from the point when the
comparator begins its output process to the point when the station
transmits the frame over the air. The launch time offset delay is
comprised of the following factors:
- The comparator processing delay
- The infrastructure link delay from the comparator to the station
- The base station processing delay
- The signal buffering performed within the base station
- The key-up delay in the base station
Decreasing the value of this field may decrease the overall delay of the
system and increase throughput. However, if this parameter is set to a
value lower than the actual delay, the launch times will become invalid,
and the system will not function properly. If the value of this parameter
is set too high, the station will not be capable of buffering the signal
correctly which will result in buffer overflow errors at the base station.
To determine the launch time offset refer to the GPS Simulcast
Installation Manual.
WARNING: The worst case infrastructure link delay from the comparator to
the station is dependent on the whether the system is a voice
only system or a voice/data system. If the system supports data a
larger simulcast launch time offset must be used to take into
account the longer infrastructure delay. Recommended times for
voice only and voice/data systems are given in the GPS Simulcast
Installation Manual.
The possible values for the Simulcast Launch Time Offset are from 0 to
999 ms.
The default value for this parameter is 180 milliseconds.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="vote_scan_help"><content>VOTE SCAN HELP
Vote Scan shall be Enabled for multicast channels with subscriber units
using a Vote Scan scan list type. Enabling this option will allow the
user to add a preamble to all TSBK control messages in the TSBK Preamble
Duration Field.
Use the Up/Dn Arrow Keys to toggle between the choices ENABLED and
DISABLED.
Default is DISABLED.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="tsbk_preamble_help"><content>TSBK PREAMBLE DURATION HELP
The TSBK preamble duration is the quantity of time (in milliseconds),
which outbound signaling and control messages (TSBKs) will be delayed
to allow subscribers on multicast channels with a Vote Scan scan list
type selected to scan and select a desirable channel. Refer to Vote
Scan documentation for the TSBK preamble duration calculation method.
Enter the desired TSBK preamble duration in this field. Value may range
between 35 and 999 milliseconds.
Default value is 385 milliseconds.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="ethernet_params_help"><content>ETHERNET PARAMETERS SCREEN HELP
No help available.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="master_ip_addr_help"><content>MASTER IP ADDRESS HELP
No help available.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="network_mask_help"><content>NETWORK MASK HELP
No help available.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="slave_mode_help"><content>SLAVE MODE HELP
No help available.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="dswv01_screen_help"><content>QUANTAR SOFTWARE VERSION SCREEN HELP
The Quantar Software Version Screen indicates the versions of Firmware
present in the station as well as the current codeplug version. This
information could be important for possible analysis of the Status
Messages.
When connected to older version stations, some of the firmware version
fields may be blank. This will also occur if the station does not have
the hardware installed, i.e., no Wireline module is present.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="dswv02_screen_help"><content>ASTRO-TAC 3000 COMPARATOR SOFTWARE VERSION SCREEN HELP
This screen provides version information and part number information to
identify the software executing on the connected comparator. The screen
displays version and part number information for each card installed in the
chassis. The backplane id and codeplug version are also displayed as an
aid for upgrades.
CONTROL CARD
The control card software is composed of three images. These images
are referred to as AC1, Boot1, and Boot2 on the version screen.
Immediately to the right of the image title column for the control card is
the software version column. In software version column, the Motorola software
version number assigned to each control card software image is displayed.
This is a read-only field which cannot be configured by the user.
The default string for this field is "NOT_INSTALLED."
NOTE: For comparators which are not software download capable, the Boot1 and
Boot2 image version fields will default to "UNAVAILABLE" since these
images are not present.
NOTE: The algorithm for obtaining software version information from an Omni-TAC
differs from the method used to obtain ASTRO-TAC software version
information. Do not attempt to use the Omni-TAC RSS to obtain software
version information from an ASTRO-TAC comparator.
To the right of the software version column is the software part number
column for the control card images. This field contains the Motorola part
number(s) assigned to the control card images.
The default string for this field is "NOT_INSTALLED."
NOTE: For comparators which are not software download capable, the Boot1 and
Boot2 image part number field will default to "___UNAVAILABLE___" since these
images are not present.
NOTE: The algorithm for obtaining part number information from an Omni-TAC
differs from the method used to obtain ASTRO-TAC part number information.
Do not attempt to use Omni-TAC RSS to obtain part numbers from an
A ASTRO-TAC comparator.
WL BOARD
The Wireline card software is composed of two images. These images
are referred to as Boot and Wireline on the version screen.
In software version columns, the Motorola software version number assigned to each
Wireline card software image is displayed. This is a read-only field which cannot
be configured by the user.
The default string for this field will be displayed
in the following instances:
- The wireline card failed to initialize properly.
- The ports for the corresponding wireline slots are configured as
PORT_DISABLED in the codeplug in the comparator.
- The wireline software does not support the software version screen. The
wireline card software must be compatible with 3.0 system comparator.
The default string for this field is "NOT_INSTALLED."
NOTE: For comparators which are not software download capable, the Boot
image version field will default to "UNAVAILABLE" since this
image is not present.
NOTE: The algorithm for obtaining software version information from an Omni-TAC
differs from the method used to obtain ASTRO-TAC software version
information. Do not attempt to use the Omni-TAC RSS to obtain software
version information from an ASTRO-TAC comparator.
In the software part number columns, the Motorola part number for the
Wireline card images is displayed.
The default string for this field will be displayed in the following instances:
- The wireline card failed to initialize properly.
- The ports for the corresponding wireline slots are configured as
PORT_DISABLED in the codeplug in the comparator.
- The wireline software does not support the software version screen. The
wireline card software must be compatible with 3.0 system comparator.
The default string for this field is "NOT_INSTALLED."
NOTE: For comparators which are not software download capable, the Boot
image part number field will default to "___UNAVAILABLE___" since this
image is not present.
NOTE: The algorithm for obtaining part number information from an Omni-TAC
differs from the method used to obtain ASTRO-TAC part number information.
Do not attempt to use Omni-TAC RSS to obtain part numbers from an
ASTRO-TAC comparator.
CP VERSION
This field contains the version of the RSS codeplug currently being used
by the control card which is being interrogated. For the RSS to operate
correctly, the RSS program must interface with a compatible version of the
comparator codeplug. This field, in conjunction with the RSS system help
information, can be used to determine if the RSS/codeplug interface is
correct or if an upgrade is necessary. This RSS system help information
can be accessed by the about screen. If
the codeplug version is not listed in the RSS system help, a more recent
version of the RSS program is required. If the codeplug version is
compatible with an earlier version of the RSS, the upgrade utility should
be executed to convert the codeplug to the required version.
BACKPLANE ID
This field displays the backplane ID assigned to the connected comparator.
This is a read-only field. If a backplane ID cannot be obtained from the
comparator, this field will display "UNKNOWN". If "UNKNOWN" appears in
this field, please verify the AC Card has firmware which supports this
feature. The product release notes indicate if the comparator software
supports this feature. AC Card versions OC_R03.00.XXX, OC_R03.01.XXX, and
OC_R03.02.XXX do NOT support this feature.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="local_status_screen_help"><content>STATUS PANEL SCREEN HELP
This screen displays the current state of key comparator parameters. The
screen will automatically update if a key parameter changes state
in the comparator. The status panel screen allows the user to monitor the
comparator's activity in a real-time fashion.
NOTE: Entering the Status Panel Help screen will suspend the Status
Panel screen updating. The Status Panel screen will resume operation
including a complete screen update when the user exits this help
screen.
When the system type field in the Hardware Configuration screen is set to
CONVENTIONAL and the comparator type field in the Hardware Configuration
screen is set to EXPANDED, the user may scroll through all of the comparators
in the expanded comparator configuration by using the Previous/Next Comparator buttons. The
current comparator port information being viewed is denoted by the Current
Chassis Number field at the top of the screen which is not editable. Once a
particular comparator has been selected then the sixteen ports for that
comparator may be viewed. Thus,if the port information for the PRIMARY
chassis is being viewed and the user presses the Previous Comparator button, then the port information
for the SECONDARY4 comparator will be viewable. Likewise if the port
information for the PRIMARY chassis is being viewed and the user presses the next Comparator button,
then the port information for the SECONDARY1 comparator will be viewable.
COLUMN DESCRIPTIONS
The screen displays several key parameters which are port dependent. The
column marked "Port #" lists the individual port numbers vertically. The
status of each port is displayed on the row which contains the port number
of interest.
The column marked "Alias" lists the customer port aliases. Each customer
port alias is configured in the Port Control Parameters screen. If an
alias has not been assigned to a port, the default alias "NONE" will appear
in the Alias column for this port.
The column entitled "State" lists each port's current link state or inbound
activity. Each port may have one of the following states:
Analog Voice - The link is established and is currently receiving
analog voice information on the infrastructure link.
Note that Analog is not supported for a EXPANDED
conventional configuration.
Data 12 - The link is established and is currently receiving digital
data information on the infrastructure link. Data 12 is a
specific type of data format.
Data 18 - The link is established and is currently receiving digital
data information on the infrastructure link. Data 18 is a
specific type of data format.
Data Control - The link is established and is currently receiving
digital data information on the infrastructure link.
Control Data is a specific type of data format.
Digital Data - The link is established and is currently receiving
digital data information on the infrastructure link.
Digital Voice - The link is established and is currently receiving
digital voice information on the infrastructure
link.
Disabled - The port's port type field is set to DISABLED in the
comparator codeplug. All inbound activity is ignored
on a DISABLED port. A DISABLED port will not transmit
information including link initialization information.
Failed - The comparator has failed the infrastructure link for this
port and/or is attempting link initialization. A Failed port
will not transmit call information.
Idle - The link is established, but no call activity is being
received.
Vote Disabled - This port has been removed from the list of ports which
are included in the voting process via a user interface
to the comparator. For example, a port can be
vote enabled or vote disabled dynamically from the
remote status panel interface.
Local Vote Disabled - This port has been removed from the list of ports
which are included in the voting process via a
user interface to the comparator. The port will
not be included until it is enabled again through
the Local Status interface.
The column entitled "HDLC Address" lists the HDLC address of each
infrastructure device connected to the comparator. An HDLC address
is simply a numeric ID which is assigned to each box in the system. The
HDLC addresses which appear on the status panel are not configured from
the comparator. Base stations and DIUs are examples of infrastructure
devices which connect to the comparator and have HDLC addresses. A port's
HDLC address field is not displayed if the port is disabled or failed.
The column entitled "Link Delay" displays the digital link delay for each
port where a Base Station/Receiver is connected to the Comparator. The
digital link delay for a port has nothing to do with the analog link delay
for the port. See the Get Link Delays Feature help described below for
further details.
The column entitled "Voted Port" indicates which port the comparator
currently considers the highest quality signal or voted port among the
list of incoming station signals. The screen will display an "X" in the
port number row which corresponds to the voted port. In an EXPANDED
conventional configuation, an additional field exists that displays which
port and comparator chassis the current voted port is on. Thus, the user
does not need to scroll through the SECONDARY chassis to find the voted
port.
The column entitled "Force Vote" indicates the port which the
technician has selected as the single source of signals which
are included in the voting process. At most, one port may be
force voted. See the Local Control Feature help described below
for further details.
GET LINK DELAYS FEATURE
To initialize or update the link delay values in the Comparator:
1. Read the codeplug from the Comparator.
2. Press Get Link Delay button to query the Comparator for the port link delays.
3. press OK to update the link delay values in the PC codeplug image.
4. Save the codeplug to the Comparator. This updates the link delay
values in the Comparator.
Pressing the Get Link Delay button will query the comparator for the port
link delays. The link delay shown is a value in milliseconds (ms). It
represents the time from when a whole frame is sent by either the
Comparator or Base Station/Receiver to the time that whole frame is
received by the other infrastructure device. Note that the connected
Base Station/Receiver must contain software which supports this feature.
If the link delay field for a port remains blank for several seconds
after pressing Get Link Delay button and the port is idle, verify the correct software is
installed in the connected Base Station/Receiver.
The link delay for each port is calculated by the Comparator under two
main assumptions.
ASSUMPTIONS: The links support a transmission rate of 9600 bps only.
The link delays are symmetrical in both directions between
the Base Station/Receiver and the Comparator.
The Comparator has two constraints on its output for port link delays.
CONSTRAINTS: An upper limit of 999 ms is set on any link delay calculation.
Therefore, a value of 999 indicates 999 ms or greater.
Digital link delays are displayed on the Status Panel Screen
for ports on which a valid link delay has been determined.
If a codeplug has been read in, pressing The Validate Configuration Button will save these link
delays to the codeplug image on the PC (see the Port Control Screen, Digital
Input Delay field). This operation does NOT update the link delay values in
the comparator. The link delays will not be saved to the codeplug if
the difference between the smallest and largest link delay is greater
than 100 msec.
IMPORTANT NOTE: In an expanded conventional comparator configuration each
comparator will need to know the port delay information for all of the ports
on the other comparators. Thus, after getting the link delays and updating
the delay values in the PC codeplug image, the codeplug will need to be saved
to each comparator after making the appropriate Hardware Configuration screen
Chassis Number changes to reflect the comparator that the codeplug is being
saved.
LOCAL CONTROL FEATURE
General Help:
Local Control allows a technician to force vote and vote disable
ports from the status panel display. This feature should be used
with caution because when local control mode is enabled, the
remote status panel can not force vote or vote disable any ports.
Specific Help:
Local Control is a feature that allows a technician to force vote
and vote disable ports through the RSS. The Comparator must
be in local control mode in order for any commands to be
accepted. When the Comparator is in local control mode, com-
mands from the remote status panel will not be processed.
To enter local control mode, hit Local Control button on the Status Panel Display
Screen. The screen will change to show "Local Control Mode is
Enabled," also, the third LED on the front panel will start blinking.
Any port force voted by the remote status will no longer be force
voted.
To force vote a port, highlight the port you want to force vote.
Then hit the Toggle Force Vote Button to toggle the port's force vote status.
Only one port can be force voted at a time and a vote dis-
able/local vote disable port can not be force voted. Ports that are
force voted through local control will not remain force voted if
local control mode is exited.
To vote disable a port or vote enable a vote disabled/ local vote
disabled port highlight the port you want to affect. Hit the Toggle
vote Disable Button to toggle the status. You may not vote dis-
able a force voted port. Ports that are vote disabled through local
control will remain vote disabled until they are enabled by the
local control or until the comparator's power is cycled. The
remote status panel may not vote enable these ports. It will
show them as failed on the panel.
To exit local control mode, hit the Local Control button. The status panel will
now show "Local Control Mode is Disabled" and the third LED on
the comparator will turn off. Local Control mode must be explic-
itly exited - leaving the Status Panel Screen will not change the
local control mode.
The local control mode and the local vote disabled ports will per-
sist through resets but not through power cycles.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otac_fan_diag_hlp"><content>FAN TEST DIAGNOSTICS HELP
This screen can be used to verify operation of the cooling fan
located on the back of the Comparator.
To verify proper fan operation:
1. Press Fan On button to turn on the Fan.
2. Observe that the cooling fan is operating.
3. Press Fan Auto button to return the fan automatic mode.
NOTE: As a precautionary measure, the RSS will return the
fan to automatic mode when the user exits this screen.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="dsvcp_help"><content>PRINT CODEPLUG SUMMARY TO FILE HELP
ENTER DIRECTORY NAME: Enter the directory path of the directory that you
wish to view. Drive letters must be followed by a colon (:), and all
legal MS-DOS characters may be entered. Complete the entry by pressing
the ENTER key. Initially, the current directory pathname will be displayed
in this field.
If the directory exists, the RSS will display the current contents of the
directory on the screen. If the directory does not exist, an error message
will be displayed.
If the directory holds more files than can be viewed on one screen, use the
Page Up Down or Arrow Up Down keys to scroll the directory contents on the
screen.
Tab, or Shift-Tab may be used to move between the fields displayed on the
screen.
ENTER FILENAME: Once a directory is chosen, select a filename by typing the
filename into the field, (create new file), or by moving the highlight bar
to the desired filename by means of the Page Up or Down and Arrow Up or
Down keys, or the TAB key (overwrite old file).
Press the ENTER key to save the Codeplug Summary to the desired file.
After the file is saved, the RSS will return to the PRINT CODEPLUG SUMMARY
Menu.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="dsvcp_directory"><content>ENTER REPORT DIRECTORY NAME HELP
Enter the directory pathname where the Codeplug Summary is to be stored
into this field. Any MS-DOS legal pathname is allowed. Wildcards may be
appended to the pathname to display only desired files in the directory.
Press ENTER or TAB to accept the pathname and to display the directory
contents.
When this pathname is changed, the RSS will use the new pathname as its
default the next time the RSS is entered. Press button F5 to
recall the default RSS Archive directory.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="dsvcp_filename"><content>ENTER REPORT FILENAME HELP
Enter the desired filename of the Codeplug Summary in this field. Any legal
MS-DOS filename characters are allowed. (To select an existing file,
the filename highlighted by the cursor will automatically be copied to the
'Enter Filename' field; either select this file by pressing Enter or TAB
or type over the existing filename).
Press Enter or TAB to select the file.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="dsvcp_dir_contents_help"><content>OVERWRITE REPORT FILE FROM LIST HELP
Use the Up/Dn, Left/Right Arrow Keys to select an Codeplug Summary file from
the given list. The filename will automatically be placed in the FILENAME
field. To overwrite the file press the ENTER key.
Press the TAB key to move to the DIRECTORY field.
Press the SHIFT TAB key to move to the FILENAME field.
Press ESC or F10 to exit the PRINT CODEPLUG TO FILE screen without
writing the Codeplug Summary to a file.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="save_alert_help"><content>SAVE ALERTS REPORT TO FILE HELP
ENTER DIRECTORY NAME: Enter the directory path of the directory that you
wish to view. Drive letters must be followed by a colon (:), and all
legal MS-DOS characters may be entered. Complete the entry by pressing
the ENTER key. Initially, the current directory pathname will be displayed
in this field.
If the directory exists, the RSS will display the current contents of the
directory on the screen. If the directory does not exist, an error message
will be displayed.
If the directory holds more files than can be viewed on one screen, use the
Page Up Down or Arrow Up Down keys to scroll the directory contents on the
screen.
Tab, or Shift-Tab may be used to move between the fields displayed on the
screen.
ENTER FILENAME: Once a directory is chosen, select a filename by typing the
filename into the field, (create new file), or by moving the highlight bar
to the desired filename by means of the Page Up or Down and Arrow Up or
Down keys, or the TAB key (overwrite old file).
Press the ENTER key to save the Alerts Report to the desired file.
After the file is saved, the RSS will return to the STATUS REPORT
Screen.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="alert_directory"><content>ENTER DIRECTORY NAME HELP
Enter the desired directory pathname where the Alert Report is stored
into this field. Any MS-DOS legal pathname is allowed. Wildcards may be
appended to the pathname to display only desired files in the directory.
Press ENTER or TAB to accept the pathname and to display the directory
contents.
When this pathname is changed, the RSS will use the new pathname as its
default the next time the RSS is entered.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="alert_filename"><content>ENTER FILENAME HELP
Enter the desired filename of the Alerts Report in this field.
Any legal MS-DOS filename characters are allowed. (To select an
existing file, the filename highlighted by the cursor will
automatically be copied to the 'Enter Filename' field; either
select this file by pressing Enter or TAB or type over the
existing filename).
Press Enter or TAB to select the file.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="alert_dir_contents_help"><content>OVERWRITE ALERT REPORT FILE FROM LIST HELP
Use the Up/Dn, Left/Right Arrow Keys to select a Alert Report file from
the given list. The filename will automatically be placed in the FILENAME
field. To overwrite the file press the ENTER key.
Press the TAB key to move to the DIRECTORY field.
Press the SHIFT TAB key to move to the FILENAME field.
Press ESC or F10 to exit the SAVE ALERT REPORT FILE screen without
writing the status report to a file.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="flash_screen_help"><content>PROGRAM FIRMWARE SCREEN HELP
This screen allows the user to program firmware image files to a
connected device.
Before starting, the firmware image files must be loaded on the target
PC's hard drive. Using the firmware installation disk, install the
software. The prompts and menus are similar to installing an RSS
package. The installation disk will provide a default directory
pathname, but the installer has the ability to change it to any desired
pathname. Whatever is chosen, this same pathname is entered on the
Firmware Directory Name on the screen.
The installation procedure is as follows:
1) Insert the installation disk into the CD drive.
2) Open CD folder and double click on the setup.exe file.
3) InstallShield Wizard screen appears. Press NEXT button.
4) License Agreement screen appears. Read and accept terms of
license and press NEXT button.
5) Choose Directory Location screen appears. A default pathname is
suggested, but may be changed to a different directory by
pressing CHANGE button. If the directory does not exist, it will
be created. Press NEXT button.
6) Ready to Install screen appears. Press INSTALL button.
7) If there is not enough disk space to install the files, an error
message will appear at this time and the install program will
terminate.
8) If enough disk space is available, the install program will proceed
with decompressing the firmware image files onto the hard drive.
9) Once all files are decompressed and copied to the hard drive,
InstallShield Wizard Complete screen appears. Press FINISH
button to exit.
The PC Date and Time fields are pre-populated with the current PC
Date & Time values. The user can then change the value to their desired ones.
The firmware will not download to the device without valid entries in
these fields.
The Station Settings group allow the user to choose between hardware device types
Choose a connection type.
Choose a Serial Port (available only for Serial & Modem connections)
Choose a Baud Rate (Modem only supports 9600 Baud)
Choose a Station port.
Choose the Device IP Address (available only for Ethernet connections)
NOTE: If the device immediately enters Software Download Mode, after
being powered up, 9600 bps must be used as the Baud Rate selection.
If the device is put into Software Download Mode and the process does
not complete, due to internal error, the device will remain in
Software Download Mode and remember which baud rate was selected.
When attempting to re-download firmware, the same baud rate that was
initially used must be reentered.
If the Port Type selected is SERIAL, the same port and cable that is
used for programming codeplugs may be used. If ETHERNET is
selected, connect the Ethernet cable from the Ethernet port on the
computer to the Ethernet port in the back of the device.
The Firmware Directory Name field is initially blank, and a valid
pathname must be entered before continuing with the download.
IMPORTANT: EPIC V control board is compatible only with the following software:
SC_020.14.034 or newer
IR_020.14.519 or newer
The older versions of software can only be downloaded to EPIC II control boards,
e.g. CLN6961.
If all fields are filled in and valid, press the "Program Firmware"
button to continue with the download. The RSS verifies that the device
is authorized to receive the firmware in the specified directory and
if so, the procedure is continued, otherwise the procedure is aborted.
If the procedure is authorized the RSS will put the device in download mode,
and send the firmware image files to the device. The progress status of
the download will be displayed on the download screen. After the download
is complete a dialog window will be displayed indicating the result.
If a firmware download is initiated using the Ethernet port and
communication errors (FTP timeout messages) are continually displayed
while connected to the device, the Ethernet drivers between the PC and
the device may not be working properly. The errors may be caused by
connecting to the Ethernet port after both the PC and device are powered
up. To correct the problem, make sure the PCMCIA Ethernet card is seated
properly into the slot, reboot the PC, and retry the firmware download.
For future downloads, it is recommended that the Ethernet connections
be made prior to powering up the PC.
If a firmware download is initiated using the Serial port and the device
is already in download mode before entering this screen, the baud rate
command sent to the device is ignored. In this case, the selected baud
rate may not be the same as the current baud rate setting in the device
and communication will not take place. The user will have to select
different baud rates until a proper one is found.
Also if performing a serial download via the serial connection, it
may take up to 5 minutes to initially connect due to the discovery
time of the device. A connection has been established when the
screen clears and an FTP download window appears. The entire
download process may take up to 30 minutes, depending on baud rate.
Button Descriptions:
Abort Download - Aborts the current download operation. Terminating the
process will not be instantaneous, because the RSS may
be waiting for a response from the connected device when
the key is pressed.
NOTE: Once a firmware download, which includes the
application and Boot 2, is initiated, the current device
application and Boot 2 firmware is erased. Using this
button will abort the firmware download but, in this
case, it will not restore the original firmware and the
device will remain in firmware download mode.
Normal Mode - Puts the device in normal operating mode if it was in
download mode. The RSS will send the normal mode command
based on the settings on the screen. If Port Type is set
to ETHERNET, the IP Address field must be correctly
entered and a valid Firmware Download Directory Name
specified. If Port Type is set to SERIAL, the Baud Rate
that was used to put the device into download mode must
be entered and a valid Firmware Download Directory Name
specified.
NOTE: If the device is in download mode, it may not be
able to be put back in normal operation unless the device
application firmware is present in the device. Under some
conditions, the application firmware may have been erased.
See NOTE under Abort Download.
Save Status - The RSS retrieves the device's status report only when the
device is in firmware download mode and save the report to
a file. The following must be properly specified:
If Port Type is set to ETHERNET, the IP Address field
must be correctly entered and a valid Firmware Download
Directory Name specified. If Port Type is set to SERIAL,
the Baud Rate that was used to put the device into
download mode must be entered. In either case, a valid
Firmware Download Directory Name must be specified.
Program Firmware - Programs firmware into the connected device based on
settings on the screen.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="flash_time_help"><content>TIME FIELD
This field is the time portion of the timestamp field for
downloading firmware in a device network.
The field is initially blank and must contain a valid time
before continuing with firmware download.
For IntelliRepeater stations, it is very important to enter
the correct time. The value is compared to time values in
other IntelliRepeater, and firmware may not be downloaded
if the value is not accurate.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="flash_date_help"><content>DATE FIELD
This field is the date portion of the timestamp field for
downloading firmware in a device network.
The field is initially blank and must contain a valid date
before continuing with firmware download.
For IntelliRepeater stations, it is very important to enter
the correct date. The value is compared to date values in
other IntelliRepeater, and firmware may not be downloaded
if the value is not accurate.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="protocol_help"><content>PROTOCOL FIELD
This field determines the transfer protocol for the firmware
download. The only choice is SLIP (Serial Line Internet
Protocol) and this field is read-only.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="baud_rate_help"><content>BAUD RATE FIELD
This field determines the rate of transfer in bits per second (bps)
of the firmware download. Valid choices are 4800, 9600, 19200,
and 38400 bps. The default is 9600 bps.
If you select a higher baud rate than the device can support, an
error message will be returned when attempting to download the
firmware and a recommended baud rate will be displayed in the
error message.
If a modem is connected between the PC and device, make sure to
select the speed of the modem when filling in this field.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="crossload_time_help"><content>CROSSLOAD TIME FIELD
This field is the time portion of the timestamp field for
crossloading codeplugs in a station network.
The field is initially blank and must contain a valid time
before continuing with the cross-load function.
It is very important to enter the correct time. The value is
compared to time values in other IntelliRepeater, and codeplugs
may not be cross-loaded if the value is not accurate.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="crossload_date_help"><content>CROSS-LOAD DATE FIELD
This field is the date portion of the timestamp field for
Cross-loading codeplugs in a station network.
The field is initially blank and must contain a valid date
before continuing with the cross-load function.
It is very important to enter the correct date. The value is
compared to date values in other IntelliRepeater, and codeplugs
may not be cross-loaded if the value is not accurate.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="ip_addr_help"><content>DEVICE IP ADDRESS FIELD
Any numeric character is valid input for the field. There must be
4 sub-components to the address with each sub-component separated
by a dot ('.'). Anything else will cause the address to be invalid.
There are a set of IP addresses that are reserved for special uses
and can not be entered for the device's address. They are:
0.0.0.0
127.0.0.0 through 127.255.255.255
128.0.0.0 through 128.0.255.255
191.255.0.0 through 191.255.255.255
192.0.0.0 through 192.0.0.255
223.255.255.0 through 223.255.255.255
224.0.0.0 through 255.255.255.255
xxx.xxx.xxx.250 through xxx.xxx.xxx.255
Attempting to enter one of the above addresses will cause an
out of range error message to be displayed.
IMPORTANT: After changing the IP Address, you must reset the
device in order for the new address to take effect.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="physical_addr_help"><content>PHYSICAL ADDRESS FIELD
The Physical Address is a 48-bit value that uniquely identifies
the Ethernet interface hardware. When a new hardware interface
is installed or a failed hardware interface is replaced, a new
Physical Address will be assigned.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="ethernet_params_help"><content>QUANTAR ETHERNET PARAMETERS SCREEN HELP
The Ethernet Parameters screens allows the user to change or view the
device's IP address and view the device's physical address.
Setting the IP address is necessary for programming the device's
firmware. It provides a unique identifier when communicating
with the connected device.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="moper_help"><content>OPERATIONAL PARAMETERS MENU HELP
This menu contains screens to view or modify station operating parameters.
Button Descriptions:
Help - Recalls this Help Screen.
View and set the Ethernet parameters of the connected station.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="fw_dir_name_help"><content>FIRMWARE DIRECTORY NAME HELP
This field specifies the directory name of the download files. Enter
a valid DOS directory pathname using backslash ('\') characters to
delineate different directory levels. The field is initially blank when
entering the screen.
The RSS will not allow firmware to be downloaded if this field does not
contain a valid directory path.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="port_type_help"><content>PORT TYPE FIELD HELP
This field determines the communication port type for programming the
firmware images. The valid choices are SERIAL and ETHERNET. The
default value is SERIAL.
If SERIAL is selected, the download COM port is determined by the
setting on the CONFIG:SERIAL PORT CONFIG screen.
If ETHERNET is selected, an Ethernet card and software driver for the
card need to be installed on the PC before continuing with the
firmware download. If not installed, exit the RSS, install the
ethernet card and run the installation software, following the
the manufacturer's instructions. Then, return to this screen to
program the device's firmware.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="flash_date_help"><content>DATE HELP
Enter the current date in this format: MM/DD/YYYY
where: MM represents the month,
DD represents the day of the month,
YYYY represents the year.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="flash_time_help"><content>TIME HELP
Enter the current time in this format: HH:MM:SS
Where HH ranges from 00 through 23 (hours)
MM ranges from 00 through 59 (minutes)
SS ranges from 00 through 59 (seconds)
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="crossload_screen_help"><content>CROSS-LOAD CODEPLUG SCREEN HELP
When cross-loading codeplugs across IntelliRepeater, a timestamp
consisting of a date and time is required. The fields are
initially blank to force the user to enter an accurate value.
The PC date and time are displayed to the user as a reference,
but they may be inaccurate due to a change in time zone, daylight
savings time, no battery backup, etc.
You must be connected to a Local Area Network (LAN) before trying
to cross-load. Stations not connected to the network will not
receive your new codeplug parameters.
Only site-related information in the codeplug will get cross-loaded
to the other stations. Station-specific information, such as
Station Type and PA Power Rating, will not get cross-loaded.
When satisfied with the values entered for the date and time,
press OK to continue programming the codeplug to the station.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="fw_dir_list_help"><content>FIRMWARE DIRECTORY LIST HELP
This popup window displays all firmware directories located under
C:\MRSS\QUANTAR. Use the arrow, page up, page down, home and end
keys to navigate through the menu. Press the ENTER key to select
a directory entry and copy it to the Firmware Directory Name field
on the screen. Pressing F10, TAB, or ESC will exit the window and
not update the field.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="dcpswvid_screen_help"><content>
This screen displays the software version, device ID, Ethernet IP
address, and Ethernet physical address information of an archive
codeplug file.
This information is available in the codeplug archive file only
when attempting to save codeplug from the device.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otc_comparator_type"><content>COMPARATOR TYPE HELP
This field determines the mode of operation the Conventional Comparator
operates in. Valid settings are STANDARD, for conventional comparators needing
to support up to 16 input/output ports, and EXPANDED, for conventional
comparators requiring up to 64 base station and 2 DIU input/output ports.
Depending on the setting of this field, some menus and fields may be hidden,
modified, or restricted from viewing. For example, if the user configures the
Comparator Type field for EXPANDED, the user will be denied access to the
Analog Voting Parameters screen and some of the Port Control Parameters will
be defaulted to those that are supported for expanded conventional comparators.
NOTE 1: Before any parameters are modified, a dialog box will pop-up giving a
warning that certain fields are about to be changed to their default values.
NOTE 2: An expanded conventional comparator supports Digital Only operation.
Analog is NOT supported.
The default setting for this field is STANDARD.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="otc_chassis_num"><content>CHASSIS NUMBER HELP
This field is only available for Conventional comparators in EXPANDED mode.
This field determines the role the particular comparator will play in the
expanded-mode configuration and determines the type of physical devices that
can be connected to the comparator as well as the level of control that the
comparator will support. The following entries may be selected:
PRIMARY - This is the main comparator in an expanded configuration. All
other comparators communicate with the PRIMARY comparator,
thus allowing it to be the focal point for consolidated port
status and control. The PRIMARY comparator allows physical
devices of ONLY type DIU to be configured for its infrastructure
ports. There is only one PRIMARY comparator in an expanded
comparator configuration.
SECONDARY1 - As the name implies, this comparator is secondary to the
PRIMARY comparator and communicates with the PRIMARY
comparator only. The SECONDARY1 comparator allows physical
devices of ONLY type STATION/RECEIVER to be configured for
its infrastructure ports. Up to 16 base station/reciever
input/output ports may be connected to this comparator.
SECONDARY2 - See SECONDARY1 comparator.
SECONDARY3 - See SECONDARY1 comparator.
SECONDARY4 - See SECONDARY1 comparator.
The default setting for this field is PRIMARY.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="station_enadis_help"><content>STATION ENABLE/DISABLE HELP
This screen provides the capability to permanently enable or permanently
disable the station. A disabled station stays in RSS only mode. The
disabled state is retained through resets and power cycles and can only
be undone with an enable command. The only functions available to the
user in RSS only mode are the capability to read the status report and
to read and write the codeplug.
Issuing a Station Enable or a Station Disable command will cause the
station to reset.
NOTE: If the station is reset 10 times in less than 10 minutes, the
station will go into RSS only mode regardless of the commands sent tothe
station. To exit from RSS only mode, send the station a Station Enable
command.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="ext_wm_help"><content>EXTERNAL WATTMETER HELP
The EXTERNAL WATTMETER field may be toggled between INSTALLED and
NONE to indicate the presence of an External Wattmeter. If installed,
the station will monitor the PA power readings from the External
Wattmeter to ensure that the station is delivering the correct amount
of power to the antenna.
</content></helpitem><helpitem keyword="enhanced_squelch_help"><content>EXTENDED SQUELCH HELP
Extended squelch should only be enabled when older analog only, non-DSP,
subscriber radios, such as Spectra mobiles, MTS2000 portables or STX portables,
are used in a trunking system. These subscribers are known to cause squelch
blocking. The squelch algorithm has been modified to minimize squelch blocking
caused by these radios. The Extended mode of operation is not available
in Conventional systems.
</content></helpitem></helpdoc>
